diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-0.txt | 4336 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-h/11681-h.htm | 4416 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-h/images/illus01.png | bin | 0 -> 49693 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-h/images/illus02.png | bin | 0 -> 20771 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-h/images/illus03.png | bin | 0 -> 43038 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-h/images/illus04.png | bin | 0 -> 48241 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-h/images/illus05.png | bin | 0 -> 19267 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-h/images/illus06.png | bin | 0 -> 49478 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-h/images/illus07.png | bin | 0 -> 23887 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-h/images/illus08.png | bin | 0 -> 49290 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-h/images/illus09.png | bin | 0 -> 24018 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-h/images/illus10.png | bin | 0 -> 46855 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-h/images/illus11.png | bin | 0 -> 20079 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-h/images/illus12.png | bin | 0 -> 51579 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-h/images/illus13.png | bin | 0 -> 15813 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-h/images/illus14.png | bin | 0 -> 48138 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-h/images/illus15.png | bin | 0 -> 16874 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-h/images/illus16.png | bin | 0 -> 19515 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-h/images/illus17.png | bin | 0 -> 14679 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-h/images/illus18.png | bin | 0 -> 19580 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-h/images/illus19.png | bin | 0 -> 51371 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-h/images/illus20.png | bin | 0 -> 22420 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-h/images/illus21.png | bin | 0 -> 18581 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 11681-h/images/illus22.png | bin | 0 -> 18049 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 779616 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h/11681-h.htm | 4816 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h/images/illus01.png | bin | 0 -> 49693 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h/images/illus02.png | bin | 0 -> 20771 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h/images/illus03.png | bin | 0 -> 43038 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h/images/illus04.png | bin | 0 -> 48241 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h/images/illus05.png | bin | 0 -> 19267 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h/images/illus06.png | bin | 0 -> 49478 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h/images/illus07.png | bin | 0 -> 23887 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h/images/illus08.png | bin | 0 -> 49290 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h/images/illus09.png | bin | 0 -> 24018 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h/images/illus10.png | bin | 0 -> 46855 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h/images/illus11.png | bin | 0 -> 20079 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h/images/illus12.png | bin | 0 -> 51579 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h/images/illus13.png | bin | 0 -> 15813 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h/images/illus14.png | bin | 0 -> 48138 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h/images/illus15.png | bin | 0 -> 16874 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h/images/illus16.png | bin | 0 -> 19515 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h/images/illus17.png | bin | 0 -> 14679 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h/images/illus18.png | bin | 0 -> 19580 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h/images/illus19.png | bin | 0 -> 51371 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h/images/illus20.png | bin | 0 -> 22420 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h/images/illus21.png | bin | 0 -> 18581 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681-h/images/illus22.png | bin | 0 -> 18049 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681.txt | 4763 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/11681.zip | bin | 0 -> 82890 bytes |
53 files changed, 18347 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/11681-0.txt b/11681-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0f74d62 --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,4336 @@ +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 11681 *** + +Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this + file which includes the original illustrations. + See 11681-h.htm or 11681-h.zip: + (http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/1/1/6/8/11681/11681-h/11681-h.htm) + or + (http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/1/1/6/8/11681/11681-h.zip) + + + + + +MARCO PAUL'S VOYAGES & TRAVELS: VERMONT + +by + +JACOB ABBOTT + +1852 + + + + + + + +Preface. + + +The design of the series of volumes, entitled MARCO PAUL'S ADVENTURES +IN THE PURSUIT OF KNOWLEDGE, is not merely to entertain the reader +with a narrative of juvenile adventures, but also to communicate, in +connection with them, as extensive and varied information as possible, +in respect to the geography, the scenery, the customs and the +institutions of this country, as they present themselves to the +observation of the little traveler, who makes his excursions under the +guidance of an intelligent and well-informed companion, qualified to +assist him in the acquisition of knowledge and in the formation of +character. The author has endeavored to enliven his narrative, and to +infuse into it elements of a salutary moral influence, by means of +personal incidents befalling the actors in the story. These incidents +are, of course, imaginary--but the reader may rely upon the strict +and exact truth and fidelity of all the descriptions of places, +institutions and scenes, which are brought before his mind in the +progress of the narrative. Thus, though the author hopes that the +readers who may honor these volumes with their perusal, will be amused +and interested by them, his design throughout will be to instruct +rather than to entertain. + + + + +Contents. + + I. Journeying + II. Accidents + III. The Grass Country + IV. The Village + V. Studying + VI. The Log Canoe + VII. A Dilemma +VIII. A Confession + IX. Boating + X. An Expedition + XI. Lost In The Woods + + + + +Engravings. + +The Great Elm +The Hill +The Accident +Who Are You? +The Lumber Box +The Tire +The Risk +The Study +Marco's Desk +Boat Adrift +Cap Gone +The Millman's House +Paddling +Marco's Room +Toss +Bad Rowing +Good Rowing +The Portage +The Expedition +The Drag +The School House +The Ride + + + + +Order Of The Volumes. + +Marco Paul, + + I.--In New York. + II.--On the Erie Canal. +III.--In Maine. + IV.--In Vermont. + V.--In Boston. + VI.--At the Springfield Armory. + + + + +Principal Persons + + MR. BARON, a merchant of New York. + MARCO, his son, a boy about twelve years old. + JOHN FORESTER, Marco's cousin, about nineteen years old. + +Marco is traveling and studying under Forester's care. + + + + +Marco Paul in Vermont. + + + + +Chapter I. + +Journeying. + + + +When Mr. Baron, Marco's father, put Marco under his cousin Forester's +care, it was his intention that he should spend a considerable part +of his time in traveling, and in out-of-door exercises, such as might +tend to re-establish his health and strengthen his constitution. +He did not, however, intend to have him give up the study of books +altogether. Accordingly, at one time, for nearly three months, Marco +remained at Forester's home, among the Green Mountains of Vermont, +where he studied several hours every day. + +It was in the early part of the autumn, that he and Forester went to +Vermont. They traveled in the stage-coach. Vermont lies upon one side +of the Connecticut river, and New Hampshire upon the other side. The +Green Mountains extend up and down, through the middle of Vermont, +from north to south, and beyond these mountains, on the western side +of the state, is lake Champlain, which extends from north to south +also, and forms the western boundary. Thus, the Green Mountains divide +the state into two great portions, one descending to the eastward, +toward Connecticut river, and the other to the westward, toward lake +Champlain. There are, therefore, two great ways of access to Vermont +from the states south of it; one up the Connecticut river on the +eastern side, and the other along the shores of lake George and lake +Champlain on the western side. There are roads across the Green +Mountains also, leading from the eastern portion of the state to the +western. All this can be seen by looking upon any map of Vermont. + +Marco and Forester went up by the Connecticut river. The road lay +along upon the bank of the river, and the scenery was very pleasant. +They traveled in the stage-coach; for there were very few railroads in +those days. + +The country was cultivated and fertile, and the prospect from the +windows of the coach was very fine. Sometimes wide meadows and +intervales extended along the river,--and at other places, high hills, +covered with trees, advanced close to the stream. They could see, too, +the farms, and villages, and green hills, across the river, on the New +Hampshire side. + +On the second day of their journey, they turned off from the river by +a road which led into the interior of the country; for the village +where Forester's father resided was back among the mountains. They had +new companions in the coach too, on this second day, as well as a new +route; for the company which had been in the coach the day before were +to separate in the morning, to go off in different directions. Several +stage-coaches drove up to the door of the tavern in the morning, just +after breakfast, with the names of the places where they were going +to, upon their sides. One was marked, "Haverhill and Lancaster;" +another, "Middlebury;" and a third, "Concord and Boston;" and there +was one odd-looking vehicle, a sort of carryall, open in front, and +drawn by two horses, which had no name upon it, and so Marco could not +tell where it was going. As these several coaches and carriages drove +up to the door, the hostlers and drivers put on the baggage and bound +it down with great straps, and then handed in the passengers;--and +thus the coaches, one after another, drove away. The whole movement +formed a very busy scene, and Marco, standing upon the piazza in front +of the tavern, enjoyed it very much. + +There was a very large elm-tree before the door, with steps to climb +up, and seats among the branches. Marco went up there and sat some +time, looking down upon the coaches as they wheeled round the tree, in +coming up to the door. Then he went down to the piazza again. + +[Illustration: THE GREAT ELM] + +There was a neatly-dressed young woman, with a little flower-pot in +her hand, standing near him, waiting for her turn. There was a small +orange-tree in her flower-pot. It was about six inches high. The sight +of this orange-tree interested Marco very much, for it reminded him +of home. He had often seen orange-trees growing in the parlors and +green-houses in New York. + +"What a pretty little orange-tree!" said Marco. "Where did you get +it?" + +"How did you know it was an orange-tree?" said the girl. + +"O, I know an orange-tree well enough," replied Marco. "I have seen +them many a time." + +"Where?" asked, the girl. + +"In New York," said Marco. "Did your orange-tree come from New York?" + +"No," said the girl. "I planted an orange-seed, and it grew from +that. I've got a lemon-tree, too," she added, "but it is a great deal +larger. The lemon-tree grows faster than the orange. My lemon-tree is +so large that I couldn't bring it home very well, so I left it in the +mill." + +"In the mill?" said Marco. "Are you a miller?" + +The girl laughed. She was a very good-humored girl, and did not appear +to be displeased, though it certainly was not quite proper for Marco +to speak in that manner to a stranger. She did not, however, reply to +his question, but said, after a pause, + +"Do you know where the Montpelier stage is?" + +The proper English meaning of the word _stage_ is a _portion of +the road_, traveled between one resting-place and another. But in +the United States it is used to mean the carriage,--being a sort of +contraction for _stage-coach_. + +"No," said Marco, "_we_ are going in that stage." + +"I wish it would come along," said the girl, "for I'm tired of +watching my trunk." + +"Where is your trunk?" said Marco. + +So the girl pointed out her trunk. It was upon the platform of the +piazza, near those belonging to Forester and Marco. The girl showed +Marco her name, which was Mary Williams, written on a card upon the +end of it. + +"I'll watch your trunk," said Marco, "and you can go in and sit down +until the stage comes." + +Mary thanked him and went in. She was not, however, quite sure that +her baggage was safe, intrusted thus to the charge of a strange boy, +and so she took a seat near the window, where she could keep an eye +upon it. There was a blue chest near these trunks, which looked like a +sailor's chest, and Marco, being tired of standing, sat down upon this +chest. He had, however, scarcely taken his seat, when he saw a coach +with four horses, coming round a corner. It was driven by a small boy +not larger than Marco. It wheeled up toward the door, and came to a +stand. Some men then put on the sailor's chest and the trunks. Mary +Williams came out and got into the coach. She sat on the back seat. +Forester and Marco got in, and took their places on the middle seat. A +young man, dressed like a sailor, took the front seat, at one corner +of the coach. These were all the passengers that were to get in here. +When every thing was ready, they drove away. + +The stage stopped, however, in a few minutes at the door of a handsome +house in the town, and took a gentleman and lady in. These new +passengers took places on the back seat, with Mary Williams. + +This company rode in perfect silence for some time. Forester took +out a book and began to read. The gentleman on the back seat went to +sleep. Mary Williams and Marco looked out at the windows, watching the +changing scenery. The sailor rode in silence; moving his lips now and +then, as if he were talking to himself, but taking no notice of any +of the company. The coach stopped at the villages which they +passed through, to exchange the mail, and sometimes to take in new +passengers. In the course of these changes Marco got his place shifted +to the forward seat by the side of the sailor, and he gradually got +into conversation with him. Marco introduced the conversation, by +asking the sailor if he knew how far it was to Montpelier. + +"No," said the sailor, "I don't keep any reckoning, but I wish we were +there." + +"Why?" asked Marco. + +"O, I expect the old cart will capsize somewhere among these +mountains, and break our necks for us." + +Marco had observed, all the morning, that when the coach canted to +one side or the other, on account of the unevenness of the road, the +sailor always started and looked anxious, as if afraid it was going to +be upset. He wondered that a man who had been apparently accustomed +to the terrible dangers of the seas, should be alarmed at the gentle +oscillations of a stage-coach. + +"Are you afraid that we shall upset?" asked Marco. + +"Yes," said the sailor, "over some of these precipices and mountains; +and then there'll be an end of us." + +The sailor said this in an easy and careless manner, as if, after all, +he was not much concerned about the danger. Still, Marco was surprised +that he should fear it at all. He was not aware how much the fears +which people feel, are occasioned by the mere novelty of the danger +which they incur. A stage-driver, who is calm and composed on his box, +in a dark night, and upon dangerous roads, will be alarmed by the +careening of a ship under a gentle breeze at sea,--while the sailor +who laughs at a gale of wind on the ocean, is afraid to ride in a +carriage on land. + +"An't you a sailor?" asked Marco. + +"Yes," replied his companion. + +"I shouldn't think that a man that had been used to the sea, would be +afraid of upsetting in a coach." + +"I'm not a _man_" said the sailor. + +"What are you?" said Marco. + +"I'm a boy. I'm only nineteen years old; though I'm going to be rated +seaman next voyage." + +"Have you just got back from a voyage?" asked Marco. + +"Yes," said the sailor. "I've been round the Horn in a whaler, from +old Nantuck. And now I'm going home to see my mother." + +"How long since you've seen her?" asked Marco. + +"O, it's four years since I ran away." + +Here the sailor began to speak in rather a lower tone than he had done +before, so that Marco only could hear. This was not difficult, as the +other passengers were at this time engaged in conversation. + +"I ran away," continued the sailor, "and went to sea about four years +ago." + +"What made you run away?" asked Marco. + +"O, I didn't want to stay at home and be abused. My father used to +abuse me; but my mother took my part, and now I want to go and see +her." + +"And to see your father too," said Marco. + +"No," said the sailor. "I don't care for him. I hope he's gone off +somewhere. But I want to see my mother. I have got a shawl for her in +my chest." + +Marco was shocked to hear a young man speak in such a manner of his +father. Still there was something in the frankness and openness of the +sailor's manner, which pleased him very much. He liked to hear his odd +and sailor-like language too, and he accordingly entered into a +long conversation with him. The sailor gave him an account of his +adventures on the voyage; how he was drawn off from the ship one day, +several miles, by a whale which they had harpooned;--how they caught +a shark, and hauled him in on deck by means of a pulley at the end of +the yard-arm;--and how, on the voyage home, the ship was driven before +an awful gale of wind for five days, under bare poles, with terrific +seas roaring after them all the way. These descriptions took a strong +hold of Marco's imagination. His eye brightened up, and he became +restless on his seat, and thought that he would give the world for a +chance to stand up in the bow of a boat, and put a harpoon into the +neck of a whale. + +In the mean time, the day wore away, and the road led into a more and +more mountainous country. The hills were longer and steeper, and the +tracts of forest more frequent and solitary. The number of passengers +increased too, until the coach was pretty heavily loaded; and +sometimes all but the female passengers would get out and walk up the +hills. On these occasions Forester and Marco would generally walk +together, talking about the incidents of their journey, or the +occupations and amusements which they expected to engage in when they +arrived at Forester's home. About the middle of the afternoon the +coach stopped at the foot of a long winding ascent, steep and stony, +and several of the passengers got out. Forester, however, remained +in, as he was tired of walking, and so Marco and the sailor walked +together. The sailor, finding how much Marco was interested in his +stories, liked his company, and at length he asked Marco where he was +going. Marco told him. + +"Ah, if you were only going on a voyage with me," said the sailor, +"that would make a man of you. I wouldn't go and be shut up with that +old prig, poring over books forever." + +Marco was displeased to hear the sailor call his cousin an old +prig, and he felt some compunctions of conscience about forming and +continuing an intimacy with such a person. Still he was so much +interested in hearing him talk, that he continued to walk with him up +the hill. Finally, the sailor fairly proposed to him to run away and +go to sea with him. + +"O no," said Marco, "I wouldn't do such a thing for the world. +Besides," said he, "they would be after us, and carry me back." + +"No," said the sailor; "we would cut across the country, traveling in +the night and laying to by day, till we got to another stage route, +and then make a straight wake, till we got to New Bedford, and there +we could get a good voyage. Come," said he, "let's go to-night. I'll +turn right about. I don't care a great deal about seeing my mother." + +Though Marco was a very bold and adventurous sort of a boy, still he +was not quite prepared for such a proposal as this. In the course of +the conversation the sailor used improper and violent language too, +which Marco did not like to hear; and, in fact, Marco began to be a +little afraid of his new acquaintance. He determined, as soon as he +got back to the coach to keep near Forester all the time, so as not to +be left alone again with the sailor. He tried to hasten on, so as to +overtake the coach, but the sailor told him not to walk so fast; and, +being unwilling to offend him, he was obliged to go slowly, and keep +with him; and thus protracted the conversation. + +[Illustration: THE HILL.] + +About half-way up the hill there was a small tavern, and the sailor +wanted Marco to go in with him and get a drink. Marco thought that he +meant a drink of water, but it was really a drink of spirits which +was intended. Marco, however, refused to go, saying that he was not +thirsty; and so they went on up the hill. At the top of the hill, the +stage-coach stopped for the pedestrians to come up. There was also +another passenger there to get in,--a woman, who came out from a +farm-house near by. The driver asked the sailor if he was not willing +to ride outside, in order to make room for the new passenger. But he +would not. He was afraid. He said he would not ride five miles outside +for a month's wages. Marco laughed at the sailor's fears, and he +immediately asked Forester to let _him_ ride outside. Forester +hesitated, but on looking up, and seeing that there was a secure seat, +with a good place to hold on, he consented. So Marco clambered up +and took his seat with the driver, while the other passengers +re-established themselves in the stage. + + + + +Chapter II. + +Accidents. + + + +Marco liked his seat upon the outside of the stage-coach very much. He +could see the whole country about him to great advantage. He was very +much interested in the scenery, not having been accustomed to travel +among forests and mountains. The driver was a rough young man,--for +the boy who drove the coach up to the door was not the regular driver. +He was not disposed to talk much, and his tone and manner, in what he +did say, did not indicate a very gentle disposition. Marco, however, +at last got a little acquainted with him, and finally proposed to the +driver to let _him_ drive. + +"Nonsense," said he, in reply, "you are not big enough to drive such a +team as this." + +"Why, there was a boy, no bigger than I, that drove the horses up to +the door when we started, this morning," replied Marco. + +"O yes,--Jerry,"--said the driver,--"but he'll break his neck one of +these days." + +"I didn't see but that he drove very well," said Marco. + +The driver was silent. + +"Come," persisted Marco, "let me drive a little way, and I'll do as +much for you some day." + +"You little fool," said the driver, "you never can do any thing for +me. You are not big enough to be of any use at all." + +Marco thought of the fable of the mouse and the lion, but since his +new companion was in such ill-humor, he thought he would say no more +to him. A resentful reply to the epithet "little fool," did in fact +rise to his lips, but he suppressed it and said nothing. + +It was fortunate for Marco that he did so. For whenever any person has +said any thing harsh, unjust, or cruel, the most effectual reply is, +generally, silence. It leaves the offender to think of what he has +said, and conscience will often reprove him in silence, far more +effectually than words could do it. This was the case in this +instance. As they rode along in silence, the echo of the words "little +fool," and the tone in which he had uttered them, lingered upon the +driver's ear. He could not help thinking that he had been rather harsh +with his little passenger. Presently he said, + +"I don't care though,--we are coming to a level piece of ground on +ahead here a little way, and then I'll see what you can make of +teaming." + +Marco was quite pleased at this unexpected result, and after ten or +fifteen minutes, they came to the level piece of road, and the driver +put the reins into Marco's hand. Marco had sometimes driven two +horses, when riding out with his father in a barouche, up the +Bloomingdale road in New York. He was therefore not entirely +unaccustomed to the handling of reins; and he took them from the +driver's hand and imitated the manner of holding them which he had +observed the driver himself to adopt, quite dexterously. + +The horses, in fact, needed very little guidance. They went along the +road very quietly of their own accord. Marco kept wishing that a +wagon or something else would come along, that he might have the +satisfaction of turning out. But nothing of the kind appeared, and he +was obliged to content himself with turning a little to one side, +to avoid a stone. At the end of the level piece of road there was a +tavern, where they were going to stop to change the horses, and Marco +asked the driver to let him turn the horses up to the door. The driver +consented, keeping a close watch all the time, ready to seize the +reins again at a moment's notice, if there had been any appearance of +difficulty. But there was none. Marco guided the horses right, and +drawing in the reins with all his strength, he brought them up +properly at the door; or rather, he seemed to do it,--for, in +reality, the horses probably acted as much of their own accord, being +accustomed to stop at this place, as from any control which Marco +exercised over them through the reins. + +There was, however, an advantage in this evolution, for Marco became +accustomed to the feeling of the reins in his hand, and acquired a +sort of confidence in his power over the horses,--greater to be sure +than there was any just ground for, but which was turned to a very +important account, a few hours afterward, as will be seen in the +sequel. + +The sailor went several times into the taverns on the way, in the +course of the afternoon, to drink, until, at length, he became +partially intoxicated. He felt, however, so much restrained in the +presence of the passengers within the coach, that he did not become +talkative and noisy, as is frequently the case in such circumstances; +but was rather stupid and sleepy. In fact, no one observed that any +change was taking place in his condition, until, at last, as he was +coming out from the door of a tavern, where he had been in to get +another drink, the driver said, + +"Come, Jack, you must get up with me now, there is another passenger +to get in here." + +Marco, who was still in his seat, holding the reins of the horses, +looked down, expecting that the sailor would make objections to this +proposal,--but he found, on the contrary, that Jack, as they called +him, acquiesced without making any difficulty, and allowed the driver +to help him up. The new passenger got inside. Forester felt somewhat +uneasy at having Marco ride any longer on the top, especially now that +the sailor was going up too. But the coach was full. He himself was +wedged into his seat, so that he could not get out easily. He knew, +too, that two or three of the passengers were going to get out at the +next stage, and so he concluded to let Marco remain outside until that +time, and then to take him in again. + +Marco's admiration for the sailor was very much diminished when he +saw how helpless he had rendered himself by his excesses, and how +unceremoniously the driver pulled and hauled him about, in getting him +into his seat. + +"There! hold on there," said the driver to him, in a stern +voice,--"hold on well, or you'll be down head foremost under the +horses' heels, at the first pitch we come to." + +The poor sailor said nothing, but grasped an iron bar which passed +from the top of the coach down by the side of the seat, and held on as +well as he could. + +They rode on in this manner for some miles, the head of the sailor +swinging back and forth, helplessly, as if he was nearly asleep. +Whenever Marco or the driver spoke to him, he either answered in a +thick and sleepy tone of voice, or he did not reply at all. Marco +watched him for a time, being continually afraid that he would fall +off. He could do nothing, however, to help him, for he himself was +sitting at one end of the seat while the sailor was upon the other, +the driver being between them. In the mean time the sun gradually went +down and the twilight came on, and as the shadows extended themselves +slowly over the landscape, Marco began to find riding outside less +pleasant than it had been before, and he thought that, on the whole, +he should be very glad when the time arrived for him to get into the +coach again, with his cousin. + +At length they came to a bridge, covered with planks, which led across +a small stream. It was in rather a solitary place, with woods on each +side of the road. Beyond the bridge there was a level piece of road +for a short distance, and then a gentle ascent, with a farmhouse near +the top of it, on the right hand side of the road. At the end of the +bridge, between the planks and the ground beyond them, there was a +jolt, caused by the rotting away of a log which had been imbedded in +the ground at the beginning of the planking. As it was rather dark, +on account of the shade of the trees, the driver did not observe this +jolt, and he was just beginning to put his horses to the trot, as they +were leaving the bridge, when the forward wheels struck down heavily +into the hollow, giving the front of the coach a sudden pitch forward +and downward. Marco grasped the iron bar at his end of the seat, and +saved himself; and the driver, who was habitually on his guard, had +his feet so braced against the fender before him, that he would not +have fallen. But the poor sailor, entirely unprepared for the shock, +and perhaps unable to resist it if he had been prepared, pitched +forward, lost his hold, went over the fender, and was tumbling down, +as the driver had predicted, head foremost, under the horses' heels. +The driver seized hold of him with one hand, but finding this +insufficient dropped his reins and tried to grasp him with both. In +doing it, however, he lost his own balance and went over too. He, of +course, let go of the sailor, when he found that he was going himself. +The sailor fell heavily and helplessly between the pole and the side +of one of the horses, to the ground. The driver followed. He seized +the pole with one hand, but was too late to save himself entirely, +and thinking there was danger of being dragged, and finding that the +horses were springing forward in a fright, he let himself drop through +to the ground also. The coach passed over them in a moment, as the +horses cantered on. + +All this passed in an instant, and Marco, before he had a moment's +time for reflection, found himself alone on his seat,--the driver run +over and perhaps killed, and the horses cantering away, with the reins +dangling about their heels. The first impulse, in such a case, would +be to scream aloud, in terror,--which would have only made the horses +run the faster. But Marco was not very easily frightened; at least, +he was not easily made crazy by fright. So he did not scream; and not +knowing what else to do, he sat still and did nothing. + +[Illustration: THE ACCIDENT.] + +In the mean time, the passengers inside knew nothing of all this. Many +of them had been asleep when they came over the bridge. The jolt had +aroused them a little, but there was nothing to indicate to them +the accident which had occurred forward, so they quietly adjusted +themselves in their seats, and endeavored to compose themselves to +sleep again. + +The horses were well trained and gentle. They cantered on as far as +the level ground extended, and then they slackened their pace as +they began to rise the ascent. The idea then occurred to Marco, that +perhaps he might clamber down over the fender to the pole, and then +walk along upon that a little way till he could gather up the reins. +Then he thought that if he could get back again with them to the +driver's seat, perhaps he could stop the horses. Marco was an expert +climber. He had learned this art in his gymnasium at New York; so that +he had no fears in respect to his being able to get down and back +again. The only danger was, lest he might frighten the horses again +and set them to running anew. + +After a moment's reflection, he concluded that at any rate he would +try it; so he cautiously stepped over the fender and clambered down. +When his feet reached the pole, he rested them a moment upon it, and +clung with his hands to the fender and other parts of the front of the +coach. He found his position here more unstable than he had expected; +for the coach being upon springs, the forward part rose and fell with +many jerks and surges, as the horses traveled swiftly along, while the +pole was held in its position straight and firm. Thus the different +parts of his body were connected with different systems of motion, +which made his position very uncomfortable. + +He found, however, after a moment's pause, that he could stand, and +probably walk upon the pole; so he advanced cautiously, putting his +hands on the backs of the horses, and walking along on the pole +between them. The horses were somewhat disturbed by the strange +sensations which they experienced, and began to canter again; but +Marco, who felt more and more confidence every moment, pushed boldly +on, gathered up the reins, and got all the ends together. Then taking +the ends of the reins in one hand, he crept back, supporting himself +by taking hold of the harness of one of the horses with the other +hand. By this means he regained the coach, and then, though with some +difficulty, he clambered up to his seat again. + +He then endeavored to stop the horses by gathering the reins together, +and pulling upon them with all his strength; but it was in vain. The +horses had by this time reached a part of the road where it was more +level, and they began to press forward at a more rapid pace. Marco +thought of calling to Forester to get out of the window and climb +along the side of the coach to the box, in order to help him; but just +at that moment he saw that they were coming up opposite to the farm +house, which had been in sight, at a distance, when they were crossing +the bridge. So he thought that though he could not stop the horses, he +might perhaps have strength enough to turn them off from the road into +the farmer's yard; and that then they could be more easily stopped. In +this he succeeded. By pulling the off rein of the leaders with all his +strength, he was able to turn them out of the road. The pole horses +followed as a matter of course,--the coach came up with a graceful +sweep to the farmer's door, and then the horses were easily stopped. +The farmer came at once to the door, to see what strange company had +come to visit him in the stage,--his wife following; while several +children crowded to the windows. + +"What's here?" said a voice from the window of the coach,--"a +post-office?" They thought the stage had been driven up to the door of +some post-office. + +Marco did not answer; in fact he was bewildered and confounded at the +strangeness of his situation. He looked back over the top of the coach +down the road to see what had become of the driver. To his great joy, +he saw him running up behind the coach,--his hat crushed out of shape, +and his clothes dusty. The passengers looked out at the windows of the +stage, exclaiming, + +"Why, driver! what's the matter?" + +The driver made no reply. He began to brush his clothes,--and, taking +off his hat, he attempted to round it out into shape again. + +"What _is_ the matter, driver?" said the passengers. + +"Nothing," replied he, "only that drunkard of a sailor tumbled off the +stage." + +"Where?" "When?" exclaimed half a dozen voices. "Is he killed?" + +"Killed? no," replied the driver; "I don't believe he is even +sobered." + +Forester and another gentleman then urgently asked where he was, and +the driver told them that he was "back there a piece," as he expressed +it. + +"What! lying in the road?" said Forester; "open the door, and let us +go and see to him." + +"No," said the driver; "he has got off to the side of the road, safe. +I don't believe he's hurt any. Let him take care of himself, and we'll +drive on." + +But Forester remonstrated strongly against leaving the poor sailor in +such a condition, and in such a place; and finally it was agreed that +the farmer should go down the road and see to him, so as to allow the +stage-coach with the passengers to go on. + +Forester was not willing, however, to have Marco ride outside any +longer; and so they contrived to make room for him within. As Marco +descended from his high seat, the driver said to him, as he passed +him, in a low voice, + +"How did you get the reins? I thought they all came down with me, +under the horses' heels." + +"Yes," said Marco, "they did, and I climbed down upon the pole and got +them." + +"Well," said the driver, "you're a smart boy. But don't tell them +inside that I tumbled off. Tell them I gave you the reins, and jumped +down to see the sailor." + +After receiving this charge, Marco would have been under a strong +temptation to tell a falsehood, if the company in the coach had asked +him any questions about it. But they did not. They were so much +occupied in expressing their astonishment that the sailor did not +break his neck, that they asked very few questions, and after riding a +short time, they relapsed into silence again. The fact that both +the driver and the sailor escaped being seriously hurt, was not so +wonderful as it might seem. Horses have generally an instinctive +caution about not stepping upon any thing under their feet. If a +little child were lying asleep in the middle of a road, and a horse +were to come galloping along without any rider, the mother, who +should see the sight from the window of the house, would doubtless be +exceedingly terrified; but in all probability the horse would pass the +child without doing it any injury. He would leap over it, or go around +it, as he would if it were a stone. This is one reason why, in so many +cases, persons are run over without being hurt. The driver and the +sailor, however, fell rather behind the horses' heels, and escaped +them in that way, and they came down so exactly into the middle of the +road, that they were out of the way of the track of the wheels, and +thus they escaped serious injury. + +The misfortunes of the evening, however, did not end here. The road +was rather rough, and there were many ruts and joltings; and one or +two of the passengers seemed to feel some fear lest the stage should +upset. One, who sat near the door, put his arm out at the window over +the door, so as to get his hand upon the handle of the catch, in +order, as he said, to be ready to open the door and spring out, at a +moment's warning. The gentleman on the back seat advised him not to do +it. + +"If you have your arm out," said he, "the coach may fall over upon +it, and break it. That's the way people get hurt by the upsetting of +coaches, by thrusting out their legs and arms in all directions, when +they find they are going over, and thus get them broken. You ought to +fold your arms and draw in your feet, and when you find that we are +going over, go in an easy attitude, with all the muscles relaxed, as +if your body was a bag of corn." + +The passenger laughed and took his arm in; and all the other +passengers, seeing that the advice of the gentleman was reasonable, +concluded to follow it if they should have occasion. And they did have +occasion sooner than they had expected. For, just after dark, as they +were going down a long hill at a pretty rapid rate, with a wagon a +short distance before them, one of the horses of the wagon stumbled +and fell, which brought the wagon to a sudden stand just before the +coach. The driver perceived in an instant that there was not time to +stop his horses, and that the only chance was to turn out of the road +and drive by. The ground at the road-side was so much inclined, that +he was almost afraid to venture this expedient, but he had no time for +thought. He wheeled his horses out,--just escaped the hind wheel of +the wagon--ran along by the road-side a short distance, with the +wheels on one side, down very near the gutter,--and then, just as he +was coming back safely into the road again, the forward wheel nearest +the middle of the road, struck a small stone, and threw the coach +over. The top rested upon the bank, and the horses were suddenly +stopped. Sometimes, on such occasions, the _transom_ bolt, as it +is called, that is, the bolt by which the forward wheels are fastened +to the carriage, comes out, and the horses run off with the wheels. It +did not come out in this case, however. The man who had put his arm +out of the window, immediately called out, in great alarm, "Hold the +horses! Hold the horses! Don't let the horses run and drag us." But +this vociferation was needless. A coach full of passengers and baggage +is a full load for four horses, when it is mounted on wheels. It would +require an exertion far beyond their strength to drag it when on its +side. The horses remained quiet, therefore, while the wagoner and the +driver, who was not hurt, opened the door in the upper side of the +coach. The passengers then climbed out, one by one, without injury. +Mary Williams came out last, with her orange-tree safe in her hand. + + + + +Chapter III. + +The Grass Country. + + + +The scene of confusion, produced by the double accident described in +the last chapter, was great, but not long continued. The wagoner got +his fallen horse up, and then the passengers, with the driver and +wagoner, all taking hold together, soon righted the stage. None of the +passengers were hurt, but the coach itself was so much injured that +the driver thought it was not safe to load it heavily again. The +female passengers got in, but the men walked along by the side of it, +intending to travel in that way about four miles to the next +tavern. Forester, however, was not inclined to take so long a walk. +Fortunately, at a small distance before them, was a farmhouse which +looked as if it belonged to a large and thrifty farmer. The great +barns and sheds, the neat yards, the well-built walls and fences, +and the large stock of cattle in the barn-yard, indicated wealth and +prosperity. Forester concluded to apply here for a lodging for the +night, for himself and Marco. The farmer was very willing to receive +them. So the driver took off their trunks, and then the stage-coach, +with the rest of the passengers, went on. + +"How long shall we have to stay here?" asked Marco. + +"Only till to-morrow," said Forester. "Another stage will come along +to-morrow. We can stop just as well as not, as we are in no haste to +get home. Besides, I should like to have you see something of the +operations of a great grass farm." + +Marco and Forester went into the house, and were ushered into a large +room, which seemed to be both sitting-room and kitchen. A large round +table was set in the middle of the floor, for supper. A monstrous dog +was lying under it, with his chin resting upon his paws. There was a +great settle in one corner, by the side of the fire. There were chairs +also, with straight backs and seats of basket-work, a spinning-wheel, +an open cupboard, and various other similar objects, which, being +so different from the articles of furniture which Marco had been +accustomed to see in the New York parlors, attracted his attention +very strongly. Marco went and took his seat upon the settle, and the +dog rose and came to him. The dog gazed into his face with an earnest +look of inquiry, which plainly said, "Who are you?" while Marco patted +him on the head, thereby answering as plainly, "A friend." The dog, +perfectly understanding the answer, seemed satisfied, and, turning +away, went back to his place again under the table. + +[Illustration: WHO ARE YOU?] + +One of the farmer's young men carried the trunks into a little +bed-room, which opened from the great room; and then the farmer sat +down and began to enter into conversation with Forester and Marco +about their accident. Forester told him also about the sailor, who +had tumbled off the coach a mile or two back, and been left behind. +Forester said that he should like to know whether he was hurt much. +Then the farmer said that he would let him take a horse and wagon the +next morning and ride back and inquire. This plan was therefore agreed +upon. Marco and Forester ate a good supper with the farmer's family, +and then spent the evening in talking, and telling stories about +horses, and sagacious dogs, and about catching wild animals in the +woods with traps. About nine o'clock the family all assembled for +evening prayers. After prayers Marco and Forester went to bed in their +little bed-room, where they slept soundly till morning. + +In the morning they were both awakened by the crowing of the cocks, at +an early hour. They also heard movements in the house and in the +yard before sunrise; so they arose and dressed themselves, and after +attending to their morning devotions together in their room, a duty +which Forester never omitted, they went out. Marco was very much +interested in the morning occupations of the farm. There was the +milking of the cows, and the feeding of the various animals, and the +pitching off a load of corn, which had been got in the evening before +and allowed to stand on the cart, on the barn-floor, over night. The +cows were then to be driven to pasture, and the boy who went with +them, took a bridle to catch a horse for Forester and Marco to have +for their ride. Forester and Marco went with him. It was only a short +walk to the pasture bars, but they had to ramble about a little while, +before they found the horses. At last they found them feeding together +at the edge of a grove of trees. There were two or three horses, and +several long-tailed colts. The boy caught one of the horses, which he +called Nero. Nero was a white horse. Marco mounted him and rode down, +with the other horses and the colts following him. They put the horse +in the stable until after breakfast, and then harnessed him into the +wagon. When all was ready, the farmer told them to bring the sailor +along with them to his house, if they found that he was hurt so that +he could not travel. + +When they were seated in the wagon, and had fairly commenced +their ride, Marco asked Forester, what he meant last evening by a +_grass_ farm. "You told me," said he, "that you wanted me to see +a great grass farm." + +"Yes," replied Forester. "The farms in this part of the United States +may be called grass farms. This is the grass country." + +"Isn't it all grass country?" asked Marco. "Grass grows everywhere." + +"Grass is not _cultivated_ everywhere so much as it is among +the mountains, in the northern states," replied Forester. "The great +articles of cultivation in the United States are grass, grain, and +cotton. The grass is cultivated in the northern states, the grain in +the middle states, and the cotton in the southern states. The grass +is food for beasts, the grain is food for man, and the cotton is +for clothing. These different kinds of cultivation are not indeed +exclusive in the different districts. Some grass is raised in the +middle and southern states, and some grain is raised in the northern +states; but, in general, the great agricultural production of the +northern states is grass, and these farms among the mountains in +Vermont are grass farms. + +"There is one striking difference," continued Forester, "between the +grass farms of the north, and the grain farms of the middle states, or +the cotton plantations of the south. The grass cultivation brings with +it a vast variety of occupations and processes on the farm, making +the farm a little world by itself; whereas the grain and the cotton +cultivation are far more simple, and require much less judgment and +skill. This is rather remarkable; for one would think that raising +food for beasts would require less skill than raising food or clothes +for man." + +"I should have thought so," said Marco. + +"The reason for the difference is," replied Forester, "that in raising +food for animals, it is necessary to keep the animals to eat it, on +the spot, for it will not bear transportation." + +"Why not?" said Marco. + +"Because it is so cheap," replied Forester. + +"I don't think that is any reason," replied Marco. + +"A load of grass"--said Forester. + +"A load of grass!" repeated Marco, laughing. + +"Yes, dried grass, that is, hay. Hay, you know, is grass dried to +preserve it." + +"Very well," said Marco; "go on." + +"A load of grass, then, is so cheap, that the cost of hauling it fifty +miles would be more than it is worth. But cotton is worth a great deal +more, in proportion to its bulk. It can therefore be transported to +distant places to be sold and manufactured. Thus the enormous quantity +of cotton which grows every summer in the southern states, is packed +in bags, very tight, and is hauled to the rivers and creeks, and there +it is put into steamboats and sent to the great seaports, and at the +seaports it is put into ships, which carry it to England or to the +northern states, to be manufactured; and it is so valuable, that it +will bring a price sufficient to pay all the persons that have been +employed in raising it, or in transporting it. But the grass that +grows in the northern countries can not be transported. The mills for +manufacturing cotton may be in one country, and the cotton be raised +in another, and then, after the cotton is gathered, it may be packed +and sent thousands of miles to be manufactured. But the sheep and oxen +which are to eat the hay, can not be kept in one country, while the +grass which they feed upon grows in another. The animals must live, in +general, on the very farm which the grass grows upon. Thus, while the +cotton cultivator has nothing to do but to raise his cotton and send +it to market, the grass cultivator must not only raise his grass, but +he must provide for and take care of all the animals which are to +eat it. This makes the agriculture of the northern states a far more +complicated business, because the care of animals runs into great +detail, and requires great skill, and sound judgment, and the exercise +of constant discretion. + +"You observe," continued Forester, "that it is by the intervention of +animals that the farmer gets the product of his land into such a shape +that it will bear transportation. For instance, he feeds out his hay +to his sheep, attending them with care and skill all the winter. In +the spring he shears off their fleeces; and now he has got something +which he _can_ send to market. He has turned his grass into wool, +and thus got its value into a much more compact form. The wool will +bear transportation. Perhaps he gave a whole load of hay to his sheep, +to produce a single bag of wool. So the bag of wool is worth as much +as the load of hay, and is very much more easily carried to market. He +can put it upon his lumber-box, and drive off fifty miles with it, to +market, without any difficulty." + +"His lumber-box?" asked Marco. "What is that?" + +"Didn't you ever see a lumber-box?" asked Forester. "It is a square +box, on runners, like those of a sleigh. The farmers have them to haul +their produce to market." + +"Why do they call it a lumber-box?" asked Marco. + +[Illustration: THE LUMBER-BOX.] + +"Why, when the country was first settled, they used to carry lumber to +market principally; that is, bundles of shingles and clapboards, which +they made from timber cut in the woods. It requires some time for a +new farm, made in the forests, to get into a condition to produce +much grass for cattle. I suppose that it was in this way that these +vehicles got the name of lumber-boxes. You will see a great many +of them, in the winter season, coming down from every part of the +country, toward the large towns on the rivers, filled with produce." + +"What else do the farmers turn their grass into, besides wool?" asked +Marco. + +"Into beef," said Forester. "They raise cows and oxen. They let them +eat the grass as it grows, all summer, and in the winter they feed +them with what they have cut and dried and stored in the barn for +them. The farmers are all ambitious to cut as much hay as they can, +and to keep a large stock of cattle. Thus they turn the grass into +beef, and the beef can be easily transported. In fact, it almost +transports itself." + +"How do you mean?" asked Marco. + +"Why, the oxen and cows, when they are fat and ready for market, walk +off in droves to Boston, to be killed. They don't kill them where they +are raised, for then they would have to haul away the beef in wagons +or sleighs, but make the animals walk to market themselves, and kill +them there. But the farmers don't generally take their own cattle to +market. Men go about the country, and call upon the farmers, and buy +their cattle, and thus collect great droves. These men are called +drovers. In traveling in this part of the country, late in the fall, +you would see great droves of cattle and sheep, passing along the +road, all going to Boston, or rather Brighton." + +"Where is Brighton?" asked Marco. + +"It is a town very near Boston, where the great cattle market is held. +The Boston dealers come out to Brighton, and buy the cattle, and have +them slaughtered, and the beef packed and sent away all over the +world. Thus the farmers turn the grass into beef, and in that shape it +can be transported and sold." + +"And what else?" asked Marco. + +"Why, they raise a great many horses in Vermont," replied Forester. +"These horses live upon grass, eating it as it grows in the pastures +and on the mountains, in the summer, and being fed upon hay in the +barn in the winter. These horses, when they are four or five years +old, are sent away to market to be sold. They can be transported very +easily. A man will ride one, and lead four or five by his side. They +will be worth perhaps seventy-five dollars apiece; so that one man +will easily take along with him, three or four hundred dollars' worth +of the produce of the farm, in the shape of horses; whereas the hay +which had been consumed on the farm to make these horses, it would +have taken forty yoke of oxen to move." + +"Forty yoke!" repeated Marco. + +"I don't mean to be exact," said Forester. "I mean it would take a +great many. So that, by feeding his hay out to horses, the farmer +gets his produce into a better state to be transported to market. The +Vermont horses go all over the land. Thus you see that the farmers +in the grass country have to turn the vegetable products which they +raise, into animal products, before they can get them to market; and +as the rearing of animals is a work which requires a great deal of +attention, care, patience, and skill, the cultivators must be men of a +higher class than those which are employed in raising cotton, or even +than those who raise grain. The animals must be watched and guarded +while they are young. There are a great many different diseases, and +accidents, and injuries which they are exposed to, and it requires +constant watchfulness, and considerable, intelligence, to guard +against them. This makes a great difference in the character which is +required in the laborers, in the different cases. A cotton plantation +in the south can be cultivated by slaves. A grain farm in the middle +states can be worked by hired laborers; but a northern grass farm, +with all its oxen, cows, sheep, poultry, and horses, can only be +successfully managed by the work of the owner." + +"Is that the reason why they have slaves at the south?" asked Marco. + +"It is a reason why slaves can be profitable at the south. In +cultivating cotton or sugar, a vast proportion of all the work done +in the year is the same. Almost the whole consists of a few simple +processes, such as planting, hoeing, picking cotton, &c., and this is +to be performed on smooth, even land, where set tasks can be easily +assigned. But the work on a grass farm is endlessly varied. It would +not be possible to divide it into set tasks. And then it is of such a +nature, that it could not possibly be performed successfully by the +mere labor of the hands. The _mind_ must be employed upon it. For +instance, even in getting in hay, in the summer season, the farmer has +to exercise all his judgment and discretion to avoid getting it wet by +the summer showers, and yet to secure it in good time, and with proper +dispatch. A cotton planter may hire an overseer to see to the getting +in of his cotton, and he can easily tell by the result, whether he +has been faithful or not. But hay can not be got in well, without the +activity, and energy, and good judgment, which can come only from the +presence and immediate supervision of an owner. This produces vast +differences in the nature of the business, and in the whole state of +society in the two regions." + +"What are the differences?" asked Marco. + +"Why, in the first place," said Forester, "the fact that cotton and +sugar can be cultivated by hired overseers, with slaves to do the +work, enables rich men to carry on great plantations without laboring +themselves. But a great grass farm could not be managed so. A man may +have one thousand acres for his plantation at the south, and with a +good overseer and good hands, it will all go on very well, so far as +his profit is concerned. They will produce a great amount of cotton, +which may be sent to market and sold, and the planter realize the +money, so as to make a large profit after paying all his expenses. But +if a man were to buy a thousand acres of grass land, and employ an +overseer and slaves to cultivate it, every thing would go to ruin. The +hay would get wet and spoiled,--the carts, wagons, and complicated +tools necessary, would get broken to pieces,--the lambs would be +neglected and die, and the property would soon go to destruction. +Even when a rich man attempts to carry on a moderate farm by hired +laborers, taking the best that he can find, he seldom succeeds." + +"Does he _ever_ succeed?" said Marco. + +"Yes," replied Forester, "sometimes. There is Mr. Warner, who lives +near my father's; he was brought up on a farm, and is practically +acquainted with all the work. He has been very successful, and has +a very large farm. He works now very little himself, but he watches +every thing with the greatest care, and he succeeds very well. He has +a great stock. He cuts fifty tons of hay." + +"I should like to see his farm," said Marco. + +"We'll go some day," replied Forester. + +"So you see," continued Forester, "that the work of a cotton or sugar +plantation, is comparatively simple and plain, requiring little +judgment or mental exertion, and a great deal of plain straightforward +bodily labor; while on a northern stock farm the labors are endlessly +varied. Every month, every week, and almost every day brings some +change. New emergencies are constantly arising, which call for +deliberation and judgment. It is necessary to have a great variety of +animals, in order to consume all the different productions of the farm +to advantage. I can explain it all to you better, when you come to see +Mr. Warner's farm." + +As Nero traveled very fast, they began by this time to draw near to +the place where they had left the sailor. When they came up to the +house, they fastened the horse to a post, and went in. The man who +lived there had gone away, but the woman said that the sailor was +somewhat hurt, and asked them to come in and see him. They found him +in the kitchen, with his foot up in a chair. He seemed to be in some +pain. There was a great bruise on his ankle, made by the cork of one +of the horses' shoes. These _corks_, as they are called, are +projections, made of steel, at the heel of a horse-shoe, to give the +horse a firm footing. They are made quite sharp in the winter season, +when there is ice and snow upon the ground, but they are generally +more blunt in the summer. This prevented the ankle's being cut as +badly as it would have been, if the corks had been sharper. Forester +looked at the ankle, and found that nothing had been done for it. It +was inflamed and painful. He got the woman to give him a basin of warm +water, and then he bathed it very carefully, which relieved the sense +of tension and pain. Then he made an ointment of equal parts of tallow +and oil, which he put upon the end of a bandage, and thus bound it +up. This treatment relieved the poor sailor very much. Then Forester +proposed to the sailor to get into the wagon and go with him to the +next house, and the sailor consented. Forester was then going to pay +the woman for his night's lodging, but the sailor said at once,--"No, +squire, not at all. I'm much obliged to you for doing up my foot, but +you need not pay any thing for me. I've got plenty of shot in the +locker." + +So saying, he put his hand in his pocket and drew out a handful of +gold and silver pieces. But the woman, who began now to feel a little +ashamed that she had not done something for the wounded foot, said he +was welcome to his lodging; and so they all got into the wagon, and +Nero carried them rapidly back to his master's. + + + + +Chapter IV. + +The Village. + + + +In due time, and without any farther adventure, Forester and Marco +arrived at the end of their journey. The village where Forester's +father lived was situated in a gorge of the mountains, or rather at +the entrance of a valley, which terminated at last in a gorge. There +was a river flowing through this valley, and the village was upon its +banks. At the upper end of the village a branch stream came in from +the north, and there was a dam upon it, with some mills. The river +itself was a rapid stream, flowing over a sandy and gravelly bottom, +and there were broad intervals on each side of it, extending for some +distance toward the higher land. Beyond these intervals, the land rose +gradually, and in an undulating manner, to the foot of the mountains, +which extended along the sides of the valley, and from the summits of +which, one might look down upon the whole scene, with the village in +the center of it as upon a map. + +Marco was very much pleased with the situation, and with the +appearance of the village. The street was broad, and it was shaded +with rows of large maples and elms on each side. The houses were +generally white, with green blinds. Most of them had pleasant yards +before them and at their sides; these yards were planted with trees +and shrubbery. There were also gardens behind. The mountains which +surrounded the scene, gave a very secluded and sheltered appearance to +the valley. + +The house in which Forester lived was the largest in the village. It +was a square house of two stories. It stood back a little from the +road, in the middle of a large yard, ornamented with rows of trees +along the sides, and groups of shrubbery in the corners and near the +house. There were gravel walks leading in different directions through +this yard, and on one side of the house was a carriage-way, which led +from a great gate in front, to a door in one end of the house, and +thence to the stable in the rear. On the other side of the house, near +the street, was the office,--for Forester's father was a lawyer. The +office was a small square building, with the lawyer's name over the +door. There was a back door to the office, and a footpath, winding +among trees and shrubbery, which led from the office to the house. + +The morning after they arrived, Forester took Marco out to see the +village. He intended not only to show him the various objects of +interest which were to be seen, but also to explain to him why it was +that such villages would spring up in a farming country, and what were +the occupations of the inhabitants. + +"The first thing which causes the commencement of a village in New +England," said Forester, "is a water-fall." + +"Why is that?" asked Marco. + +"There are certain things," replied Forester, "which the farmers can +not very well do for themselves, by their own strength, particularly +grinding their corn, and sawing logs into boards for their houses. +When they first begin to settle in a new country, they make the houses +of logs, and they have to take the corn and grain a great many miles +on horseback, through paths in the woods, or, in the winter, on +hand-sleds, to get it ground. But as soon as any of them are able to +do it, they build a dam on some stream in the neighborhood, where +there is a fall in the water, and thus get a water power. This water +power they employ, to turn a saw-mill and a grist-mill. Then all the +farmers, when they want to build houses or barns, haul logs to the +mill to get them sawed into boards, and they carry their grain to the +grist-mill and get it ground. They pay the owner of the mills for +doing this work for them. And thus, if there are a great many farms in +the country around, and no other mills very near, so that the mills +are kept all the time at work, the owner gets a great deal of pay, and +gradually acquires property. + +"Now, as soon as the mills are built, perhaps a blacksmith sets up a +shop near them. If a blacksmith is going to open a shop anywhere +in that town, it will be better for him to have it near the mills, +because, as the farmers all have to come to the mills at any rate, +they can avail themselves of the opportunity, to get their horses +shod, or to get new tires to their wheels, when they are broken." + +"Tires?" repeated Marco. "What are tires?" + +"They are the iron rims around wheels. Every wheel must have an iron +band about it, very tight, to strengthen it and to hold it firmly +together. Without a tire, a wheel would very soon come to pieces, in +rattling over a stony road. + +"Besides," continued Forester, "there is a great deal of other iron +work, which the farmers must have done. Farmers can, generally, do +most of the wood work which they want themselves. They can make their +rakes, and drags, and cart-bodies, and sleds, and tool handles; but +when they want iron work, they must go to the blacksmith's. They can +make a harrow-frame, but the blacksmith must make the teeth." + +"Now I should think," said Marco, "that it would be easier to make the +teeth than the frame." + +"Perhaps it is as easy, if one has the forge and tools," replied +Forester; "but the tools and fixtures, necessary for blacksmith's +work, are much more expensive than those required for ordinary wood +work. There must be a forge built on purpose, and an anvil, supported +on a solid foundation, and various tools. All these are necessary for +shoeing a single horse, and when they are all procured, they will +answer for all the horses of the neighborhood. Thus it happens, that +though farmers do a great deal of their wood work themselves, at their +own farms, in cold and stormy weather, they generally have their iron +work done at a blacksmith's at some central place, where it is easy +and convenient for all of them to go." + +The above conversation took place between Marco and Forester, as they +were walking along together through the village, toward the part of +the town where the mills were situated. Just at this moment, Marco +happened to cast his eyes across the street a short distance before +them, and he saw a fire on the ground in a little yard. He asked +Forester what that fire could be. As soon as Forester saw the fire, he +exclaimed, + +"Ah! they are putting a tire upon a wheel; that's quite fortunate; +we'll go across and see them." + +So they left the path under the trees where they had been walking, and +went obliquely across the street toward the fire. Marco saw that +there was a large blacksmith's shop there. It was a very neat-looking +building, painted red. There was a large door in the front, and a very +low window, with a shutter hanging over it, by the side of the door. +In an open yard, by the side of the shop, was the fire. The fire was +in the form of a ring. There were several men standing about it; one +of them, whom Marco supposed was the blacksmith, by his leather apron, +was putting on small sticks of wood and chips, here and there, around +the ring. Marco saw that there was a large iron hoop, as he called it, +on the fire. It was not really a hoop, it was a _tire_. It was +made of a much larger and thicker bar of iron, than those which are +used for hoops. It was a tire belonging to a wheel. The wheel was +lying upon the ground near, ready to receive the tire. It was the hind +wheel of a wagon. The wagon itself was standing in front of the shop, +with one end of the hind axletree supported by a block. + +"What do they heat the tire for?" asked Marco. + +"To swell it," replied Forester. "It is necessary to have the tire go +on very tight, so as to hold the wheel together with all the force of +the iron. Now when iron is heated it swells, and then shrinks again +when it cools. So they heat the tire hot, and put it upon the wheel in +that state. Then when it cools it shrinks, and binds the whole wheel +together with a very strong grip." + +"But if they put it on hot, it will burn the wood," said Marco. + +"Yes," replied Forester, "it will burn the wood a little. They can not +help that entirely; but they stand ready with water, to pour on, as +soon as the tire is in its place, and so cool it immediately, so that +it does not burn the fellies enough to injure them." + +"What are the fellies?" asked Marco. + +"They are the parts of the wooden rim of the wheel. The rim is made of +several pieces of wood, which are called fellies." + +So Forester took Marco to the wheel, and showed him the parts of +which the rim was composed. While Marco was looking at the wheel, the +blacksmith began to push away the burning brands a little from the +tire, as it began to be hot enough. Presently he went into his shop +and brought out several pairs of tongs. With these the men lifted the +tire out of the fire, but the blacksmith said it was a little too hot, +and he must let it cool a minute or two. + +"Why, if it's very hot," said Marco, "it will grip the wheel all the +harder." + +"It will grip it _too_ hard," said Forester. "Sometimes a tire +shrinks so much as to spring the spokes out of shape. Didn't you ever +see a wheel with the spokes bent out of shape?" + +"I don't know," said Marco. "I never noticed wheels much." + +"They do get bent, sometimes," said Forester. "It requires great care +to put on a tire in such a manner, as to give it just the right degree +of force to bind the wheel strongly together, without straining it." + +[Illustration: THE TIRE.] + +As soon as the tire became of the right temperature, the men took it +up again with the pairs of tongs--taking hold with them at different +sides of it--and then they put it down carefully over the wheel. The +wheel immediately began to smoke on all sides. In one or two places +it burst into a flame. The blacksmith, however, paid no attention to +this, but with a hammer, which he held in his hand, he knocked it down +into its place, all around the rim; then he took up a brown pitcher +full of water, which was standing near, and began to pour the +water on, walking round and round the wheel as he did it, so as to +extinguish the flames in every part and cool the iron. When this +process was completed, Forester and Marco walked on. + +"Let me see," said Forester, "where did I leave off, Marco, in my +account of the growth of a village? I was telling you about the +blacksmith's shop, I believe." + +"Yes," said Marco. + +"The next thing to the blacksmith's shop, in the history of a New +England village," said Forester, "is generally a store. You see the +farmers can not raise every thing they want. There are a great many +things which come from foreign countries, which they have to buy." + +"Such as sugar and tea," said Marco. + +"Yes," replied Forester, "only they make a great deal of sugar in +Vermont out of the sap of the maple-tree. We will go and see Mr. +Warner's sugar bush next spring. But there are a great many things +which the farmers must buy. One of the most important articles is +iron. Now when a man concludes to open a store, the best place that he +can have for his business is near the mills and the blacksmith's shop; +because the people have to come there on other business, and so that +is the most convenient place for them to visit his store. And so, by +and by, when a carpenter and a mason come into the country, the little +village which has thus begun to form itself, is the best place for +them to settle in, for that is the place where people can most +conveniently call and see them. After a while a physician comes and +settles there, to heal them when they are sick, and a lawyer to +prevent disputes." + +"To _prevent_ disputes!" said Marco. Marco had not much idea of +the nature of a lawyer's business, but he had a sort of undefined and +vague notion, that lawyers _made_ disputes among men, and lived +by them. + +"Why, I know," said Forester, laughing, "that lawyers have not the +credit, generally, of preventing many disputes, but I believe they do. +Perhaps it is because I am going to be a lawyer myself. But I really +believe that lawyers prevent ten disputes, where they occasion one." + +"How do they do it?" asked Marco. + +"Why, they make contracts, and draw up writings, and teach men to be +clear and distinct in their engagements and bargains. Then besides, +when men will not pay their debts, they compel them to do it, by legal +process. And there are a vast many debts which are paid, for fear of +this legal process, which would not have been paid without it. Thus, +knowing that the lawyers are always ready to apply the laws, men are +much more careful not to break them, than they otherwise would be. So +that it is no doubt vastly for the benefit of a community, not only to +have efficient laws, but efficient lawyers to aid in the execution of +them." + +By this time, Forester and Marco had reached the part of the village +where the mills were situated. Forester showed Marco the dam. It was +supported by ledges of rocks on each bank, and there was a flume, +which conducted the water to the wheels of the mills. There were two +mills and a machine-shop. They went into the machine-shop. There was +a lathe here carried by water. A man was at work at it, turning hoe +handles. Forester asked him what other articles were turned there; and +he said posts for bedsteads, and rounds for chairs, and such other +things as were used in quantities in that part of the country. +Forester asked him whether the lathe would turn brass and iron as well +as wood; but he said it would not. It was not fitted for that work. + +"I suppose you might have a lathe here, to work in the metals," said +Forester. + +"Yes," replied the man, "but it would not be worth while. There is +very little of that kind of work wanted in this part of the country." + +After looking at the mills, Forester and Marco walked along up the +stream a little way, to look at the mill-pond. Whenever a dam is +made, it causes a pond to be formed above it, more or less extensive, +according to the nature of the ground. In this case there was quite a +large pond, formed by the accumulation of the water above the dam. +The pond was not very wide, but it extended more than a mile up the +stream. The banks were picturesque and beautiful, being overhung with +trees in some places, and in others presenting verdant slopes, down to +the water's edge. + +"That's a good pond to go a-fishing in," said Marco. + +"Yes," said Forester, "and it makes fine skating ground in the +winter." + +Marco and Forester followed the banks of the mill-pond, until they +came to the end of the still water; beyond that they saw a rapid +running stream, coming down from the mountains. Marco wished to follow +this stream up farther, to see what they would come to, and Forester +consented. The ground ascended more and more the farther they +proceeded, and the view began to be shut in by forests, precipices and +mountains. Marco liked clambering over the rocks, and he found a +great deal to interest him at every step of the way. He saw several +squirrels and one rabbit. He wanted Forester to get him a gun and let +him come out into those woods a-gunning. + +"No," said Forester. + +"Why not?" asked Marco. + +"That is dangerous amusement." + +"Why? Do you think I should get killed with my sun?" asked Marco. + +"No," replied Forester, "I don't think you would; but you _might_ +get killed. The risk would be too great for the benefit." + +"Why, you told me the other day, that it was a great thing to learn to +take risks coolly. If I had a gun I could practice and learn." + +"Yes," said Forester, "it is well to take risks coolly, when the +advantage is sufficient to justify it. For instance, when you crept +down upon the pole the other day, to get the reins, you took a great +risk, but perhaps you saved the lives of the passengers by it. That +was right--but to hazard your life, for the sake of the pleasure of +shooting a squirrel, is not wise." Marco had before this time told him +about his getting the reins. + +"I shouldn't think, there was much danger," said Marco. + +"No," said Forester, "there's very little danger. In using a gun, you +put yourself in a very little danger of a very great calamity. There's +very little probability that your gun would burst, or that you would +ever shoot accidentally any other person;--very little indeed. But if +the gun were to burst, and blow off one of your arms, or put out your +eyes, or if you were to shoot another boy, the calamity would be a +very terrible one. So we call it a great risk." + +"It seems to be a small risk of a great calamity," said Marco. + +"Yes," replied Forester, "but we call it a great risk. We call the +risk great, when either the evil which we are in danger of is great, +or when the chance of its befalling us is great. For example, if you +and I were to walk over that log which lies across the stream, we +should run a great risk; but that would be, not a small chance of a +great evil, but a great chance of a small evil. There would be a great +chance that we should fall off into the stream; but that would not be +much of an evil as we should only get ourselves wet." + +[Illustration: The Risk] + +"Let us go and try it," said Marco. "Not I," said Forester. "You may, +however, if you please. I am willing to have you take such a risk as +_that_, for your amusement." + +Marco went to the log and walked back and forth across it, as +composedly as if it were a broad plank, lying upon the ground. +Finally, he hopped across it on one foot, to show Forester his +dexterity. Forester was surprised. He did not know how much skill in +such feats Marco had acquired by his gymnastics in New York. + +After this, Forester and Marco clambered up some rocks on an elevated +summit, where they had a fine view of the village below them. They +could trace the river, winding through the valley, with the green +intervals on both sides of it. They could see the village and the +streets, with the spire of the meeting-house in the center. The +mill-pond was in full view also; and Marco's attention was attracted +by a boat, which he saw gliding over the surface of the water. + +"O! there is a boat," said Marco. + +"Yes," said Forester. "I have paddled over the water many a time in +her." + +"How many oars does she pull?" asked Marco. + +"Oars?" said Forester, "no oars; they use paddles." + +"I wish they had some oars," said Marco, "and then I would get a crew +of boys, and teach them to manage a boat man-o'-war fashion." + +"How do you know any thing about it?" asked Forester. + +"O, I learned at New York, in the boats at the Battery." + +"Well," said Forester, "we'll have some oars made, and get a crew. I +should like to learn myself." + +"Let us go down and see the boat," said Marco, "now." + +"No," replied Forester, "it is time to go to dinner now; but we'll +come and see the boat the next time we go to take a walk." + +So Marco and Forester came down the hill, and thence went across the +fields home to dinner. They dined at half-past twelve o'clock, which +seemed a very strange hour to Marco. + + + + +Chapter V. + +Studying. + + + +The little building where Forester's father had his office, had a +small back room in it, which opened from the office proper, and which +was used as a library and private study. It had a small fire place +in it, and there was a table in the middle of the room, with a large +portable writing-desk upon it. This desk was made of rosewood. The +sides of the room were lined with book-shelves. There was one large +window which looked upon the yard and garden behind. The books in +this room were principally law-books, though there were some books of +history and travels, and great dictionaries of various kinds. Forester +conducted Marco into this room, a day or two after their arrival in +the village, saying, + +"Here, Marco, this is to be our study. How do you like it?" + +"Very well," said Marco. "It is a very pleasant room. Am I to study +all these books?" + +"Not more than one at a time, at any rate," said Forester. + +"_This_ is my place, I suppose," said Marco; and so saying he sat +down in a great arm-chair, before the portable writing-desk, which was +open on the table. + +[Illustration: THE STUDY.] + +"No," said Forester, "that is _my_ place. I am going to arrange +your establishment near the window. James has gone to bring your desk +now." + +While he was speaking, the door opened, and James, the young man who +lived at Forester's father's came in, bringing a desk. It was painted +blue, and had four legs. These legs were of such a length as to make +the desk just high enough for Marco. James put it down, at Forester's +direction, near the window. It was placed with the left side toward +the window, so that the light from the window would strike across the +desk from left to right. This is the most convenient direction for +receiving light when one is writing. Forester then placed a chair +before the desk, and Marco went into the house and brought out all the +books and papers which he had, and arranged them neatly in his desk. +While he was gone, Forester took an inkstand and a sand-box out of a +closet by the side of the fire, and filled them both, and put them on +the desk. He also placed in the desk a supply of paper, in quarter +sheets. After Marco had come back, and had put in his books and +papers, Forester gave him a ruler and a lead pencil; also a slate and +half a dozen slate pencils; also a piece of sponge and a piece of +India-rubber. He gave him besides a little square phial, and sent him +to fill it with water, so that he might have water always at hand to +wet his sponge with. + +"Now is that all you will want?" asked Forester. + +"Why, yes, I should think so," said Marco. "If I should want any thing +else, I can ask you, you know. You are going to stay here and study +too?" + +"Yes," said Forester; "but your asking me is just what I wish to +avoid. I wish to arrange it so that we shall both have our time to +ourselves, without interruption." + +"But I shall have to ask you questions when I get into difficulty," +said Marco. + +"No," said Forester, "I hope not. I mean to contrive it so that you +can get out of difficulty yourself. Let me see. You will want some +pens. I will get a bunch of quills and make them up into pens for +you." + +"What, a whole bunch?" said Marco. + +"Yes," replied Forester. "I don't wish to have you come to me, when I +am in the midst of a law argument, to get me to make a pen." + +Steel pens were very little used in those days. + +While Forester was making the pens, he said, + +"There are twenty-five quills in a bunch. I shall tie them up, when +they are ready, into two bunches, of about a dozen in each. These you +will put in your desk. When you want a pen, you will draw one out of +the bunches and use it. You must not stop to look them over, to choose +a good one, but you must take any one that comes first to hand, +because, if any one should not be good, the sooner you get it out and +try it, and ascertain that it is not good, the sooner you will get it +out of the way." + +"Well," said Marco, "and what shall I do with the bad ones?" + +"Wipe them clean,--by the way, you must have a good penwiper,--and +then put them together in a particular place in your desk. When you +have thus used one bunch, tie them up and lay the bunch on my desk to +be mended, and then you can go on using the other bunch. This will +give me opportunity to choose a convenient time to mend the first +bunch again. When I have mended them, I will tie them up and lay them +on your desk again. Thus you will always have a supply of pens, and I +shall never be interrupted to mend one. This will be a great deal more +convenient, both for you and for me." + +"Only it will use up a great many more pens," replied Marco. + +"No," said Forester; "not at all. We shall have more in use at one +time, it is true, but the whole bunch may last as long as if we had +only one cut at a time." + +"We shall begin to study," continued Forester, "at nine o'clock, and +leave off at twelve. That will give you half an hour to run about and +play before dinner." + +"And a recess?" said Marco,--"I ought to have a recess." + +"Why, there's a difficulty about a recess," said Forester. "I shall +have it on my mind every day, to tell you when it is time for the +recess, and when it is time to come in." + +"O no," replied Marco, "I can find out when it is time for the recess. +Let it be always at ten o'clock, and I can look at the watch." + +Marco referred to a watch belonging to Forester's father, which was +kept hung up over the mantel-piece in their little study. + +"I think it probable you would find out when it was time for the +recess to _begin_," said Forester, "but you would not be so +careful about the end of it. You would get engaged in play, and would +forget how the time was passing, and I should have to go out and call +you in." + +"Couldn't you have a little bell?" said Marco. + +"But I don't wish to have any thing of that kind to do," said +Forester, "I am going to instruct you half an hour every morning, +beginning at nine o'clock, and I want to have it all so arranged, that +after that, I shall be left entirely to myself, so that I can go +on with my studies, as well as you with yours. If we can do this +successfully, then, when noon comes, I shall feel that I have done my +morning's work well, and you and I can go off in the afternoon on all +sorts of expeditions. But if I have to spend the whole morning in +attending to you, then I must stay at home and attend to my own +studies in the afternoon." + +"Well," said Marco, "I think I can find out when to come in." + +"We'll try it one or two mornings, but I have no idea that you will +succeed. However, we can give up the plan if we find that you stay +out too long. You may have five minutes' recess every day, at eleven +o'clock. On the whole it shall be _ten_ minutes. And this shall +be the plan of your studies for the morning. At nine o'clock, I shall +give you instruction for half an hour. Then you may study arithmetic +for one hour; then write half an hour; then have a recess for ten +minutes: then read for the rest of the last hour. That will bring it +to twelve o'clock." + +"But I can't study arithmetic, alone," said Marco. + +"Yes," said Forester, "I shall show you how, in the first half-hour +when I am giving you my instructions. Now, are you willing really to +try to carry this system into effect, pleasantly and prosperously?" + +"Yes," said Marco, "I'll try." + +"We shall find some inconveniences and troubles at first, I have no +doubt," said Forester; "but if we are patient and persevering, we +shall soon make the system go smoothly." + +Forester then said, that as Marco might forget what he had to do each +hour, he would make a sort of map of the hours, with the name of +the study which he was to pursue marked in each. This he called a +schedule. The schedule, when it was completed, was as follows: + +IX. X. XI. XII. + | Instruction. | Arithmetic. | Writing. | Recess. | Reading. | + +This schedule was drawn neatly on a piece of paper, and fastened with +wafers to the under side of the lid of Marco's desk, so that he could +look at it at any time, by opening his desk. + +It was in the afternoon that this conversation was held, and these +preparations made. The next morning, at nine o'clock, Marco and +Forester went into the little study, and Forester gave him his +instructions. He took his arithmetic, and explained to him how to +perform some examples, under one of the rules. Forester performed one +or two of them himself, explaining very particularly all the steps. +He then rubbed out his work, and directed Marco to perform them by +himself in the same manner. "If you succeed in doing these right," +said he, "you may set yourself some others of the same kind, with +different numbers, and perform those too. If you get into any +difficulty, you must not ask me, but you may set yourself sums in +addition, and spend the rest of the hour in doing them. That, you can +certainly do without help." + +"Yes," said Marco, "I can do that." + +"The next half-hour is for writing," said Forester. "I will set you +some copies." + +So Forester took a writing-book, which he had prepared, and wrote +Marco some copies, one on the top of each page. Marco looked over +him while he wrote. It is very important that a child should see his +teacher write his copies, for thus he will see how the letters should +be formed. Forester wrote four or five copies for Marco, and while he +was writing them he gave him particular instructions about the manner +of holding his pen, and shaping the letters. + +"Now," said Forester, "you can not possibly have occasion to come to +me about your writing; for here are pages enough for you to write upon +for several days, and you have plenty of pens." + +"But I should think you would want to see whether I write it well," +said Marco. + +"I shall examine it carefully to-morrow morning," said Forester. + +"Very well," said Marco; "after the writing will come the recess." + +"Yes," said Forester, "and then the reading." + +"What shall I read?" asked Marco. + +Forester then rose and went to one of the book-shelves, where there +was a set of books, entitled the American Encyclopedia. There were +thirteen octavo volumes in the set. It was rather too high for Marco +to reach it, and so Forester took all the volumes down and placed them +on a lower shelf, not far from the window, in a place where Marco +could get easy access to them. + +"There," said Forester; "there is your library. The American +Encyclopedia is a sort of a dictionary. When your reading hour comes, +you may take down any volume of this Encyclopedia, and turn to any +article you please. Or you may think of any subject that you would +like to read about, as for instance, _boat, cannon, camel, eagle, +trout, horse_, or any other subject, and take down the proper +volume and find the article. You can find it by the letters which are +printed on the backs of the volumes." + +"Let us look now," said Marco, "and see what it says about trouts." + +"No, not now," replied Forester; "when your reading hour comes, you +may read what you choose. Only you must have a piece of paper at hand, +and write upon it the title of every article which you read, and show +it to me the next morning, because I shall wish to know what you have +been reading, and perhaps to question you about it. Now you understand +your work, do you not?" + +"Yes," said Marco; "and what are you going to do?" + +"O, I'm going to study my law-books." + +"Shall you stay here and study?" + +"Yes," replied Forester, "I shall be here most of the time. Sometimes +I shall be called into the other room, perhaps, on business with my +lather; but that need not make any difference with you." + +"Only, then there will be nobody to watch me," said Marco. + +"O, I shall not watch you any, even when I am here. I shall pay no +attention to you at all. I can judge to-morrow morning, when I come to +look at your work and give you new instructions, whether you have been +industrious or not. + +"Even if I accidentally see you doing any thing wrong, I shall not +probably say any thing about it. I shall remember it, and speak to you +about it to-morrow morning, in my half-hour. I shall do everything in +my half-hour." + +Marco felt somewhat relieved, to think that he was not going to be +under a very rigid observation in his studies. + +"I do not expect," said Forester, "that you will do very well for the +first few days. It will take some time to get this system under full +operation. I presume that you will come to me as many as ten times the +first day." + +"O, no," said Marco, "I don't mean to come to you once." + +"You will,--I have no doubt. What shall I say to you if you do? Will +it be a good plan for me to answer your question?" + +"Why, no," said Marco, "I suppose not." + +"And yet, if I refuse to answer, it will not be very pleasant to you. +It will put you out of humor." + +"No," said Marco. + +"I will have one invariable answer to give you," said Forester. "It +shall be this,--Act according to your own judgment. That will be a +little more civil than to take no notice of your question at all, +and yet it will preserve our principle,--that I am to give you no +assistance except in my half-hour. Then, besides, I will keep an +account of the number of questions you ask me, and see if they do not +amount to ten." + +By this time Forester's half-hour was out, and Marco went to his desk. + +"There's one thing," said Marco, "before I begin:--may I have the +window open?" + +"Act according to your own judgment," said Forester, "and there is one +question asked." So Forester made one mark upon a paper which he had +upon the table. + +"But, cousin Forester, it is not right to count that, for I had not +begun." + +Forester made no reply, but began arranging his note-books, as if he +was about commencing his own studies. Marco looked at him a moment, +and then he rose and gently opened the window and began his work. + +[Illustration: MARCO'S DESK.] + +Marco was but little accustomed to solitary study, and, after +performing one of the examples which Forester had given him, he +thought he was tired, and he began to look out the window and to play +with his pencil. He would lay his pencil upon the upper side of +his slate, and let it roll down. As the pencil was not round, but +polygonal in its form, it made a curious clicking sound in rolling +down, which amused Marco, though it disturbed and troubled Forester. +Whatever may have been the nice peculiarities in the delicate +mechanism of Forester's ear, and of the nerves connected with it, +compared with that of Marco's, by which the same sound produced a +sensation of pleasure in one ear, while it gave only pain in the +other, it would require a very profound philosopher to explain. But +the effect was certain. Forester, however, did not speak, but let +Marco roll his pencil down the slate as long as he pleased. + +This was not long, however; Marco soon grew tired of it, and then +began to look out the window. There was a little staple in the window +sill, placed there as a means of fastening the blind. Marco pushed the +point of his pencil into this staple, in order to see if it would go +through. It did go through in an instant, and slipping through his +fingers, it fell out of the window. + +"Dear me! there goes my pencil. My pencil has dropped out of the +window, cousin Forester; shall I go out and get it?" + +"Act according to your own judgment," said Forester. At the same time +he was saying this, he made another mark upon his paper. + +"Why, you ought not to count that, cousin Forester," said Marco, "for +I don't know whether you'd wish me to go and get that pencil, or take +another out of my desk." + +"Act according to your own judgment," replied Forester. + +Marco looked perplexed and troubled. In fact, he was a little +displeased to find that Forester would not answer him. He thought +that, it was an unforeseen emergency, which Forester ought to have +considered an exception to his rule. But he was obliged to decide the +question for himself, and he concluded to go out for his pencil. It +took him some time to find it in the grass, and after he had found it, +he stopped for some time longer, to watch some ants which were passing +in and out, at the entrance to their nest, each one bringing up a +grain of sand in his forceps. When Marco came in, he found that his +hour for arithmetic was so nearly expired, that he should not have +time to finish another sum, if he should begin it; so he put his +arithmetical apparatus away, and took out his writing-book. + +Marco went through the whole forenoon pretty much in the same way. He +spent a large part of his time in looking out of the window and about +the room. He went out at the time for the recess, but he stayed out +twenty minutes instead of ten. He was astonished, when he came in, to +see how rapidly the time had passed. He then took down a volume of the +Encyclopedia, and read until twelve o'clock, and then, leaving the +volume of the Encyclopedia and his writing-book on his desk, he told +Forester that the study hours were over, and went away. + +The next morning, at nine, Forester asked him how he had got along the +day before. Marco had the frankness to admit that he did not get along +very well. + +"Still," said Forester, "I am well satisfied on the whole. You did +very well for a first experiment. In the first place, you did really +make some effort to carry out my plan. You kept the reckoning of the +hours, and changed your studies at the appointed time. You did not +speak to me more than three or four times, and then you acquiesced +pretty good-naturedly in my refusing to help you. To-day you will do +better, I have no doubt, and to-morrow better still. And thus, in the +course of a week, I have great confidence that you will learn to study +for three hours by yourself, to good advantage." + +"Two hours and a half it is," said Marco. + +"Yes," said Forester. + +It resulted as Forester predicted. Marco, finding that Forester was +disposed to be pleased with and to commend his efforts, made greater +efforts every day, and, in the course of a week, he began to be a +very respectable student. In the afternoon he used to ramble about, +sometimes with Forester, and sometimes alone. He was very fond of +fishing, and Forester used to allow him to go to certain parts of the +river, where the water was not deep, alone, trusting to his word that +he would confine himself strictly to the prescribed bounds. + + + + +Chapter VI. + +The Log Canoe. + + + +Every thing went on very prosperously, for a week or two, in the +little study. Marco became more and more attentive to his studies, and +more and more interested in them. He was often getting into little +difficulties, it is true, and giving trouble to his uncle and aunt; +but then he generally seemed sorry afterward for the trouble which he +had thus occasioned, and he bore reproof, and such punishments as his +cousin thought it necessary to inflict, with so much good-humor, that +they all readily forgave him for his faults and misdemeanors. + +One day, however, about a fortnight after he had commenced his +studies, he got led away, through the influence of a peculiar +temptation, into a rather serious act of transgression, which might +have been followed by very grave consequences. The circumstances were +these. He had commenced his studies as usual, after having received +his half-hour's instruction from Forester, and was in the midst of the +process of reducing the fraction 504/756 to its lowest terms, when he +happened to look out of the window and to see two boys climbing over +a garden fence belonging to one of the neighbor's houses, at a little +distance in the rear of his uncle's house. It was a very pleasant +morning, and Marco had the window open; so he could see the boys very +plainly. They stopped on the farther side of the fence which they had +got over, and though they were partially concealed by the fence, yet +Marco could plainly perceive that they were busily employed in doing +something there, though he could not imagine what. He wished very much +to go and see; but he knew that it would be in vain to make request +for permission, and so he contented himself with watching them. + +Just at this moment his uncle opened the door which led into the +little study, and asked Forester if he would step into the office. +Forester did so; and then, after a few minutes, he returned, put up +his books, and said that he had got to go away, and that perhaps he +should not be back till noon. Marco had often been left alone at his +studies for a time, but never for a whole morning before. He knew that +he was to go on with his work just as if Forester had remained. So +Forester bade him good morning, and then went away. + +Marco watched the boys, wondering more and more what they could be +doing. They kept stooping down to the ground, and moving about a +little, as if they were planting seeds. But as it was entirely the +wrong season for any such work, Marco concluded that they must be +hiding something in the ground. "Perhaps," said he to himself, "they +have been stealing some money, and are burying it. I wish I could go +and see." + +If there had been a door leading directly from the study into the +yard, Marco would have left his studies and have gone out at once; but +as it was, he could not get out without going through the office where +his uncle was sitting. At last the thought struck him that he might +jump out the window. He felt some hesitation at taking this step, but +finally he concluded that he would do it, and just go near enough to +see what the boys were hiding, and exactly where they were putting it, +so that he could go afterward and find it without fail. He determined +to return then immediately. + +"I shall not be out longer than five minutes," said he to himself, +"and I will let it go for my recess." + +So he took his cap from the nail where he was accustomed to hang it, +while he was at his studies, and then climbing out the window, feet +foremost, he let himself down gently to the ground. He then crept +slyly along through the yards and gardens, until he got pretty near +the place where the boys were at work. The mystery, however, was +rather increased than diminished by the near view. He could make +nothing of the operations which they were engaged in; and while he was +hesitating whether to go nearer, one of the boys happened to look up +and spied him. Marco had intended to keep himself concealed by a tree, +behind which he had taken his station, but the boy having looked up +suddenly, at a moment when he happened to be off his guard, saw him +before he had time to draw back under the cover he had chosen. + +"Holloa, Marco," said the boy, "come here." + +Marco was astonished at this frank and open invitation. He had +expected that the boys, when they saw him, would have dropped at once +behind the fence to conceal themselves, or that they would have caught +up what he supposed they were burying, and have run away. Their +accosting him in this fearless manner deranged his ideas about their +probable object, and increased his curiosity to know what they were +doing. So he came forth from his concealment and went toward them. +When he reached the spot, the mystery was suddenly dispelled by his +finding out that they were digging worms for bait, to go a-fishing. + +Marco's curiosity was now changed to eager desire. The boys told him +that they were going down to the river to fish for eels, and Marco's +soul was all on fire to accompany them. He had never fished for eels. +He knew the boys very well, and they offered to lend him a hook and +line. But Marco thought that on the whole it would not do. He tried to +persuade them to wait until the afternoon, but they would not consent +to such a postponement of their pleasure. So Marco wished them good +luck, and began to mount the fence again, with the intention of +returning to his studies. + +On looking toward the office, he saw his uncle coming out of the door +in the rear of it, and walking toward the house. Marco immediately +reflected that it would not answer for him to meet his uncle, and he +descended from the fence again on the same side with the boys, until +his uncle should go back. The boys thought he came back because he +was undecided whether to go with them or not, and they renewed their +invitations with redoubled urgency. Marco did not reply, but looked +steadily toward the house. He saw a man standing in the yard with a +small ladder in his hand. A moment afterward, Marco's uncle came out +of the house, and, to Marco's great consternation, he perceived that +he had a saw and a hatchet in his hand, and then he recollected that +his uncle had been intending to prune some trees that forenoon. The +trees were situated in various positions about the yard, so that Marco +could neither go in at the front door of the office, nor climb in at +the window, without being discovered. He did not know what to do. + +In the mean time, the boys urged him to go with them. They did not +know any thing about his studies, and supposed that his hesitation was +only owing to his want of interest in the object of the expedition. +Finally, Marco concluded to go. He supposed that he should not be able +to get back into his study till noon, as he recollected that his +uncle expected to be employed all the forenoon about his pruning. +He thought, therefore, that his chance of detection would not be +increased by staying out an hour or two longer, and so he told the +boys that he would go. + +When they had procured sufficient bait, they went toward the river. +Their way led them not very far from the house, and they were several +times in situations where they were exposed to view, in case Marco's +uncle had looked toward them. Marco, however, contrived to walk by +these places in such a manner as to cover himself as much as possible +from view by the other boys; and besides, he hoped that his uncle was +too much occupied with his pruning, to notice what boys were prowling +about the village. They passed across the street in this manner, and +then went down over the intervales toward the river. Marco felt quite +relieved at seeing that his uncle kept steadily at his work, holding +the ladder for the other man to mount by, or sawing off low branches +himself, without appearing to notice the boys at all. + +The river was circuitous in its course, and its banks were in some +places steep, and in others low and sandy. The water was generally +shallow, but in some places it was deep,--especially under the high +banks. In many places there were willows and elms, overhanging the +water. It was in one of these places that the boys were going to fish +for eels. It was a point where the river took a sudden turn, forming a +sort of angle in the stream, where the water was very dark and deep. +The bank was high at that place, and it was covered with trees and +bushes. Some of these trees had been undermined, and their roots and +branches were floating in the water. The boys scrambled down to the +brink and made ready for fishing. They cut slender poles in the +bushes, for fishing-poles. There was a trunk of a tree lying along +the shore, extending obliquely out a little way over the water, which +furnished them a convenient footing. They stood or sat upon it, baited +their hooks, and threw them over into the water. They followed the +bait with their eyes as it sunk slowly down into the dark depths, +among the logs, and roots, and trunks of trees, which were lying +submerged in the water. + +The boys remained here an hour, but they caught no eels. Either there +were none there, or for some reason or other they chose not to bite. +They had some talk about going to another place, but before they +decided upon that plan, Marco's attention was arrested by the sight of +what appeared to be a large log floating down the river. He pointed it +out to the other boys, and, on closer examination, they saw that it +was an old canoe, of the kind that are formed by hollowing out a log. +It was not of very large size and it appeared to be rather old and +decayed. Still, the boys wanted to get it very much. They gathered in +their lines, and ran along the bank, keeping pace with the boat as it +floated down. + +[Illustration: BOAT ADRIFT.] + +They very soon came to a reach of the river,--that is, to a length +of it between one bend and another, where the water was swift and +shallow. So the two boys who had been fishing with Marco threw off +their shoes, and pulled up their trowsers, and ran down the bank, and +into the river. The boat was far out in the stream, and they had to +wade some distance before they came to it. Besides, as the boat was +floating down all the time, while they were wading across, it got some +distance down the stream before they could reach it. They, however, +succeeded in getting it at last, and, with much floundering in the +water and many shouts of laughter, they brought it over to Marco. + +Marco was much pleased with the prize. It was in better condition than +they had expected to find it. There was, indeed, a piece knocked out +at one end, near the upper edge, but they found that it would support +all three of the boys, if they sat in it carefully, and with their +weight principally at the other end. For want of oars or paddles they +cut poles on the banks, thinking that they could push the boat along, +by planting the poles against the bottom, as the water was not deep. +They drew the boat up to the shore, and poured out some water which +had got into her, and then they all carefully embarked, intending to +make a little voyage. + +It happened that just below the place to which the boat had drifted +before they overtook it, the water became somewhat deeper, and of +course more smooth and still, so that it afforded a favorable place +for navigating such a boat. In fact, the character of the stream, +throughout its whole course for several miles, was to present a +constant succession of changes, from deep and almost still water, to +shallow and rapid currents, rippling over beds of sand and gravel. +One of these rapids, or rips, as they were called, the boys had just +passed; it being in one of them, though one more broad and less rapid +than many of the others, that they had pursued and overtaken the +boat. In the smooth and still water below, therefore, they had a very +favorable opportunity to try their boat, for the water, though not so +shallow as it was above, was still not so deep as to prevent their +propelling their boat, by pushing their poles against the bottom. It +required some care to preserve their equilibrium, but then the water +was not deep, and they knew, therefore, that there was no danger of +being drowned if they should upset. + +Things went on very prosperously, until, after a few minutes, the boys +suddenly found themselves drifting into deeper water. Their poles +would scarcely touch the bottom. Marco, who was not much accustomed to +this kind of navigation, was at first somewhat alarmed, but the other +boys told him to keep quiet, and they would soon drift into shallow +water again. They accordingly drew in their poles, and began to look +over the edge of the boat into the water, to see if they could see +any eels. They saw no eels, but the water soon began to grow shallow +again, and so the boys, feeling that they were in no danger, remained +quietly in their places, looking idly into the water, talking about +the various objects which they saw upon the bottom. + +After some minutes spent in this manner, one of the boys looked down +the stream, and saw that the boat was gradually approaching another of +the rapids. + +"Come, boys," said he, "we must go to work, or we shall be down over +the rips." + +So the boys all took their poles and began to push the boat up the +stream; but they found it harder than they had expected. In fact, the +boat had drifted down nearer to the rapids than they ought to have +allowed it to go. The water was running quite swiftly where they were, +and they soon found that all their efforts were not sufficient to stem +the current. The boat was carried round and round in every direction, +excepting up the stream. In fact the current was rapidly acquiring the +entire mastery over them, and hurrying them down to a point where the +water poured on in a furious torrent through a long narrow passage +between beds of stone and gravel. + +"Pull, boys, pull!" said Marco; "we shall go down over the rips in +spite of every thing." + +The boys did pull, but they could effect nothing. The water was +sweeping them along with great rapidity, notwithstanding all their +struggles. Finally, when they found that they could not make head +against it, so as to go up the stream, they concluded to pull for the +shore. They were not in any great fear, for the river was very narrow +and not more than knee deep in the rapids, so that there was no real +danger of any calamity greater than getting well wet. They seemed to +be also in a fair way to escape this, for they found that they could +make some progress in getting their boat toward the shore. But, just +as they began to think their object was about to be accomplished, they +were arrested by a sudden mishap. It happened that there was a little +snag in the river, nearly in the direction in which they were going. +It was the end of a small log, which rose almost to the surface of the +water. The greater part of the log was firmly imbedded in the sand, +but there was a small portion of it which projected so far as barely +to be submerged. The boys did not notice this, and, in their eagerness +to run the boat ashore, it happened that they were running it across +the current, just above this snag. But as the current was sweeping +them down the stream at the same time that they were pushing +themselves across it, it carried the boat with great force against +this snag. The bottom of the boat was confined by it, while the force +of the current, still pressing upon the side, overset it in a moment, +and threw all the boys out into the water. + +The boys scrambled out without much difficulty, and stood upon the +gravelly beach. They saw at the same moment a man on the bank of the +river above, who looked as if he was about to run to their aid; but +when he saw that they were safe, he turned around immediately and +disappeared. An instant afterward, Marco, finding that his cap was not +upon his head, looked around for it, and, to his dismay, he saw it +floating swiftly away down the rapids. He ran into the water and +seized the boat, which was then beginning also to go away. He called +upon the boys to help him pull it up and pour the water out. He then +lanched it again with all speed, seized one of the poles, clambered +into it, and pushed off into the swiftest part of the current, and +away he went after his cap. + +[Illustration: CAP GONE.] + +He resorted to this desperate measure, because he was greatly alarmed +at the idea of going home without his cap. It would have certainly +insured his detection, and, as he supposed, a double punishment. He +now was as eager to go down the rapids as he had before been to escape +them. His only care was to keep his boat head down, so that if he +should encounter any snag or rock he might not be thrown broadside on. +He kept a good lookout too ahead. The boat shot through the water like +an arrow, and was soon clear of the rapids in the comparatively still +water below. + +Marco contrived to paddle with his pole, so as to overtake the cap and +recover it. Then he went to the shore and landed. He drew up the +boat as high as he could, and went back to seek the other boys. He +concluded that it was time to go home. His conscience now began to +reproach him with the wrong which he had been doing. His promised +pleasure had failed. His clothes were wet and uncomfortable. His mind +was anxious and unhappy. With a heavy heart he began to retrace his +steps, sure of detection when he reached home, and of punishment. He +did not, however, dread the punishment so much as the just displeasure +which his cousin would manifest, and the evidence of the pain which he +knew his cousin would suffer, when he came to learn how his pupil had +betrayed the confidence which had been reposed in him. Before he set +out for home, however, he took off such of his clothes as were most +wet, and wrung out the water as well as he could, and then put them on +again. + +When he drew near to the house, he expected to see his uncle still at +work, but he was not there. Marco reconnoitered the place carefully, +and then went into the office. His uncle was not in the office. He +passed through into the study. He was afraid that Forester would be +there, but, to his surprise and joy, he was not, and there was no sign +that he had been there since the morning. Marco looked at the watch, +and found that it was only about half-past eleven. So he took down +a volume of the Encyclopedia and began to read. He read the article +_canoe_, and he found some information about the bark canoes made +by Indians, but nothing about log canoes. In about fifteen minutes he +heard the office door open, and his cousin Forester came in. Forester +walked into the study, but said nothing to Marco. Marco kept at his +work, without speaking to his cousin. He began to hope that he might +yet escape. His only fear now was lest his wet clothes should be +observed. He put his hand down many times to his knees, to ascertain +how fast they were drying. The clothes that he wore were of woolen, +and of a dark color, so that they did not show the wet very +distinctly, and, besides, the sun and the air were warm that day, and +the clothes had dried fast. In a word, when twelve o'clock arrived and +Marco put his books away, nobody would have observed that his clothes +had been wet. He ran about in the open air until dinner-time, and +though, when he went in to dinner, he felt oppressed with a sense of +guilt and of self-condemnation, he was satisfied that no one suspected +him. Marco thought that he had had a very lucky escape. + + + + +Chapter VII. + +A Dilemma. + + + +Though Marco's first feeling was that of relief, to find that he had +got back from his truancy without detection, he felt, after all, ill +at ease. He kept out of sight till the dinner-bell rang, and then he +was almost afraid to go in, for fear that, by some accident or other, +his uncle might have noticed his absence, and might ask him something +about it. He was usually much interested at dinner-time in talking +with Forester about plans for the afternoon; but now he felt guilty +and afraid, and he was disinclined to look his uncle or his cousin in +the face, or to speak a word. + +And yet it was not punishment that Marco was afraid of. There were +very few boys who could bear punishment of any kind with more +fortitude than he, or to whom the idea of punishment gave less +concern. It was the detection itself, rather than what was to come +after it, that he feared. There is something in the very act of being +detected and exposed in guilt, which the heart instinctively shrinks +from; and many a boy would willingly bear in secret twice the pain +which the punishment of an offense would bring, rather than have his +commission of the offense discovered and made known. + +There was, however, no indication, at the dinner table, that Marco's +cousin or uncle suspected him of any wrong. They talked of various +subjects in their usual manner. Forester had arranged it with Marco, +to go that afternoon down to the mill-pond, to examine the boat, in +order to see whether they could have it fitted with oars, and to +make arrangements to that effect. Marco now hoped that Forester had +forgotten this plan, and would not go. Though he had been very much +interested in the plan the day before, he now felt disinclined to go. +He wished to be alone, or at least out of sight of Forester. He felt +as if he had a terrible secret on his mind, and that there was great +danger that something or other would occur to discover it. So he hoped +that Forester would have forgotten the appointment, and that it would +be thus postponed to some future time. + +But Forester had not forgotten it; and after dinner, he asked Marco +how soon he should be ready to go. Marco said that he should be ready +at any time; and in about half an hour they set out. They walked +together to the mill-pond. Forester said that the boat belonged to +a man who worked in the mills, but he lived a little distance above +them. His house was near the water, in a little valley. The water of +the pond extended up into this valley, forming a sort of bay. + +[Illustration: THE MILLMAN'S HOUSE.] + +A road led to the house, but did not go beyond it. The house was +small, but it had pleasant little yards and gardens about it, and +various pens and coops for different sorts of animals. The man who +lived there was famous for keeping a great many animals. He had pigs, +and cows, and Malta cats, and two dogs,--one of them a water dog,--and +ducks and geese,--among the latter, two wild geese,--and hens and +rabbits; and there were two gray squirrels, hanging up in a cage by +the side of the front door. Forester told Marco about these animals as +they walked along. + +Marco was very fond of animals, and he began to anticipate great +pleasure in seeing these. When they came near the house, he ran +forward to look at the wild geese. The water dog ran to meet Forester. +He knew Forester, having often seen him there before. Forester and +Marco rambled about the yards, looking at the animals for some time, +and then went to the water's edge, which was very near the house. The +ducks and geese were swimming in the water. Forester called the dog +there, and Marco amused himself for some time in throwing sticks into +the water, and ordering the dog, whose name was Nelson, to plunge in +and go and bring them back. The boat was there too, fastened by a rope +to a post in the bank. At length, after Marco had satisfied himself +with these amusements, he said, + +"Well, cousin Forester, here is the boat." + +"Yes," said Forester, "but the man don't seem to be at home. I presume +he's at the mill." + +"And what shall we do in that case?" asked Marco. + +"Why, I will go into the house first, and ascertain the fact, and get +a paddle." + +So Forester went into the house, and soon afterward returned, bringing +with him a paddle. He said that the man was at the mill, but that +his wife said that they might have the boat to go and find him. "I +thought," said Forester, "that you would rather go in the boat than +walk." + +"Yes," said Marco, "I should." + +"Besides," continued Forester, "I can teach you to paddle." + +Marco took the paddle from Forester's hand. He had never seen one +before. He said that they always used oars, not paddles, in New York +harbor. A paddle is shaped very differently from an oar. It is much +shorter and lighter,--though the blade is broader. A paddle is worked, +too, differently from an oar. An oar acts as a lever against the side +of the boat,--the middle of it resting in a small notch called a +row-lock, or between two wooden pins. But a paddle is held in the +hands entirely. + +"What do they have paddles for in this country?" said Marco. "Oars are +better." + +"You are not competent to decide that question," replied Forester. + +"Why not?" said Marco; "I have rowed boats many a time." + +"Yes, but you have never paddled much. You have used oars, but not +paddles, and so you can not compare them." + +"Well," said Marco, "I mean to try this paddle now, and then I can +tell." + +Marco had seen the boys who were with him in the boat that morning, +using their poles as paddles, and he had used one of the poles in that +manner himself; and he was just upon the point of saying something +upon the subject, when suddenly he recollected that it would betray +him. In fact, Marco found that having such a secret as this upon his +mind, was a source of great embarrassment and constraint, as he more +than once came very near making some allusion inadvertently, which +would have resulted in his exposure. While speaking of boats, and +oars, and paddles, and such subjects, he had to be continually upon +his guard and to watch all his words. + +[Illustration: PADDLING] + +They got into the boat and pushed out upon the water. Forester taught +Marco how to use the paddle. He gave him his seat in the stern of the +boat, and directed him to grasp the lower end of the handle with the +other hand. Then, by dipping the blade in the water and pushing the +water back, the boat was propelled forward. He also explained to him +how, by turning the blade of the paddle, one way or the other, he +could give the bow of the boat an impulse toward the right or toward +the left. + +"Thus you see," said Forester, "with a paddle you can steer, but with +an oar you can not." + +"With two oars I can," said Marco. + +"Yes." replied Forester. "You must have two oars to guide a boat, but +you can do it with one paddle. Therefore, if you can have but one, a +paddle is better than an oar. There is another advantage in a paddle; +that is, in using it, your face looks the way that you are going." + +"Yes," rejoined Marco, "that is a great advantage." + +"In rowing, you must sit with your back to the bow of the boat, and +look over your shoulder to see where you are going." + +"Yes," said Marco, "unless you have a steersman." + +"True," replied Forester. "When you have several men to row, and one +to steer, you get along very well with oars, but in case of only one +man, there is an advantage in a paddle. There is still another point +to be considered,--a paddle is better for a narrow boat and oars for +wide ones." + +"Why so?" asked Marco. + +"Because," said Forester, "a certain width is required in a boat in +order to work oars well. The oarsman must sit upon the seat, and +extend the oar off upon one side of the boat, and there must be a +certain distance between the part which he takes hold of, and the +row-lock, in order to work to advantage. But it is no matter how +narrow the boat is if he has a paddle, for he holds it perpendicularly +over the side." + +"So paddles are better," said Marco, "for one kind of boat, and oars +for another." + +"Yes," replied Forester, "and paddles are better for one kind of +_navigation_, and oars for another. Oars require greater breadth +of water to work in. In a narrow, crooked stream flowing among logs +and rocks, oars would not answer at all. But with a paddle a man can +worm a boat through anywhere." + +"That is, if it is only wide enough for the boat to go," said Marco. + +"Of course," replied Forester. "The paddle itself requires no +additional space. But oars extend so far laterally"-- + +"Laterally?" asked Marco. + +"Yes," rejoined Forester; "that is, on each side. Oars extend so far +on each side, that they require a great breadth of water. If you +attempt to go through a narrow place, the oars would strike." + +"Why, no," said Marco. "You can give orders to trail oars." + +"I don't know any thing about that," said Forester. + +"That's a beautiful manoeuver," said Marco, "only it is hard to do. +You see, you order them to give way hearty, so as to get a good +headway, till just as you get to the narrow place, and then +_trail_ is the word. Then the oarsmen all whip their oars out of +the row-locks in an instant, and let 'em trail alongside under the +boat's counters, and she shoots through the narrow place like a bird." + +Marco became very enthusiastic in describing this manoeuver, but +Forester did not get a very clear idea of it, after all. + +"You'll teach it to us," said Forester, "when we get our oars and +a good boat's crew of boys. At any rate, a boat can be paddled +continuously through a narrow space, better than it can be rowed. +Therefore, paddles are generally used on rivers, where there are many +narrow places to pass through. Indians and savages almost always use +paddles, for they navigate many intricate and narrow passages of +water." + +By this time they began to draw near the mill. They landed near some +great logs which were floating in the water, ready to be drawn up into +the mill and sawed. They went up the bank and thence into the mill. +The man who owned the boat, was tending the mill. When he wanted a +log, he would take the end of a long chain down a sloping plane of +planks which led to the water, and fasten it to a log. The other end +of the chain was fastened round an axle in the mill, and when all was +ready, the man would set the axle in motion by the machinery, and that +would draw the log up. When the log was in the mill, the man would +roll it over into its place, on a long platform of timber, where it +was to be sawed. Then he would set the saw machinery in motion, and +the platform would begin to move forward, and the saw at the same time +to go up and down, sawing the log as it advanced. Thus it would saw +it through, from end to end, and then, by reversing the motion of the +machinery, the log was carried back again. The man would then move it +a little to one side, just far enough for the thickness of the board +which he wished to make, and then begin to saw again. He moved the log +by means of an iron bar with a sharp point, which he struck into the +end of the log, and thus pried it over, one end at a time. When the +log was placed in its new position, the machinery was set in motion +again, and the log was sawed through in another place, from end to +end, parallel to the first sawing, leaving the width of a board +between. This process was continued until the log was sawed entirely +into boards, except a piece in the middle, which it was necessary to +leave of double thickness, and this answered for a plank. + +Marco was much interested in watching this process, and when the +sawing of this log was completed, and another log drawn up into its +place, Forester introduced the subject of the boat. He told the man +what he wished to do, namely, to have some row-locks or thole-pins +made along the sides of the boat, and some oars to row it with. It +would also be necessary to have seats, or thwarts, as they are called, +placed in such a manner that there should be one just before each +row-lock. These seats were for the oarsmen to sit upon, in rowing. The +man told Forester that he might do any thing he pleased with the boat. +He was sure that Forester would do it no injury. Forester asked him +who would be a good man to do the work, and the man recommended to him +a wagon-maker who had a shop very near the mill. + +They went to the wagon-maker and explained to him what they wanted. +The wagon-maker readily undertook the work. They all went down to the +boat together, to plan the seats and the places for the thole-pins. +They concluded to have three pairs on each side. This would require +six oars. These oars the wagon-maker promised to make, and to have all +the work done by the beginning of the next week. They also concluded +to have the boat taken out of the water and thoroughly calked again, +and her bottom _payed_ over with pitch, as she was not perfectly +tight. This being all arranged, Forester and Marco began to walk +toward home. + +"It seems to me strange to get a wagon-maker to work on a boat," said +Marco. + +"In New York, I suppose you would go to a boat-builder," said +Forester. + +"Yes," replied Marco, "to be sure." + +"There are no boat-builders here," rejoined Forester. "In fact, there +are very few trades represented here, and workmen are willing to do +any kind of jobs that they can." + +As only a small part of the afternoon was yet passed away, Marco asked +Forester if he might go down to the river a-fishing. "I can keep +within my bounds, you know," said he. + +"Yes," said Forester, "you _can_ keep within your bounds." + +"And I will," said Marco. "Don't you suppose I will?" + +"Why, you can tell better than I can about that," said Forester. +"You have been here now some weeks, and I have treated you with +considerable trust and confidence,--have I not?" + +"Why, yes," said Marco. + +"I have given you leave to go a-fishing, trusting to your fidelity +in keeping within your bounds. I have left you alone in your study, +several times in the forenoons. I have let you go up on the mountains +with other boys, and lent you my watch, so that you might know when +it was time to come back. Now you can tell better than I, whether you +have been faithful to all of these trusts." + +Marco did not answer. He did not know what to say. He walked along in +silence. + +"I will leave it with you to decide," said Forester. "Here we are just +home; now you may go into the study and reflect a few moments upon the +subject. Call to mind all the cases in which I have treated you with +trust and confidence, and consider whether you have always been +faithful to the trust. If, on reflection, you think that you have, you +may take your fishing-line and go a-fishing. If you feel conscious +that you have at any time betrayed my confidence, you must not go this +afternoon. You may go out to play wherever you please about the house +and garden, but you must not go a-fishing. If you are in doubt whether +you have betrayed my confidence or not, and wish to ask my opinion +about some particular case which comes up to your mind, you may remain +in the study till I come in, and ask me, and I will tell you. I shall +be in, in a few minutes." + +There was a pause here. Marco looked very serious, and walked along in +silence. Such a turn to the conversation was entirely unexpected to +him, and he did not know what to say. + +"It is possible," continued Forester, "that you may be conscious that +you have clearly been guilty of betraying the confidence which I have +placed in you in some instance which I know nothing of, or which you +suppose I know nothing of, and you may wish to confess it to me. If +you have been guilty of any such act, the best thing that you can do +is to confess it to me at once; and if you wish to do it, you may wait +till I come, for that purpose. So you may wait till I come either to +ask me a question, or to confess a fault. If you do not wish to do +either, you may go out without waiting for me; but you must not go +a-fishing unless you can truly say that you have been faithful and +honest, whenever I have trusted you before." + +So saying, Forester parted from Marco and went into the house. Marco +slowly walked into the office, and through it into the little study. +He was greatly perplexed to know what to make of this address. "Can +it be," thought he, "that he knows that I went away this morning? How +could he have found it out? Or did he say that, only to find out now +whether I have been honest or not heretofore?" + +On mature reflection, Marco concluded that Forester did not probably +know any thing about his having gone away. He thought that what he had +just said was only a part of Forester's general plan of managing +his case, and that it did not imply that Forester entertained any +particular suspicions. Marco thought that he might therefore safely go +a-fishing that afternoon if he was disposed; but we must do him the +justice to say, that he did not entertain the idea of doing it a +moment. He determined that he would not go. But as he was not prepared +to confess his fault, and as he had no question to ask, he determined +to go and play about the garden. He thought a little of waiting till +his cousin came in, and then honestly making a confession; but he +could not quite conclude upon this, and so he determined to go and +think more of it. Besides, he concluded that if he were going to make +a confession at all, he should rather do it that evening when he went +to bed; for Forester always came up to his room after he went to bed, +to have a little friendly and serious conversation with him, and to +bid him good night. + +He accordingly went out before Forester came in. He spent the +afternoon in a miserable state of mind. He could not divest himself of +the feeling of anxiety, that in some way or other, Forester had found +out his transgression. He rather wondered, that, if it were true that +Forester had found it out, he had not said something to him directly +about it,--but then he knew it was Forester's way not always to make +known, at once, all that he knew in such cases. But then he thought, +again, that Forester _could_ not know any thing about it. There +was no way for him to have known it. He was away all the morning, and +did not come home until after Marco got back. So he concluded that +Forester did not know; but he began to wish that he did. He could not +bear to think of telling him, but he wished that he knew. The burden +of such a secret became intolerable to him. He strolled about the +yards and garden, not knowing what to do with himself, and growing all +the time more and more anxious and unhappy. He was in a very serious +dilemma. + +Marco cast his eyes occasionally toward the office, expecting to see +Forester come out. He thought Forester would want to know whether he +went a-fishing or not. But he did not come. Marco spent some time in +the garden with James, who was at work there raking over the ground, +and gathering in such things as might be hurt by any sudden frost. +Marco worked with him for some time, and endeavored to converse with +him, but he did not find him very communicative, and at last he went +into the house and sat on the sofa in the parlor, reading, until +supper time. + +Marco fully expected that Forester would ask him at supper time +whether he had been a-fishing or not; but he said nothing about it. +Forester told his father and mother about their plan for a boat, and +gave them a full account of their visit to the mill. His mother seemed +quite interested in the account, and told Marco, that, after he got +his crew well trained, she should hope that he would invite her on an +excursion in the boat. + +"Yes," said Marco, "we will. We must have a seat, cousin Forester, for +passengers and visitors, in the stern sheets." + +"The stern sheets?" said Forester, "what do you mean by the stern +sheets?" + +"Why, it is aft," said Marco, "between the coxswain's place and the +stroke-oarsman." + +"You'll have to show us," said his aunt, "when we come to see the +boat." + +This kind of conversation somewhat relieved Marco's mind,--but still +he was ill at ease, and he determined to tell Forester the whole story +at bedtime, if he could only summon up courage to begin. + + + + +Chapter VIII. + +A Confession. + + + +In the room where Marco slept, there was a large, stuffed arm-chair, +which was commonly called the easy chair; it was one that was seldom +used by the family, except in sickness. It stood in a corner of the +room not far from the head of Marco's bed. Forester used to sit in +this chair while he remained conversing with Marco, when he came up to +take his light. + +When Forester had taken his seat in the great chair this evening, +according to his usual custom, he began his conversation by saying. + +"Well, Marco, have you been helping James in the garden this +afternoon?" + +"Why, no," said Marco, "I did not help him much,--I don't like James +very well." + +"Why not?" asked Forester. + +"Why, I don't think he is very accommodating," replied Marco. + +"What has he done to-day, which is unaccommodating?" asked Forester. + +"He would not lend me his knife. I wanted to borrow his knife to cut +me a cane from some apple-tree trimmings, and he would not let me have +it." + +"Haven't you got a knife of your own?" asked Forester. + +"Yes," said Marco, "but mine won't open." + +"Won't open?" repeated Forester. "What's the cause of that?" + +"Why, I suppose because the joint is rusty," replied Marco. + +"How came it rusty?" asked Forester. + +"Why, you see I laid it down one day on a stone, where I was at work +with it, and left it there, and there happened to come a rain in the +night and rusted it. I did not know where it was, and so I didn't find +it for a good many days." + +"Then, I presume," said Forester, "that James supposed that you would +leave his knife out in the same way and spoil it." + +"No," replied Marco, "that was not the reason." + +"You are sure that you asked him for it distinctly, and he refused?" + +"Yes," said Marco. + +Here there was a moment's pause. Marco thought that his cousin +Forester was considering what should be done to James, for being so +unaccommodating. He did not know but that he would report him to his +father and have him turned away; though Marco did not really wish to +have him turned away. + +But Forester said, after reflecting a moment, "That makes me think of +a story I have got here; listen and hear it." + +[Illustration: MARCO'S ROOM.] + +So Forester took out his pocket-book and opened it, and then appeared +to be turning over the leaves, for a moment, to find a place. Then he +began to read, or to appear to read, as follows: + +Once there was a little girl named Anne. She came to her mother one +day, as she was sitting in the parlor, and began to complain bitterly +of her sister Mary. Her sister Mary was older than she was, and had a +doll. Anne complained that Mary would not lend her her doll. + +"Are you sure that she refused to lend you her doll?" asked her +mother. + +"Yes, mother, I am _sure_ she did," replied Anne. + +"Perhaps she is playing with it herself," said her mother. + +"No," replied Anne, "she is ironing in the kitchen." + +"I think you must be mistaken," said her mother. "Go and ask her +again. Don't tell her I sent you, but ask her yourself, whether she +really meant that she was not willing to lend you her doll." + +So Anne ran off to put the question to Mary again; presently she +returned with the same answer. "Mary," she said, "would not lend it to +her." + +"I am very sorry to hear it," said her mother, "for now I suppose I +shall have to punish you." + +"To punish _her_, you mean," said Anne. + +"No," said her mother, "to punish you. I don't suppose _she_ is +to blame." + +"Why, mother--how can _I_ be to blame, for her not being willing +to lend me her doll?" + +"You _are_, I've no doubt," said her mother. "Mary is a +good-natured, accommodating girl,--always ready to do kindnesses, and +if she has any unwillingness to lend any thing to you, it must be that +you have created it yourself, by some misconduct. So that it will +prove, no doubt, that you are the one to be punished." + +Here Anne began to hang her head and look a little ashamed. Her +mother's supposition proved to be correct, for, on inquiring, it +appeared that Mary had lent her doll to Anne a few days before, and +that when she wanted it again, Anne was unwilling to give it to her, +and when Mary insisted on her bringing it to her, she became angry and +threw the doll out the window. + +"I never heard that story before, cousin Forester," said Marco. "And I +did not know that you had stories in your pocket-book." + +Forester laughed and put up his pocket-book. + +"I don't believe there is any story there," said Marco. "You made it +up for me, I verily believe." + +"Yes," said Forester, "I did. Don't it fit your case pretty well?" + +"Why, I don't know," said Marco. "I don't see why he could not let me +have his knife." + +"Suppose _I_ had asked him for his knife; don't you suppose he +would have lent it to me?" + +"Yes," said Marco, "I've no doubt he would; he would do any thing for +_you_, of course, because you pay him--or uncle pays him, which +is the same thing." + +"I don't think that that is the reason altogether," replied Forester. +"There was the man at the mill to-day, who said that I might take his +boat and do any thing I chose to do with it." + +"Yes," said Marco, "I noticed that." + +"And perhaps you thought it was very much to his credit that he did +so." + +"Yes," said Marco. + +"But the fact is," rejoined Forester, "as I think, it was more to +my credit than his; because I have had his boat a great many times +heretofore, and his having so much confidence in me now, shows how I +have acted with his property before. I have always taken a great deal +of pains to use it carefully, to bring it back to its place safely, to +get the water out, if there was any in it, and leave every thing in +order. I have done this, not only because it is just and right that I +should not make him suffer inconvenience on account of his doing me a +favor, but as a matter of policy." + +"What do you mean by a matter of policy?" asked Marco. + +"Why, regard to my own interest. If I did not do so, I should soon +make people unwilling to lend me their things. And I think there must +be some good reason why James is not willing to lend you his knife." + +"Why, he says," answered Marco, "that I don't bring back his things." + +"Ah!" rejoined Forester, "that's it. I thought there must be some such +reason as that. You have lost your character with James, and I advise +you to acquire a new one as soon as you can. Besides, you have done +him injustice this evening. You represented him as refusing you his +knife because he was unaccommodating and selfish, whereas it was +only proper regard to the safety of his property. What you said was +calculated to make an unfavorable impression on my mind against him, +and one which would have been unjust." + +Marco perceived that it was so, and was silent. + +"I am sorry that your knife is rusty," resumed Forester. "Perhaps I +can get it open for you." + +"How?" asked Marco. + +"Why, I believe the best way is to soak the joint in oil. The oil will +insinuate itself into the joint, and then we can get hold of the blade +with a pair of nippers, or something of the kind, and open it; and +then, by working it to and fro a few times, the rust will work out, +and the knife be as good as it was before. If it is very rusty indeed, +this plan will not answer." + +"What must be done in that case?" asked Marco. + +"The only way then is to carry it to some kind of smith and get him to +punch out the rivet. Then we can take the blade out entirely. By this +means we can clean it of its rust, and then put it in again with a new +rivet. If you will give me your knife to-morrow, I will try to put it +in order for you again, in one or the other of these ways. + +"And now," continued Forester, after a short pause, "it is time for me +to go down, unless you have something which you wish to say." + +Although it was not unusual for Forester to close his evening +conversation in this manner, Marco's attention was particularly +arrested by the excellent opportunity which this remark afforded him +to make his confession. He really wished to make it,--but he did not +know how to begin. He wished that his cousin would ask him something +about it, or introduce the subject in some way or other, but Forester +was silent. Presently he rose, came to Marco's bedside, and asked him +if he was warm enough,--for the nights at this season of the year were +beginning to be cool. + +"Yes," said Marco, "I'm very comfortable." + +"Well, then, good night." So Forester took the lamp and walked slowly +toward the door. + +"Cousin Forester," said Marco. + +"What?" said Forester. + +"Don't go just yet." + +Forester turned back and advanced to the foot of the bed. There was a +high foot-board at the foot of the bed, and Forester leaned upon it +with the lamp in his hand. + +"Is there any thing that you want to say to me?" + +Marco was silent. He looked distressed and embarrassed, and moved his +head restlessly on his pillow. + +"There's something wrong, isn't there, Marco," said Forester, "that +you are thinking whether to confess to me or not? If there is, do just +as you choose about it. I like to have you confess what you have done +that is wrong, but then, if you do it at all, it must be done of your +own accord." + +"Well," said Marco, "I want to tell you about my going away to play +this forenoon." + +"How long were you gone?" asked Forester. + +"Pretty much all the forenoon," replied Marco. + +"Well," said Forester, "I am very glad you concluded to confess it of +your own accord, but I know all about it." + +Marco started up in his bed and looked his cousin in the face, and +said, + +"Why, cousin Forester, how did you know?" + +"To prove to you that I really did know, I will tell you what you did. +You got out of the window soon after I went away, and went over into +Mr. Eldon's garden, where George Eldon and Samuel Warner were digging +worms for bait. Then you went with them down to the river. You hid +behind them when you passed in sight of the house, for fear that +father would see you, as he was out in the yard, pruning trees. +Then you went down to the river and sat on a log under some bushes, +fishing. After a while you spied an old log canoe, drifting down the +river, and the other boys waded out and got it. Then you all got into +it and paddled about a while, and afterward got carried over the rips +and upset in the water. Your cap drifted down the stream, and you +went after it in the canoe and got it. After that, you took off your +stockings and wrung out the water from them, and then came home. You +got into the study only about a quarter of an hour before I came." + +Marco listened to this minute account of his adventures with eager +interest, wondering how his cousin could have obtained so early and +such complete information. After Forester had concluded, he paused a +moment and breathed a long sigh. Then he laid his head down upon his +pillow again, saying, + +"Well, I don't see how you found it out; and I am sorry that you did, +for I meant to have told you all about it myself." + +Marco seemed really disappointed at having lost the opportunity to +make his full confession, but Forester told him that he considered +that he _had_ made full confession. "You made up your mind to +do it," said he, "and you did begin, and it was the beginning which +required all the effort. I only refrained from asking you about the +details, from a wish to show you that I really knew all about it." + +"I don't see how you found it out," said Marco. "I suppose it must +have been that the boys told you." + +"No," replied Forester; "I have not seen either of the boys, or heard +any thing from them, directly or indirectly." + +"Then you must have watched me yourself," said Marco, "instead of +going away." + +"Do you think," said Forester, "that I would pretend that I was going +away, and then just go out a little way and lie in wait to watch you? + +"Why, no,"--said Marco,--"I don't really suppose that you would." + +"No," said Forester, "I really went away nut of town. I went to visit +a sick man and help him make his will, and I did not return until just +before you saw me." + +"Then I don't see how you knew," said Marco. + +"It is of very little consequence to you to know that," said Forester, +"but I want to ask you a little more about the affair. Are you willing +to answer any question that I may ask?" + +Marco said that he was, and Forester asked him about the circumstances +which led him to go away. Marco explained to him how he saw the boys, +and what he thought that they were doing, and what induced him to go +and see them, and how he was prevented from coming back as he had +intended. There was an air of openness and honesty in the manner in +which Marco related these facts, which convinced Forester that he was +telling the truth. + +Forester was glad to find that it was not a deliberate and +preconcerted plan, between Marco and the other boys, to go off on this +expedition; for, bad as it was for Marco to allow himself to be drawn +away by such temptations, it would have been worse, or rather it would +have indicated a worse state of character, if he had deliberately +planned such a truancy. + +"Well," said Forester, as he was about to close the conversation, "I +am very glad that you concluded to confess your fault. I am very glad, +too, that you did not go a-fishing this afternoon under the sort of +permission which I gave you. I infer from these two things that you +wish to be cured of these faults, and to become a boy of firm moral +principle. Now it is a rule with me, generally, not to punish a boy +for what he confesses of his own accord. Still, I think it probable +it would be better for you to have some punishment for this. It would +help to make a strong impression upon your mind, and make it much more +easy for you to resist such temptations in time to come. But you +may decide this question yourself. If you choose to submit to a +punishment, and will tell me so to-morrow morning, I will think of +some suitable one for you. If you do not say any thing to me about it, +I shall not punish you." So saying, Forester bade Marco good night. + +The next morning, Marco met Forester on the stairs, as he was coming +down to breakfast, and told him that he thought he should feel better +to be punished. So Forester reflected upon the subject, and at nine +o'clock, when Marco went in to commence his studies, Forester told him +that he had concluded upon his punishment. + +"What is it to be?" said Marco. + +"It is for me not to allow you to study," replied Forester, "all this +forenoon, but to require you to sit still at your desk, with nothing +to do. You see it will be a sort of solitary imprisonment, only your +prison will in itself be a pleasant place." + +Marco thought that this would not be a very severe punishment, but he +found, in enduring it, that it was in fact much more severe than he +had imagined. He got very tired indeed, long before the forenoon was +out. He concluded that solitary imprisonment for years, in a gloomy +dungeon, must be a terrible punishment indeed. + +A year or two after this time, when Marco had been entirely cured of +all such faults, he one day asked Forester to explain to him how he +knew where he went on this memorable forenoon; and Forester willingly +explained it to him. It seems that Forester's father, though a very +gentle and kind-hearted man, was a very shrewd one, and having been +accustomed to the discovery, in the course of his practice, of all +sorts of pranks and roguery, was less disposed to place confidence in +others till he knew the confidence was deserved, than Forester himself +was, who had less experience. And when he knew that Forester had gone +away, leaving Marco alone, he doubted a little whether he would remain +industriously at his work. While he was thinking of this, he heard a +slight noise which Marco made with his feet against the clapboards of +the house in getting out the window. He therefore came into the study +a moment afterward, and found that Marco had gone. He looked out the +window and saw him going off toward the other boys. Just at that +moment the man came to help him prune his trees, but before he began +this work he went into the house to James, called him to a window and +pointed out Marco to him, and said, + +"I want you, James, to follow him, and keep in sight of him until he +returns, but if possible don't let him see you. Say nothing to +me about it, but give my son Forester an account of all that you +observe." + +James did as he was directed, and when Forester came back he told him +the whole story, just before Forester went into the study. So that +Forester knew all about it, before Marco saw him. James managed the +affair very adroitly, for he kept himself entirely out of sight except +in one instance, and that was when the boys fell into the water. He +then rushed toward them for fear that they might be drowned, but +he stopped on the bank when he saw that there was no danger, and +disappeared again before Marco had time to recognize him. + + + + +Chapter IX. + +Boating. + + + +The alterations and improvements, which Forester had ordered in the +boat, were completed at the time promised. Marco said that it would +require a crew of eight to man the boat properly: six oarsmen, a +bowman, and a coxswain. Marco pronounced this word as if it was spelt +_coxen_. This is the proper way to pronounce it. It means the one +who sits in the stern, to steer the boat and direct the rowers. In +fact, the coxswain is the commander of the boat's crew. + +"_I_ will be bowman," said Marco, "and you can be coxswain, and +then we shall want six boys for oarsmen." + +"You will have to explain to me then what my duties will be," said +Forester, "for I don't even know what a coxswain is." + +"Why, he's the commander," said Marco. "He gives all the orders." + +"Then you must be coxswain at first," said Forester, "for I don't know +any thing about it. You have got to teach us all. After I have learned +to manage a boat with six oars, man-of-war fashion, I should like to +be coxswain sometimes very much. And it seems to me," added Forester, +"that you and I had better go down first alone, until you get me +taught, and then we can get the boys to come afterward." + +"O no," said Marco, "you'll all learn easily enough together. I can +tell you all exactly what to do." + +Forester acceded to this proposal, and they made out a list of six +boys, and Forester authorized Marco to invite them to come. "Be sure," +said Forester, "to tell their parents that we are going out in a boat, +and tell them that I am going too." Marco did this. The boys all +gladly accepted the invitation. They came first to the house, and then +proceeded by a path, from the foot of the garden, which led to the +mill-pond. It was about half-past one when they reached the boat. + +Here there was a great scene of confusion, as the boys all commenced +talking and asking questions together. They found the boat in fine +order, being perfectly tight and dry, and the new seats being all in +their places. The oars, however, were not there. Forester recommended +to Marco to send a detachment of his men, to go to the wagon-maker's +shop and get them. So Marco sent off three of the boys, calculating +very correctly that they could bring two oars apiece. Before many +minutes they returned, each of the boys having two oars, one on each +shoulder. + +The other boys immediately began to take the oars, and they all +advanced together toward the boat, to get in. + +"Stop," exclaimed Marco, "stop, boys! you must not go aboard without +an order. I'm coxswain; you must wait till I tell you, before one of +you goes aboard. John, come out." + +John, who had stepped into the boat, came back again on hearing this +peremptory order, and the boys waited on the bank. Marco then +told them to put the oars in. The boys began to pitch them in, in +confusion, some falling upon the thwarts, and some into the bottom of +the boat. + +"No,--stop," said Marco; "that isn't the way. Put 'em in in order." + +"Yes, put 'em in order," said John. "Let's put 'em in order." + +"Lay 'em along the thwarts," said Marco, "the blades forward." + +Marco explained to the boys how to place the oars. They were laid +along the middle of the thwarts so as to leave room to sit by the side +of them. They were placed in such a manner that the handle of one came +upon each seat. + +"_Aboard!_" said Marco, in a military tone. + +The boys did not understand that order, and of course did not obey it. + +"_Aboard_, I say!" repeated Marco; "when I say _Aboard_, you +must all get into the boat." + +With this explanation of the word of command, the boys understood what +they were to do, and got aboard the boat as fast as they could. There +was much confusion among them in getting their seats. Several of them +began to take up their oars, until they were forbidden to do so by +Marco, in a loud voice. + +"You must not touch the oars," said he, "until I say _Toss_. Then +you must take them and toss them right up in the air." + +"How?" said one of the boys, named Joseph. "How, Marco?" + +This question was scarcely heard amid the confusion. + +"Be silent, boys; don't talk, and don't stop to ask _how_, but do +just as I tell you." + +Marco was so much accustomed to the idea which sailors attach to +the word _toss_, and to the manner in which they perform the +evolution, that he forgot how many different ways there might be of +tossing up an oar. The proper way is, when the command is given, for +each oarsman to raise the blade of his oar quick, but gently, into the +air, letting the end of the handle rest upon the thwart. It is then in +a position to be let down into the water conveniently when the next +order, which is, _Let fall_, is given. + +The raising of the oars, and then letting them fall, all exactly +together, by the crew of a man-of-war's boat, makes a very pretty +spectacle. + +The boys, however, knew nothing about this, for Marco, as it was all +very plain and familiar to him, did not realize the necessity of +making very minute explanations to such new recruits as those +that were under his command. Accordingly, when the order came to +_toss_, some of the boys sat still, looking at Marco, and not +knowing what to do; others raised their oars into the air, some one +way and some another; and Joseph, who was a little discomposed by the +rebuff he had met with, concluded that he would obey as literally as +possible, let what would come of it and he gave his oar a high toss +into the air. It fell at a short distance from him into the water, +went down for a moment out of sight, and then, shooting out for half +its length, it fell over upon its side and began to float away. + +[Illustration: "TOSS."] + +Hereupon ensued just such a scene of laughter shouts, and confusion +as might have been expected. All began to shout out exclamations and +orders, and to give directions how to proceed to recover the lost oar. +The boys whose oars were still left, thrust them confusedly into the +water, and began pushing, poking, and paddling with them, in order to +get the boat out to where Joseph's oar was floating. All this time +Forester remained on the bank, laughing at this specimen of nautical +command and subordination. + +After a time the oar was recovered, and Marco, after much scolding and +vociferation, got his crew in order again. Forester said that he would +remain where he was, on the bank, until Marco had tried his oarsmen a +little. So Marco went on giving his orders. He succeeded finally in +getting the boys all in their seats again, with their oars in their +hands. + +"Now, boys, mind," said he, "and I'll tell you exactly what to do. +_Attention!_ When I say _Attention_, you must all stop talking. +_Attention!_ Now you mustn't speak a word. You must hold your oars out +over the water and have them all ready, the handles in your hands, and +when I say _Give way_, then you must all begin to row, all together +exactly, so as to keep the stroke. You must keep the stroke with the +stroke-oarsman." + +But the boys did not know who the stroke-oarsman was, and they began +clamorously to inquire, notwithstanding the injunction to silence +which they had received. Marco explained to them that the +stroke-oarsman was the one who sat nearest to him, that is, the one +farthest aft. As the oarsmen were all sitting with their backs toward +the bow of the boat, their faces were toward the stern, and therefore +the one who sat farthest aft could be seen by the rest. This is the +reason why the thwart which is farthest aft is made the seat of the +best oarsman, and the others are required to make their motions keep +time with his. For the oars in a boat that is fully manned are so +close together, that, unless they keep time exactly with each other, +the blades would cross and hit one another in utter confusion. But +if they keep the stroke, as they call it, exactly together, all goes +right. For this reason the oarsman who sits aft, by whose oar the +movements of all the other oars are to be regulated, is called the +stroke-oarsman. + +The boys, however, knew nothing of all this. Marco contented himself +with giving one general direction to them, to keep the stroke with +the stroke-oarsman, and to begin when he gave the order, "_Give +way_." Accordingly, after all were silent again, the oars being +extended over the water, and Forester standing on the bank watching +the operation, Marco called out in the tone of command, "_Give +way!_" + +The boys immediately began to row, all looking at the stroke-oarsman, +but failing entirely to keep time with him. The oars thumped against +each other, crossed each other, and made all manner of confusion. +Some could not get into the water, and others could not get out; and +Joseph's oar, which somehow or other came out too suddenly, while he +was pulling hard upon it, caused him to pitch backward off his seat +and tumble over into the bottom of the boat. + +[Illustration: BAD ROWING.] + +"_Oars!_" said Marco, "OARS!" + +What Marco meant by _oars_ they did not know, so they paid no +attention to the command, but some stopped rowing in despair, while +others kept on, banging the blades of the oars against one another, +and plashing the water, but produced no effect whatever in respect to +propelling the boat. In the mean time the air was filled with shouts +of laughter and loud vociferations. + +"_Oars!_" exclaimed Marco again, with the voice of a colonel at +the head of his regiment. "_Oars!_ Why don't you stop when I say +_Oars_?" + +The boys began to stop, shouting to one another, "Stop!" "Stop!" In a +few minutes all was still again. The boys began to take their oars in +and one of them rose and said, + +"Poh! this is all nonsense. You can't do any thing with oars. I'd +rather have one good paddle than all the oars in New York." + +In fact, Marco himself began to despair. He uttered some impatient +exclamations, and tried to paddle the boat toward the shore. But he +found he was almost as awkward in managing a paddle, as the other boys +were in working oars. He succeeded, however, at last, in getting the +boat to the shore, and then he told the boys that they might as well +get out, for they could not do any thing at all about rowing. + +"You don't seem to get along very well, Marco," said Forester: "what +is the matter?" + +"Why, I havn't got any crew. They don't know any thing about it." + +"It seems to me the fault is in the commander," said Forester. + +"In me?" said Marco. "Why, I ordered them right, but they wouldn't +obey." + +"Yes, your orders would have been right, if you had had a trained +crew. But you don't manage in the right way to teach raw recruits." + +"I wish you would try, then, cousin Forester," said Marco. + +"Well," said Forester, "I have no objection to try. Boys, are you +willing to have me for commander?" + +"Yes, sir," "Yes, sir," said all the boys. + +"I shall be a great deal more strict than Marco," said Forester. "So I +don't expect that you will like me. But I will try. I don't want quite +so many oarsmen to begin with; I should rather teach a few at a time. +Are there any of you that would like to come ashore, and let the rest +practice first?" + +None of the boys moved. They all wished to practice first. This was +just as Forester expected. + +"Very well," said Forester; "I know how I can thin out my crew. As +fast as I find that you don't obey my orders, I shall put you ashore." + +"But suppose we don't understand?" said one of the boys. + +"I shall explain fully beforehand what you are to do. And, Marco, you +must observe how I manage, and then you will know another time. When +you have got any thing to teach, the art consists in dividing the +lesson into a great many very short steps, and letting your pupils +take one at a time." + +Forester knew nothing about managing a boat's crew until that day, but +he had observed very attentively all the orders which Marco had given, +and noticed their meaning, and thus he was prepared to manoeuver the +boat as far as Marco had gone in giving his orders. He accordingly +stepped into the boat and took Marco's place; while Marco himself +walked forward and took his place at the bow of the boat, saying that +he was going to be bowman. + +"Marco," said Forester, "you say that when the order is +_Attention_, the crew must be silent; what is the order when I +want to give them liberty to talk again?" + +"_Crew at ease_" said Marco. + +"Very well. Now, boys, when I say _Attention_, you must be still, +look at me, hear all I say, and obey the orders as exactly as you can, +but ask no questions and give me no advice, nor speak to one another, +till I say, _Crew at ease_. Then you can talk again. Perhaps two +or three of you will disobey, and I have no objection to that, as I +should like some excuse for putting some of you ashore." + +Forester smiled as he said this, and every boy determined that he +would not be the one to be sent ashore. + +"_Attention!_" said Forester. + +Forester then put his paddle into the water and paddled the boat out +into the pond a little way. While he was doing this, there was a dead +silence on board the boat. Not a boy spoke a word; and when, at last, +Forester stopped paddling, the boat floated on a little way gently +through the water, and not a sound was to be heard except the distant +barking of a dog on the opposite shore. + +"_Crew at ease_," said Forester. The boys laughed, changed their +positions, and began to talk. + +"I didn't get any of you ashore then," said Forester, "but I shall +succeed the next time, for I shall watch my opportunity when you are +all busy talking, and say, _Attention_, suddenly; then you will +not all stop in an instant, but some will go on just to finish their +sentence, and this will be disobeying the order, and so I shall get +you ashore." + +The boys laughed; they thought that it was not very good policy for +Forester to give them this warning of his intention, as it put +them all upon their guard. Presently the word of command came very +suddenly--"_Attention!_" Every voice was hushed in an instant; +the boys assumed immediately an erect position, and looked directly +toward Forester. + +"Joseph," said Forester, "when I give order _Toss_, you are +to take up your oar and raise the blade into the air, and hold it +perpendicularly, with the end of the handle resting on the thwart by +your side, on the side of the boat opposite to the one on which you +are going to row,--_Toss!_" + +So Joseph raised his oar in the manner directed, the other boys +looking on. + +"Let it down again," said Forester. Joseph obeyed. + +"_Crew at ease_," said Forester. + +Forester acted very wisely in not keeping the attention of the crew +very long at a time. By relieving them very frequently, he made the +distinction between being under orders and at ease a very marked +and striking one, so that the boys easily kept it in mind. In a few +moments he commanded attention again, with the same success as before. +He then ordered another boy to toss his oar, then another, and so on, +until he had taught the movement to each one separately. He gave to +each one such explanations as he needed, and when necessary he made +them perform the evolution twice, so as to be sure that each one +understood exactly what was to be done. Then Forester gave the command +for them all to toss together, and they did so quite successfully. The +oars rose and stood perpendicularly like so many masts; while Forester +paddled the boat slowly through the water. Then he directed the boys +to let the oars down again, gently, to their places along the thwarts, +and put the crew at ease. + +The boys perceived now that they were making progress. They were +gaining slowly, it is true, but surely, and Marco saw where the cause +of his failure was. He had not realized how entirely ignorant all +these boys were of the whole mystery of managing an oar and of acting +in concert; and besides, he had not had experience enough as a +teacher, to know how short the steps must be made, in teaching any +science or art which is entirely new. + +In the same slow and cautious manner, Forester taught the boys to let +the blades of their oars fall gently into the water, at the command, +"_Let fall_." He taught one at a time, as before, each boy +dropping the blades into the water and letting the middle of the oar +come into the row-lock, while he held the handle in his hands ready +to row. Then, without letting them row any, he ordered them to +_toss_ again; that is, to raise the oars out of the water and +hold them in the air, with the end of the handle resting upon the +thwart. He drilled them in this exercise for some time, until they +could go through it with ease, regularity, and dispatch. He then gave +the order, "_Crew at ease_," and let the boys rest themselves and +enjoy conversation. + +While they were resting, Forester paddled them about. The boys asked +him when he was going to let them row, and Forester told them that +perhaps they had had drilling enough for one day, and if they chose he +would not require any thing more of them, but would paddle them about +and let them amuse themselves. But they were all eager to learn to +row. So Forester consented. + +He taught them the use of the oar, in the same slow and cautious +manner by which his preceding instructions had been characterized. He +made one learn at a time, explaining to him minutely every motion. As +each one, in turn, practiced these instructions, the rest looked on, +observing every thing very attentively, so as to be ready when their +turn should come. At length, when they had rowed separately, he tried +first two, and then four, and then six together, and finally got them +so trained that they could keep the stroke very well. While they were +pulling in this manner, the boat would shoot ahead very rapidly. When +he wanted them to stop, he would call out, "_Oars_." This was +the order for them to stop rowing, after they had finished the stroke +which they had commenced, and to hold the oars in a horizontal +position, with the blades just above the water, ready to begin again +whenever he should give the command. + +At first the boys were inclined to stop immediately, even if they were +in the middle of a stroke, if they heard the command, _oars_. But +Marco said that this was wrong; they must finish the stroke, he said, +if they had commenced it, and then all take the oars out of the water +regularly together. Forester was careful too to give the order always +between the middle and the end of a stroke, so that the obeying of the +order came immediately after the issuing of it. + +By this means Forester could stop them in a moment, when any thing +went wrong. He would order, "_Give way_," and then the boys would +all begin to pull their oars. As soon as any of them lost the stroke, +or whenever any oars began to interfere, or any other difficulty or +accident occurred, he would immediately give the order, "_Oars_." +This would instantly arrest the rowing, before the difficulty became +serious. Then, after a moment's pause he would say, "_Give way_," +again, when they would once more begin rowing all together. All this +time, he sat in the stern and steered the boat wherever they wanted to +go. + +[Illustration: GOOD ROWING.] + +Marco wished to have Forester teach the boys how to back water, and to +trail oars, and to put the oars apeak, and to perform various other +evolutions. But Forester was very slow in going on to new manoeuvers +before the old ones were made perfectly familiar. He accordingly spent +nearly an hour in rowing about the pond, up and down, to make the boys +familiar with the stroke. He found, as is, in fact, universally the +case with beginners in the art of rowing, that they were very prone to +row faster and faster, that is, to accelerate their strokes, instead +of rowing regularly, keeping continually the same time. They gradually +improved, however, in respect to this fault, and by the middle of the +afternoon Marco began to think that they were quite a good crew. +They practiced several new evolutions during the latter part of the +afternoon, and just before tea time they all went home, much pleased +with the afternoon's enjoyment, and with the new knowledge and skill +which they had acquired. They also planned another excursion the +following week. + + + + +Chapter X. + +An Expedition. + + + +Forester and Marco got their boat's crew well trained in the course of +a week or two, and one pleasant day in September they planned a long +expedition in their boat. The boys collected at the house of the owner +of the boat, at one o'clock. Two of them carried a large basket which +Forester had provided. It was quite heavy, and they did not know what +was in it; but they supposed that it was a store of some sort of +provisions for a supper, in case they should be gone so long as to +need a supper. Forester carried a hatchet also. + +At the proper word of command, the boys got into the boat and took +their several stations. Marco took his place forward to act as bowman. +It is the duty of the bowman to keep a lookout forward, that the boat +does not run into any danger; and also, when the boat comes to land, +to step out first and hold it by the painter, that is, the rope which +is fastened to the bow, while the others get out. Marco had a pole, +with an iron spike and also an iron hook in the end of it, which he +used to _fend off_ with, as they called it, when the boat was in +danger of running against any obstacle. This was called a boat-hook. + +"_Attention!_" said Forester, when the boys were all seated. + +"_Toss!_" + +Hereupon the boys raised the oars into the air, ready to let them down +into the water. + +"_Let fall!_" said Forester. The oars all fell gently and +together into their places. + +"_Give way!_" said Forester. + +The boat began immediately to glide rapidly over the water, under the +impulse which the boys gave it in rowing. "_Crew at ease_," said +Forester. + +So the boys went on rowing, but understood that they had liberty to +talk. One of them wished to know where Forester was going with them; +but Forester said it was entirely contrary to the discipline aboard +a man-of-war for the crew to ask the captain where they were going. +"Besides," said Forester, "though I could easily tell you, I think you +will enjoy the expedition more, to know nothing about it beforehand, +but to take every thing as it comes." + +Forester steered in such a manner as to put the head of the boat +toward a bank at some distance from where they started, on which there +was a thick forest of firs and other evergreens, growing near the +water. When they got pretty near the land, he gave the order for +attention, that they might observe silence in going through whatever +manoeuvers were required here. The next order was, _Oars_. At +this the oarsmen stopped rowing, and held their oars horizontally over +the water. The boat in the mean time was gliding on toward the shore. + +"_Aboard!_" said Forester. + +The crew then gently raised their oars into the air, and passed them +over their heads into the boat, laying them upon the thwarts in their +proper position, along the middle of the boat. By this order the crew +supposed that Forester was going to land. + +"Bear a hand, Mr. Bowman," said Forester, "and fend off from the +shore." + +Forester, by means of his paddle, had steered the boat up to a log +which lay in the edge of the water, and Marco, at first fending off +from the log, to keep the boat from striking hard, and then holding on +to it with his hook, got it into a good position for landing, and held +it securely. + +"_Crew ashore_," said Forester. + +The crew, who had learned all these orders in the course of the +repeated instructions which Forester and Marco had given them, began +to rise and to walk toward the bow of the boat and to go ashore. Marco +landed first, and held the boat with his boat-hook, while the rest got +out. Forester then ordered Marco to make the boat fast, until they +were ready to embark again. + +Forester then went up in the woods a little way, with his hatchet +in his hand, and began to look about among the trees. Finally, he +selected a small tree, with a round, straight stem, and began to cut +it down. The boys gathered around him, wondering what it could be for. +Forester smiled, and worked on in silence, declining to answer any of +their questions. Marco said it was for a mast, he knew, but when they +asked him where the sail was, he seemed perplexed, and could not +answer. + +As soon, however, as the tree was cut down, it was evident that it was +not intended to be used as a mast, for Forester began at once to cut +it up into lengths of about two feet long. What could be his design, +the boys were utterly unable to imagine. He said nothing, but ordered +the boys to take these lengths, one by one, and put them into the +boat. There were five in all. Then he ordered the crew on board again. +Marco got in last. When all were seated, the order was given to shove +off, the oars were _tossed_--then _let fall_ into the water. +He ordered them to _back water_ first, by which manoeuver the +boat was backed off from the land into deep water. Then he commanded +them to _give way_, and at the same time bringing the stern of +the boat round by his paddle, the boat was made to shoot swiftly down +the stream. + +The boat went rapidly forward along the shores of the pond, and +presently, on coming round a wooded point, the mills appeared in +sight. As they approached the mills, they kept pretty near the shore, +and at length landed just above the dam. + +Forester ordered the crew ashore, at a place where there was a road +leading down to the water's edge. This road was made by the teams +which came down to get logs and lumber from the water. At Forester's +direction, the boys drew the bow of the boat up a little way upon the +land. Then he ordered the boys to take out the pieces of the stem of +the little tree, and he placed one of them under the bow as a roller. +The boys then took hold of the sides of the boat, three on each side, +each boy opposite to his own row-lock, while Marco stood ready to put +under another roller. The ascent was very gradual, so that the boat +moved up easily, and the boys were very much surprised and delighted +to see their boat thus running up upon the land. + +It seemed to them an exercise of great power to be able to take so +large a boat so easily and rapidly up such an ascent upon the land. +They were aided to do it by two principles. One was the combination of +their strength in one united effort, and the other was the influence +of the rollers in preventing the friction of the bottom of the boat +upon the ground. + +Presently the whole length of the boat was out of water and resting +on four rollers, which Marco had put under it, one by one, as it had +advanced. Forester would then call out, "_Ahead with her!_" when +the boys would move about two steps. Then Forester would give the +command, "_Hold on_," and they would stop. By this time one of +the rollers would come out behind, and Marco would take it up and +carry it round forward, and place it under the bow, and Forester +would then say, "_Ahead with her!_" again, and the boat would +immediately advance again up the acclivity. + +[Illustration: THE PORTAGE.] + +In a very few minutes the boat was thus rolled up into a sort of a +road, where the way was level. Here it went very easily. Presently it +began to descend, and soon the boys saw that Forester was taking a +sort of path which led by a gentle slope down to the water immediately +below the mill. They were very much pleased at this, for, as they had +had a great many excursions already on the mill-pond, they had become +familiar with it in all its parts, and they were much animated at the +idea of exploring new regions. In going down to the water on the lower +side of the mill, they had, of course, no exertion to make to draw the +boat, as its own weight was more than sufficient to carry it down upon +the rollers. They only had to hold it back to prevent its running down +too fast, and to keep it properly guided. + +"It goes down pretty easy," said Marco; "but I don't see how you are +ever going to get it back again." + +It was, in fact, a long and rather steep descent. The boys thought +that it would require far more strength than they could exercise, to +bring the boat _up_ such an inclination. Forester told them not +to fear. He said that a good commander never put too much upon his +men, or voluntarily got them into any difficulty without planning +beforehand a way to get out. + +They soon got down to the water's edge again. Here, instead of the +broad and smooth pond which they had above the dam, they found a +stream eddying, and foaming, and flowing rapidly down between rocks +and logs. There was a bridge across the stream too, a short distance +below. The boys were a little inclined to be afraid to embark, in what +appeared to be a rather dangerous navigation, but they had confidence +in Forester, and so they readily obeyed when Forester ordered the crew +aboard. + +"Now, Mr. Bowman," said Forester, "keep a sharp lookout ahead for +rocks and snags, and fend off well when there is any danger." + +So Marco kneeled upon a small seat at the bow of the boat, and looked +into the water before him, while Forester propelled and guided the +boat with his paddle. They advanced slowly and by a very tortuous +course, so as to avoid the rocks and shallows, and at length, just +above the bridge, they came to a wider and smoother passage of water: +and here Forester ordered the oars out. There was only room for them +to take four or five strokes before they came to the bridge, and under +the bridge there was only a very narrow passage where they could go +through. This passage was between one of the piers and a gravel +bed. As they advanced toward it, Forester called out, "_Give way +strong!_" and all the boys pulled their oars with all their +strength, without, however, accelerating the strokes. This gave +the boat a rapid headway, and then Forester gave the order to +_trail_, when the boys simultaneously lifted the oars out of the +row-locks and let them drift in the water alongside of the boat. As +the boat was advancing very swiftly, the oars were immediately swept +in close to her sides, and thus were out of the way, and the boat +glided safely and swiftly through the passage, and emerged into a +broader sheet of smooth water beyond. + +"_Recover!_" said Forester. The boys then, by a peculiar +manoeuver which they had learned by much practice, brought back their +oars into the row-locks, and raised the blades out of the water, so +as to get them into a position for rowing. "_Give way!_" said +Forester, and immediately they were all in motion, the boat gliding +swiftly down the stream. + +After they had gone on in this way a few minutes, Forester ordered the +oars _apeak_, and put the crew at ease. When the oars are apeak, +they are drawn _in_ a little way, so that the handle of each oar +may be passed under a sort of cleat or ledge, which runs along on the +inside of the boat near the upper edge of it. This keeps the oar firm +in its place without the necessity of holding it, the handle being +under this cleat, while the middle of the oar rests in the row-lock. +Thus the oarsmen are relieved from the necessity of holding their +oars, and yet the oars are all ready to be seized again in a moment, +whenever it becomes desirable to commence rowing. + +Meantime the boat slowly drifted down the stream. The water was here +deep and comparatively still, and the boys amused themselves with +looking over the sides into the depths of the water. They glided +noiselessly along over various objects,--now a great flat rock, now +a sunken tree, and now a bed of yellow sand. Every now and then, +Forester would order the oars out, and make the oarsmen give way for +a few strokes, so as to give the boat what they called steerage way, +that is, way through the water, so that holding the paddle in one +position or the other would steer it. In this way Forester guided the +boat in the right direction, keeping it pretty near the middle of the +stream. + +This mill-stream, as has already been stated, emptied into the river, +and the boat was now rapidly approaching the place of junction. In a +few minutes more the river came into view. The boys could see it at +some distance before them, running with great rapidity by a rocky +point of land which formed one side of the mouth of the brook. + +"Now, boys," said Forester, "is it safe for us to go out into that +current?" + +"Yes," said Marco, "by all means,--let us go." + +"Perhaps we shall upset in the rips," said some of the boys. + +"No matter if we do," said Marco; "it is not deep in the rips, and of +course there is no danger." + +"That is in our favor certainly," said Forester. "Whenever the current +sets strong, there it is sure to be shallow, so that if we upset +we should not be drowned; and where it is deep, so as to make it +dangerous for us to get in, it is always still, and thus there is no +danger of upsetting." + +"What is the reason of that?" said one of the boys. + +"The reason is given in this way," said Forester, "in the college +mathematics. The velocity of a stream is inversely as the area of the +section." + +The boys did not understand such mathematical phraseology as this, and +so Forester clothed his explanation in different language. He said +that where the stream was shallow or narrow, the current must be more +rapid, in order to get all the water through in so small a space, but +where it is deep, it may move slowly. + +Forester landed his crew upon the rocky point, where they had a very +pleasant view up and down the river. He proposed to them to have their +luncheon there, and to this they agreed. So they went back to the edge +of the rocks, where there was a little grove of trees, and they sat +down upon a log which had been worn smooth by the action of the water +in floods, and bleached by the sun. + +There were plenty of dry sticks and slabs lying about upon the shore, +which Forester ordered the crew to collect in order to build a fire. +It was not cold, and they had no need of a fire for any purposes +of cooking, but a fire would look cheerful and pleasant, and they +accordingly made one. Forester had some matches in his pocket. Two of +the crew brought the basket from the boat, and when they had opened +it, they found an abundant store of provisions. There was a dozen or +more of round cakes, and a large apple-pie, which, as there were just +eight of them, gave forty-five degrees to each one. There was also a +jug of milk, and a silver mug, which Forester's mother had lent them +for the excursion, to drink out of. + +The boys, whose appetites had been sharpened by their exertions in the +portage of the boat round the falls, and in rowing, did not cease +to eat until the provisions were entirely exhausted, and then they +carried the empty basket back to the boat. Soon after this, Forester +summoned what he called a council of war, to consider the question +whether they had better go down the river. He said he wanted their +true and deliberate judgment in the case. He did not wish them to say +what they would like, merely, but what they thought, on the whole, +was best. He told them that he should not be _governed_ by their +advice, but, after hearing all that they had to say, he should act +according to his own judgment. + +"Then what's the use of asking us at all?" said Marco. + +"Why, what you will say may modify my judgment. I did not say that I +shall decide according to my judgment as it is now, but as it will be +after I have heard what you will have to say. I shall be influenced +perhaps by your reasons, but I shall decide myself. That is the theory +of a council of war. The commander may be influenced by the arguments +of his subalterns, but he is not governed by their votes." + +Forester then called upon each of the boys, in succession, to give his +opinion on the point. Marco was in favor of going down the river, but +all the rest, though they said that they should like to go very much, +thought it would not answer, as it would be almost impossible to get +the boat up again over the rips. After the consultation was concluded, +Forester said, "Well, boys, you have all given wise opinions except +Marco, and his is not wise. Now we'll go aboard the boat." + +"_Crew aboard!_" said Forester. The other orders followed in +rapid succession: _Attention! Toss! Let fall! Backwater! Oars! Give +way!_ The boys considered it settled, on hearing what Forester had +said of the wisdom of their several opinions, that they were now going +back toward the mill; but how they were going to get the boat back +above the dam they did not know, though they did not doubt that +Forester had some good plan which he had not explained to them. +Instead, however, of turning the head of the boat up the stream, +Forester pointed it toward the river. They supposed that he was going +out to the edge of the river, and that then he would turn and come +back; but, to their utter amazement, he pushed boldly on directly into +the current, and then, putting his helm hard up and calling out to the +crew to give way strong, the boat swept round into the very center of +the stream and shot down the river over the rips like an arrow. + +[Illustration: THE EXPEDITION.] + +"Give way, boys, hearty," said Forester. "Give way strong." + +The boys pulled with all their strength, and the boat went swifter +and swifter. Forester kept it in the middle of the current, where the +water was deepest, though even here it was very shallow. Marco, in +the mean time, who was stationed at the bows, kept a sharp lookout +forward, and gave Forester notice of any impending danger. They soon +got through the rips and came to the deep and still water below, where +the current was gentle and the surface smooth. Here Forester ordered +the oars apeak, and the crew at ease. + +"We never shall get back in the world," said one of the boys; "forty +men couldn't row the boat up those rips." + +"Let us try," said Forester. So he ordered the oars out again, and +put the boat under way. He brought her head round so as to point up +stream, and calling upon the crew to give way strong, he forced her +back into the rapid water. They went on a few rods, but long before +they reached the most rapid part, they found that with all their +exertions they could make no progress. The boat seemed stationary. +"_Oars_," said Forester. The boys stopped rowing, holding their +oars in the air, just above the water. Forester then, by means of his +paddle, turned the boat round again, saying, "Well, if we can't go up, +we can go down stream." He then ordered the crew to give way again, +and they began to glide along swiftly down the river. + +The boys wondered how Forester was going to get back, but he told them +to give themselves no concern on that score. "That responsibility +rests on me," said he. + +"But how came you to come down here," said Marco, "when you said my +advice wasn't good?" + +"I said your opinion was not wise. The boys who advised me not to come +were wiser than you. They gave better advice, so far as they and you +understood the case. But I know something which you do not, as is +usual with commanders,--and therefore I came down. In view of all that +_you_ know, it would have been wisest to have gone back, but in +view of all that _I_ know, it is wisest to come down." + +The curiosity of the boys was very much excited to know what it could +be that Forester knew which rendered coming down the river wise; but +Forester would make no explanations. He said that commanders were not +generally very communicative to their crews. In the mean time the boat +went on, sometimes shooting swiftly through the rapids, and sometimes +floating in a more calm and quiet manner on the surface of the stiller +water. In this way they went on more than a mile, enjoying the voyage +very highly, and admiring the varied scenery which was presented to +their view at every turn of the stream. + +At one place the boys landed upon a small sandy beach under some +overhanging rocks. They amused themselves in climbing about the rocks +for a time, and then they were ordered aboard again, and sailed on. + +Now it happened that the river, in the part of its course over which +this voyage had been performed, took a great circuit, and though they +had followed its course for more than a mile, they were now drawing +near to a place which was not very far from Forester's father's +house,--being about as much below it, as the place where the boat +belonged in the mill-pond was above it. As they approached the point +where the river turned again, Marco, who was looking out before, saw a +sort of landing, where there was a man standing, together with a yoke +of oxen. It was just sunset when they approached this spot. When they +arrived at it, the whole mystery was explained, for they found that +the man was James, who lived at Forester's father's, and the oxen were +his father's oxen. James had come down, under an appointment which +Forester had secretly made with him, with the oxen and a drag, and by +means of them he hauled the boat across to the mill-pond again, by +a back road which led directly across the pastures, and lanched it +safely again into the water close to the dwelling of its owner. So the +boys had, as it were, the pleasure of sliding down hill, without the +labor of drawing their sleds up again. + +[Illustration: THE DRAG.] + +Marco was very much pleased with this expedition. Forester told him +when they got home, that the Indians often carried their canoes around +falls, or from one river to another, and that such carrying-places +were called _portages_. + + + + +Chapter XI. + +Lost In The Woods. + + + +While Marco Paul was in Vermont, he and Forester had a remarkable +adventure in the woods. They got lost in fact, and for a time it +seemed quite doubtful how they were ever to find their way home. It +happened thus. + +One morning in the fall of the year, Marco, walking along toward the +barn with James, asked James what he was going to do that day. + +"I expect that I am going to gather apples," said James. + +"Well," said Marco. "Are you going in the cart?" + +"Yes," said James. + +"And may I go with you?" asked Marco. + +"Yes," said James. + +"And help gather the apples? said Marco. + +"Yes," said James. + +"And drive the oxen a little way?" asked Marco. + +"Yes," said James. + +"Well." said Marco. "I will run and get my goad-stick." + +Marco went toward the house intending to go in and get his goad-stick. +On his way he met his uncle. His uncle asked him whether James was out +in the barn. Marco said that he was, and his uncle then asked him to +go and request James to come to him. Marco did so, and he and James +then came along toward the house together. + +Marco's uncle stood upon the step of the door. + +"James," said he, "I was thinking that we ought to send for the +horses;--and the apples ought to be gathered too. Which is it best to +do?" + +"I hardly know, sir," said James. "It is high time that the apples +were gathered, and yet we promised to send for the horses to-day." + +"I can go and get the horses," said Marco,--"just as well as not. +Where is it?" + +"Oh no," said his uncle. "It is ten or fifteen miles from here. Isn't +it, James?" + +"Yes," said James, "by the road. I suppose it is about _four_ +miles through the woods. I was intending to walk there, through the +woods, and then to come home round by the road. It is rather a rough +road for horses through the woods." + +"Let cousin Forester and me go," said Marco. "I will go and ask him." + +So Marco went and found Forester. When Forester heard of the plan +he was quite inclined to accede to it. He had been much engaged +in studying for some time, and had had very little exercise and +recreation, so that he was easily persuaded to undertake an +expedition. The plan was all soon agreed upon. The horses had been put +out to pasture at a farmer's up the river about twelve miles. In going +that twelve miles the river took a great turn, so that in fact the +farm where the horses were pastured was not, in a straight line, +more than four miles from Mr. Forester's house. But the intermediate +country was a desolate and almost impassable region of forests and +mountains. There was, indeed, a sort of footpath by which it was +possible for men to get through, but this path was dangerous, and in +fact almost impracticable for horses. So James had formed the plan of +walking through the woods by the path, and then of coming home by the +road, riding one of the horses and leading the other. + +Forester and Marco concluded to adopt the same plan; except that in +coming home there would be just a horse a-piece for them to ride. They +put up some provisions to eat on the way, packing them in Marco's +knapsack. The knapsack, when it was ready, was strapped upon Marco's +back, for he insisted on carrying it. Forester consented to this +arrangement, secretly intending, however, not to allow Marco to carry +the load very far. + +Forester asked James if there would be any difficulty about the way. +James said that there would not be. The path, though it was not an +easy one to travel, was very easy to find. + +"You go on," said he, "along the back road about three quarters of a +mile, and then you will come to a small school-house on the left hand +side of the road, on a sort of hill. It is in the Jones district." + +"What sort of a school-house is it?" asked Forester. + +"It is a small school-house, with a little cupola upon the top of it," +said James, "for a bell. It stands upon a knoll by the side of the +road. Just beyond it the main road turns to the right, and there is +a narrower road leading off to the left through a gate. You must go +through that gate and then follow the path into the woods." + +"We can find it, I think," said Forester. + +"Yes," said Marco, "I know the place very well." + +Forester said he thought that they should find the way without any +difficulty, and so bidding his uncle and aunt good-bye, he and Marco +set out. + +They went through the garden, and from the garden they passed out +through a small gate into the orchard. Marco wished to go this way in +order to get some apples. He chose two from off his favorite tree and +put them into the knapsack, and took another in his hand to eat by the +way. Forester did the same, only he put the two that he carried with +him, into his pockets. + +From the orchard the travelers walked across a field and down into +the glen, and after crossing a brook upon some stepping-stones, they +ascended upon the other side, and presently climbing over a fence, +they came out into what James had called the back road. They walked +along upon this road, for about three quarters of a mile, until at +last they came in sight of the school-house. Marco spied it first. + +"There," said Marco, "that is the school-house." + +"How do you know that that is the one?" asked Forester. + +"Oh, I know the Jones district very well," said Marco. + +In New England the tract of country included within the jurisdiction +of a town, is divided into districts for the establishment and support +of schools. These districts are called school-districts, and each one +is generally named from some of the principal families that happen to +live in it. It happened that there were several families of the name +of Jones that lived in this part of the town, and so their district +was called the Jones district. + +"How do you happen to know it?" said Forester. + +"Oh, I came out here two or three times with Thomas Jones to set my +squirrel trap," said Marco. "There goes Thomas Jones now." + +"Where?" asked Forester. + +"There," said Marco, pointing along the road a little way. + +Forester looked forward, and saw in the road before them a boy walking +toward the school-house, with his slate under his arm. Beyond the boy, +upon the knoll on the left side of the road, was the school-house +itself. + +[Illustration: THE SCHOOL-HOUSE.] + +The school-house was not far from the road, and there was a little +grove of trees behind it. Beyond the school-house, and almost directly +before them, Marco and Forester saw the road turning a little to the +left toward the gate. + +"There is the gate," said Marco, "that we are to go through." + +"Yes," said Forester, "that must be the one." + +Forester and Marco walked on until they came to the school-house. +Thomas got to the school-house before them, and went in. Forester and +Marco passed on and went through the gate. They then went on beyond +the gate a little way till they came to a pair of bars. Marco took +down all but the topmost bar, and Forester, stooping down, passed +under. Marco attempted to do the same; but forgetting that he had a +knapsack upon his back, he did not stoop low enough, and gave his +knapsack such a knock as almost threw him down. Fortunately there was +nothing frangible inside, and so no damage was done. One of his apples +was mellowed a little; that was all. + +The path led the travelers first across a rough and rocky pasture, and +then it suddenly entered a wood where every thing wore an expression +of wild and solemn grandeur. The trees were very lofty, and consisted +of tall stems, rising to a vast height and surmounted above with a +tuft of branches, which together formed a broad canopy over the heads +of the travelers, and produced a sort of somber twilight below. Birds +sang in plaintive notes on the tops of distant trees, and now and then +a squirrel was seen running along the ground, or climbing up the trunk +of some vast hemlock or pine. + +"I hope that we shall not lose our way in these woods," said Forester. + +"Oh, there is no danger of that," rejoined Marco. "The path is very +plain." + +"It seems plain here," said Forester, "and I presume that there can +not be any danger, or James would have recommended to us to go the +other way." + +"We shall come home the other way," said Marco. "I wonder if there are +any saddles. Twelve miles would be too far to ride bareback." + +"Yes," said Forester, "there are saddles. I asked James about that." + +The path which Forester and Marco were pursuing soon began to +ascend. It ascended at first gradually, and afterward more and more +precipitously, and at length began to wind about among rocks and +precipices in such a manner, that Marco said he did not wonder at all +that James said it would be a rough road for horses. + +"I think it is a very rough road for boys," said Forester. + +"Boys?" repeated Marco. "Do you call yourself boys." + +"For _men_ then," said Forester. + +"But _I_ am not a man," said Marco. + +"Then I don't see how I can express my idea," said Forester. + +Marco's attention was here diverted from the rhetorical difficulty in +which Forester had become involved, by a very deep chasm upon one side +of the path. He went to the brink of it and could hear the roaring of +a torrent far below. + +"I mean to throw a stone down," said Marco. He accordingly, after +looking around for a moment, found a stone about as large as his head. +This stone he contrived to bring to the edge of the precipice and then +to throw it over. It went thundering down among the rocks and trees +below, while Marco stood upon the brink and listened to the sound of +the echoes and reverberations. He then got another stone larger than +the first, and threw that down; after which he and Forester resumed +their journey. + +The path, though it was a very rough and tortuous one, was pretty +plain; and it is probable that the travelers would have found no +difficulty in following it to the end of their route, had it not been +for an occurrence which they had not at all anticipated, but which was +one, nevertheless, that has often taken place to confuse the steps of +mountain travelers and make them lose their way. This occurrence was a +fall of snow. + +It was not late enough in the year for snow upon the lowlands, but +snow falls very early in the autumn upon the summits of mountains. +Marco and Forester had not anticipated stormy weather of any kind, +when they left home; for the wind was west and the sky was clear. +When, however, they had accomplished about one half of their journey, +large masses of fleecy clouds began to drive over the mountains, +and presently, all at once, it began to snow. Marco was extremely +delighted to see the snow falling. Forester was not so much pleased. +On the other hand, he looked somewhat concerned. He did not at first +think how the snow could do them any serious injury, but he seemed to +have an undefined sense of danger from it, and appeared uneasy. They +both, however, walked on. + +The region through which the path led at the time when the snow came +on, was a tract of flat land on the summit of the mountainous range, +with small and scattered trees here and there upon it. The best thing, +probably, for the travelers to have done in the emergency would have +been to have turned round the moment it began to snow, and go back as +fast as possible by the way that they came, as long as they were sure +of the path, and then to wait until the fallen snow had melted. If +they found then that the snow did not melt, so that they could see the +path again, it would be better to return altogether, as their chance +of being able to follow the path back toward their home would be much +greater than that of pursuing it forward; for they might expect to +find some guidance, in going back, by their recognition of the place +which they had passed in ascending. + +Forester, however, did not happen to think of this; and so when it +began to snow, his only immediate desire was to go forward as fast as +possible, so as to get into the woods again where he and Marco would +be in some measure under shelter. + +Marco finding that Forester appeared somewhat anxious, began to feel +some sentiment of fear himself. + +"Who would have thought," said he, "that we should have got caught out +in this snow-storm?" + +"Oh, it is not a snow-storm," replied Forester. "It is only a little +snow flurry. It will be over in a few minutes." + +"How do you know that it is not going to be a snow-storm?" asked +Marco. + +"Because storms never come out of the west," replied Forester. + +It snowed, however, faster and faster, and the ground soon began to be +entirely whitened. Forester pressed on, but he soon found himself at +a loss for his way. The air was so filled with the descending flakes, +that he could see only a very short distance before him. The view +of the forests and mountains was cut off on every side, and nothing +presented itself to the eye but the dim forms of the rocks and trees +which were near. These, too, were indistinct and shapeless. The ground +was soon entirely covered, and all hope of finding the path entirely +disappeared. Forester went back then a short distance, endeavoring to +retrace his steps. He followed the foot-prints a little way, but all +traces of them were soon obliterated. When he found that the steps +could no longer be seen, he went toward a tree which he saw rising +dimly at a little distance before him. The tree proved to be a large +hemlock, with wide-spreading branches. There was a place under this +tree where the ground was bare, having been sheltered from the snow by +the branches of the tree. There were some rocks too lying under this +tree. Forester walked up to them and sat down. Marco followed his +example. + +"Well, Marco," said Forester, "we are really lost." + +"And what are we going to do?" asked Marco, with a countenance of +great concern. + +"The first thing is," said Forester, "to open the knapsack, and see +what there is inside that is good to eat." + +So Forester took the knapsack off from his shoulders,--for he had +taken it from Marco some time before, and laying it upon a large +flat stone by his side, he began to open it, and to take out the +provisions. + +Forester was afraid that he and Marco had got themselves into somewhat +serious difficulty, but he wished to teach Marco that in emergencies +of such a nature, it would do no good to give way to a panic, or to +unnecessary anxiety. So he assumed an unconcerned and contented air, +and made arrangements for the luncheon, just as if they had stopped +there to eat it of their own accord, and without being in any +difficulty whatever about the prosecution of the journey. + +Marco, however, seemed to be quite uneasy. + +"What are we going to do?" said he. "If we get lost in this +snow-storm, we shall have to stay in the woods perhaps all night." + +"Yes," said Forester, "that we can do. We have done that before." + +Forester here alluded to an occasion on which he and Marco had spent +the night in a hut in the woods, when traveling in Maine. + +"But we had an axe then," said Marco, "to make a camp." + +"Yes," replied Forester, "that is true. I don't think, however, that +we shall have to stay in the woods all night now. We have _three_ +chances for avoiding it." + +"What are the three?" said Marco. + +"Why, in the first place," replied Forester, "we can stay where we are +until it stops snowing,--in fact it has almost stopped now. Then I +presume that the sun will come out, and in half an hour melt away all +the snow. Then we can find our path again, and go on." + +"But I don't think it is certain that we can find our path again," +said Marco. + +"Nor do I," said Forester, "but there's a chance of it. I did not say +that we had three certainties, but three chances." + +"Well," said Marco; "go on; what are the other two?" + +"If we can not find the path," said Forester, "either because the snow +does not melt, or for any other reason, then we can remain where we +are until night, and the people, finding that we do not come home, +will send up for us." + +"And how can they find us?" asked Marco. + +"Why, they will come up the path, of course, and we can not be very +far from the path, for we only lost it a few minutes before we came +here. Of course they will come up very near to this place;--and they +will come shouting out, every few minutes, as loud as they can, and so +we shall hear them." + +"Yes," said Marco, "I see; that is a pretty good chance." + +"The third chance for us," said Forester, "is to go down into the +first glen or valley that we can find, and then we shall probably come +to a stream. Then we can follow the stream down to the river." + +"How do you know that it goes to the river?" asked Marco. + +"All mountain streams do, of course," said Forester. "They go down +wherever they can find a valley or a hollow,--joining together and +taking in branches as they proceed,--until they get down into the +level country, and then they flow to the nearest river, and so to the +sea. Now I know that the river takes a bend around this mountainous +tract, and almost surrounds it, and all the streams from it must flow +into the river without going very far. We could follow one down, +though we should probably find the way very rough and difficult." + +"Let us try it," said Marco. + +This plan was decided upon, and so, when the snow squall was entirely +over and the sun had come out Marco and Forester, taking their +departure from the great tree and guiding their course by the sun, +the travelers set out, proceeding as nearly in a straight line as +possible, intending to go on in that manner until they should come to +some stream, and then to follow the stream down to the river. The plan +succeeded perfectly well. They soon descended into a valley, where +they found a little brook flowing over a bed of moss-covered stones. +They followed this brook down for about a mile, when they came to a +junction between the brook that they were following and another one. +After this junction of course the stream was larger, and in many +places they found it difficult to get along. The way was encumbered +with bushes, rocks, and fallen trees, and in one place the stream +flowed in a foaming torrent through the bottom of a deep chasm, with +sides rising directly out of the water. Here the travelers were +obliged to find a way at a distance from the brook--guiding +themselves, however, by the sound of its roaring. After passing the +chasm, they got back to the stream again. + +They came out into the open country about one o'clock, and found to their +great joy that they were very near the place where the horses were +pastured. The horses were all ready for them, and Forester and Marco +mounted them immediately, and set out on their return home. + +It was very pleasant riding along at their ease on horseback, after all +the dangers and fatigues that they had encountered. A part of the way +the road which they took lay along the shore of the river. Marco enjoyed +this part of the ride very much indeed. + +They reached home about sunset, with an excellent appetite for supper. +Marco was very enthusiastic in his manner of giving his aunt Forester +an account of his adventures, and he said, in conclusion, that he would +just as lief get lost in the woods as not. It was good fun. + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 11681 *** diff --git a/11681-h/11681-h.htm b/11681-h/11681-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..14897aa --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-h/11681-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,4416 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html + PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd"> +<html> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8" /> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of Marco Paul's Voyages and Travels; Vermont, by Jacob Abbott</title> +<style type="text/css"> + <!-- + + body { + margin : 5%; + font-family: Verdana, Arial, sans-serif; + } + + h1, h2, h3, h4 { + text-align: center; + font-weight: bold; + font-variant: small-caps + } + + .smallcaps { font-variant: small-caps } + + a { text-decoration: none; } + a:hover { background-color: #ffffcc } + + div.chapter { + margin-top: 4em; + } + + hr { + height: 1px; + width: 80%; } + hr.full { width: 100%; + height: 2px; } + div.note { + border-style: dashed; + border-width: 1px; + border-color: #000000; + background-color: #ccffcc; + width: 80%; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + font-size: .8em; + } + + div.image { + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + width: 50%; + } + + img { + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + border: none; + max-width: 100%; + } + a:link {color:blue; + text-decoration:none} + link {color:blue; + text-decoration:none} + a:visited {color:blue; + text-decoration:none} + a:hover {color:red} + pre {font-size: 9pt;} + +--> +</style> +</head> +<body> +<div>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 11681 ***</div> +<h1>The Project Gutenberg eBook, Marco Paul's Voyages and Travels; Vermont, by +Jacob Abbott</h1> +<br /> +<br /> +<center> +<b>E-text prepared by Project Gutenberg Distributed Proofreaders</b></center> +<br /> +<br /> +<hr class="full" /> +<br /> +<div id="tp"> +<h1 class="title">Marco Paul's Voyages & Travels</h1> + +<h2 class="subtitle">Vermont</h2> + +<h2 class="author">[by Jacob Abbott]</h2> + +<h3>1852</h3> +</div> + + +<div id="preface"> +<h2>Preface.</h2> + + +<p>The design of the series of volumes, entitled <span class="smallcaps">Marco Paul's Adventures +in the Pursuit of Knowledge</span>, is not merely to entertain the reader +with a narrative of juvenile adventures, but also to communicate, in +connection with them, as extensive and varied information as possible, +in respect to the geography, the scenery, the customs and the +institutions of this country, as they present themselves to the +observation of the little traveler, who makes his excursions under the +guidance of an intelligent and well-informed companion, qualified to +assist him in the acquisition of knowledge and in the formation of +character. The author has endeavored to enliven his narrative, and to +infuse into it elements of a salutary moral influence, by means of +personal incidents befalling the actors in the story. These incidents +are, of course, imaginary--but the reader may rely upon the strict +and exact truth and fidelity of all the descriptions of places, +institutions and scenes, which are brought before his mind in the +progress of the narrative. Thus, though the author hopes that the +readers who may honor these volumes with their perusal, will be amused +and interested by them, his design throughout will be to instruct +rather than to entertain.</p> +</div> + + +<div id="toc"> +<h2>Contents.</h2> + + +<ol style="list-style-type: upper-roman"> + <li><a href="#ch01">Journeying</a></li> + <li><a href="#ch02">Accidents</a></li> + <li><a href="#ch03">The Grass Country</a></li> + <li><a href="#ch04">The Village</a></li> + <li><a href="#ch05">Studying</a></li> + <li><a href="#ch06">The Log Canoe</a></li> + <li><a href="#ch07">A Dilemma</a></li> + <li><a href="#ch08">A Confession</a></li> + <li><a href="#ch09">Boating</a></li> + <li><a href="#ch10">An Expedition</a></li> + <li><a href="#ch11">Lost In The Woods</a></li> +</ol> +</div> + +<div id="engravings"> +<h2>Engravings.</h2> + + +<ul style="list-style-type: none"> + <li><a href="images/illus01.png">The Great Elm</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus02.png">The Hill</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus03.png">The Accident</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus04.png">Who Are You?</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus05.png">The Lumber Box</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus06.png">The Tire</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus07.png">The Risk</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus08.png">The Study</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus09.png">Marco's Desk</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus10.png">Boat Adrift</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus11.png">Cap Gone</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus12.png">The Millman's House</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus13.png">Paddling</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus14.png">Marco's Room</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus15.png">Toss</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus16.png">Bad Rowing</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus17.png">Good Rowing</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus18.png">The Portage</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus19.png">The Expedition</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus20.png">The Drag</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus21.png">The School House</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus22.png">The Ride</a></li> +</ul> +</div> + +<div id="series"> +<h2>Order Of The Volumes.</h2> + +<p>Marco Paul,</p> + +<ol style="list-style-type: upper-roman"><li>In New York.</li> +<li>On the Erie Canal.</li> +<li>In Maine.</li> +<li>In Vermont.</li> +<li>In Boston.</li> +<li>At the Springfield Armory.</li> +</ol> +</div> + +<div id="personae"> +<h2>Principal Persons</h2> + +<p> <span class="smallcaps">Mr. Baron</span>, a merchant of New York.</p> +<p> <span class="smallcaps">Marco</span>, his son, a boy about twelve years old.</p> +<p> <span class="smallcaps">John Forester</span>, Marco's cousin, about nineteen years old.</p> + +<p>Marco is traveling and studying under Forester's care.</p> +</div> + + + + +<h1 class="title">Marco Paul in Vermont.</h1> + + + +<div class="chapter" id="ch01"> +<h2>Chapter I.</h2> + +<h3>Journeying.</h3> + + + +<p>When Mr. Baron, Marco's father, put Marco under his cousin Forester's +care, it was his intention that he should spend a considerable part +of his time in traveling, and in out-of-door exercises, such as might +tend to re-establish his health and strengthen his constitution. +He did not, however, intend to have him give up the study of books +altogether. Accordingly, at one time, for nearly three months, Marco +remained at Forester's home, among the Green Mountains of Vermont, +where he studied several hours every day.</p> + +<p>It was in the early part of the autumn, that he and Forester went to +Vermont. They traveled in the stage-coach. Vermont lies upon one side +of the Connecticut river, and New Hampshire upon the other side. The +Green Mountains extend up and down, through the middle of Vermont, +from north to south, and beyond these mountains, on the western side +of the state, is lake Champlain, which extends from north to south +also, and forms the western boundary. Thus, the Green Mountains divide +the state into two great portions, one descending to the eastward, +toward Connecticut river, and the other to the westward, toward lake +Champlain. There are, therefore, two great ways of access to Vermont +from the states south of it; one up the Connecticut river on the +eastern side, and the other along the shores of lake George and lake +Champlain on the western side. There are roads across the Green +Mountains also, leading from the eastern portion of the state to the +western. All this can be seen by looking upon any map of Vermont.</p> + +<p>Marco and Forester went up by the Connecticut river. The road lay +along upon the bank of the river, and the scenery was very pleasant. +They traveled in the stage-coach; for there were very few railroads in +those days.</p> + +<p>The country was cultivated and fertile, and the prospect from the +windows of the coach was very fine. Sometimes wide meadows and +intervales extended along the river,--and at other places, high hills, +covered with trees, advanced close to the stream. They could see, too, +the farms, and villages, and green hills, across the river, on the New +Hampshire side.</p> + +<p>On the second day of their journey, they turned off from the river by +a road which led into the interior of the country; for the village +where Forester's father resided was back among the mountains. They had +new companions in the coach too, on this second day, as well as a new +route; for the company which had been in the coach the day before were +to separate in the morning, to go off in different directions. Several +stage-coaches drove up to the door of the tavern in the morning, just +after breakfast, with the names of the places where they were going +to, upon their sides. One was marked, "Haverhill and Lancaster;" +another, "Middlebury;" and a third, "Concord and Boston;" and there +was one odd-looking vehicle, a sort of carryall, open in front, and +drawn by two horses, which had no name upon it, and so Marco could not +tell where it was going. As these several coaches and carriages drove +up to the door, the hostlers and drivers put on the baggage and bound +it down with great straps, and then handed in the passengers;--and +thus the coaches, one after another, drove away. The whole movement +formed a very busy scene, and Marco, standing upon the piazza in front +of the tavern, enjoyed it very much.</p> + +<p>There was a very large elm-tree before the door, with steps to climb +up, and seats among the branches. Marco went up there and sat some +time, looking down upon the coaches as they wheeled round the tree, in +coming up to the door. Then he went down to the piazza again.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus01.png"alt="The Great Elm" />The Great Elm</p></div> + +<p>There was a neatly-dressed young woman, with a little flower-pot in +her hand, standing near him, waiting for her turn. There was a small +orange-tree in her flower-pot. It was about six inches high. The sight +of this orange-tree interested Marco very much, for it reminded him +of home. He had often seen orange-trees growing in the parlors and +green-houses in New York.</p> + +<p>"What a pretty little orange-tree!" said Marco. "Where did you get +it?"</p> + +<p>"How did you know it was an orange-tree?" said the girl.</p> + +<p>"O, I know an orange-tree well enough," replied Marco. "I have seen +them many a time."</p> + +<p>"Where?" asked, the girl.</p> + +<p>"In New York," said Marco. "Did your orange-tree come from New York?"</p> + +<p>"No," said the girl. "I planted an orange-seed, and it grew from +that. I've got a lemon-tree, too," she added, "but it is a great deal +larger. The lemon-tree grows faster than the orange. My lemon-tree is +so large that I couldn't bring it home very well, so I left it in the +mill."</p> + +<p>"In the mill?" said Marco. "Are you a miller?"</p> + +<p>The girl laughed. She was a very good-humored girl, and did not appear +to be displeased, though it certainly was not quite proper for Marco +to speak in that manner to a stranger. She did not, however, reply to +his question, but said, after a pause,</p> + +<p>"Do you know where the Montpelier stage is?"</p> + +<p>The proper English meaning of the word <i>stage</i> is a <i>portion of +the road</i>, traveled between one resting-place and another. But in +the United States it is used to mean the carriage,--being a sort of +contraction for <i>stage-coach</i>.</p> + +<p>"No," said Marco, "<i>we</i> are going in that stage."</p> + +<p>"I wish it would come along," said the girl, "for I'm tired of +watching my trunk."</p> + +<p>"Where is your trunk?" said Marco.</p> + +<p>So the girl pointed out her trunk. It was upon the platform of the +piazza, near those belonging to Forester and Marco. The girl showed +Marco her name, which was Mary Williams, written on a card upon the +end of it.</p> + +<p>"I'll watch your trunk," said Marco, "and you can go in and sit down +until the stage comes."</p> + +<p>Mary thanked him and went in. She was not, however, quite sure that +her baggage was safe, intrusted thus to the charge of a strange boy, +and so she took a seat near the window, where she could keep an eye +upon it. There was a blue chest near these trunks, which looked like a +sailor's chest, and Marco, being tired of standing, sat down upon this +chest. He had, however, scarcely taken his seat, when he saw a coach +with four horses, coming round a corner. It was driven by a small boy +not larger than Marco. It wheeled up toward the door, and came to a +stand. Some men then put on the sailor's chest and the trunks. Mary +Williams came out and got into the coach. She sat on the back seat. +Forester and Marco got in, and took their places on the middle seat. A +young man, dressed like a sailor, took the front seat, at one corner +of the coach. These were all the passengers that were to get in here. +When every thing was ready, they drove away.</p> + +<p>The stage stopped, however, in a few minutes at the door of a handsome +house in the town, and took a gentleman and lady in. These new +passengers took places on the back seat, with Mary Williams.</p> + +<p>This company rode in perfect silence for some time. Forester took +out a book and began to read. The gentleman on the back seat went to +sleep. Mary Williams and Marco looked out at the windows, watching the +changing scenery. The sailor rode in silence; moving his lips now and +then, as if he were talking to himself, but taking no notice of any +of the company. The coach stopped at the villages which they +passed through, to exchange the mail, and sometimes to take in new +passengers. In the course of these changes Marco got his place shifted +to the forward seat by the side of the sailor, and he gradually got +into conversation with him. Marco introduced the conversation, by +asking the sailor if he knew how far it was to Montpelier.</p> + +<p>"No," said the sailor, "I don't keep any reckoning, but I wish we were +there."</p> + +<p>"Why?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"O, I expect the old cart will capsize somewhere among these +mountains, and break our necks for us."</p> + +<p>Marco had observed, all the morning, that when the coach canted to +one side or the other, on account of the unevenness of the road, the +sailor always started and looked anxious, as if afraid it was going to +be upset. He wondered that a man who had been apparently accustomed +to the terrible dangers of the seas, should be alarmed at the gentle +oscillations of a stage-coach.</p> + +<p>"Are you afraid that we shall upset?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said the sailor, "over some of these precipices and mountains; +and then there'll be an end of us."</p> + +<p>The sailor said this in an easy and careless manner, as if, after all, +he was not much concerned about the danger. Still, Marco was surprised +that he should fear it at all. He was not aware how much the fears +which people feel, are occasioned by the mere novelty of the danger +which they incur. A stage-driver, who is calm and composed on his box, +in a dark night, and upon dangerous roads, will be alarmed by the +careening of a ship under a gentle breeze at sea,--while the sailor +who laughs at a gale of wind on the ocean, is afraid to ride in a +carriage on land.</p> + +<p>"An't you a sailor?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied his companion.</p> + +<p>"I shouldn't think that a man that had been used to the sea, would be +afraid of upsetting in a coach."</p> + +<p>"I'm not a <i>man</i>" said the sailor.</p> + +<p>"What are you?" said Marco.</p> + +<p>"I'm a boy. I'm only nineteen years old; though I'm going to be rated +seaman next voyage."</p> + +<p>"Have you just got back from a voyage?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said the sailor. "I've been round the Horn in a whaler, from +old Nantuck. And now I'm going home to see my mother."</p> + +<p>"How long since you've seen her?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"O, it's four years since I ran away."</p> + +<p>Here the sailor began to speak in rather a lower tone than he had done +before, so that Marco only could hear. This was not difficult, as the +other passengers were at this time engaged in conversation.</p> + +<p>"I ran away," continued the sailor, "and went to sea about four years +ago."</p> + +<p>"What made you run away?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"O, I didn't want to stay at home and be abused. My father used to +abuse me; but my mother took my part, and now I want to go and see +her."</p> + +<p>"And to see your father too," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"No," said the sailor. "I don't care for him. I hope he's gone off +somewhere. But I want to see my mother. I have got a shawl for her in +my chest."</p> + +<p>Marco was shocked to hear a young man speak in such a manner of his +father. Still there was something in the frankness and openness of the +sailor's manner, which pleased him very much. He liked to hear his odd +and sailor-like language too, and he accordingly entered into a +long conversation with him. The sailor gave him an account of his +adventures on the voyage; how he was drawn off from the ship one day, +several miles, by a whale which they had harpooned;--how they caught +a shark, and hauled him in on deck by means of a pulley at the end of +the yard-arm;--and how, on the voyage home, the ship was driven before +an awful gale of wind for five days, under bare poles, with terrific +seas roaring after them all the way. These descriptions took a strong +hold of Marco's imagination. His eye brightened up, and he became +restless on his seat, and thought that he would give the world for a +chance to stand up in the bow of a boat, and put a harpoon into the +neck of a whale.</p> + +<p>In the mean time, the day wore away, and the road led into a more and +more mountainous country. The hills were longer and steeper, and the +tracts of forest more frequent and solitary. The number of passengers +increased too, until the coach was pretty heavily loaded; and +sometimes all but the female passengers would get out and walk up the +hills. On these occasions Forester and Marco would generally walk +together, talking about the incidents of their journey, or the +occupations and amusements which they expected to engage in when they +arrived at Forester's home. About the middle of the afternoon the +coach stopped at the foot of a long winding ascent, steep and stony, +and several of the passengers got out. Forester, however, remained +in, as he was tired of walking, and so Marco and the sailor walked +together. The sailor, finding how much Marco was interested in his +stories, liked his company, and at length he asked Marco where he was +going. Marco told him.</p> + +<p>"Ah, if you were only going on a voyage with me," said the sailor, +"that would make a man of you. I wouldn't go and be shut up with that +old prig, poring over books forever."</p> + +<p>Marco was displeased to hear the sailor call his cousin an old +prig, and he felt some compunctions of conscience about forming and +continuing an intimacy with such a person. Still he was so much +interested in hearing him talk, that he continued to walk with him up +the hill. Finally, the sailor fairly proposed to him to run away and +go to sea with him.</p> + +<p>"O no," said Marco, "I wouldn't do such a thing for the world. +Besides," said he, "they would be after us, and carry me back."</p> + +<p>"No," said the sailor; "we would cut across the country, traveling in +the night and laying to by day, till we got to another stage route, +and then make a straight wake, till we got to New Bedford, and there +we could get a good voyage. Come," said he, "let's go to-night. I'll +turn right about. I don't care a great deal about seeing my mother."</p> + +<p>Though Marco was a very bold and adventurous sort of a boy, still he +was not quite prepared for such a proposal as this. In the course of +the conversation the sailor used improper and violent language too, +which Marco did not like to hear; and, in fact, Marco began to be a +little afraid of his new acquaintance. He determined, as soon as he +got back to the coach to keep near Forester all the time, so as not to +be left alone again with the sailor. He tried to hasten on, so as to +overtake the coach, but the sailor told him not to walk so fast; and, +being unwilling to offend him, he was obliged to go slowly, and keep +with him; and thus protracted the conversation.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus02.png" alt="The Hill." />The Hill.</p></div> + +<p>About half-way up the hill there was a small tavern, and the sailor +wanted Marco to go in with him and get a drink. Marco thought that he +meant a drink of water, but it was really a drink of spirits which +was intended. Marco, however, refused to go, saying that he was not +thirsty; and so they went on up the hill. At the top of the hill, the +stage-coach stopped for the pedestrians to come up. There was also +another passenger there to get in,--a woman, who came out from a +farm-house near by. The driver asked the sailor if he was not willing +to ride outside, in order to make room for the new passenger. But he +would not. He was afraid. He said he would not ride five miles outside +for a month's wages. Marco laughed at the sailor's fears, and he +immediately asked Forester to let <i>him</i> ride outside. Forester +hesitated, but on looking up, and seeing that there was a secure seat, +with a good place to hold on, he consented. So Marco clambered up +and took his seat with the driver, while the other passengers +re-established themselves in the stage.</p> +</div> + + +<div class="chapter" id="ch02"> +<h2>Chapter II.</h2> + +<h3>Accidents.</h3> + + + +<p>Marco liked his seat upon the outside of the stage-coach very much. He +could see the whole country about him to great advantage. He was very +much interested in the scenery, not having been accustomed to travel +among forests and mountains. The driver was a rough young man,--for +the boy who drove the coach up to the door was not the regular driver. +He was not disposed to talk much, and his tone and manner, in what he +did say, did not indicate a very gentle disposition. Marco, however, +at last got a little acquainted with him, and finally proposed to the +driver to let <i>him</i> drive.</p> + +<p>"Nonsense," said he, in reply, "you are not big enough to drive such a +team as this."</p> + +<p>"Why, there was a boy, no bigger than I, that drove the horses up to +the door when we started, this morning," replied Marco.</p> + +<p>"O yes,--Jerry,"--said the driver,--"but he'll break his neck one of +these days."</p> + +<p>"I didn't see but that he drove very well," said Marco.</p> + +<p>The driver was silent.</p> + +<p>"Come," persisted Marco, "let me drive a little way, and I'll do as +much for you some day."</p> + +<p>"You little fool," said the driver, "you never can do any thing for +me. You are not big enough to be of any use at all."</p> + +<p>Marco thought of the fable of the mouse and the lion, but since his +new companion was in such ill-humor, he thought he would say no more +to him. A resentful reply to the epithet "little fool," did in fact +rise to his lips, but he suppressed it and said nothing.</p> + +<p>It was fortunate for Marco that he did so. For whenever any person has +said any thing harsh, unjust, or cruel, the most effectual reply is, +generally, silence. It leaves the offender to think of what he has +said, and conscience will often reprove him in silence, far more +effectually than words could do it. This was the case in this +instance. As they rode along in silence, the echo of the words "little +fool," and the tone in which he had uttered them, lingered upon the +driver's ear. He could not help thinking that he had been rather harsh +with his little passenger. Presently he said,</p> + +<p>"I don't care though,--we are coming to a level piece of ground on +ahead here a little way, and then I'll see what you can make of +teaming."</p> + +<p>Marco was quite pleased at this unexpected result, and after ten or +fifteen minutes, they came to the level piece of road, and the driver +put the reins into Marco's hand. Marco had sometimes driven two +horses, when riding out with his father in a barouche, up the +Bloomingdale road in New York. He was therefore not entirely +unaccustomed to the handling of reins; and he took them from the +driver's hand and imitated the manner of holding them which he had +observed the driver himself to adopt, quite dexterously.</p> + +<p>The horses, in fact, needed very little guidance. They went along the +road very quietly of their own accord. Marco kept wishing that a +wagon or something else would come along, that he might have the +satisfaction of turning out. But nothing of the kind appeared, and he +was obliged to content himself with turning a little to one side, +to avoid a stone. At the end of the level piece of road there was a +tavern, where they were going to stop to change the horses, and Marco +asked the driver to let him turn the horses up to the door. The driver +consented, keeping a close watch all the time, ready to seize the +reins again at a moment's notice, if there had been any appearance of +difficulty. But there was none. Marco guided the horses right, and +drawing in the reins with all his strength, he brought them up +properly at the door; or rather, he seemed to do it,--for, in +reality, the horses probably acted as much of their own accord, being +accustomed to stop at this place, as from any control which Marco +exercised over them through the reins.</p> + +<p>There was, however, an advantage in this evolution, for Marco became +accustomed to the feeling of the reins in his hand, and acquired a +sort of confidence in his power over the horses,--greater to be sure +than there was any just ground for, but which was turned to a very +important account, a few hours afterward, as will be seen in the +sequel.</p> + +<p>The sailor went several times into the taverns on the way, in the +course of the afternoon, to drink, until, at length, he became +partially intoxicated. He felt, however, so much restrained in the +presence of the passengers within the coach, that he did not become +talkative and noisy, as is frequently the case in such circumstances; +but was rather stupid and sleepy. In fact, no one observed that any +change was taking place in his condition, until, at last, as he was +coming out from the door of a tavern, where he had been in to get +another drink, the driver said,</p> + +<p>"Come, Jack, you must get up with me now, there is another passenger +to get in here."</p> + +<p>Marco, who was still in his seat, holding the reins of the horses, +looked down, expecting that the sailor would make objections to this +proposal,--but he found, on the contrary, that Jack, as they called +him, acquiesced without making any difficulty, and allowed the driver +to help him up. The new passenger got inside. Forester felt somewhat +uneasy at having Marco ride any longer on the top, especially now that +the sailor was going up too. But the coach was full. He himself was +wedged into his seat, so that he could not get out easily. He knew, +too, that two or three of the passengers were going to get out at the +next stage, and so he concluded to let Marco remain outside until that +time, and then to take him in again.</p> + +<p>Marco's admiration for the sailor was very much diminished when he +saw how helpless he had rendered himself by his excesses, and how +unceremoniously the driver pulled and hauled him about, in getting him +into his seat.</p> + +<p>"There! hold on there," said the driver to him, in a stern +voice,--"hold on well, or you'll be down head foremost under the +horses' heels, at the first pitch we come to."</p> + +<p>The poor sailor said nothing, but grasped an iron bar which passed +from the top of the coach down by the side of the seat, and held on as +well as he could.</p> + +<p>They rode on in this manner for some miles, the head of the sailor +swinging back and forth, helplessly, as if he was nearly asleep. +Whenever Marco or the driver spoke to him, he either answered in a +thick and sleepy tone of voice, or he did not reply at all. Marco +watched him for a time, being continually afraid that he would fall +off. He could do nothing, however, to help him, for he himself was +sitting at one end of the seat while the sailor was upon the other, +the driver being between them. In the mean time the sun gradually went +down and the twilight came on, and as the shadows extended themselves +slowly over the landscape, Marco began to find riding outside less +pleasant than it had been before, and he thought that, on the whole, +he should be very glad when the time arrived for him to get into the +coach again, with his cousin.</p> + +<p>At length they came to a bridge, covered with planks, which led across +a small stream. It was in rather a solitary place, with woods on each +side of the road. Beyond the bridge there was a level piece of road +for a short distance, and then a gentle ascent, with a farmhouse near +the top of it, on the right hand side of the road. At the end of the +bridge, between the planks and the ground beyond them, there was a +jolt, caused by the rotting away of a log which had been imbedded in +the ground at the beginning of the planking. As it was rather dark, +on account of the shade of the trees, the driver did not observe this +jolt, and he was just beginning to put his horses to the trot, as they +were leaving the bridge, when the forward wheels struck down heavily +into the hollow, giving the front of the coach a sudden pitch forward +and downward. Marco grasped the iron bar at his end of the seat, and +saved himself; and the driver, who was habitually on his guard, had +his feet so braced against the fender before him, that he would not +have fallen. But the poor sailor, entirely unprepared for the shock, +and perhaps unable to resist it if he had been prepared, pitched +forward, lost his hold, went over the fender, and was tumbling down, +as the driver had predicted, head foremost, under the horses' heels. +The driver seized hold of him with one hand, but finding this +insufficient dropped his reins and tried to grasp him with both. In +doing it, however, he lost his own balance and went over too. He, of +course, let go of the sailor, when he found that he was going himself. +The sailor fell heavily and helplessly between the pole and the side +of one of the horses, to the ground. The driver followed. He seized +the pole with one hand, but was too late to save himself entirely, +and thinking there was danger of being dragged, and finding that the +horses were springing forward in a fright, he let himself drop through +to the ground also. The coach passed over them in a moment, as the +horses cantered on.</p> + +<p>All this passed in an instant, and Marco, before he had a moment's +time for reflection, found himself alone on his seat,--the driver run +over and perhaps killed, and the horses cantering away, with the reins +dangling about their heels. The first impulse, in such a case, would +be to scream aloud, in terror,--which would have only made the horses +run the faster. But Marco was not very easily frightened; at least, +he was not easily made crazy by fright. So he did not scream; and not +knowing what else to do, he sat still and did nothing.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus03.png" alt="The Accident." />The Accident.</p></div> + +<p>In the mean time, the passengers inside knew nothing of all this. Many +of them had been asleep when they came over the bridge. The jolt had +aroused them a little, but there was nothing to indicate to them +the accident which had occurred forward, so they quietly adjusted +themselves in their seats, and endeavored to compose themselves to +sleep again.</p> + +<p>The horses were well trained and gentle. They cantered on as far as +the level ground extended, and then they slackened their pace as +they began to rise the ascent. The idea then occurred to Marco, that +perhaps he might clamber down over the fender to the pole, and then +walk along upon that a little way till he could gather up the reins. +Then he thought that if he could get back again with them to the +driver's seat, perhaps he could stop the horses. Marco was an expert +climber. He had learned this art in his gymnasium at New York; so that +he had no fears in respect to his being able to get down and back +again. The only danger was, lest he might frighten the horses again +and set them to running anew.</p> + +<p>After a moment's reflection, he concluded that at any rate he would +try it; so he cautiously stepped over the fender and clambered down. +When his feet reached the pole, he rested them a moment upon it, and +clung with his hands to the fender and other parts of the front of the +coach. He found his position here more unstable than he had expected; +for the coach being upon springs, the forward part rose and fell with +many jerks and surges, as the horses traveled swiftly along, while the +pole was held in its position straight and firm. Thus the different +parts of his body were connected with different systems of motion, +which made his position very uncomfortable.</p> + +<p>He found, however, after a moment's pause, that he could stand, and +probably walk upon the pole; so he advanced cautiously, putting his +hands on the backs of the horses, and walking along on the pole +between them. The horses were somewhat disturbed by the strange +sensations which they experienced, and began to canter again; but +Marco, who felt more and more confidence every moment, pushed boldly +on, gathered up the reins, and got all the ends together. Then taking +the ends of the reins in one hand, he crept back, supporting himself +by taking hold of the harness of one of the horses with the other +hand. By this means he regained the coach, and then, though with some +difficulty, he clambered up to his seat again.</p> + +<p>He then endeavored to stop the horses by gathering the reins together, +and pulling upon them with all his strength; but it was in vain. The +horses had by this time reached a part of the road where it was more +level, and they began to press forward at a more rapid pace. Marco +thought of calling to Forester to get out of the window and climb +along the side of the coach to the box, in order to help him; but just +at that moment he saw that they were coming up opposite to the farm +house, which had been in sight, at a distance, when they were crossing +the bridge. So he thought that though he could not stop the horses, he +might perhaps have strength enough to turn them off from the road into +the farmer's yard; and that then they could be more easily stopped. In +this he succeeded. By pulling the off rein of the leaders with all his +strength, he was able to turn them out of the road. The pole horses +followed as a matter of course,--the coach came up with a graceful +sweep to the farmer's door, and then the horses were easily stopped. +The farmer came at once to the door, to see what strange company had +come to visit him in the stage,--his wife following; while several +children crowded to the windows.</p> + +<p>"What's here?" said a voice from the window of the coach,--"a +post-office?" They thought the stage had been driven up to the door of +some post-office.</p> + +<p>Marco did not answer; in fact he was bewildered and confounded at the +strangeness of his situation. He looked back over the top of the coach +down the road to see what had become of the driver. To his great joy, +he saw him running up behind the coach,--his hat crushed out of shape, +and his clothes dusty. The passengers looked out at the windows of the +stage, exclaiming,</p> + +<p>"Why, driver! what's the matter?"</p> + +<p>The driver made no reply. He began to brush his clothes,--and, taking +off his hat, he attempted to round it out into shape again.</p> + +<p>"What <i>is</i> the matter, driver?" said the passengers.</p> + +<p>"Nothing," replied he, "only that drunkard of a sailor tumbled off the +stage."</p> + +<p>"Where?" "When?" exclaimed half a dozen voices. "Is he killed?"</p> + +<p>"Killed? no," replied the driver; "I don't believe he is even +sobered."</p> + +<p>Forester and another gentleman then urgently asked where he was, and +the driver told them that he was "back there a piece," as he expressed +it.</p> + +<p>"What! lying in the road?" said Forester; "open the door, and let us +go and see to him."</p> + +<p>"No," said the driver; "he has got off to the side of the road, safe. +I don't believe he's hurt any. Let him take care of himself, and we'll +drive on."</p> + +<p>But Forester remonstrated strongly against leaving the poor sailor in +such a condition, and in such a place; and finally it was agreed that +the farmer should go down the road and see to him, so as to allow the +stage-coach with the passengers to go on.</p> + +<p>Forester was not willing, however, to have Marco ride outside any +longer; and so they contrived to make room for him within. As Marco +descended from his high seat, the driver said to him, as he passed +him, in a low voice,</p> + +<p>"How did you get the reins? I thought they all came down with me, +under the horses' heels."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "they did, and I climbed down upon the pole and got +them."</p> + +<p>"Well," said the driver, "you're a smart boy. But don't tell them +inside that I tumbled off. Tell them I gave you the reins, and jumped +down to see the sailor."</p> + +<p>After receiving this charge, Marco would have been under a strong +temptation to tell a falsehood, if the company in the coach had asked +him any questions about it. But they did not. They were so much +occupied in expressing their astonishment that the sailor did not +break his neck, that they asked very few questions, and after riding a +short time, they relapsed into silence again. The fact that both +the driver and the sailor escaped being seriously hurt, was not so +wonderful as it might seem. Horses have generally an instinctive +caution about not stepping upon any thing under their feet. If a +little child were lying asleep in the middle of a road, and a horse +were to come galloping along without any rider, the mother, who +should see the sight from the window of the house, would doubtless be +exceedingly terrified; but in all probability the horse would pass the +child without doing it any injury. He would leap over it, or go around +it, as he would if it were a stone. This is one reason why, in so many +cases, persons are run over without being hurt. The driver and the +sailor, however, fell rather behind the horses' heels, and escaped +them in that way, and they came down so exactly into the middle of the +road, that they were out of the way of the track of the wheels, and +thus they escaped serious injury.</p> + +<p>The misfortunes of the evening, however, did not end here. The road +was rather rough, and there were many ruts and joltings; and one or +two of the passengers seemed to feel some fear lest the stage should +upset. One, who sat near the door, put his arm out at the window over +the door, so as to get his hand upon the handle of the catch, in +order, as he said, to be ready to open the door and spring out, at a +moment's warning. The gentleman on the back seat advised him not to do +it.</p> + +<p>"If you have your arm out," said he, "the coach may fall over upon +it, and break it. That's the way people get hurt by the upsetting of +coaches, by thrusting out their legs and arms in all directions, when +they find they are going over, and thus get them broken. You ought to +fold your arms and draw in your feet, and when you find that we are +going over, go in an easy attitude, with all the muscles relaxed, as +if your body was a bag of corn."</p> + +<p>The passenger laughed and took his arm in; and all the other +passengers, seeing that the advice of the gentleman was reasonable, +concluded to follow it if they should have occasion. And they did have +occasion sooner than they had expected. For, just after dark, as they +were going down a long hill at a pretty rapid rate, with a wagon a +short distance before them, one of the horses of the wagon stumbled +and fell, which brought the wagon to a sudden stand just before the +coach. The driver perceived in an instant that there was not time to +stop his horses, and that the only chance was to turn out of the road +and drive by. The ground at the road-side was so much inclined, that +he was almost afraid to venture this expedient, but he had no time for +thought. He wheeled his horses out,--just escaped the hind wheel of +the wagon--ran along by the road-side a short distance, with the +wheels on one side, down very near the gutter,--and then, just as he +was coming back safely into the road again, the forward wheel nearest +the middle of the road, struck a small stone, and threw the coach +over. The top rested upon the bank, and the horses were suddenly +stopped. Sometimes, on such occasions, the <i>transom</i> bolt, as it +is called, that is, the bolt by which the forward wheels are fastened +to the carriage, comes out, and the horses run off with the wheels. It +did not come out in this case, however. The man who had put his arm +out of the window, immediately called out, in great alarm, "Hold the +horses! Hold the horses! Don't let the horses run and drag us." But +this vociferation was needless. A coach full of passengers and baggage +is a full load for four horses, when it is mounted on wheels. It would +require an exertion far beyond their strength to drag it when on its +side. The horses remained quiet, therefore, while the wagoner and the +driver, who was not hurt, opened the door in the upper side of the +coach. The passengers then climbed out, one by one, without injury. +Mary Williams came out last, with her orange-tree safe in her hand.</p> +</div> + + +<div class="chapter" id="ch03"> +<h2>Chapter III.</h2> + +<h3>The Grass Country.</h3> + + + +<p>The scene of confusion, produced by the double accident described in +the last chapter, was great, but not long continued. The wagoner got +his fallen horse up, and then the passengers, with the driver and +wagoner, all taking hold together, soon righted the stage. None of the +passengers were hurt, but the coach itself was so much injured that +the driver thought it was not safe to load it heavily again. The +female passengers got in, but the men walked along by the side of it, +intending to travel in that way about four miles to the next +tavern. Forester, however, was not inclined to take so long a walk. +Fortunately, at a small distance before them, was a farmhouse which +looked as if it belonged to a large and thrifty farmer. The great +barns and sheds, the neat yards, the well-built walls and fences, +and the large stock of cattle in the barn-yard, indicated wealth and +prosperity. Forester concluded to apply here for a lodging for the +night, for himself and Marco. The farmer was very willing to receive +them. So the driver took off their trunks, and then the stage-coach, +with the rest of the passengers, went on.</p> + +<p>"How long shall we have to stay here?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Only till to-morrow," said Forester. "Another stage will come along +to-morrow. We can stop just as well as not, as we are in no haste to +get home. Besides, I should like to have you see something of the +operations of a great grass farm."</p> + +<p>Marco and Forester went into the house, and were ushered into a large +room, which seemed to be both sitting-room and kitchen. A large round +table was set in the middle of the floor, for supper. A monstrous dog +was lying under it, with his chin resting upon his paws. There was a +great settle in one corner, by the side of the fire. There were chairs +also, with straight backs and seats of basket-work, a spinning-wheel, +an open cupboard, and various other similar objects, which, being +so different from the articles of furniture which Marco had been +accustomed to see in the New York parlors, attracted his attention +very strongly. Marco went and took his seat upon the settle, and the +dog rose and came to him. The dog gazed into his face with an earnest +look of inquiry, which plainly said, "Who are you?" while Marco patted +him on the head, thereby answering as plainly, "A friend." The dog, +perfectly understanding the answer, seemed satisfied, and, turning +away, went back to his place again under the table.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus04.png" alt="Who Are You?" />Who Are You?</p></div> + +<p>One of the farmer's young men carried the trunks into a little +bed-room, which opened from the great room; and then the farmer sat +down and began to enter into conversation with Forester and Marco +about their accident. Forester told him also about the sailor, who +had tumbled off the coach a mile or two back, and been left behind. +Forester said that he should like to know whether he was hurt much. +Then the farmer said that he would let him take a horse and wagon the +next morning and ride back and inquire. This plan was therefore agreed +upon. Marco and Forester ate a good supper with the farmer's family, +and then spent the evening in talking, and telling stories about +horses, and sagacious dogs, and about catching wild animals in the +woods with traps. About nine o'clock the family all assembled for +evening prayers. After prayers Marco and Forester went to bed in their +little bed-room, where they slept soundly till morning.</p> + +<p>In the morning they were both awakened by the crowing of the cocks, at +an early hour. They also heard movements in the house and in the +yard before sunrise; so they arose and dressed themselves, and after +attending to their morning devotions together in their room, a duty +which Forester never omitted, they went out. Marco was very much +interested in the morning occupations of the farm. There was the +milking of the cows, and the feeding of the various animals, and the +pitching off a load of corn, which had been got in the evening before +and allowed to stand on the cart, on the barn-floor, over night. The +cows were then to be driven to pasture, and the boy who went with +them, took a bridle to catch a horse for Forester and Marco to have +for their ride. Forester and Marco went with him. It was only a short +walk to the pasture bars, but they had to ramble about a little while, +before they found the horses. At last they found them feeding together +at the edge of a grove of trees. There were two or three horses, and +several long-tailed colts. The boy caught one of the horses, which he +called Nero. Nero was a white horse. Marco mounted him and rode down, +with the other horses and the colts following him. They put the horse +in the stable until after breakfast, and then harnessed him into the +wagon. When all was ready, the farmer told them to bring the sailor +along with them to his house, if they found that he was hurt so that +he could not travel.</p> + +<p>When they were seated in the wagon, and had fairly commenced +their ride, Marco asked Forester, what he meant last evening by a +<i>grass</i> farm. "You told me," said he, "that you wanted me to see +a great grass farm."</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Forester. "The farms in this part of the United States +may be called grass farms. This is the grass country."</p> + +<p>"Isn't it all grass country?" asked Marco. "Grass grows everywhere."</p> + +<p>"Grass is not <i>cultivated</i> everywhere so much as it is among +the mountains, in the northern states," replied Forester. "The great +articles of cultivation in the United States are grass, grain, and +cotton. The grass is cultivated in the northern states, the grain in +the middle states, and the cotton in the southern states. The grass +is food for beasts, the grain is food for man, and the cotton is +for clothing. These different kinds of cultivation are not indeed +exclusive in the different districts. Some grass is raised in the +middle and southern states, and some grain is raised in the northern +states; but, in general, the great agricultural production of the +northern states is grass, and these farms among the mountains in +Vermont are grass farms.</p> + +<p>"There is one striking difference," continued Forester, "between the +grass farms of the north, and the grain farms of the middle states, or +the cotton plantations of the south. The grass cultivation brings with +it a vast variety of occupations and processes on the farm, making +the farm a little world by itself; whereas the grain and the cotton +cultivation are far more simple, and require much less judgment and +skill. This is rather remarkable; for one would think that raising +food for beasts would require less skill than raising food or clothes +for man."</p> + +<p>"I should have thought so," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"The reason for the difference is," replied Forester, "that in raising +food for animals, it is necessary to keep the animals to eat it, on +the spot, for it will not bear transportation."</p> + +<p>"Why not?" said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Because it is so cheap," replied Forester.</p> + +<p>"I don't think that is any reason," replied Marco.</p> + +<p>"A load of grass"--said Forester.</p> + +<p>"A load of grass!" repeated Marco, laughing.</p> + +<p>"Yes, dried grass, that is, hay. Hay, you know, is grass dried to +preserve it."</p> + +<p>"Very well," said Marco; "go on."</p> + +<p>"A load of grass, then, is so cheap, that the cost of hauling it fifty +miles would be more than it is worth. But cotton is worth a great deal +more, in proportion to its bulk. It can therefore be transported to +distant places to be sold and manufactured. Thus the enormous quantity +of cotton which grows every summer in the southern states, is packed +in bags, very tight, and is hauled to the rivers and creeks, and there +it is put into steamboats and sent to the great seaports, and at the +seaports it is put into ships, which carry it to England or to the +northern states, to be manufactured; and it is so valuable, that it +will bring a price sufficient to pay all the persons that have been +employed in raising it, or in transporting it. But the grass that +grows in the northern countries can not be transported. The mills for +manufacturing cotton may be in one country, and the cotton be raised +in another, and then, after the cotton is gathered, it may be packed +and sent thousands of miles to be manufactured. But the sheep and oxen +which are to eat the hay, can not be kept in one country, while the +grass which they feed upon grows in another. The animals must live, in +general, on the very farm which the grass grows upon. Thus, while the +cotton cultivator has nothing to do but to raise his cotton and send +it to market, the grass cultivator must not only raise his grass, but +he must provide for and take care of all the animals which are to +eat it. This makes the agriculture of the northern states a far more +complicated business, because the care of animals runs into great +detail, and requires great skill, and sound judgment, and the exercise +of constant discretion.</p> + +<p>"You observe," continued Forester, "that it is by the intervention of +animals that the farmer gets the product of his land into such a shape +that it will bear transportation. For instance, he feeds out his hay +to his sheep, attending them with care and skill all the winter. In +the spring he shears off their fleeces; and now he has got something +which he <i>can</i> send to market. He has turned his grass into wool, +and thus got its value into a much more compact form. The wool will +bear transportation. Perhaps he gave a whole load of hay to his sheep, +to produce a single bag of wool. So the bag of wool is worth as much +as the load of hay, and is very much more easily carried to market. He +can put it upon his lumber-box, and drive off fifty miles with it, to +market, without any difficulty."</p> + +<p>"His lumber-box?" asked Marco. "What is that?"</p> + +<p>"Didn't you ever see a lumber-box?" asked Forester. "It is a square +box, on runners, like those of a sleigh. The farmers have them to haul +their produce to market."</p> + +<p>"Why do they call it a lumber-box?" asked Marco.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus05.png" alt="The Lumber-Box." />The Lumber-Box.</p></div> + +<p>"Why, when the country was first settled, they used to carry lumber to +market principally; that is, bundles of shingles and clapboards, which +they made from timber cut in the woods. It requires some time for a +new farm, made in the forests, to get into a condition to produce +much grass for cattle. I suppose that it was in this way that these +vehicles got the name of lumber-boxes. You will see a great many +of them, in the winter season, coming down from every part of the +country, toward the large towns on the rivers, filled with produce."</p> + +<p>"What else do the farmers turn their grass into, besides wool?" asked +Marco.</p> + +<p>"Into beef," said Forester. "They raise cows and oxen. They let them +eat the grass as it grows, all summer, and in the winter they feed +them with what they have cut and dried and stored in the barn for +them. The farmers are all ambitious to cut as much hay as they can, +and to keep a large stock of cattle. Thus they turn the grass into +beef, and the beef can be easily transported. In fact, it almost +transports itself."</p> + +<p>"How do you mean?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Why, the oxen and cows, when they are fat and ready for market, walk +off in droves to Boston, to be killed. They don't kill them where they +are raised, for then they would have to haul away the beef in wagons +or sleighs, but make the animals walk to market themselves, and kill +them there. But the farmers don't generally take their own cattle to +market. Men go about the country, and call upon the farmers, and buy +their cattle, and thus collect great droves. These men are called +drovers. In traveling in this part of the country, late in the fall, +you would see great droves of cattle and sheep, passing along the +road, all going to Boston, or rather Brighton."</p> + +<p>"Where is Brighton?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"It is a town very near Boston, where the great cattle market is held. +The Boston dealers come out to Brighton, and buy the cattle, and have +them slaughtered, and the beef packed and sent away all over the +world. Thus the farmers turn the grass into beef, and in that shape it +can be transported and sold."</p> + +<p>"And what else?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Why, they raise a great many horses in Vermont," replied Forester. +"These horses live upon grass, eating it as it grows in the pastures +and on the mountains, in the summer, and being fed upon hay in the +barn in the winter. These horses, when they are four or five years +old, are sent away to market to be sold. They can be transported very +easily. A man will ride one, and lead four or five by his side. They +will be worth perhaps seventy-five dollars apiece; so that one man +will easily take along with him, three or four hundred dollars' worth +of the produce of the farm, in the shape of horses; whereas the hay +which had been consumed on the farm to make these horses, it would +have taken forty yoke of oxen to move."</p> + +<p>"Forty yoke!" repeated Marco.</p> + +<p>"I don't mean to be exact," said Forester. "I mean it would take a +great many. So that, by feeding his hay out to horses, the farmer +gets his produce into a better state to be transported to market. The +Vermont horses go all over the land. Thus you see that the farmers +in the grass country have to turn the vegetable products which they +raise, into animal products, before they can get them to market; and +as the rearing of animals is a work which requires a great deal of +attention, care, patience, and skill, the cultivators must be men of a +higher class than those which are employed in raising cotton, or even +than those who raise grain. The animals must be watched and guarded +while they are young. There are a great many different diseases, and +accidents, and injuries which they are exposed to, and it requires +constant watchfulness, and considerable, intelligence, to guard +against them. This makes a great difference in the character which is +required in the laborers, in the different cases. A cotton plantation +in the south can be cultivated by slaves. A grain farm in the middle +states can be worked by hired laborers; but a northern grass farm, +with all its oxen, cows, sheep, poultry, and horses, can only be +successfully managed by the work of the owner."</p> + +<p>"Is that the reason why they have slaves at the south?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"It is a reason why slaves can be profitable at the south. In +cultivating cotton or sugar, a vast proportion of all the work done +in the year is the same. Almost the whole consists of a few simple +processes, such as planting, hoeing, picking cotton, &c., and this is +to be performed on smooth, even land, where set tasks can be easily +assigned. But the work on a grass farm is endlessly varied. It would +not be possible to divide it into set tasks. And then it is of such a +nature, that it could not possibly be performed successfully by the +mere labor of the hands. The <i>mind</i> must be employed upon it. For +instance, even in getting in hay, in the summer season, the farmer has +to exercise all his judgment and discretion to avoid getting it wet by +the summer showers, and yet to secure it in good time, and with proper +dispatch. A cotton planter may hire an overseer to see to the getting +in of his cotton, and he can easily tell by the result, whether he +has been faithful or not. But hay can not be got in well, without the +activity, and energy, and good judgment, which can come only from the +presence and immediate supervision of an owner. This produces vast +differences in the nature of the business, and in the whole state of +society in the two regions."</p> + +<p>"What are the differences?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Why, in the first place," said Forester, "the fact that cotton and +sugar can be cultivated by hired overseers, with slaves to do the +work, enables rich men to carry on great plantations without laboring +themselves. But a great grass farm could not be managed so. A man may +have one thousand acres for his plantation at the south, and with a +good overseer and good hands, it will all go on very well, so far as +his profit is concerned. They will produce a great amount of cotton, +which may be sent to market and sold, and the planter realize the +money, so as to make a large profit after paying all his expenses. But +if a man were to buy a thousand acres of grass land, and employ an +overseer and slaves to cultivate it, every thing would go to ruin. The +hay would get wet and spoiled,--the carts, wagons, and complicated +tools necessary, would get broken to pieces,--the lambs would be +neglected and die, and the property would soon go to destruction. +Even when a rich man attempts to carry on a moderate farm by hired +laborers, taking the best that he can find, he seldom succeeds."</p> + +<p>"Does he <i>ever</i> succeed?" said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Forester, "sometimes. There is Mr. Warner, who lives +near my father's; he was brought up on a farm, and is practically +acquainted with all the work. He has been very successful, and has +a very large farm. He works now very little himself, but he watches +every thing with the greatest care, and he succeeds very well. He has +a great stock. He cuts fifty tons of hay."</p> + +<p>"I should like to see his farm," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"We'll go some day," replied Forester.</p> + +<p>"So you see," continued Forester, "that the work of a cotton or sugar +plantation, is comparatively simple and plain, requiring little +judgment or mental exertion, and a great deal of plain straightforward +bodily labor; while on a northern stock farm the labors are endlessly +varied. Every month, every week, and almost every day brings some +change. New emergencies are constantly arising, which call for +deliberation and judgment. It is necessary to have a great variety of +animals, in order to consume all the different productions of the farm +to advantage. I can explain it all to you better, when you come to see +Mr. Warner's farm."</p> + +<p>As Nero traveled very fast, they began by this time to draw near to +the place where they had left the sailor. When they came up to the +house, they fastened the horse to a post, and went in. The man who +lived there had gone away, but the woman said that the sailor was +somewhat hurt, and asked them to come in and see him. They found him +in the kitchen, with his foot up in a chair. He seemed to be in some +pain. There was a great bruise on his ankle, made by the cork of one +of the horses' shoes. These <i>corks</i>, as they are called, are +projections, made of steel, at the heel of a horse-shoe, to give the +horse a firm footing. They are made quite sharp in the winter season, +when there is ice and snow upon the ground, but they are generally +more blunt in the summer. This prevented the ankle's being cut as +badly as it would have been, if the corks had been sharper. Forester +looked at the ankle, and found that nothing had been done for it. It +was inflamed and painful. He got the woman to give him a basin of warm +water, and then he bathed it very carefully, which relieved the sense +of tension and pain. Then he made an ointment of equal parts of tallow +and oil, which he put upon the end of a bandage, and thus bound it +up. This treatment relieved the poor sailor very much. Then Forester +proposed to the sailor to get into the wagon and go with him to the +next house, and the sailor consented. Forester was then going to pay +the woman for his night's lodging, but the sailor said at once,--"No, +squire, not at all. I'm much obliged to you for doing up my foot, but +you need not pay any thing for me. I've got plenty of shot in the +locker."</p> + +<p>So saying, he put his hand in his pocket and drew out a handful of +gold and silver pieces. But the woman, who began now to feel a little +ashamed that she had not done something for the wounded foot, said he +was welcome to his lodging; and so they all got into the wagon, and +Nero carried them rapidly back to his master's.</p> +</div> + + +<div class="chapter" id="ch04"> +<h2>Chapter IV.</h2> + +<h3>The Village.</h3> + + + +<p>In due time, and without any farther adventure, Forester and Marco +arrived at the end of their journey. The village where Forester's +father lived was situated in a gorge of the mountains, or rather at +the entrance of a valley, which terminated at last in a gorge. There +was a river flowing through this valley, and the village was upon its +banks. At the upper end of the village a branch stream came in from +the north, and there was a dam upon it, with some mills. The river +itself was a rapid stream, flowing over a sandy and gravelly bottom, +and there were broad intervals on each side of it, extending for some +distance toward the higher land. Beyond these intervals, the land rose +gradually, and in an undulating manner, to the foot of the mountains, +which extended along the sides of the valley, and from the summits of +which, one might look down upon the whole scene, with the village in +the center of it as upon a map.</p> + +<p>Marco was very much pleased with the situation, and with the +appearance of the village. The street was broad, and it was shaded +with rows of large maples and elms on each side. The houses were +generally white, with green blinds. Most of them had pleasant yards +before them and at their sides; these yards were planted with trees +and shrubbery. There were also gardens behind. The mountains which +surrounded the scene, gave a very secluded and sheltered appearance to +the valley.</p> + +<p>The house in which Forester lived was the largest in the village. It +was a square house of two stories. It stood back a little from the +road, in the middle of a large yard, ornamented with rows of trees +along the sides, and groups of shrubbery in the corners and near the +house. There were gravel walks leading in different directions through +this yard, and on one side of the house was a carriage-way, which led +from a great gate in front, to a door in one end of the house, and +thence to the stable in the rear. On the other side of the house, near +the street, was the office,--for Forester's father was a lawyer. The +office was a small square building, with the lawyer's name over the +door. There was a back door to the office, and a footpath, winding +among trees and shrubbery, which led from the office to the house.</p> + +<p>The morning after they arrived, Forester took Marco out to see the +village. He intended not only to show him the various objects of +interest which were to be seen, but also to explain to him why it was +that such villages would spring up in a farming country, and what were +the occupations of the inhabitants.</p> + +<p>"The first thing which causes the commencement of a village in New +England," said Forester, "is a water-fall."</p> + +<p>"Why is that?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"There are certain things," replied Forester, "which the farmers can +not very well do for themselves, by their own strength, particularly +grinding their corn, and sawing logs into boards for their houses. +When they first begin to settle in a new country, they make the houses +of logs, and they have to take the corn and grain a great many miles +on horseback, through paths in the woods, or, in the winter, on +hand-sleds, to get it ground. But as soon as any of them are able to +do it, they build a dam on some stream in the neighborhood, where +there is a fall in the water, and thus get a water power. This water +power they employ, to turn a saw-mill and a grist-mill. Then all the +farmers, when they want to build houses or barns, haul logs to the +mill to get them sawed into boards, and they carry their grain to the +grist-mill and get it ground. They pay the owner of the mills for +doing this work for them. And thus, if there are a great many farms in +the country around, and no other mills very near, so that the mills +are kept all the time at work, the owner gets a great deal of pay, and +gradually acquires property.</p> + +<p>"Now, as soon as the mills are built, perhaps a blacksmith sets up a +shop near them. If a blacksmith is going to open a shop anywhere +in that town, it will be better for him to have it near the mills, +because, as the farmers all have to come to the mills at any rate, +they can avail themselves of the opportunity, to get their horses +shod, or to get new tires to their wheels, when they are broken."</p> + +<p>"Tires?" repeated Marco. "What are tires?"</p> + +<p>"They are the iron rims around wheels. Every wheel must have an iron +band about it, very tight, to strengthen it and to hold it firmly +together. Without a tire, a wheel would very soon come to pieces, in +rattling over a stony road.</p> + +<p>"Besides," continued Forester, "there is a great deal of other iron +work, which the farmers must have done. Farmers can, generally, do +most of the wood work which they want themselves. They can make their +rakes, and drags, and cart-bodies, and sleds, and tool handles; but +when they want iron work, they must go to the blacksmith's. They can +make a harrow-frame, but the blacksmith must make the teeth."</p> + +<p>"Now I should think," said Marco, "that it would be easier to make the +teeth than the frame."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps it is as easy, if one has the forge and tools," replied +Forester; "but the tools and fixtures, necessary for blacksmith's +work, are much more expensive than those required for ordinary wood +work. There must be a forge built on purpose, and an anvil, supported +on a solid foundation, and various tools. All these are necessary for +shoeing a single horse, and when they are all procured, they will +answer for all the horses of the neighborhood. Thus it happens, that +though farmers do a great deal of their wood work themselves, at their +own farms, in cold and stormy weather, they generally have their iron +work done at a blacksmith's at some central place, where it is easy +and convenient for all of them to go."</p> + +<p>The above conversation took place between Marco and Forester, as they +were walking along together through the village, toward the part of +the town where the mills were situated. Just at this moment, Marco +happened to cast his eyes across the street a short distance before +them, and he saw a fire on the ground in a little yard. He asked +Forester what that fire could be. As soon as Forester saw the fire, he +exclaimed,</p> + +<p>"Ah! they are putting a tire upon a wheel; that's quite fortunate; +we'll go across and see them."</p> + +<p>So they left the path under the trees where they had been walking, and +went obliquely across the street toward the fire. Marco saw that +there was a large blacksmith's shop there. It was a very neat-looking +building, painted red. There was a large door in the front, and a very +low window, with a shutter hanging over it, by the side of the door. +In an open yard, by the side of the shop, was the fire. The fire was +in the form of a ring. There were several men standing about it; one +of them, whom Marco supposed was the blacksmith, by his leather apron, +was putting on small sticks of wood and chips, here and there, around +the ring. Marco saw that there was a large iron hoop, as he called it, +on the fire. It was not really a hoop, it was a <i>tire</i>. It was +made of a much larger and thicker bar of iron, than those which are +used for hoops. It was a tire belonging to a wheel. The wheel was +lying upon the ground near, ready to receive the tire. It was the hind +wheel of a wagon. The wagon itself was standing in front of the shop, +with one end of the hind axletree supported by a block.</p> + +<p>"What do they heat the tire for?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"To swell it," replied Forester. "It is necessary to have the tire go +on very tight, so as to hold the wheel together with all the force of +the iron. Now when iron is heated it swells, and then shrinks again +when it cools. So they heat the tire hot, and put it upon the wheel in +that state. Then when it cools it shrinks, and binds the whole wheel +together with a very strong grip."</p> + +<p>"But if they put it on hot, it will burn the wood," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Forester, "it will burn the wood a little. They can not +help that entirely; but they stand ready with water, to pour on, as +soon as the tire is in its place, and so cool it immediately, so that +it does not burn the fellies enough to injure them."</p> + +<p>"What are the fellies?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"They are the parts of the wooden rim of the wheel. The rim is made of +several pieces of wood, which are called fellies."</p> + +<p>So Forester took Marco to the wheel, and showed him the parts of +which the rim was composed. While Marco was looking at the wheel, the +blacksmith began to push away the burning brands a little from the +tire, as it began to be hot enough. Presently he went into his shop +and brought out several pairs of tongs. With these the men lifted the +tire out of the fire, but the blacksmith said it was a little too hot, +and he must let it cool a minute or two.</p> + +<p>"Why, if it's very hot," said Marco, "it will grip the wheel all the +harder."</p> + +<p>"It will grip it <i>too</i> hard," said Forester. "Sometimes a tire +shrinks so much as to spring the spokes out of shape. Didn't you ever +see a wheel with the spokes bent out of shape?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know," said Marco. "I never noticed wheels much."</p> + +<p>"They do get bent, sometimes," said Forester. "It requires great care +to put on a tire in such a manner, as to give it just the right degree +of force to bind the wheel strongly together, without straining it."</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus06.png" alt="The Tire." />The Tire.</p></div> + +<p>As soon as the tire became of the right temperature, the men took it +up again with the pairs of tongs--taking hold with them at different +sides of it--and then they put it down carefully over the wheel. The +wheel immediately began to smoke on all sides. In one or two places +it burst into a flame. The blacksmith, however, paid no attention to +this, but with a hammer, which he held in his hand, he knocked it down +into its place, all around the rim; then he took up a brown pitcher +full of water, which was standing near, and began to pour the +water on, walking round and round the wheel as he did it, so as to +extinguish the flames in every part and cool the iron. When this +process was completed, Forester and Marco walked on.</p> + +<p>"Let me see," said Forester, "where did I leave off, Marco, in my +account of the growth of a village? I was telling you about the +blacksmith's shop, I believe."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"The next thing to the blacksmith's shop, in the history of a New +England village," said Forester, "is generally a store. You see the +farmers can not raise every thing they want. There are a great many +things which come from foreign countries, which they have to buy."</p> + +<p>"Such as sugar and tea," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Forester, "only they make a great deal of sugar in +Vermont out of the sap of the maple-tree. We will go and see Mr. +Warner's sugar bush next spring. But there are a great many things +which the farmers must buy. One of the most important articles is +iron. Now when a man concludes to open a store, the best place that he +can have for his business is near the mills and the blacksmith's shop; +because the people have to come there on other business, and so that +is the most convenient place for them to visit his store. And so, by +and by, when a carpenter and a mason come into the country, the little +village which has thus begun to form itself, is the best place for +them to settle in, for that is the place where people can most +conveniently call and see them. After a while a physician comes and +settles there, to heal them when they are sick, and a lawyer to +prevent disputes."</p> + +<p>"To <i>prevent</i> disputes!" said Marco. Marco had not much idea of +the nature of a lawyer's business, but he had a sort of undefined and +vague notion, that lawyers <i>made</i> disputes among men, and lived +by them. + +"Why, I know," said Forester, laughing, "that lawyers have not the +credit, generally, of preventing many disputes, but I believe they do. +Perhaps it is because I am going to be a lawyer myself. But I really +believe that lawyers prevent ten disputes, where they occasion one."</p> + +<p>"How do they do it?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Why, they make contracts, and draw up writings, and teach men to be +clear and distinct in their engagements and bargains. Then besides, +when men will not pay their debts, they compel them to do it, by legal +process. And there are a vast many debts which are paid, for fear of +this legal process, which would not have been paid without it. Thus, +knowing that the lawyers are always ready to apply the laws, men are +much more careful not to break them, than they otherwise would be. So +that it is no doubt vastly for the benefit of a community, not only to +have efficient laws, but efficient lawyers to aid in the execution of +them."</p> + +<p>By this time, Forester and Marco had reached the part of the village +where the mills were situated. Forester showed Marco the dam. It was +supported by ledges of rocks on each bank, and there was a flume, +which conducted the water to the wheels of the mills. There were two +mills and a machine-shop. They went into the machine-shop. There was +a lathe here carried by water. A man was at work at it, turning hoe +handles. Forester asked him what other articles were turned there; and +he said posts for bedsteads, and rounds for chairs, and such other +things as were used in quantities in that part of the country. +Forester asked him whether the lathe would turn brass and iron as well +as wood; but he said it would not. It was not fitted for that work.</p> + +<p>"I suppose you might have a lathe here, to work in the metals," said +Forester.</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied the man, "but it would not be worth while. There is +very little of that kind of work wanted in this part of the country."</p> + +<p>After looking at the mills, Forester and Marco walked along up the +stream a little way, to look at the mill-pond. Whenever a dam is +made, it causes a pond to be formed above it, more or less extensive, +according to the nature of the ground. In this case there was quite a +large pond, formed by the accumulation of the water above the dam. +The pond was not very wide, but it extended more than a mile up the +stream. The banks were picturesque and beautiful, being overhung with +trees in some places, and in others presenting verdant slopes, down to +the water's edge.</p> + +<p>"That's a good pond to go a-fishing in," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester, "and it makes fine skating ground in the +winter."</p> + +<p>Marco and Forester followed the banks of the mill-pond, until they +came to the end of the still water; beyond that they saw a rapid +running stream, coming down from the mountains. Marco wished to follow +this stream up farther, to see what they would come to, and Forester +consented. The ground ascended more and more the farther they +proceeded, and the view began to be shut in by forests, precipices and +mountains. Marco liked clambering over the rocks, and he found a +great deal to interest him at every step of the way. He saw several +squirrels and one rabbit. He wanted Forester to get him a gun and let +him come out into those woods a-gunning.</p> + +<p>"No," said Forester.</p> + +<p>"Why not?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"That is dangerous amusement."</p> + +<p>"Why? Do you think I should get killed with my sun?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"No," replied Forester, "I don't think you would; but you <i>might</i> +get killed. The risk would be too great for the benefit."</p> + +<p>"Why, you told me the other day, that it was a great thing to learn to +take risks coolly. If I had a gun I could practice and learn."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester, "it is well to take risks coolly, when the +advantage is sufficient to justify it. For instance, when you crept +down upon the pole the other day, to get the reins, you took a great +risk, but perhaps you saved the lives of the passengers by it. That +was right--but to hazard your life, for the sake of the pleasure of +shooting a squirrel, is not wise." Marco had before this time told him +about his getting the reins.</p> + +<p>"I shouldn't think, there was much danger," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"No," said Forester, "there's very little danger. In using a gun, you +put yourself in a very little danger of a very great calamity. There's +very little probability that your gun would burst, or that you would +ever shoot accidentally any other person;--very little indeed. But if +the gun were to burst, and blow off one of your arms, or put out your +eyes, or if you were to shoot another boy, the calamity would be a +very terrible one. So we call it a great risk."</p> + +<p>"It seems to be a small risk of a great calamity," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Forester, "but we call it a great risk. We call the +risk great, when either the evil which we are in danger of is great, +or when the chance of its befalling us is great. For example, if you +and I were to walk over that log which lies across the stream, we +should run a great risk; but that would be, not a small chance of a +great evil, but a great chance of a small evil. There would be a great +chance that we should fall off into the stream; but that would not be +much of an evil as we should only get ourselves wet."</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus07.png" alt="The Risk" />The Risk</p></div> + +<p>"Let us go and try it," said Marco. "Not I," said Forester. "You may, +however, if you please. I am willing to have you take such a risk as +<i>that</i>, for your amusement."</p> + +<p>Marco went to the log and walked back and forth across it, as +composedly as if it were a broad plank, lying upon the ground. +Finally, he hopped across it on one foot, to show Forester his +dexterity. Forester was surprised. He did not know how much skill in +such feats Marco had acquired by his gymnastics in New York.</p> + +<p>After this, Forester and Marco clambered up some rocks on an elevated +summit, where they had a fine view of the village below them. They +could trace the river, winding through the valley, with the green +intervals on both sides of it. They could see the village and the +streets, with the spire of the meeting-house in the center. The +mill-pond was in full view also; and Marco's attention was attracted +by a boat, which he saw gliding over the surface of the water.</p> + +<p>"O! there is a boat," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester. "I have paddled over the water many a time in +her."</p> + +<p>"How many oars does she pull?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Oars?" said Forester, "no oars; they use paddles."</p> + +<p>"I wish they had some oars," said Marco, "and then I would get a crew +of boys, and teach them to manage a boat man-o'-war fashion."</p> + +<p>"How do you know any thing about it?" asked Forester.</p> + +<p>"O, I learned at New York, in the boats at the Battery."</p> + +<p>"Well," said Forester, "we'll have some oars made, and get a crew. I +should like to learn myself."</p> + +<p>"Let us go down and see the boat," said Marco, "now."</p> + +<p>"No," replied Forester, "it is time to go to dinner now; but we'll +come and see the boat the next time we go to take a walk."</p> + +<p>So Marco and Forester came down the hill, and thence went across the +fields home to dinner. They dined at half-past twelve o'clock, which +seemed a very strange hour to Marco.</p> +</div> + + +<div class="chapter" id="ch05"> +<h2>Chapter V.</h2> + +<h3>Studying.</h3> + + + +<p>The little building where Forester's father had his office, had a +small back room in it, which opened from the office proper, and which +was used as a library and private study. It had a small fire place +in it, and there was a table in the middle of the room, with a large +portable writing-desk upon it. This desk was made of rosewood. The +sides of the room were lined with book-shelves. There was one large +window which looked upon the yard and garden behind. The books in +this room were principally law-books, though there were some books of +history and travels, and great dictionaries of various kinds. Forester +conducted Marco into this room, a day or two after their arrival in +the village, saying,</p> + +<p>"Here, Marco, this is to be our study. How do you like it?"</p> + +<p>"Very well," said Marco. "It is a very pleasant room. Am I to study +all these books?"</p> + +<p>"Not more than one at a time, at any rate," said Forester.</p> + +<p>"<i>This</i> is my place, I suppose," said Marco; and so saying he sat +down in a great arm-chair, before the portable writing-desk, which was +open on the table.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus08.png" alt="The Study." />The Study.</p></div> + +<p>"No," said Forester, "that is <i>my</i> place. I am going to arrange +your establishment near the window. James has gone to bring your desk +now."</p> + +<p>While he was speaking, the door opened, and James, the young man who +lived at Forester's father's came in, bringing a desk. It was painted +blue, and had four legs. These legs were of such a length as to make +the desk just high enough for Marco. James put it down, at Forester's +direction, near the window. It was placed with the left side toward +the window, so that the light from the window would strike across the +desk from left to right. This is the most convenient direction for +receiving light when one is writing. Forester then placed a chair +before the desk, and Marco went into the house and brought out all the +books and papers which he had, and arranged them neatly in his desk. +While he was gone, Forester took an inkstand and a sand-box out of a +closet by the side of the fire, and filled them both, and put them on +the desk. He also placed in the desk a supply of paper, in quarter +sheets. After Marco had come back, and had put in his books and +papers, Forester gave him a ruler and a lead pencil; also a slate and +half a dozen slate pencils; also a piece of sponge and a piece of +India-rubber. He gave him besides a little square phial, and sent him +to fill it with water, so that he might have water always at hand to +wet his sponge with.</p> + +<p>"Now is that all you will want?" asked Forester.</p> + +<p>"Why, yes, I should think so," said Marco. "If I should want any thing +else, I can ask you, you know. You are going to stay here and study +too?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester; "but your asking me is just what I wish to +avoid. I wish to arrange it so that we shall both have our time to +ourselves, without interruption."</p> + +<p>"But I shall have to ask you questions when I get into difficulty," +said Marco.</p> + +<p>"No," said Forester, "I hope not. I mean to contrive it so that you +can get out of difficulty yourself. Let me see. You will want some +pens. I will get a bunch of quills and make them up into pens for +you."</p> + +<p>"What, a whole bunch?" said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Forester. "I don't wish to have you come to me, when I +am in the midst of a law argument, to get me to make a pen."</p> + +<p>Steel pens were very little used in those days.</p> + +<p>While Forester was making the pens, he said,</p> + +<p>"There are twenty-five quills in a bunch. I shall tie them up, when +they are ready, into two bunches, of about a dozen in each. These you +will put in your desk. When you want a pen, you will draw one out of +the bunches and use it. You must not stop to look them over, to choose +a good one, but you must take any one that comes first to hand, +because, if any one should not be good, the sooner you get it out and +try it, and ascertain that it is not good, the sooner you will get it +out of the way."</p> + +<p>"Well," said Marco, "and what shall I do with the bad ones?"</p> + +<p>"Wipe them clean,--by the way, you must have a good penwiper,--and +then put them together in a particular place in your desk. When you +have thus used one bunch, tie them up and lay the bunch on my desk to +be mended, and then you can go on using the other bunch. This will +give me opportunity to choose a convenient time to mend the first +bunch again. When I have mended them, I will tie them up and lay them +on your desk again. Thus you will always have a supply of pens, and I +shall never be interrupted to mend one. This will be a great deal more +convenient, both for you and for me."</p> + +<p>"Only it will use up a great many more pens," replied Marco.</p> + +<p>"No," said Forester; "not at all. We shall have more in use at one +time, it is true, but the whole bunch may last as long as if we had +only one cut at a time."</p> + +<p>"We shall begin to study," continued Forester, "at nine o'clock, and +leave off at twelve. That will give you half an hour to run about and +play before dinner."</p> + +<p>"And a recess?" said Marco,--"I ought to have a recess."</p> + +<p>"Why, there's a difficulty about a recess," said Forester. "I shall +have it on my mind every day, to tell you when it is time for the +recess, and when it is time to come in."</p> + +<p>"O no," replied Marco, "I can find out when it is time for the recess. +Let it be always at ten o'clock, and I can look at the watch."</p> + +<p>Marco referred to a watch belonging to Forester's father, which was +kept hung up over the mantel-piece in their little study.</p> + +<p>"I think it probable you would find out when it was time for the +recess to <i>begin</i>," said Forester, "but you would not be so +careful about the end of it. You would get engaged in play, and would +forget how the time was passing, and I should have to go out and call +you in."</p> + +<p>"Couldn't you have a little bell?" said Marco.</p> + +<p>"But I don't wish to have any thing of that kind to do," said +Forester, "I am going to instruct you half an hour every morning, +beginning at nine o'clock, and I want to have it all so arranged, that +after that, I shall be left entirely to myself, so that I can go +on with my studies, as well as you with yours. If we can do this +successfully, then, when noon comes, I shall feel that I have done my +morning's work well, and you and I can go off in the afternoon on all +sorts of expeditions. But if I have to spend the whole morning in +attending to you, then I must stay at home and attend to my own +studies in the afternoon."</p> + +<p>"Well," said Marco, "I think I can find out when to come in."</p> + +<p>"We'll try it one or two mornings, but I have no idea that you will +succeed. However, we can give up the plan if we find that you stay +out too long. You may have five minutes' recess every day, at eleven +o'clock. On the whole it shall be <i>ten</i> minutes. And this shall +be the plan of your studies for the morning. At nine o'clock, I shall +give you instruction for half an hour. Then you may study arithmetic +for one hour; then write half an hour; then have a recess for ten +minutes: then read for the rest of the last hour. That will bring it +to twelve o'clock."</p> + +<p>"But I can't study arithmetic, alone," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester, "I shall show you how, in the first half-hour +when I am giving you my instructions. Now, are you willing really to +try to carry this system into effect, pleasantly and prosperously?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "I'll try."</p> + +<p>"We shall find some inconveniences and troubles at first, I have no +doubt," said Forester; "but if we are patient and persevering, we +shall soon make the system go smoothly."</p> + +<p>Forester then said, that as Marco might forget what he had to do each +hour, he would make a sort of map of the hours, with the name of +the study which he was to pursue marked in each. This he called a +schedule. The schedule, when it was completed, was as follows:</p> + +<p>IX. X. XI. XII. + | Instruction. | Arithmetic. | Writing. | Recess. | Reading. |</p> + +<p>This schedule was drawn neatly on a piece of paper, and fastened with +wafers to the under side of the lid of Marco's desk, so that he could +look at it at any time, by opening his desk.</p> + +<p>It was in the afternoon that this conversation was held, and these +preparations made. The next morning, at nine o'clock, Marco and +Forester went into the little study, and Forester gave him his +instructions. He took his arithmetic, and explained to him how to +perform some examples, under one of the rules. Forester performed one +or two of them himself, explaining very particularly all the steps. +He then rubbed out his work, and directed Marco to perform them by +himself in the same manner. "If you succeed in doing these right," +said he, "you may set yourself some others of the same kind, with +different numbers, and perform those too. If you get into any +difficulty, you must not ask me, but you may set yourself sums in +addition, and spend the rest of the hour in doing them. That, you can +certainly do without help."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "I can do that."</p> + +<p>"The next half-hour is for writing," said Forester. "I will set you +some copies."</p> + +<p>So Forester took a writing-book, which he had prepared, and wrote +Marco some copies, one on the top of each page. Marco looked over +him while he wrote. It is very important that a child should see his +teacher write his copies, for thus he will see how the letters should +be formed. Forester wrote four or five copies for Marco, and while he +was writing them he gave him particular instructions about the manner +of holding his pen, and shaping the letters.</p> + +<p>"Now," said Forester, "you can not possibly have occasion to come to +me about your writing; for here are pages enough for you to write upon +for several days, and you have plenty of pens."</p> + +<p>"But I should think you would want to see whether I write it well," +said Marco.</p> + +<p>"I shall examine it carefully to-morrow morning," said Forester.</p> + +<p>"Very well," said Marco; "after the writing will come the recess."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester, "and then the reading."</p> + +<p>"What shall I read?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>Forester then rose and went to one of the book-shelves, where there +was a set of books, entitled the American Encyclopedia. There were +thirteen octavo volumes in the set. It was rather too high for Marco +to reach it, and so Forester took all the volumes down and placed them +on a lower shelf, not far from the window, in a place where Marco +could get easy access to them.</p> + +<p>"There," said Forester; "there is your library. The American +Encyclopedia is a sort of a dictionary. When your reading hour comes, +you may take down any volume of this Encyclopedia, and turn to any +article you please. Or you may think of any subject that you would +like to read about, as for instance, <i>boat, cannon, camel, eagle, +trout, horse</i>, or any other subject, and take down the proper +volume and find the article. You can find it by the letters which are +printed on the backs of the volumes."</p> + +<p>"Let us look now," said Marco, "and see what it says about trouts."</p> + +<p>"No, not now," replied Forester; "when your reading hour comes, you +may read what you choose. Only you must have a piece of paper at hand, +and write upon it the title of every article which you read, and show +it to me the next morning, because I shall wish to know what you have +been reading, and perhaps to question you about it. Now you understand +your work, do you not?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco; "and what are you going to do?"</p> + +<p>"O, I'm going to study my law-books."</p> + +<p>"Shall you stay here and study?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Forester, "I shall be here most of the time. Sometimes +I shall be called into the other room, perhaps, on business with my +lather; but that need not make any difference with you."</p> + +<p>"Only, then there will be nobody to watch me," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"O, I shall not watch you any, even when I am here. I shall pay no +attention to you at all. I can judge to-morrow morning, when I come to +look at your work and give you new instructions, whether you have been +industrious or not.</p> + +<p>"Even if I accidentally see you doing any thing wrong, I shall not +probably say any thing about it. I shall remember it, and speak to you +about it to-morrow morning, in my half-hour. I shall do everything in +my half-hour."</p> + +<p>Marco felt somewhat relieved, to think that he was not going to be +under a very rigid observation in his studies.</p> + +<p>"I do not expect," said Forester, "that you will do very well for the +first few days. It will take some time to get this system under full +operation. I presume that you will come to me as many as ten times the +first day."</p> + +<p>"O, no," said Marco, "I don't mean to come to you once."</p> + +<p>"You will,--I have no doubt. What shall I say to you if you do? Will +it be a good plan for me to answer your question?"</p> + +<p>"Why, no," said Marco, "I suppose not."</p> + +<p>"And yet, if I refuse to answer, it will not be very pleasant to you. +It will put you out of humor."</p> + +<p>"No," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"I will have one invariable answer to give you," said Forester. "It +shall be this,--Act according to your own judgment. That will be a +little more civil than to take no notice of your question at all, +and yet it will preserve our principle,--that I am to give you no +assistance except in my half-hour. Then, besides, I will keep an +account of the number of questions you ask me, and see if they do not +amount to ten."</p> + +<p>By this time Forester's half-hour was out, and Marco went to his desk.</p> + +<p>"There's one thing," said Marco, "before I begin:--may I have the +window open?"</p> + +<p>"Act according to your own judgment," said Forester, "and there is one +question asked." So Forester made one mark upon a paper which he had +upon the table.</p> + +<p>"But, cousin Forester, it is not right to count that, for I had not +begun."</p> + +<p>Forester made no reply, but began arranging his note-books, as if he +was about commencing his own studies. Marco looked at him a moment, +and then he rose and gently opened the window and began his work.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus09.png" alt="Marco's Desk." />Marco's Desk.</p></div> + +<p>Marco was but little accustomed to solitary study, and, after +performing one of the examples which Forester had given him, he +thought he was tired, and he began to look out the window and to play +with his pencil. He would lay his pencil upon the upper side of +his slate, and let it roll down. As the pencil was not round, but +polygonal in its form, it made a curious clicking sound in rolling +down, which amused Marco, though it disturbed and troubled Forester. +Whatever may have been the nice peculiarities in the delicate +mechanism of Forester's ear, and of the nerves connected with it, +compared with that of Marco's, by which the same sound produced a +sensation of pleasure in one ear, while it gave only pain in the +other, it would require a very profound philosopher to explain. But +the effect was certain. Forester, however, did not speak, but let +Marco roll his pencil down the slate as long as he pleased.</p> + +<p>This was not long, however; Marco soon grew tired of it, and then +began to look out the window. There was a little staple in the window +sill, placed there as a means of fastening the blind. Marco pushed the +point of his pencil into this staple, in order to see if it would go +through. It did go through in an instant, and slipping through his +fingers, it fell out of the window.</p> + +<p>"Dear me! there goes my pencil. My pencil has dropped out of the +window, cousin Forester; shall I go out and get it?"</p> + +<p>"Act according to your own judgment," said Forester. At the same time +he was saying this, he made another mark upon his paper.</p> + +<p>"Why, you ought not to count that, cousin Forester," said Marco, "for +I don't know whether you'd wish me to go and get that pencil, or take +another out of my desk."</p> + +<p>"Act according to your own judgment," replied Forester.</p> + +<p>Marco looked perplexed and troubled. In fact, he was a little +displeased to find that Forester would not answer him. He thought +that, it was an unforeseen emergency, which Forester ought to have +considered an exception to his rule. But he was obliged to decide the +question for himself, and he concluded to go out for his pencil. It +took him some time to find it in the grass, and after he had found it, +he stopped for some time longer, to watch some ants which were passing +in and out, at the entrance to their nest, each one bringing up a +grain of sand in his forceps. When Marco came in, he found that his +hour for arithmetic was so nearly expired, that he should not have +time to finish another sum, if he should begin it; so he put his +arithmetical apparatus away, and took out his writing-book.</p> + +<p>Marco went through the whole forenoon pretty much in the same way. He +spent a large part of his time in looking out of the window and about +the room. He went out at the time for the recess, but he stayed out +twenty minutes instead of ten. He was astonished, when he came in, to +see how rapidly the time had passed. He then took down a volume of the +Encyclopedia, and read until twelve o'clock, and then, leaving the +volume of the Encyclopedia and his writing-book on his desk, he told +Forester that the study hours were over, and went away.</p> + +<p>The next morning, at nine, Forester asked him how he had got along the +day before. Marco had the frankness to admit that he did not get along +very well.</p> + +<p>"Still," said Forester, "I am well satisfied on the whole. You did +very well for a first experiment. In the first place, you did really +make some effort to carry out my plan. You kept the reckoning of the +hours, and changed your studies at the appointed time. You did not +speak to me more than three or four times, and then you acquiesced +pretty good-naturedly in my refusing to help you. To-day you will do +better, I have no doubt, and to-morrow better still. And thus, in the +course of a week, I have great confidence that you will learn to study +for three hours by yourself, to good advantage."</p> + +<p>"Two hours and a half it is," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester.</p> + +<p>It resulted as Forester predicted. Marco, finding that Forester was +disposed to be pleased with and to commend his efforts, made greater +efforts every day, and, in the course of a week, he began to be a +very respectable student. In the afternoon he used to ramble about, +sometimes with Forester, and sometimes alone. He was very fond of +fishing, and Forester used to allow him to go to certain parts of the +river, where the water was not deep, alone, trusting to his word that +he would confine himself strictly to the prescribed bounds.</p> +</div> + + +<div class="chapter" id="ch06"> +<h2>Chapter VI.</h2> + +<h3>The Log Canoe.</h3> + + + +<p>Every thing went on very prosperously, for a week or two, in the +little study. Marco became more and more attentive to his studies, and +more and more interested in them. He was often getting into little +difficulties, it is true, and giving trouble to his uncle and aunt; +but then he generally seemed sorry afterward for the trouble which he +had thus occasioned, and he bore reproof, and such punishments as his +cousin thought it necessary to inflict, with so much good-humor, that +they all readily forgave him for his faults and misdemeanors.</p> + +<p>One day, however, about a fortnight after he had commenced his +studies, he got led away, through the influence of a peculiar +temptation, into a rather serious act of transgression, which might +have been followed by very grave consequences. The circumstances were +these. He had commenced his studies as usual, after having received +his half-hour's instruction from Forester, and was in the midst of the +process of reducing the fraction 504/756 to its lowest terms, when he +happened to look out of the window and to see two boys climbing over +a garden fence belonging to one of the neighbor's houses, at a little +distance in the rear of his uncle's house. It was a very pleasant +morning, and Marco had the window open; so he could see the boys very +plainly. They stopped on the farther side of the fence which they had +got over, and though they were partially concealed by the fence, yet +Marco could plainly perceive that they were busily employed in doing +something there, though he could not imagine what. He wished very much +to go and see; but he knew that it would be in vain to make request +for permission, and so he contented himself with watching them.</p> + +<p>Just at this moment his uncle opened the door which led into the +little study, and asked Forester if he would step into the office. +Forester did so; and then, after a few minutes, he returned, put up +his books, and said that he had got to go away, and that perhaps he +should not be back till noon. Marco had often been left alone at his +studies for a time, but never for a whole morning before. He knew that +he was to go on with his work just as if Forester had remained. So +Forester bade him good morning, and then went away.</p> + +<p>Marco watched the boys, wondering more and more what they could be +doing. They kept stooping down to the ground, and moving about a +little, as if they were planting seeds. But as it was entirely the +wrong season for any such work, Marco concluded that they must be +hiding something in the ground. "Perhaps," said he to himself, "they +have been stealing some money, and are burying it. I wish I could go +and see."</p> + +<p>If there had been a door leading directly from the study into the +yard, Marco would have left his studies and have gone out at once; but +as it was, he could not get out without going through the office where +his uncle was sitting. At last the thought struck him that he might +jump out the window. He felt some hesitation at taking this step, but +finally he concluded that he would do it, and just go near enough to +see what the boys were hiding, and exactly where they were putting it, +so that he could go afterward and find it without fail. He determined +to return then immediately.</p> + +<p>"I shall not be out longer than five minutes," said he to himself, +"and I will let it go for my recess."</p> + +<p>So he took his cap from the nail where he was accustomed to hang it, +while he was at his studies, and then climbing out the window, feet +foremost, he let himself down gently to the ground. He then crept +slyly along through the yards and gardens, until he got pretty near +the place where the boys were at work. The mystery, however, was +rather increased than diminished by the near view. He could make +nothing of the operations which they were engaged in; and while he was +hesitating whether to go nearer, one of the boys happened to look up +and spied him. Marco had intended to keep himself concealed by a tree, +behind which he had taken his station, but the boy having looked up +suddenly, at a moment when he happened to be off his guard, saw him +before he had time to draw back under the cover he had chosen.</p> + +<p>"Holloa, Marco," said the boy, "come here."</p> + +<p>Marco was astonished at this frank and open invitation. He had +expected that the boys, when they saw him, would have dropped at once +behind the fence to conceal themselves, or that they would have caught +up what he supposed they were burying, and have run away. Their +accosting him in this fearless manner deranged his ideas about their +probable object, and increased his curiosity to know what they were +doing. So he came forth from his concealment and went toward them. +When he reached the spot, the mystery was suddenly dispelled by his +finding out that they were digging worms for bait, to go a-fishing.</p> + +<p>Marco's curiosity was now changed to eager desire. The boys told him +that they were going down to the river to fish for eels, and Marco's +soul was all on fire to accompany them. He had never fished for eels. +He knew the boys very well, and they offered to lend him a hook and +line. But Marco thought that on the whole it would not do. He tried to +persuade them to wait until the afternoon, but they would not consent +to such a postponement of their pleasure. So Marco wished them good +luck, and began to mount the fence again, with the intention of +returning to his studies.</p> + +<p>On looking toward the office, he saw his uncle coming out of the door +in the rear of it, and walking toward the house. Marco immediately +reflected that it would not answer for him to meet his uncle, and he +descended from the fence again on the same side with the boys, until +his uncle should go back. The boys thought he came back because he +was undecided whether to go with them or not, and they renewed their +invitations with redoubled urgency. Marco did not reply, but looked +steadily toward the house. He saw a man standing in the yard with a +small ladder in his hand. A moment afterward, Marco's uncle came out +of the house, and, to Marco's great consternation, he perceived that +he had a saw and a hatchet in his hand, and then he recollected that +his uncle had been intending to prune some trees that forenoon. The +trees were situated in various positions about the yard, so that Marco +could neither go in at the front door of the office, nor climb in at +the window, without being discovered. He did not know what to do.</p> + +<p>In the mean time, the boys urged him to go with them. They did not +know any thing about his studies, and supposed that his hesitation was +only owing to his want of interest in the object of the expedition. +Finally, Marco concluded to go. He supposed that he should not be able +to get back into his study till noon, as he recollected that his +uncle expected to be employed all the forenoon about his pruning. +He thought, therefore, that his chance of detection would not be +increased by staying out an hour or two longer, and so he told the +boys that he would go.</p> + +<p>When they had procured sufficient bait, they went toward the river. +Their way led them not very far from the house, and they were several +times in situations where they were exposed to view, in case Marco's +uncle had looked toward them. Marco, however, contrived to walk by +these places in such a manner as to cover himself as much as possible +from view by the other boys; and besides, he hoped that his uncle was +too much occupied with his pruning, to notice what boys were prowling +about the village. They passed across the street in this manner, and +then went down over the intervales toward the river. Marco felt quite +relieved at seeing that his uncle kept steadily at his work, holding +the ladder for the other man to mount by, or sawing off low branches +himself, without appearing to notice the boys at all.</p> + +<p>The river was circuitous in its course, and its banks were in some +places steep, and in others low and sandy. The water was generally +shallow, but in some places it was deep,--especially under the high +banks. In many places there were willows and elms, overhanging the +water. It was in one of these places that the boys were going to fish +for eels. It was a point where the river took a sudden turn, forming a +sort of angle in the stream, where the water was very dark and deep. +The bank was high at that place, and it was covered with trees and +bushes. Some of these trees had been undermined, and their roots and +branches were floating in the water. The boys scrambled down to the +brink and made ready for fishing. They cut slender poles in the +bushes, for fishing-poles. There was a trunk of a tree lying along +the shore, extending obliquely out a little way over the water, which +furnished them a convenient footing. They stood or sat upon it, baited +their hooks, and threw them over into the water. They followed the +bait with their eyes as it sunk slowly down into the dark depths, +among the logs, and roots, and trunks of trees, which were lying +submerged in the water.</p> + +<p>The boys remained here an hour, but they caught no eels. Either there +were none there, or for some reason or other they chose not to bite. +They had some talk about going to another place, but before they +decided upon that plan, Marco's attention was arrested by the sight of +what appeared to be a large log floating down the river. He pointed it +out to the other boys, and, on closer examination, they saw that it +was an old canoe, of the kind that are formed by hollowing out a log. +It was not of very large size and it appeared to be rather old and +decayed. Still, the boys wanted to get it very much. They gathered in +their lines, and ran along the bank, keeping pace with the boat as it +floated down.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus10.png" alt="Boat Adrift." />Boat Adrift.</p></div> + +<p>They very soon came to a reach of the river,--that is, to a length +of it between one bend and another, where the water was swift and +shallow. So the two boys who had been fishing with Marco threw off +their shoes, and pulled up their trowsers, and ran down the bank, and +into the river. The boat was far out in the stream, and they had to +wade some distance before they came to it. Besides, as the boat was +floating down all the time, while they were wading across, it got some +distance down the stream before they could reach it. They, however, +succeeded in getting it at last, and, with much floundering in the +water and many shouts of laughter, they brought it over to Marco.</p> + +<p>Marco was much pleased with the prize. It was in better condition than +they had expected to find it. There was, indeed, a piece knocked out +at one end, near the upper edge, but they found that it would support +all three of the boys, if they sat in it carefully, and with their +weight principally at the other end. For want of oars or paddles they +cut poles on the banks, thinking that they could push the boat along, +by planting the poles against the bottom, as the water was not deep. +They drew the boat up to the shore, and poured out some water which +had got into her, and then they all carefully embarked, intending to +make a little voyage.</p> + +<p>It happened that just below the place to which the boat had drifted +before they overtook it, the water became somewhat deeper, and of +course more smooth and still, so that it afforded a favorable place +for navigating such a boat. In fact, the character of the stream, +throughout its whole course for several miles, was to present a +constant succession of changes, from deep and almost still water, to +shallow and rapid currents, rippling over beds of sand and gravel. +One of these rapids, or rips, as they were called, the boys had just +passed; it being in one of them, though one more broad and less rapid +than many of the others, that they had pursued and overtaken the +boat. In the smooth and still water below, therefore, they had a very +favorable opportunity to try their boat, for the water, though not so +shallow as it was above, was still not so deep as to prevent their +propelling their boat, by pushing their poles against the bottom. It +required some care to preserve their equilibrium, but then the water +was not deep, and they knew, therefore, that there was no danger of +being drowned if they should upset.</p> + +<p>Things went on very prosperously, until, after a few minutes, the boys +suddenly found themselves drifting into deeper water. Their poles +would scarcely touch the bottom. Marco, who was not much accustomed to +this kind of navigation, was at first somewhat alarmed, but the other +boys told him to keep quiet, and they would soon drift into shallow +water again. They accordingly drew in their poles, and began to look +over the edge of the boat into the water, to see if they could see +any eels. They saw no eels, but the water soon began to grow shallow +again, and so the boys, feeling that they were in no danger, remained +quietly in their places, looking idly into the water, talking about +the various objects which they saw upon the bottom.</p> + +<p>After some minutes spent in this manner, one of the boys looked down +the stream, and saw that the boat was gradually approaching another of +the rapids.</p> + +<p>"Come, boys," said he, "we must go to work, or we shall be down over +the rips."</p> + +<p>So the boys all took their poles and began to push the boat up the +stream; but they found it harder than they had expected. In fact, the +boat had drifted down nearer to the rapids than they ought to have +allowed it to go. The water was running quite swiftly where they were, +and they soon found that all their efforts were not sufficient to stem +the current. The boat was carried round and round in every direction, +excepting up the stream. In fact the current was rapidly acquiring the +entire mastery over them, and hurrying them down to a point where the +water poured on in a furious torrent through a long narrow passage +between beds of stone and gravel.</p> + +<p>"Pull, boys, pull!" said Marco; "we shall go down over the rips in +spite of every thing."</p> + +<p>The boys did pull, but they could effect nothing. The water was +sweeping them along with great rapidity, notwithstanding all their +struggles. Finally, when they found that they could not make head +against it, so as to go up the stream, they concluded to pull for the +shore. They were not in any great fear, for the river was very narrow +and not more than knee deep in the rapids, so that there was no real +danger of any calamity greater than getting well wet. They seemed to +be also in a fair way to escape this, for they found that they could +make some progress in getting their boat toward the shore. But, just +as they began to think their object was about to be accomplished, they +were arrested by a sudden mishap. It happened that there was a little +snag in the river, nearly in the direction in which they were going. +It was the end of a small log, which rose almost to the surface of the +water. The greater part of the log was firmly imbedded in the sand, +but there was a small portion of it which projected so far as barely +to be submerged. The boys did not notice this, and, in their eagerness +to run the boat ashore, it happened that they were running it across +the current, just above this snag. But as the current was sweeping +them down the stream at the same time that they were pushing +themselves across it, it carried the boat with great force against +this snag. The bottom of the boat was confined by it, while the force +of the current, still pressing upon the side, overset it in a moment, +and threw all the boys out into the water.</p> + +<p>The boys scrambled out without much difficulty, and stood upon the +gravelly beach. They saw at the same moment a man on the bank of the +river above, who looked as if he was about to run to their aid; but +when he saw that they were safe, he turned around immediately and +disappeared. An instant afterward, Marco, finding that his cap was not +upon his head, looked around for it, and, to his dismay, he saw it +floating swiftly away down the rapids. He ran into the water and +seized the boat, which was then beginning also to go away. He called +upon the boys to help him pull it up and pour the water out. He then +lanched it again with all speed, seized one of the poles, clambered +into it, and pushed off into the swiftest part of the current, and +away he went after his cap.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus11.png" alt="Cap Gone." />Cap Gone.</p></div> + +<p>He resorted to this desperate measure, because he was greatly alarmed +at the idea of going home without his cap. It would have certainly +insured his detection, and, as he supposed, a double punishment. He +now was as eager to go down the rapids as he had before been to escape +them. His only care was to keep his boat head down, so that if he +should encounter any snag or rock he might not be thrown broadside on. +He kept a good lookout too ahead. The boat shot through the water like +an arrow, and was soon clear of the rapids in the comparatively still +water below.</p> + +<p>Marco contrived to paddle with his pole, so as to overtake the cap and +recover it. Then he went to the shore and landed. He drew up the +boat as high as he could, and went back to seek the other boys. He +concluded that it was time to go home. His conscience now began to +reproach him with the wrong which he had been doing. His promised +pleasure had failed. His clothes were wet and uncomfortable. His mind +was anxious and unhappy. With a heavy heart he began to retrace his +steps, sure of detection when he reached home, and of punishment. He +did not, however, dread the punishment so much as the just displeasure +which his cousin would manifest, and the evidence of the pain which he +knew his cousin would suffer, when he came to learn how his pupil had +betrayed the confidence which had been reposed in him. Before he set +out for home, however, he took off such of his clothes as were most +wet, and wrung out the water as well as he could, and then put them on +again.</p> + +<p>When he drew near to the house, he expected to see his uncle still at +work, but he was not there. Marco reconnoitered the place carefully, +and then went into the office. His uncle was not in the office. He +passed through into the study. He was afraid that Forester would be +there, but, to his surprise and joy, he was not, and there was no sign +that he had been there since the morning. Marco looked at the watch, +and found that it was only about half-past eleven. So he took down +a volume of the Encyclopedia and began to read. He read the article +<i>canoe</i>, and he found some information about the bark canoes made +by Indians, but nothing about log canoes. In about fifteen minutes he +heard the office door open, and his cousin Forester came in. Forester +walked into the study, but said nothing to Marco. Marco kept at his +work, without speaking to his cousin. He began to hope that he might +yet escape. His only fear now was lest his wet clothes should be +observed. He put his hand down many times to his knees, to ascertain +how fast they were drying. The clothes that he wore were of woolen, +and of a dark color, so that they did not show the wet very +distinctly, and, besides, the sun and the air were warm that day, and +the clothes had dried fast. In a word, when twelve o'clock arrived and +Marco put his books away, nobody would have observed that his clothes +had been wet. He ran about in the open air until dinner-time, and +though, when he went in to dinner, he felt oppressed with a sense of +guilt and of self-condemnation, he was satisfied that no one suspected +him. Marco thought that he had had a very lucky escape.</p> +</div> + + +<div class="chapter" id="ch07"> +<h2>Chapter VII.</h2> + +<h3>A Dilemma.</h3> + + + +<p>Though Marco's first feeling was that of relief, to find that he had +got back from his truancy without detection, he felt, after all, ill +at ease. He kept out of sight till the dinner-bell rang, and then he +was almost afraid to go in, for fear that, by some accident or other, +his uncle might have noticed his absence, and might ask him something +about it. He was usually much interested at dinner-time in talking +with Forester about plans for the afternoon; but now he felt guilty +and afraid, and he was disinclined to look his uncle or his cousin in +the face, or to speak a word.</p> + +<p>And yet it was not punishment that Marco was afraid of. There were +very few boys who could bear punishment of any kind with more +fortitude than he, or to whom the idea of punishment gave less +concern. It was the detection itself, rather than what was to come +after it, that he feared. There is something in the very act of being +detected and exposed in guilt, which the heart instinctively shrinks +from; and many a boy would willingly bear in secret twice the pain +which the punishment of an offense would bring, rather than have his +commission of the offense discovered and made known.</p> + +<p>There was, however, no indication, at the dinner table, that Marco's +cousin or uncle suspected him of any wrong. They talked of various +subjects in their usual manner. Forester had arranged it with Marco, +to go that afternoon down to the mill-pond, to examine the boat, in +order to see whether they could have it fitted with oars, and to +make arrangements to that effect. Marco now hoped that Forester had +forgotten this plan, and would not go. Though he had been very much +interested in the plan the day before, he now felt disinclined to go. +He wished to be alone, or at least out of sight of Forester. He felt +as if he had a terrible secret on his mind, and that there was great +danger that something or other would occur to discover it. So he hoped +that Forester would have forgotten the appointment, and that it would +be thus postponed to some future time.</p> + +<p>But Forester had not forgotten it; and after dinner, he asked Marco +how soon he should be ready to go. Marco said that he should be ready +at any time; and in about half an hour they set out. They walked +together to the mill-pond. Forester said that the boat belonged to +a man who worked in the mills, but he lived a little distance above +them. His house was near the water, in a little valley. The water of +the pond extended up into this valley, forming a sort of bay.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus12.png" alt="The Millman's House." />The Millman's House.</p></div> + +<p>A road led to the house, but did not go beyond it. The house was +small, but it had pleasant little yards and gardens about it, and +various pens and coops for different sorts of animals. The man who +lived there was famous for keeping a great many animals. He had pigs, +and cows, and Malta cats, and two dogs,--one of them a water dog,--and +ducks and geese,--among the latter, two wild geese,--and hens and +rabbits; and there were two gray squirrels, hanging up in a cage by +the side of the front door. Forester told Marco about these animals as +they walked along.</p> + +<p>Marco was very fond of animals, and he began to anticipate great +pleasure in seeing these. When they came near the house, he ran +forward to look at the wild geese. The water dog ran to meet Forester. +He knew Forester, having often seen him there before. Forester and +Marco rambled about the yards, looking at the animals for some time, +and then went to the water's edge, which was very near the house. The +ducks and geese were swimming in the water. Forester called the dog +there, and Marco amused himself for some time in throwing sticks into +the water, and ordering the dog, whose name was Nelson, to plunge in +and go and bring them back. The boat was there too, fastened by a rope +to a post in the bank. At length, after Marco had satisfied himself +with these amusements, he said,</p> + +<p>"Well, cousin Forester, here is the boat."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester, "but the man don't seem to be at home. I presume +he's at the mill."</p> + +<p>"And what shall we do in that case?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Why, I will go into the house first, and ascertain the fact, and get +a paddle."</p> + +<p>So Forester went into the house, and soon afterward returned, bringing +with him a paddle. He said that the man was at the mill, but that +his wife said that they might have the boat to go and find him. "I +thought," said Forester, "that you would rather go in the boat than +walk."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "I should."</p> + +<p>"Besides," continued Forester, "I can teach you to paddle."</p> + +<p>Marco took the paddle from Forester's hand. He had never seen one +before. He said that they always used oars, not paddles, in New York +harbor. A paddle is shaped very differently from an oar. It is much +shorter and lighter,--though the blade is broader. A paddle is worked, +too, differently from an oar. An oar acts as a lever against the side +of the boat,--the middle of it resting in a small notch called a +row-lock, or between two wooden pins. But a paddle is held in the +hands entirely.</p> + +<p>"What do they have paddles for in this country?" said Marco. "Oars are +better."</p> + +<p>"You are not competent to decide that question," replied Forester.</p> + +<p>"Why not?" said Marco; "I have rowed boats many a time."</p> + +<p>"Yes, but you have never paddled much. You have used oars, but not +paddles, and so you can not compare them."</p> + +<p>"Well," said Marco, "I mean to try this paddle now, and then I can +tell."</p> + +<p>Marco had seen the boys who were with him in the boat that morning, +using their poles as paddles, and he had used one of the poles in that +manner himself; and he was just upon the point of saying something +upon the subject, when suddenly he recollected that it would betray +him. In fact, Marco found that having such a secret as this upon his +mind, was a source of great embarrassment and constraint, as he more +than once came very near making some allusion inadvertently, which +would have resulted in his exposure. While speaking of boats, and +oars, and paddles, and such subjects, he had to be continually upon +his guard and to watch all his words.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus13.png" alt="Paddling." />Paddling.</p></div> + +<p>They got into the boat and pushed out upon the water. Forester taught +Marco how to use the paddle. He gave him his seat in the stern of the +boat, and directed him to grasp the lower end of the handle with the +other hand. Then, by dipping the blade in the water and pushing the +water back, the boat was propelled forward. He also explained to him +how, by turning the blade of the paddle, one way or the other, he +could give the bow of the boat an impulse toward the right or toward +the left.</p> + +<p>"Thus you see," said Forester, "with a paddle you can steer, but with +an oar you can not."</p> + +<p>"With two oars I can," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes." replied Forester. "You must have two oars to guide a boat, but +you can do it with one paddle. Therefore, if you can have but one, a +paddle is better than an oar. There is another advantage in a paddle; +that is, in using it, your face looks the way that you are going."</p> + +<p>"Yes," rejoined Marco, "that is a great advantage."</p> + +<p>"In rowing, you must sit with your back to the bow of the boat, and +look over your shoulder to see where you are going."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "unless you have a steersman."</p> + +<p>"True," replied Forester. "When you have several men to row, and one +to steer, you get along very well with oars, but in case of only one +man, there is an advantage in a paddle. There is still another point +to be considered,--a paddle is better for a narrow boat and oars for +wide ones."</p> + +<p>"Why so?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Because," said Forester, "a certain width is required in a boat in +order to work oars well. The oarsman must sit upon the seat, and +extend the oar off upon one side of the boat, and there must be a +certain distance between the part which he takes hold of, and the +row-lock, in order to work to advantage. But it is no matter how +narrow the boat is if he has a paddle, for he holds it perpendicularly +over the side."</p> + +<p>"So paddles are better," said Marco, "for one kind of boat, and oars +for another."</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Forester, "and paddles are better for one kind of +<i>navigation</i>, and oars for another. Oars require greater breadth +of water to work in. In a narrow, crooked stream flowing among logs +and rocks, oars would not answer at all. But with a paddle a man can +worm a boat through anywhere."</p> + +<p>"That is, if it is only wide enough for the boat to go," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Of course," replied Forester. "The paddle itself requires no +additional space. But oars extend so far laterally"--</p> + +<p>"Laterally?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," rejoined Forester; "that is, on each side. Oars extend so far +on each side, that they require a great breadth of water. If you +attempt to go through a narrow place, the oars would strike."</p> + +<p>"Why, no," said Marco. "You can give orders to trail oars."</p> + +<p>"I don't know any thing about that," said Forester.</p> + +<p>"That's a beautiful manoeuver," said Marco, "only it is hard to do. +You see, you order them to give way hearty, so as to get a good +headway, till just as you get to the narrow place, and then +<i>trail</i> is the word. Then the oarsmen all whip their oars out of +the row-locks in an instant, and let 'em trail alongside under the +boat's counters, and she shoots through the narrow place like a bird."</p> + +<p>Marco became very enthusiastic in describing this manoeuver, but +Forester did not get a very clear idea of it, after all.</p> + +<p>"You'll teach it to us," said Forester, "when we get our oars and +a good boat's crew of boys. At any rate, a boat can be paddled +continuously through a narrow space, better than it can be rowed. +Therefore, paddles are generally used on rivers, where there are many +narrow places to pass through. Indians and savages almost always use +paddles, for they navigate many intricate and narrow passages of +water."</p> + +<p>By this time they began to draw near the mill. They landed near some +great logs which were floating in the water, ready to be drawn up into +the mill and sawed. They went up the bank and thence into the mill. +The man who owned the boat, was tending the mill. When he wanted a +log, he would take the end of a long chain down a sloping plane of +planks which led to the water, and fasten it to a log. The other end +of the chain was fastened round an axle in the mill, and when all was +ready, the man would set the axle in motion by the machinery, and that +would draw the log up. When the log was in the mill, the man would +roll it over into its place, on a long platform of timber, where it +was to be sawed. Then he would set the saw machinery in motion, and +the platform would begin to move forward, and the saw at the same time +to go up and down, sawing the log as it advanced. Thus it would saw +it through, from end to end, and then, by reversing the motion of the +machinery, the log was carried back again. The man would then move it +a little to one side, just far enough for the thickness of the board +which he wished to make, and then begin to saw again. He moved the log +by means of an iron bar with a sharp point, which he struck into the +end of the log, and thus pried it over, one end at a time. When the +log was placed in its new position, the machinery was set in motion +again, and the log was sawed through in another place, from end to +end, parallel to the first sawing, leaving the width of a board +between. This process was continued until the log was sawed entirely +into boards, except a piece in the middle, which it was necessary to +leave of double thickness, and this answered for a plank.</p> + +<p>Marco was much interested in watching this process, and when the +sawing of this log was completed, and another log drawn up into its +place, Forester introduced the subject of the boat. He told the man +what he wished to do, namely, to have some row-locks or thole-pins +made along the sides of the boat, and some oars to row it with. It +would also be necessary to have seats, or thwarts, as they are called, +placed in such a manner that there should be one just before each +row-lock. These seats were for the oarsmen to sit upon, in rowing. The +man told Forester that he might do any thing he pleased with the boat. +He was sure that Forester would do it no injury. Forester asked him +who would be a good man to do the work, and the man recommended to him +a wagon-maker who had a shop very near the mill.</p> + +<p>They went to the wagon-maker and explained to him what they wanted. +The wagon-maker readily undertook the work. They all went down to the +boat together, to plan the seats and the places for the thole-pins. +They concluded to have three pairs on each side. This would require +six oars. These oars the wagon-maker promised to make, and to have all +the work done by the beginning of the next week. They also concluded +to have the boat taken out of the water and thoroughly calked again, +and her bottom <i>payed</i> over with pitch, as she was not perfectly +tight. This being all arranged, Forester and Marco began to walk +toward home.</p> + +<p>"It seems to me strange to get a wagon-maker to work on a boat," said +Marco.</p> + +<p>"In New York, I suppose you would go to a boat-builder," said +Forester.</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Marco, "to be sure."</p> + +<p>"There are no boat-builders here," rejoined Forester. "In fact, there +are very few trades represented here, and workmen are willing to do +any kind of jobs that they can."</p> + +<p>As only a small part of the afternoon was yet passed away, Marco asked +Forester if he might go down to the river a-fishing. "I can keep +within my bounds, you know," said he.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester, "you <i>can</i> keep within your bounds."</p> + +<p>"And I will," said Marco. "Don't you suppose I will?"</p> + +<p>"Why, you can tell better than I can about that," said Forester. +"You have been here now some weeks, and I have treated you with +considerable trust and confidence,--have I not?"</p> + +<p>"Why, yes," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"I have given you leave to go a-fishing, trusting to your fidelity +in keeping within your bounds. I have left you alone in your study, +several times in the forenoons. I have let you go up on the mountains +with other boys, and lent you my watch, so that you might know when +it was time to come back. Now you can tell better than I, whether you +have been faithful to all of these trusts."</p> + +<p>Marco did not answer. He did not know what to say. He walked along in +silence.</p> + +<p>"I will leave it with you to decide," said Forester. "Here we are just +home; now you may go into the study and reflect a few moments upon the +subject. Call to mind all the cases in which I have treated you with +trust and confidence, and consider whether you have always been +faithful to the trust. If, on reflection, you think that you have, you +may take your fishing-line and go a-fishing. If you feel conscious +that you have at any time betrayed my confidence, you must not go this +afternoon. You may go out to play wherever you please about the house +and garden, but you must not go a-fishing. If you are in doubt whether +you have betrayed my confidence or not, and wish to ask my opinion +about some particular case which comes up to your mind, you may remain +in the study till I come in, and ask me, and I will tell you. I shall +be in, in a few minutes."</p> + +<p>There was a pause here. Marco looked very serious, and walked along in +silence. Such a turn to the conversation was entirely unexpected to +him, and he did not know what to say.</p> + +<p>"It is possible," continued Forester, "that you may be conscious that +you have clearly been guilty of betraying the confidence which I have +placed in you in some instance which I know nothing of, or which you +suppose I know nothing of, and you may wish to confess it to me. If +you have been guilty of any such act, the best thing that you can do +is to confess it to me at once; and if you wish to do it, you may wait +till I come, for that purpose. So you may wait till I come either to +ask me a question, or to confess a fault. If you do not wish to do +either, you may go out without waiting for me; but you must not go +a-fishing unless you can truly say that you have been faithful and +honest, whenever I have trusted you before."</p> + +<p>So saying, Forester parted from Marco and went into the house. Marco +slowly walked into the office, and through it into the little study. +He was greatly perplexed to know what to make of this address. "Can +it be," thought he, "that he knows that I went away this morning? How +could he have found it out? Or did he say that, only to find out now +whether I have been honest or not heretofore?"</p> + +<p>On mature reflection, Marco concluded that Forester did not probably +know any thing about his having gone away. He thought that what he had +just said was only a part of Forester's general plan of managing +his case, and that it did not imply that Forester entertained any +particular suspicions. Marco thought that he might therefore safely go +a-fishing that afternoon if he was disposed; but we must do him the +justice to say, that he did not entertain the idea of doing it a +moment. He determined that he would not go. But as he was not prepared +to confess his fault, and as he had no question to ask, he determined +to go and play about the garden. He thought a little of waiting till +his cousin came in, and then honestly making a confession; but he +could not quite conclude upon this, and so he determined to go and +think more of it. Besides, he concluded that if he were going to make +a confession at all, he should rather do it that evening when he went +to bed; for Forester always came up to his room after he went to bed, +to have a little friendly and serious conversation with him, and to +bid him good night.</p> + +<p>He accordingly went out before Forester came in. He spent the +afternoon in a miserable state of mind. He could not divest himself of +the feeling of anxiety, that in some way or other, Forester had found +out his transgression. He rather wondered, that, if it were true that +Forester had found it out, he had not said something to him directly +about it,--but then he knew it was Forester's way not always to make +known, at once, all that he knew in such cases. But then he thought, +again, that Forester <i>could</i> not know any thing about it. There +was no way for him to have known it. He was away all the morning, and +did not come home until after Marco got back. So he concluded that +Forester did not know; but he began to wish that he did. He could not +bear to think of telling him, but he wished that he knew. The burden +of such a secret became intolerable to him. He strolled about the +yards and garden, not knowing what to do with himself, and growing all +the time more and more anxious and unhappy. He was in a very serious +dilemma.</p> + +<p>Marco cast his eyes occasionally toward the office, expecting to see +Forester come out. He thought Forester would want to know whether he +went a-fishing or not. But he did not come. Marco spent some time in +the garden with James, who was at work there raking over the ground, +and gathering in such things as might be hurt by any sudden frost. +Marco worked with him for some time, and endeavored to converse with +him, but he did not find him very communicative, and at last he went +into the house and sat on the sofa in the parlor, reading, until +supper time.</p> + +<p>Marco fully expected that Forester would ask him at supper time +whether he had been a-fishing or not; but he said nothing about it. +Forester told his father and mother about their plan for a boat, and +gave them a full account of their visit to the mill. His mother seemed +quite interested in the account, and told Marco, that, after he got +his crew well trained, she should hope that he would invite her on an +excursion in the boat.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "we will. We must have a seat, cousin Forester, for +passengers and visitors, in the stern sheets."</p> + +<p>"The stern sheets?" said Forester, "what do you mean by the stern +sheets?"</p> + +<p>"Why, it is aft," said Marco, "between the coxswain's place and the +stroke-oarsman."</p> + +<p>"You'll have to show us," said his aunt, "when we come to see the +boat."</p> + +<p>This kind of conversation somewhat relieved Marco's mind,--but still +he was ill at ease, and he determined to tell Forester the whole story +at bedtime, if he could only summon up courage to begin.</p> +</div> + + +<div class="chapter" id="ch08"> +<h2>Chapter VIII.</h2> + +<h3>A Confession.</h3> + + + +<p>In the room where Marco slept, there was a large, stuffed arm-chair, +which was commonly called the easy chair; it was one that was seldom +used by the family, except in sickness. It stood in a corner of the +room not far from the head of Marco's bed. Forester used to sit in +this chair while he remained conversing with Marco, when he came up to +take his light.</p> + +<p>When Forester had taken his seat in the great chair this evening, +according to his usual custom, he began his conversation by saying.</p> + +<p>"Well, Marco, have you been helping James in the garden this +afternoon?"</p> + +<p>"Why, no," said Marco, "I did not help him much,--I don't like James +very well."</p> + +<p>"Why not?" asked Forester.</p> + +<p>"Why, I don't think he is very accommodating," replied Marco.</p> + +<p>"What has he done to-day, which is unaccommodating?" asked Forester.</p> + +<p>"He would not lend me his knife. I wanted to borrow his knife to cut +me a cane from some apple-tree trimmings, and he would not let me have +it."</p> + +<p>"Haven't you got a knife of your own?" asked Forester.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "but mine won't open."</p> + +<p>"Won't open?" repeated Forester. "What's the cause of that?"</p> + +<p>"Why, I suppose because the joint is rusty," replied Marco.</p> + +<p>"How came it rusty?" asked Forester.</p> + +<p>"Why, you see I laid it down one day on a stone, where I was at work +with it, and left it there, and there happened to come a rain in the +night and rusted it. I did not know where it was, and so I didn't find +it for a good many days."</p> + +<p>"Then, I presume," said Forester, "that James supposed that you would +leave his knife out in the same way and spoil it."</p> + +<p>"No," replied Marco, "that was not the reason."</p> + +<p>"You are sure that you asked him for it distinctly, and he refused?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco.</p> + +<p>Here there was a moment's pause. Marco thought that his cousin +Forester was considering what should be done to James, for being so +unaccommodating. He did not know but that he would report him to his +father and have him turned away; though Marco did not really wish to +have him turned away.</p> + +<p>But Forester said, after reflecting a moment, "That makes me think of +a story I have got here; listen and hear it."</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus14.png" alt="Marco's Room." />Marco's Room.</p></div> + +<p>So Forester took out his pocket-book and opened it, and then appeared +to be turning over the leaves, for a moment, to find a place. Then he +began to read, or to appear to read, as follows:</p> + +<p>Once there was a little girl named Anne. She came to her mother one +day, as she was sitting in the parlor, and began to complain bitterly +of her sister Mary. Her sister Mary was older than she was, and had a +doll. Anne complained that Mary would not lend her her doll.</p> + +<p>"Are you sure that she refused to lend you her doll?" asked her +mother.</p> + +<p>"Yes, mother, I am <i>sure</i> she did," replied Anne.</p> + +<p>"Perhaps she is playing with it herself," said her mother.</p> + +<p>"No," replied Anne, "she is ironing in the kitchen."</p> + +<p>"I think you must be mistaken," said her mother. "Go and ask her +again. Don't tell her I sent you, but ask her yourself, whether she +really meant that she was not willing to lend you her doll."</p> + +<p>So Anne ran off to put the question to Mary again; presently she +returned with the same answer. "Mary," she said, "would not lend it to +her."</p> + +<p>"I am very sorry to hear it," said her mother, "for now I suppose I +shall have to punish you."</p> + +<p>"To punish <i>her</i>, you mean," said Anne.</p> + +<p>"No," said her mother, "to punish you. I don't suppose <i>she</i> is +to blame."</p> + +<p>"Why, mother--how can <i>I</i> be to blame, for her not being willing +to lend me her doll?"</p> + +<p>"You <i>are</i>, I've no doubt," said her mother. "Mary is a +good-natured, accommodating girl,--always ready to do kindnesses, and +if she has any unwillingness to lend any thing to you, it must be that +you have created it yourself, by some misconduct. So that it will +prove, no doubt, that you are the one to be punished."</p> + +<p>Here Anne began to hang her head and look a little ashamed. Her +mother's supposition proved to be correct, for, on inquiring, it +appeared that Mary had lent her doll to Anne a few days before, and +that when she wanted it again, Anne was unwilling to give it to her, +and when Mary insisted on her bringing it to her, she became angry and +threw the doll out the window.</p> + +<p>"I never heard that story before, cousin Forester," said Marco. "And I +did not know that you had stories in your pocket-book."</p> + +<p>Forester laughed and put up his pocket-book.</p> + +<p>"I don't believe there is any story there," said Marco. "You made it +up for me, I verily believe."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester, "I did. Don't it fit your case pretty well?"</p> + +<p>"Why, I don't know," said Marco. "I don't see why he could not let me +have his knife."</p> + +<p>"Suppose <i>I</i> had asked him for his knife; don't you suppose he +would have lent it to me?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "I've no doubt he would; he would do any thing for +<i>you</i>, of course, because you pay him--or uncle pays him, which +is the same thing."</p> + +<p>"I don't think that that is the reason altogether," replied Forester. +"There was the man at the mill to-day, who said that I might take his +boat and do any thing I chose to do with it."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "I noticed that."</p> + +<p>"And perhaps you thought it was very much to his credit that he did +so."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"But the fact is," rejoined Forester, "as I think, it was more to +my credit than his; because I have had his boat a great many times +heretofore, and his having so much confidence in me now, shows how I +have acted with his property before. I have always taken a great deal +of pains to use it carefully, to bring it back to its place safely, to +get the water out, if there was any in it, and leave every thing in +order. I have done this, not only because it is just and right that I +should not make him suffer inconvenience on account of his doing me a +favor, but as a matter of policy."</p> + +<p>"What do you mean by a matter of policy?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Why, regard to my own interest. If I did not do so, I should soon +make people unwilling to lend me their things. And I think there must +be some good reason why James is not willing to lend you his knife."</p> + +<p>"Why, he says," answered Marco, "that I don't bring back his things."</p> + +<p>"Ah!" rejoined Forester, "that's it. I thought there must be some such +reason as that. You have lost your character with James, and I advise +you to acquire a new one as soon as you can. Besides, you have done +him injustice this evening. You represented him as refusing you his +knife because he was unaccommodating and selfish, whereas it was +only proper regard to the safety of his property. What you said was +calculated to make an unfavorable impression on my mind against him, +and one which would have been unjust."</p> + +<p>Marco perceived that it was so, and was silent.</p> + +<p>"I am sorry that your knife is rusty," resumed Forester. "Perhaps I +can get it open for you."</p> + +<p>"How?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Why, I believe the best way is to soak the joint in oil. The oil will +insinuate itself into the joint, and then we can get hold of the blade +with a pair of nippers, or something of the kind, and open it; and +then, by working it to and fro a few times, the rust will work out, +and the knife be as good as it was before. If it is very rusty indeed, +this plan will not answer."</p> + +<p>"What must be done in that case?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"The only way then is to carry it to some kind of smith and get him to +punch out the rivet. Then we can take the blade out entirely. By this +means we can clean it of its rust, and then put it in again with a new +rivet. If you will give me your knife to-morrow, I will try to put it +in order for you again, in one or the other of these ways.</p> + +<p>"And now," continued Forester, after a short pause, "it is time for me +to go down, unless you have something which you wish to say."</p> + +<p>Although it was not unusual for Forester to close his evening +conversation in this manner, Marco's attention was particularly +arrested by the excellent opportunity which this remark afforded him +to make his confession. He really wished to make it,--but he did not +know how to begin. He wished that his cousin would ask him something +about it, or introduce the subject in some way or other, but Forester +was silent. Presently he rose, came to Marco's bedside, and asked him +if he was warm enough,--for the nights at this season of the year were +beginning to be cool.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "I'm very comfortable."</p> + +<p>"Well, then, good night." So Forester took the lamp and walked slowly +toward the door.</p> + +<p>"Cousin Forester," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"What?" said Forester.</p> + +<p>"Don't go just yet."</p> + +<p>Forester turned back and advanced to the foot of the bed. There was a +high foot-board at the foot of the bed, and Forester leaned upon it +with the lamp in his hand.</p> + +<p>"Is there any thing that you want to say to me?"</p> + +<p>Marco was silent. He looked distressed and embarrassed, and moved his +head restlessly on his pillow.</p> + +<p>"There's something wrong, isn't there, Marco," said Forester, "that +you are thinking whether to confess to me or not? If there is, do just +as you choose about it. I like to have you confess what you have done +that is wrong, but then, if you do it at all, it must be done of your +own accord."</p> + +<p>"Well," said Marco, "I want to tell you about my going away to play +this forenoon."</p> + +<p>"How long were you gone?" asked Forester.</p> + +<p>"Pretty much all the forenoon," replied Marco.</p> + +<p>"Well," said Forester, "I am very glad you concluded to confess it of +your own accord, but I know all about it."</p> + +<p>Marco started up in his bed and looked his cousin in the face, and +said,</p> + +<p>"Why, cousin Forester, how did you know?"</p> + +<p>"To prove to you that I really did know, I will tell you what you did. +You got out of the window soon after I went away, and went over into +Mr. Eldon's garden, where George Eldon and Samuel Warner were digging +worms for bait. Then you went with them down to the river. You hid +behind them when you passed in sight of the house, for fear that +father would see you, as he was out in the yard, pruning trees. +Then you went down to the river and sat on a log under some bushes, +fishing. After a while you spied an old log canoe, drifting down the +river, and the other boys waded out and got it. Then you all got into +it and paddled about a while, and afterward got carried over the rips +and upset in the water. Your cap drifted down the stream, and you +went after it in the canoe and got it. After that, you took off your +stockings and wrung out the water from them, and then came home. You +got into the study only about a quarter of an hour before I came."</p> + +<p>Marco listened to this minute account of his adventures with eager +interest, wondering how his cousin could have obtained so early and +such complete information. After Forester had concluded, he paused a +moment and breathed a long sigh. Then he laid his head down upon his +pillow again, saying,</p> + +<p>"Well, I don't see how you found it out; and I am sorry that you did, +for I meant to have told you all about it myself."</p> + +<p>Marco seemed really disappointed at having lost the opportunity to +make his full confession, but Forester told him that he considered +that he <i>had</i> made full confession. "You made up your mind to +do it," said he, "and you did begin, and it was the beginning which +required all the effort. I only refrained from asking you about the +details, from a wish to show you that I really knew all about it."</p> + +<p>"I don't see how you found it out," said Marco. "I suppose it must +have been that the boys told you."</p> + +<p>"No," replied Forester; "I have not seen either of the boys, or heard +any thing from them, directly or indirectly."</p> + +<p>"Then you must have watched me yourself," said Marco, "instead of +going away."</p> + +<p>"Do you think," said Forester, "that I would pretend that I was going +away, and then just go out a little way and lie in wait to watch you?</p> + +<p>"Why, no,"--said Marco,--"I don't really suppose that you would."</p> + +<p>"No," said Forester, "I really went away nut of town. I went to visit +a sick man and help him make his will, and I did not return until just +before you saw me."</p> + +<p>"Then I don't see how you knew," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"It is of very little consequence to you to know that," said Forester, +"but I want to ask you a little more about the affair. Are you willing +to answer any question that I may ask?"</p> + +<p>Marco said that he was, and Forester asked him about the circumstances +which led him to go away. Marco explained to him how he saw the boys, +and what he thought that they were doing, and what induced him to go +and see them, and how he was prevented from coming back as he had +intended. There was an air of openness and honesty in the manner in +which Marco related these facts, which convinced Forester that he was +telling the truth.</p> + +<p>Forester was glad to find that it was not a deliberate and +preconcerted plan, between Marco and the other boys, to go off on this +expedition; for, bad as it was for Marco to allow himself to be drawn +away by such temptations, it would have been worse, or rather it would +have indicated a worse state of character, if he had deliberately +planned such a truancy.</p> + +<p>"Well," said Forester, as he was about to close the conversation, "I +am very glad that you concluded to confess your fault. I am very glad, +too, that you did not go a-fishing this afternoon under the sort of +permission which I gave you. I infer from these two things that you +wish to be cured of these faults, and to become a boy of firm moral +principle. Now it is a rule with me, generally, not to punish a boy +for what he confesses of his own accord. Still, I think it probable +it would be better for you to have some punishment for this. It would +help to make a strong impression upon your mind, and make it much more +easy for you to resist such temptations in time to come. But you +may decide this question yourself. If you choose to submit to a +punishment, and will tell me so to-morrow morning, I will think of +some suitable one for you. If you do not say any thing to me about it, +I shall not punish you." So saying, Forester bade Marco good night.</p> + +<p>The next morning, Marco met Forester on the stairs, as he was coming +down to breakfast, and told him that he thought he should feel better +to be punished. So Forester reflected upon the subject, and at nine +o'clock, when Marco went in to commence his studies, Forester told him +that he had concluded upon his punishment.</p> + +<p>"What is it to be?" said Marco.</p> + +<p>"It is for me not to allow you to study," replied Forester, "all this +forenoon, but to require you to sit still at your desk, with nothing +to do. You see it will be a sort of solitary imprisonment, only your +prison will in itself be a pleasant place."</p> + +<p>Marco thought that this would not be a very severe punishment, but he +found, in enduring it, that it was in fact much more severe than he +had imagined. He got very tired indeed, long before the forenoon was +out. He concluded that solitary imprisonment for years, in a gloomy +dungeon, must be a terrible punishment indeed.</p> + +<p>A year or two after this time, when Marco had been entirely cured of +all such faults, he one day asked Forester to explain to him how he +knew where he went on this memorable forenoon; and Forester willingly +explained it to him. It seems that Forester's father, though a very +gentle and kind-hearted man, was a very shrewd one, and having been +accustomed to the discovery, in the course of his practice, of all +sorts of pranks and roguery, was less disposed to place confidence in +others till he knew the confidence was deserved, than Forester himself +was, who had less experience. And when he knew that Forester had gone +away, leaving Marco alone, he doubted a little whether he would remain +industriously at his work. While he was thinking of this, he heard a +slight noise which Marco made with his feet against the clapboards of +the house in getting out the window. He therefore came into the study +a moment afterward, and found that Marco had gone. He looked out the +window and saw him going off toward the other boys. Just at that +moment the man came to help him prune his trees, but before he began +this work he went into the house to James, called him to a window and +pointed out Marco to him, and said,</p> + +<p>"I want you, James, to follow him, and keep in sight of him until he +returns, but if possible don't let him see you. Say nothing to +me about it, but give my son Forester an account of all that you +observe."</p> + +<p>James did as he was directed, and when Forester came back he told him +the whole story, just before Forester went into the study. So that +Forester knew all about it, before Marco saw him. James managed the +affair very adroitly, for he kept himself entirely out of sight except +in one instance, and that was when the boys fell into the water. He +then rushed toward them for fear that they might be drowned, but +he stopped on the bank when he saw that there was no danger, and +disappeared again before Marco had time to recognize him.</p> +</div> + + +<div class="chapter" id="ch09"> +<h2>Chapter IX.</h2> + +<h3>Boating.</h3> + + + +<p>The alterations and improvements, which Forester had ordered in the +boat, were completed at the time promised. Marco said that it would +require a crew of eight to man the boat properly: six oarsmen, a +bowman, and a coxswain. Marco pronounced this word as if it was spelt +<i>coxen</i>. This is the proper way to pronounce it. It means the one +who sits in the stern, to steer the boat and direct the rowers. In +fact, the coxswain is the commander of the boat's crew.</p> + +<p>"<i>I</i> will be bowman," said Marco, "and you can be coxswain, and +then we shall want six boys for oarsmen."</p> + +<p>"You will have to explain to me then what my duties will be," said +Forester, "for I don't even know what a coxswain is."</p> + +<p>"Why, he's the commander," said Marco. "He gives all the orders."</p> + +<p>"Then you must be coxswain at first," said Forester, "for I don't know +any thing about it. You have got to teach us all. After I have learned +to manage a boat with six oars, man-of-war fashion, I should like to +be coxswain sometimes very much. And it seems to me," added Forester, +"that you and I had better go down first alone, until you get me +taught, and then we can get the boys to come afterward."</p> + +<p>"O no," said Marco, "you'll all learn easily enough together. I can +tell you all exactly what to do."</p> + +<p>Forester acceded to this proposal, and they made out a list of six +boys, and Forester authorized Marco to invite them to come. "Be sure," +said Forester, "to tell their parents that we are going out in a boat, +and tell them that I am going too." Marco did this. The boys all +gladly accepted the invitation. They came first to the house, and then +proceeded by a path, from the foot of the garden, which led to the +mill-pond. It was about half-past one when they reached the boat.</p> + +<p>Here there was a great scene of confusion, as the boys all commenced +talking and asking questions together. They found the boat in fine +order, being perfectly tight and dry, and the new seats being all in +their places. The oars, however, were not there. Forester recommended +to Marco to send a detachment of his men, to go to the wagon-maker's +shop and get them. So Marco sent off three of the boys, calculating +very correctly that they could bring two oars apiece. Before many +minutes they returned, each of the boys having two oars, one on each +shoulder.</p> + +<p>The other boys immediately began to take the oars, and they all +advanced together toward the boat, to get in.</p> + +<p>"Stop," exclaimed Marco, "stop, boys! you must not go aboard without +an order. I'm coxswain; you must wait till I tell you, before one of +you goes aboard. John, come out."</p> + +<p>John, who had stepped into the boat, came back again on hearing this +peremptory order, and the boys waited on the bank. Marco then +told them to put the oars in. The boys began to pitch them in, in +confusion, some falling upon the thwarts, and some into the bottom of +the boat.</p> + +<p>"No,--stop," said Marco; "that isn't the way. Put 'em in in order."</p> + +<p>"Yes, put 'em in order," said John. "Let's put 'em in order."</p> + +<p>"Lay 'em along the thwarts," said Marco, "the blades forward."</p> + +<p>Marco explained to the boys how to place the oars. They were laid +along the middle of the thwarts so as to leave room to sit by the side +of them. They were placed in such a manner that the handle of one came +upon each seat.</p> + +<p>"<i>Aboard!</i>" said Marco, in a military tone.</p> + +<p>The boys did not understand that order, and of course did not obey it.</p> + +<p>"<i>Aboard</i>, I say!" repeated Marco; "when I say <i>Aboard</i>, you +must all get into the boat."</p> + +<p>With this explanation of the word of command, the boys understood what +they were to do, and got aboard the boat as fast as they could. There +was much confusion among them in getting their seats. Several of them +began to take up their oars, until they were forbidden to do so by +Marco, in a loud voice.</p> + +<p>"You must not touch the oars," said he, "until I say <i>Toss</i>. Then +you must take them and toss them right up in the air."</p> + +<p>"How?" said one of the boys, named Joseph. "How, Marco?"</p> + +<p>This question was scarcely heard amid the confusion.</p> + +<p>"Be silent, boys; don't talk, and don't stop to ask <i>how</i>, but do +just as I tell you."</p> + +<p>Marco was so much accustomed to the idea which sailors attach to +the word <i>toss</i>, and to the manner in which they perform the +evolution, that he forgot how many different ways there might be of +tossing up an oar. The proper way is, when the command is given, for +each oarsman to raise the blade of his oar quick, but gently, into the +air, letting the end of the handle rest upon the thwart. It is then in +a position to be let down into the water conveniently when the next +order, which is, <i>Let fall</i>, is given.</p> + +<p>The raising of the oars, and then letting them fall, all exactly +together, by the crew of a man-of-war's boat, makes a very pretty +spectacle.</p> + +<p>The boys, however, knew nothing about this, for Marco, as it was all +very plain and familiar to him, did not realize the necessity of +making very minute explanations to such new recruits as those +that were under his command. Accordingly, when the order came to +<i>toss</i>, some of the boys sat still, looking at Marco, and not +knowing what to do; others raised their oars into the air, some one +way and some another; and Joseph, who was a little discomposed by the +rebuff he had met with, concluded that he would obey as literally as +possible, let what would come of it and he gave his oar a high toss +into the air. It fell at a short distance from him into the water, +went down for a moment out of sight, and then, shooting out for half +its length, it fell over upon its side and began to float away.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus15.png" alt=""Toss."" />"Toss."</p></div> + +<p>Hereupon ensued just such a scene of laughter shouts, and confusion +as might have been expected. All began to shout out exclamations and +orders, and to give directions how to proceed to recover the lost oar. +The boys whose oars were still left, thrust them confusedly into the +water, and began pushing, poking, and paddling with them, in order to +get the boat out to where Joseph's oar was floating. All this time +Forester remained on the bank, laughing at this specimen of nautical +command and subordination.</p> + +<p>After a time the oar was recovered, and Marco, after much scolding and +vociferation, got his crew in order again. Forester said that he would +remain where he was, on the bank, until Marco had tried his oarsmen a +little. So Marco went on giving his orders. He succeeded finally in +getting the boys all in their seats again, with their oars in their +hands.</p> + +<p>"Now, boys, mind," said he, "and I'll tell you exactly what to do. +<i>Attention!</i> When I say <i>Attention</i>, you must all stop talking. +<i>Attention!</i> Now you mustn't speak a word. You must hold your oars out +over the water and have them all ready, the handles in your hands, and +when I say <i>Give way</i>, then you must all begin to row, all together +exactly, so as to keep the stroke. You must keep the stroke with the +stroke-oarsman."</p> + +<p>But the boys did not know who the stroke-oarsman was, and they began +clamorously to inquire, notwithstanding the injunction to silence +which they had received. Marco explained to them that the +stroke-oarsman was the one who sat nearest to him, that is, the one +farthest aft. As the oarsmen were all sitting with their backs toward +the bow of the boat, their faces were toward the stern, and therefore +the one who sat farthest aft could be seen by the rest. This is the +reason why the thwart which is farthest aft is made the seat of the +best oarsman, and the others are required to make their motions keep +time with his. For the oars in a boat that is fully manned are so +close together, that, unless they keep time exactly with each other, +the blades would cross and hit one another in utter confusion. But +if they keep the stroke, as they call it, exactly together, all goes +right. For this reason the oarsman who sits aft, by whose oar the +movements of all the other oars are to be regulated, is called the +stroke-oarsman.</p> + +<p>The boys, however, knew nothing of all this. Marco contented himself +with giving one general direction to them, to keep the stroke with +the stroke-oarsman, and to begin when he gave the order, "<i>Give +way</i>." Accordingly, after all were silent again, the oars being +extended over the water, and Forester standing on the bank watching +the operation, Marco called out in the tone of command, "<i>Give +way!</i>"</p> + +<p>The boys immediately began to row, all looking at the stroke-oarsman, +but failing entirely to keep time with him. The oars thumped against +each other, crossed each other, and made all manner of confusion. +Some could not get into the water, and others could not get out; and +Joseph's oar, which somehow or other came out too suddenly, while he +was pulling hard upon it, caused him to pitch backward off his seat +and tumble over into the bottom of the boat.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus16.png" alt="Bad Rowing." />Bad Rowing.</p></div> + +<p>"<i>Oars!</i>" said Marco, "OARS!"</p> + +<p>What Marco meant by <i>oars</i> they did not know, so they paid no +attention to the command, but some stopped rowing in despair, while +others kept on, banging the blades of the oars against one another, +and plashing the water, but produced no effect whatever in respect to +propelling the boat. In the mean time the air was filled with shouts +of laughter and loud vociferations.</p> + +<p>"<i>Oars!</i>" exclaimed Marco again, with the voice of a colonel at +the head of his regiment. "<i>Oars!</i> Why don't you stop when I say +<i>Oars</i>?"</p> + +<p>The boys began to stop, shouting to one another, "Stop!" "Stop!" In a +few minutes all was still again. The boys began to take their oars in +and one of them rose and said,</p> + +<p>"Poh! this is all nonsense. You can't do any thing with oars. I'd +rather have one good paddle than all the oars in New York."</p> + +<p>In fact, Marco himself began to despair. He uttered some impatient +exclamations, and tried to paddle the boat toward the shore. But he +found he was almost as awkward in managing a paddle, as the other boys +were in working oars. He succeeded, however, at last, in getting the +boat to the shore, and then he told the boys that they might as well +get out, for they could not do any thing at all about rowing.</p> + +<p>"You don't seem to get along very well, Marco," said Forester: "what +is the matter?"</p> + +<p>"Why, I havn't got any crew. They don't know any thing about it."</p> + +<p>"It seems to me the fault is in the commander," said Forester.</p> + +<p>"In me?" said Marco. "Why, I ordered them right, but they wouldn't +obey."</p> + +<p>"Yes, your orders would have been right, if you had had a trained +crew. But you don't manage in the right way to teach raw recruits."</p> + +<p>"I wish you would try, then, cousin Forester," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Well," said Forester, "I have no objection to try. Boys, are you +willing to have me for commander?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir," "Yes, sir," said all the boys.</p> + +<p>"I shall be a great deal more strict than Marco," said Forester. "So I +don't expect that you will like me. But I will try. I don't want quite +so many oarsmen to begin with; I should rather teach a few at a time. +Are there any of you that would like to come ashore, and let the rest +practice first?"</p> + +<p>None of the boys moved. They all wished to practice first. This was +just as Forester expected.</p> + +<p>"Very well," said Forester; "I know how I can thin out my crew. As +fast as I find that you don't obey my orders, I shall put you ashore."</p> + +<p>"But suppose we don't understand?" said one of the boys.</p> + +<p>"I shall explain fully beforehand what you are to do. And, Marco, you +must observe how I manage, and then you will know another time. When +you have got any thing to teach, the art consists in dividing the +lesson into a great many very short steps, and letting your pupils +take one at a time."</p> + +<p>Forester knew nothing about managing a boat's crew until that day, but +he had observed very attentively all the orders which Marco had given, +and noticed their meaning, and thus he was prepared to manoeuver the +boat as far as Marco had gone in giving his orders. He accordingly +stepped into the boat and took Marco's place; while Marco himself +walked forward and took his place at the bow of the boat, saying that +he was going to be bowman.</p> + +<p>"Marco," said Forester, "you say that when the order is +<i>Attention</i>, the crew must be silent; what is the order when I +want to give them liberty to talk again?"</p> + +<p>"<i>Crew at ease</i>" said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Very well. Now, boys, when I say <i>Attention</i>, you must be still, +look at me, hear all I say, and obey the orders as exactly as you can, +but ask no questions and give me no advice, nor speak to one another, +till I say, <i>Crew at ease</i>. Then you can talk again. Perhaps two +or three of you will disobey, and I have no objection to that, as I +should like some excuse for putting some of you ashore."</p> + +<p>Forester smiled as he said this, and every boy determined that he +would not be the one to be sent ashore.</p> + +<p>"<i>Attention!</i>" said Forester.</p> + +<p>Forester then put his paddle into the water and paddled the boat out +into the pond a little way. While he was doing this, there was a dead +silence on board the boat. Not a boy spoke a word; and when, at last, +Forester stopped paddling, the boat floated on a little way gently +through the water, and not a sound was to be heard except the distant +barking of a dog on the opposite shore.</p> + +<p>"<i>Crew at ease</i>," said Forester. The boys laughed, changed their +positions, and began to talk.</p> + +<p>"I didn't get any of you ashore then," said Forester, "but I shall +succeed the next time, for I shall watch my opportunity when you are +all busy talking, and say, <i>Attention</i>, suddenly; then you will +not all stop in an instant, but some will go on just to finish their +sentence, and this will be disobeying the order, and so I shall get +you ashore."</p> + +<p>The boys laughed; they thought that it was not very good policy for +Forester to give them this warning of his intention, as it put +them all upon their guard. Presently the word of command came very +suddenly--"<i>Attention!</i>" Every voice was hushed in an instant; +the boys assumed immediately an erect position, and looked directly +toward Forester.</p> + +<p>"Joseph," said Forester, "when I give order <i>Toss</i>, you are +to take up your oar and raise the blade into the air, and hold it +perpendicularly, with the end of the handle resting on the thwart by +your side, on the side of the boat opposite to the one on which you +are going to row,--<i>Toss!</i>"</p> + +<p>So Joseph raised his oar in the manner directed, the other boys +looking on.</p> + +<p>"Let it down again," said Forester. Joseph obeyed.</p> + +<p>"<i>Crew at ease</i>," said Forester.</p> + +<p>Forester acted very wisely in not keeping the attention of the crew +very long at a time. By relieving them very frequently, he made the +distinction between being under orders and at ease a very marked +and striking one, so that the boys easily kept it in mind. In a few +moments he commanded attention again, with the same success as before. +He then ordered another boy to toss his oar, then another, and so on, +until he had taught the movement to each one separately. He gave to +each one such explanations as he needed, and when necessary he made +them perform the evolution twice, so as to be sure that each one +understood exactly what was to be done. Then Forester gave the command +for them all to toss together, and they did so quite successfully. The +oars rose and stood perpendicularly like so many masts; while Forester +paddled the boat slowly through the water. Then he directed the boys +to let the oars down again, gently, to their places along the thwarts, +and put the crew at ease.</p> + +<p>The boys perceived now that they were making progress. They were +gaining slowly, it is true, but surely, and Marco saw where the cause +of his failure was. He had not realized how entirely ignorant all +these boys were of the whole mystery of managing an oar and of acting +in concert; and besides, he had not had experience enough as a +teacher, to know how short the steps must be made, in teaching any +science or art which is entirely new.</p> + +<p>In the same slow and cautious manner, Forester taught the boys to let +the blades of their oars fall gently into the water, at the command, +"<i>Let fall</i>." He taught one at a time, as before, each boy +dropping the blades into the water and letting the middle of the oar +come into the row-lock, while he held the handle in his hands ready +to row. Then, without letting them row any, he ordered them to +<i>toss</i> again; that is, to raise the oars out of the water and +hold them in the air, with the end of the handle resting upon the +thwart. He drilled them in this exercise for some time, until they +could go through it with ease, regularity, and dispatch. He then gave +the order, "<i>Crew at ease</i>," and let the boys rest themselves and +enjoy conversation.</p> + +<p>While they were resting, Forester paddled them about. The boys asked +him when he was going to let them row, and Forester told them that +perhaps they had had drilling enough for one day, and if they chose he +would not require any thing more of them, but would paddle them about +and let them amuse themselves. But they were all eager to learn to +row. So Forester consented.</p> + +<p>He taught them the use of the oar, in the same slow and cautious +manner by which his preceding instructions had been characterized. He +made one learn at a time, explaining to him minutely every motion. As +each one, in turn, practiced these instructions, the rest looked on, +observing every thing very attentively, so as to be ready when their +turn should come. At length, when they had rowed separately, he tried +first two, and then four, and then six together, and finally got them +so trained that they could keep the stroke very well. While they were +pulling in this manner, the boat would shoot ahead very rapidly. When +he wanted them to stop, he would call out, "<i>Oars</i>." This was +the order for them to stop rowing, after they had finished the stroke +which they had commenced, and to hold the oars in a horizontal +position, with the blades just above the water, ready to begin again +whenever he should give the command.</p> + +<p>At first the boys were inclined to stop immediately, even if they were +in the middle of a stroke, if they heard the command, <i>oars</i>. But +Marco said that this was wrong; they must finish the stroke, he said, +if they had commenced it, and then all take the oars out of the water +regularly together. Forester was careful too to give the order always +between the middle and the end of a stroke, so that the obeying of the +order came immediately after the issuing of it.</p> + +<p>By this means Forester could stop them in a moment, when any thing +went wrong. He would order, "<i>Give way</i>," and then the boys would +all begin to pull their oars. As soon as any of them lost the stroke, +or whenever any oars began to interfere, or any other difficulty or +accident occurred, he would immediately give the order, "<i>Oars</i>." +This would instantly arrest the rowing, before the difficulty became +serious. Then, after a moment's pause he would say, "<i>Give way</i>," +again, when they would once more begin rowing all together. All this +time, he sat in the stern and steered the boat wherever they wanted to +go.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus17.png" alt="Good Rowing." />Good Rowing.</p></div> + +<p>Marco wished to have Forester teach the boys how to back water, and to +trail oars, and to put the oars apeak, and to perform various other +evolutions. But Forester was very slow in going on to new manoeuvers +before the old ones were made perfectly familiar. He accordingly spent +nearly an hour in rowing about the pond, up and down, to make the boys +familiar with the stroke. He found, as is, in fact, universally the +case with beginners in the art of rowing, that they were very prone to +row faster and faster, that is, to accelerate their strokes, instead +of rowing regularly, keeping continually the same time. They gradually +improved, however, in respect to this fault, and by the middle of the +afternoon Marco began to think that they were quite a good crew. +They practiced several new evolutions during the latter part of the +afternoon, and just before tea time they all went home, much pleased +with the afternoon's enjoyment, and with the new knowledge and skill +which they had acquired. They also planned another excursion the +following week.</p> +</div> + + +<div class="chapter" id="ch10"> +<h2>Chapter X.</h2> + +<h3>An Expedition.</h3> + + + +<p>Forester and Marco got their boat's crew well trained in the course of +a week or two, and one pleasant day in September they planned a long +expedition in their boat. The boys collected at the house of the owner +of the boat, at one o'clock. Two of them carried a large basket which +Forester had provided. It was quite heavy, and they did not know what +was in it; but they supposed that it was a store of some sort of +provisions for a supper, in case they should be gone so long as to +need a supper. Forester carried a hatchet also.</p> + +<p>At the proper word of command, the boys got into the boat and took +their several stations. Marco took his place forward to act as bowman. +It is the duty of the bowman to keep a lookout forward, that the boat +does not run into any danger; and also, when the boat comes to land, +to step out first and hold it by the painter, that is, the rope which +is fastened to the bow, while the others get out. Marco had a pole, +with an iron spike and also an iron hook in the end of it, which he +used to <i>fend off</i> with, as they called it, when the boat was in +danger of running against any obstacle. This was called a boat-hook.</p> + +<p>"<i>Attention!</i>" said Forester, when the boys were all seated.</p> + +<p>"<i>Toss!</i>"</p> + +<p>Hereupon the boys raised the oars into the air, ready to let them down +into the water.</p> + +<p>"<i>Let fall!</i>" said Forester. The oars all fell gently and +together into their places.</p> + +<p>"<i>Give way!</i>" said Forester.</p> + +<p>The boat began immediately to glide rapidly over the water, under the +impulse which the boys gave it in rowing. "<i>Crew at ease</i>," said +Forester.</p> + +<p>So the boys went on rowing, but understood that they had liberty to +talk. One of them wished to know where Forester was going with them; +but Forester said it was entirely contrary to the discipline aboard +a man-of-war for the crew to ask the captain where they were going. +"Besides," said Forester, "though I could easily tell you, I think you +will enjoy the expedition more, to know nothing about it beforehand, +but to take every thing as it comes."</p> + +<p>Forester steered in such a manner as to put the head of the boat +toward a bank at some distance from where they started, on which there +was a thick forest of firs and other evergreens, growing near the +water. When they got pretty near the land, he gave the order for +attention, that they might observe silence in going through whatever +manoeuvers were required here. The next order was, <i>Oars</i>. At +this the oarsmen stopped rowing, and held their oars horizontally over +the water. The boat in the mean time was gliding on toward the shore.</p> + +<p>"<i>Aboard!</i>" said Forester.</p> + +<p>The crew then gently raised their oars into the air, and passed them +over their heads into the boat, laying them upon the thwarts in their +proper position, along the middle of the boat. By this order the crew +supposed that Forester was going to land.</p> + +<p>"Bear a hand, Mr. Bowman," said Forester, "and fend off from the +shore."</p> + +<p>Forester, by means of his paddle, had steered the boat up to a log +which lay in the edge of the water, and Marco, at first fending off +from the log, to keep the boat from striking hard, and then holding on +to it with his hook, got it into a good position for landing, and held +it securely.</p> + +<p>"<i>Crew ashore</i>," said Forester.</p> + +<p>The crew, who had learned all these orders in the course of the +repeated instructions which Forester and Marco had given them, began +to rise and to walk toward the bow of the boat and to go ashore. Marco +landed first, and held the boat with his boat-hook, while the rest got +out. Forester then ordered Marco to make the boat fast, until they +were ready to embark again.</p> + +<p>Forester then went up in the woods a little way, with his hatchet +in his hand, and began to look about among the trees. Finally, he +selected a small tree, with a round, straight stem, and began to cut +it down. The boys gathered around him, wondering what it could be for. +Forester smiled, and worked on in silence, declining to answer any of +their questions. Marco said it was for a mast, he knew, but when they +asked him where the sail was, he seemed perplexed, and could not +answer.</p> + +<p>As soon, however, as the tree was cut down, it was evident that it was +not intended to be used as a mast, for Forester began at once to cut +it up into lengths of about two feet long. What could be his design, +the boys were utterly unable to imagine. He said nothing, but ordered +the boys to take these lengths, one by one, and put them into the +boat. There were five in all. Then he ordered the crew on board again. +Marco got in last. When all were seated, the order was given to shove +off, the oars were <i>tossed</i>--then <i>let fall</i> into the water. +He ordered them to <i>back water</i> first, by which manoeuver the +boat was backed off from the land into deep water. Then he commanded +them to <i>give way</i>, and at the same time bringing the stern of +the boat round by his paddle, the boat was made to shoot swiftly down +the stream.</p> + +<p>The boat went rapidly forward along the shores of the pond, and +presently, on coming round a wooded point, the mills appeared in +sight. As they approached the mills, they kept pretty near the shore, +and at length landed just above the dam.</p> + +<p>Forester ordered the crew ashore, at a place where there was a road +leading down to the water's edge. This road was made by the teams +which came down to get logs and lumber from the water. At Forester's +direction, the boys drew the bow of the boat up a little way upon the +land. Then he ordered the boys to take out the pieces of the stem of +the little tree, and he placed one of them under the bow as a roller. +The boys then took hold of the sides of the boat, three on each side, +each boy opposite to his own row-lock, while Marco stood ready to put +under another roller. The ascent was very gradual, so that the boat +moved up easily, and the boys were very much surprised and delighted +to see their boat thus running up upon the land.</p> + +<p>It seemed to them an exercise of great power to be able to take so +large a boat so easily and rapidly up such an ascent upon the land. +They were aided to do it by two principles. One was the combination of +their strength in one united effort, and the other was the influence +of the rollers in preventing the friction of the bottom of the boat +upon the ground.</p> + +<p>Presently the whole length of the boat was out of water and resting +on four rollers, which Marco had put under it, one by one, as it had +advanced. Forester would then call out, "<i>Ahead with her!</i>" when +the boys would move about two steps. Then Forester would give the +command, "<i>Hold on</i>," and they would stop. By this time one of +the rollers would come out behind, and Marco would take it up and +carry it round forward, and place it under the bow, and Forester +would then say, "<i>Ahead with her!</i>" again, and the boat would +immediately advance again up the acclivity.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus18.png" alt="The Portage." />The Portage.</p></div> + +<p>In a very few minutes the boat was thus rolled up into a sort of a +road, where the way was level. Here it went very easily. Presently it +began to descend, and soon the boys saw that Forester was taking a +sort of path which led by a gentle slope down to the water immediately +below the mill. They were very much pleased at this, for, as they had +had a great many excursions already on the mill-pond, they had become +familiar with it in all its parts, and they were much animated at the +idea of exploring new regions. In going down to the water on the lower +side of the mill, they had, of course, no exertion to make to draw the +boat, as its own weight was more than sufficient to carry it down upon +the rollers. They only had to hold it back to prevent its running down +too fast, and to keep it properly guided.</p> + +<p>"It goes down pretty easy," said Marco; "but I don't see how you are +ever going to get it back again."</p> + +<p>It was, in fact, a long and rather steep descent. The boys thought +that it would require far more strength than they could exercise, to +bring the boat <i>up</i> such an inclination. Forester told them not +to fear. He said that a good commander never put too much upon his +men, or voluntarily got them into any difficulty without planning +beforehand a way to get out.</p> + +<p>They soon got down to the water's edge again. Here, instead of the +broad and smooth pond which they had above the dam, they found a +stream eddying, and foaming, and flowing rapidly down between rocks +and logs. There was a bridge across the stream too, a short distance +below. The boys were a little inclined to be afraid to embark, in what +appeared to be a rather dangerous navigation, but they had confidence +in Forester, and so they readily obeyed when Forester ordered the crew +aboard.</p> + +<p>"Now, Mr. Bowman," said Forester, "keep a sharp lookout ahead for +rocks and snags, and fend off well when there is any danger."</p> + +<p>So Marco kneeled upon a small seat at the bow of the boat, and looked +into the water before him, while Forester propelled and guided the +boat with his paddle. They advanced slowly and by a very tortuous +course, so as to avoid the rocks and shallows, and at length, just +above the bridge, they came to a wider and smoother passage of water: +and here Forester ordered the oars out. There was only room for them +to take four or five strokes before they came to the bridge, and under +the bridge there was only a very narrow passage where they could go +through. This passage was between one of the piers and a gravel +bed. As they advanced toward it, Forester called out, "<i>Give way +strong!</i>" and all the boys pulled their oars with all their +strength, without, however, accelerating the strokes. This gave +the boat a rapid headway, and then Forester gave the order to +<i>trail</i>, when the boys simultaneously lifted the oars out of the +row-locks and let them drift in the water alongside of the boat. As +the boat was advancing very swiftly, the oars were immediately swept +in close to her sides, and thus were out of the way, and the boat +glided safely and swiftly through the passage, and emerged into a +broader sheet of smooth water beyond.</p> + +<p>"<i>Recover!</i>" said Forester. The boys then, by a peculiar +manoeuver which they had learned by much practice, brought back their +oars into the row-locks, and raised the blades out of the water, so +as to get them into a position for rowing. "<i>Give way!</i>" said +Forester, and immediately they were all in motion, the boat gliding +swiftly down the stream.</p> + +<p>After they had gone on in this way a few minutes, Forester ordered the +oars <i>apeak</i>, and put the crew at ease. When the oars are apeak, +they are drawn <i>in</i> a little way, so that the handle of each oar +may be passed under a sort of cleat or ledge, which runs along on the +inside of the boat near the upper edge of it. This keeps the oar firm +in its place without the necessity of holding it, the handle being +under this cleat, while the middle of the oar rests in the row-lock. +Thus the oarsmen are relieved from the necessity of holding their +oars, and yet the oars are all ready to be seized again in a moment, +whenever it becomes desirable to commence rowing.</p> + +<p>Meantime the boat slowly drifted down the stream. The water was here +deep and comparatively still, and the boys amused themselves with +looking over the sides into the depths of the water. They glided +noiselessly along over various objects,--now a great flat rock, now +a sunken tree, and now a bed of yellow sand. Every now and then, +Forester would order the oars out, and make the oarsmen give way for +a few strokes, so as to give the boat what they called steerage way, +that is, way through the water, so that holding the paddle in one +position or the other would steer it. In this way Forester guided the +boat in the right direction, keeping it pretty near the middle of the +stream.</p> + +<p>This mill-stream, as has already been stated, emptied into the river, +and the boat was now rapidly approaching the place of junction. In a +few minutes more the river came into view. The boys could see it at +some distance before them, running with great rapidity by a rocky +point of land which formed one side of the mouth of the brook.</p> + +<p>"Now, boys," said Forester, "is it safe for us to go out into that +current?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "by all means,--let us go."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps we shall upset in the rips," said some of the boys.</p> + +<p>"No matter if we do," said Marco; "it is not deep in the rips, and of +course there is no danger."</p> + +<p>"That is in our favor certainly," said Forester. "Whenever the current +sets strong, there it is sure to be shallow, so that if we upset +we should not be drowned; and where it is deep, so as to make it +dangerous for us to get in, it is always still, and thus there is no +danger of upsetting."</p> + +<p>"What is the reason of that?" said one of the boys.</p> + +<p>"The reason is given in this way," said Forester, "in the college +mathematics. The velocity of a stream is inversely as the area of the +section."</p> + +<p>The boys did not understand such mathematical phraseology as this, and +so Forester clothed his explanation in different language. He said +that where the stream was shallow or narrow, the current must be more +rapid, in order to get all the water through in so small a space, but +where it is deep, it may move slowly.</p> + +<p>Forester landed his crew upon the rocky point, where they had a very +pleasant view up and down the river. He proposed to them to have their +luncheon there, and to this they agreed. So they went back to the edge +of the rocks, where there was a little grove of trees, and they sat +down upon a log which had been worn smooth by the action of the water +in floods, and bleached by the sun.</p> + +<p>There were plenty of dry sticks and slabs lying about upon the shore, +which Forester ordered the crew to collect in order to build a fire. +It was not cold, and they had no need of a fire for any purposes +of cooking, but a fire would look cheerful and pleasant, and they +accordingly made one. Forester had some matches in his pocket. Two of +the crew brought the basket from the boat, and when they had opened +it, they found an abundant store of provisions. There was a dozen or +more of round cakes, and a large apple-pie, which, as there were just +eight of them, gave forty-five degrees to each one. There was also a +jug of milk, and a silver mug, which Forester's mother had lent them +for the excursion, to drink out of.</p> + +<p>The boys, whose appetites had been sharpened by their exertions in the +portage of the boat round the falls, and in rowing, did not cease +to eat until the provisions were entirely exhausted, and then they +carried the empty basket back to the boat. Soon after this, Forester +summoned what he called a council of war, to consider the question +whether they had better go down the river. He said he wanted their +true and deliberate judgment in the case. He did not wish them to say +what they would like, merely, but what they thought, on the whole, +was best. He told them that he should not be <i>governed</i> by their +advice, but, after hearing all that they had to say, he should act +according to his own judgment.</p> + +<p>"Then what's the use of asking us at all?" said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Why, what you will say may modify my judgment. I did not say that I +shall decide according to my judgment as it is now, but as it will be +after I have heard what you will have to say. I shall be influenced +perhaps by your reasons, but I shall decide myself. That is the theory +of a council of war. The commander may be influenced by the arguments +of his subalterns, but he is not governed by their votes."</p> + +<p>Forester then called upon each of the boys, in succession, to give his +opinion on the point. Marco was in favor of going down the river, but +all the rest, though they said that they should like to go very much, +thought it would not answer, as it would be almost impossible to get +the boat up again over the rips. After the consultation was concluded, +Forester said, "Well, boys, you have all given wise opinions except +Marco, and his is not wise. Now we'll go aboard the boat."</p> + +<p>"<i>Crew aboard!</i>" said Forester. The other orders followed in +rapid succession: <i>Attention! Toss! Let fall! Backwater! Oars! Give +way!</i> The boys considered it settled, on hearing what Forester had +said of the wisdom of their several opinions, that they were now going +back toward the mill; but how they were going to get the boat back +above the dam they did not know, though they did not doubt that +Forester had some good plan which he had not explained to them. +Instead, however, of turning the head of the boat up the stream, +Forester pointed it toward the river. They supposed that he was going +out to the edge of the river, and that then he would turn and come +back; but, to their utter amazement, he pushed boldly on directly into +the current, and then, putting his helm hard up and calling out to the +crew to give way strong, the boat swept round into the very center of +the stream and shot down the river over the rips like an arrow.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus19.png" alt="The Expedition." />The Expedition.</p></div> + +<p>"Give way, boys, hearty," said Forester. "Give way strong."</p> + +<p>The boys pulled with all their strength, and the boat went swifter +and swifter. Forester kept it in the middle of the current, where the +water was deepest, though even here it was very shallow. Marco, in +the mean time, who was stationed at the bows, kept a sharp lookout +forward, and gave Forester notice of any impending danger. They soon +got through the rips and came to the deep and still water below, where +the current was gentle and the surface smooth. Here Forester ordered +the oars apeak, and the crew at ease.</p> + +<p>"We never shall get back in the world," said one of the boys; "forty +men couldn't row the boat up those rips."</p> + +<p>"Let us try," said Forester. So he ordered the oars out again, and +put the boat under way. He brought her head round so as to point up +stream, and calling upon the crew to give way strong, he forced her +back into the rapid water. They went on a few rods, but long before +they reached the most rapid part, they found that with all their +exertions they could make no progress. The boat seemed stationary. +"<i>Oars</i>," said Forester. The boys stopped rowing, holding their +oars in the air, just above the water. Forester then, by means of his +paddle, turned the boat round again, saying, "Well, if we can't go up, +we can go down stream." He then ordered the crew to give way again, +and they began to glide along swiftly down the river.</p> + +<p>The boys wondered how Forester was going to get back, but he told them +to give themselves no concern on that score. "That responsibility +rests on me," said he.</p> + +<p>"But how came you to come down here," said Marco, "when you said my +advice wasn't good?"</p> + +<p>"I said your opinion was not wise. The boys who advised me not to come +were wiser than you. They gave better advice, so far as they and you +understood the case. But I know something which you do not, as is +usual with commanders,--and therefore I came down. In view of all that +<i>you</i> know, it would have been wisest to have gone back, but in +view of all that <i>I</i> know, it is wisest to come down."</p> + +<p>The curiosity of the boys was very much excited to know what it could +be that Forester knew which rendered coming down the river wise; but +Forester would make no explanations. He said that commanders were not +generally very communicative to their crews. In the mean time the boat +went on, sometimes shooting swiftly through the rapids, and sometimes +floating in a more calm and quiet manner on the surface of the stiller +water. In this way they went on more than a mile, enjoying the voyage +very highly, and admiring the varied scenery which was presented to +their view at every turn of the stream.</p> + +<p>At one place the boys landed upon a small sandy beach under some +overhanging rocks. They amused themselves in climbing about the rocks +for a time, and then they were ordered aboard again, and sailed on.</p> + +<p>Now it happened that the river, in the part of its course over which +this voyage had been performed, took a great circuit, and though they +had followed its course for more than a mile, they were now drawing +near to a place which was not very far from Forester's father's +house,--being about as much below it, as the place where the boat +belonged in the mill-pond was above it. As they approached the point +where the river turned again, Marco, who was looking out before, saw a +sort of landing, where there was a man standing, together with a yoke +of oxen. It was just sunset when they approached this spot. When they +arrived at it, the whole mystery was explained, for they found that +the man was James, who lived at Forester's father's, and the oxen were +his father's oxen. James had come down, under an appointment which +Forester had secretly made with him, with the oxen and a drag, and by +means of them he hauled the boat across to the mill-pond again, by +a back road which led directly across the pastures, and lanched it +safely again into the water close to the dwelling of its owner. So the +boys had, as it were, the pleasure of sliding down hill, without the +labor of drawing their sleds up again.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus20.png" alt="The Drag." />The Drag.</p></div> + +<p>Marco was very much pleased with this expedition. Forester told him +when they got home, that the Indians often carried their canoes around +falls, or from one river to another, and that such carrying-places +were called <i>portages</i>.</p> +</div> + + +<div class="chapter" id="ch11"> +<h2>Chapter XI.</h2> + +<h3>Lost In The Woods.</h3> + + + +<p>While Marco Paul was in Vermont, he and Forester had a remarkable +adventure in the woods. They got lost in fact, and for a time it +seemed quite doubtful how they were ever to find their way home. It +happened thus.</p> + +<p>One morning in the fall of the year, Marco, walking along toward the +barn with James, asked James what he was going to do that day.</p> + +<p>"I expect that I am going to gather apples," said James.</p> + +<p>"Well," said Marco. "Are you going in the cart?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," said James.</p> + +<p>"And may I go with you?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said James.</p> + +<p>"And help gather the apples? said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said James.</p> + +<p>"And drive the oxen a little way?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said James.</p> + +<p>"Well." said Marco. "I will run and get my goad-stick."</p> + +<p>Marco went toward the house intending to go in and get his goad-stick. +On his way he met his uncle. His uncle asked him whether James was out +in the barn. Marco said that he was, and his uncle then asked him to +go and request James to come to him. Marco did so, and he and James +then came along toward the house together.</p> + +<p>Marco's uncle stood upon the step of the door.</p> + +<p>"James," said he, "I was thinking that we ought to send for the +horses;--and the apples ought to be gathered too. Which is it best to +do?"</p> + +<p>"I hardly know, sir," said James. "It is high time that the apples +were gathered, and yet we promised to send for the horses to-day."</p> + +<p>"I can go and get the horses," said Marco,--"just as well as not. +Where is it?"</p> + +<p>"Oh no," said his uncle. "It is ten or fifteen miles from here. Isn't +it, James?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," said James, "by the road. I suppose it is about <i>four</i> +miles through the woods. I was intending to walk there, through the +woods, and then to come home round by the road. It is rather a rough +road for horses through the woods."</p> + +<p>"Let cousin Forester and me go," said Marco. "I will go and ask him."</p> + +<p>So Marco went and found Forester. When Forester heard of the plan +he was quite inclined to accede to it. He had been much engaged +in studying for some time, and had had very little exercise and +recreation, so that he was easily persuaded to undertake an +expedition. The plan was all soon agreed upon. The horses had been put +out to pasture at a farmer's up the river about twelve miles. In going +that twelve miles the river took a great turn, so that in fact the +farm where the horses were pastured was not, in a straight line, +more than four miles from Mr. Forester's house. But the intermediate +country was a desolate and almost impassable region of forests and +mountains. There was, indeed, a sort of footpath by which it was +possible for men to get through, but this path was dangerous, and in +fact almost impracticable for horses. So James had formed the plan of +walking through the woods by the path, and then of coming home by the +road, riding one of the horses and leading the other.</p> + +<p>Forester and Marco concluded to adopt the same plan; except that in +coming home there would be just a horse a-piece for them to ride. They +put up some provisions to eat on the way, packing them in Marco's +knapsack. The knapsack, when it was ready, was strapped upon Marco's +back, for he insisted on carrying it. Forester consented to this +arrangement, secretly intending, however, not to allow Marco to carry +the load very far.</p> + +<p>Forester asked James if there would be any difficulty about the way. +James said that there would not be. The path, though it was not an +easy one to travel, was very easy to find.</p> + +<p>"You go on," said he, "along the back road about three quarters of a +mile, and then you will come to a small school-house on the left hand +side of the road, on a sort of hill. It is in the Jones district."</p> + +<p>"What sort of a school-house is it?" asked Forester.</p> + +<p>"It is a small school-house, with a little cupola upon the top of it," +said James, "for a bell. It stands upon a knoll by the side of the +road. Just beyond it the main road turns to the right, and there is +a narrower road leading off to the left through a gate. You must go +through that gate and then follow the path into the woods."</p> + +<p>"We can find it, I think," said Forester.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "I know the place very well."</p> + +<p>Forester said he thought that they should find the way without any +difficulty, and so bidding his uncle and aunt good-bye, he and Marco +set out.</p> + +<p>They went through the garden, and from the garden they passed out +through a small gate into the orchard. Marco wished to go this way in +order to get some apples. He chose two from off his favorite tree and +put them into the knapsack, and took another in his hand to eat by the +way. Forester did the same, only he put the two that he carried with +him, into his pockets.</p> + +<p>From the orchard the travelers walked across a field and down into +the glen, and after crossing a brook upon some stepping-stones, they +ascended upon the other side, and presently climbing over a fence, +they came out into what James had called the back road. They walked +along upon this road, for about three quarters of a mile, until at +last they came in sight of the school-house. Marco spied it first.</p> + +<p>"There," said Marco, "that is the school-house."</p> + +<p>"How do you know that that is the one?" asked Forester.</p> + +<p>"Oh, I know the Jones district very well," said Marco.</p> + +<p>In New England the tract of country included within the jurisdiction +of a town, is divided into districts for the establishment and support +of schools. These districts are called school-districts, and each one +is generally named from some of the principal families that happen to +live in it. It happened that there were several families of the name +of Jones that lived in this part of the town, and so their district +was called the Jones district.</p> + +<p>"How do you happen to know it?" said Forester.</p> + +<p>"Oh, I came out here two or three times with Thomas Jones to set my +squirrel trap," said Marco. "There goes Thomas Jones now."</p> + +<p>"Where?" asked Forester.</p> + +<p>"There," said Marco, pointing along the road a little way.</p> + +<p>Forester looked forward, and saw in the road before them a boy walking +toward the school-house, with his slate under his arm. Beyond the boy, +upon the knoll on the left side of the road, was the school-house +itself.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus21.png" alt="The School-House." />The School-House.</p></div> + +<p>The school-house was not far from the road, and there was a little +grove of trees behind it. Beyond the school-house, and almost directly +before them, Marco and Forester saw the road turning a little to the +left toward the gate.</p> + +<p>"There is the gate," said Marco, "that we are to go through."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester, "that must be the one."</p> + +<p>Forester and Marco walked on until they came to the school-house. +Thomas got to the school-house before them, and went in. Forester and +Marco passed on and went through the gate. They then went on beyond +the gate a little way till they came to a pair of bars. Marco took +down all but the topmost bar, and Forester, stooping down, passed +under. Marco attempted to do the same; but forgetting that he had a +knapsack upon his back, he did not stoop low enough, and gave his +knapsack such a knock as almost threw him down. Fortunately there was +nothing frangible inside, and so no damage was done. One of his apples +was mellowed a little; that was all.</p> + +<p>The path led the travelers first across a rough and rocky pasture, and +then it suddenly entered a wood where every thing wore an expression +of wild and solemn grandeur. The trees were very lofty, and consisted +of tall stems, rising to a vast height and surmounted above with a +tuft of branches, which together formed a broad canopy over the heads +of the travelers, and produced a sort of somber twilight below. Birds +sang in plaintive notes on the tops of distant trees, and now and then +a squirrel was seen running along the ground, or climbing up the trunk +of some vast hemlock or pine.</p> + +<p>"I hope that we shall not lose our way in these woods," said Forester.</p> + +<p>"Oh, there is no danger of that," rejoined Marco. "The path is very +plain."</p> + +<p>"It seems plain here," said Forester, "and I presume that there can +not be any danger, or James would have recommended to us to go the +other way."</p> + +<p>"We shall come home the other way," said Marco. "I wonder if there are +any saddles. Twelve miles would be too far to ride bareback."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester, "there are saddles. I asked James about that."</p> + +<p>The path which Forester and Marco were pursuing soon began to +ascend. It ascended at first gradually, and afterward more and more +precipitously, and at length began to wind about among rocks and +precipices in such a manner, that Marco said he did not wonder at all +that James said it would be a rough road for horses.</p> + +<p>"I think it is a very rough road for boys," said Forester.</p> + +<p>"Boys?" repeated Marco. "Do you call yourself boys."</p> + +<p>"For <i>men</i> then," said Forester.</p> + +<p>"But <i>I</i> am not a man," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Then I don't see how I can express my idea," said Forester.</p> + +<p>Marco's attention was here diverted from the rhetorical difficulty in +which Forester had become involved, by a very deep chasm upon one side +of the path. He went to the brink of it and could hear the roaring of +a torrent far below.</p> + +<p>"I mean to throw a stone down," said Marco. He accordingly, after +looking around for a moment, found a stone about as large as his head. +This stone he contrived to bring to the edge of the precipice and then +to throw it over. It went thundering down among the rocks and trees +below, while Marco stood upon the brink and listened to the sound of +the echoes and reverberations. He then got another stone larger than +the first, and threw that down; after which he and Forester resumed +their journey.</p> + +<p>The path, though it was a very rough and tortuous one, was pretty +plain; and it is probable that the travelers would have found no +difficulty in following it to the end of their route, had it not been +for an occurrence which they had not at all anticipated, but which was +one, nevertheless, that has often taken place to confuse the steps of +mountain travelers and make them lose their way. This occurrence was a +fall of snow.</p> + +<p>It was not late enough in the year for snow upon the lowlands, but +snow falls very early in the autumn upon the summits of mountains. +Marco and Forester had not anticipated stormy weather of any kind, +when they left home; for the wind was west and the sky was clear. +When, however, they had accomplished about one half of their journey, +large masses of fleecy clouds began to drive over the mountains, +and presently, all at once, it began to snow. Marco was extremely +delighted to see the snow falling. Forester was not so much pleased. +On the other hand, he looked somewhat concerned. He did not at first +think how the snow could do them any serious injury, but he seemed to +have an undefined sense of danger from it, and appeared uneasy. They +both, however, walked on.</p> + +<p>The region through which the path led at the time when the snow came +on, was a tract of flat land on the summit of the mountainous range, +with small and scattered trees here and there upon it. The best thing, +probably, for the travelers to have done in the emergency would have +been to have turned round the moment it began to snow, and go back as +fast as possible by the way that they came, as long as they were sure +of the path, and then to wait until the fallen snow had melted. If +they found then that the snow did not melt, so that they could see the +path again, it would be better to return altogether, as their chance +of being able to follow the path back toward their home would be much +greater than that of pursuing it forward; for they might expect to +find some guidance, in going back, by their recognition of the place +which they had passed in ascending.</p> + +<p>Forester, however, did not happen to think of this; and so when it +began to snow, his only immediate desire was to go forward as fast as +possible, so as to get into the woods again where he and Marco would +be in some measure under shelter.</p> + +<p>Marco finding that Forester appeared somewhat anxious, began to feel +some sentiment of fear himself.</p> + +<p>"Who would have thought," said he, "that we should have got caught out +in this snow-storm?"</p> + +<p>"Oh, it is not a snow-storm," replied Forester. "It is only a little +snow flurry. It will be over in a few minutes."</p> + +<p>"How do you know that it is not going to be a snow-storm?" asked +Marco.</p> + +<p>"Because storms never come out of the west," replied Forester.</p> + +<p>It snowed, however, faster and faster, and the ground soon began to be +entirely whitened. Forester pressed on, but he soon found himself at +a loss for his way. The air was so filled with the descending flakes, +that he could see only a very short distance before him. The view +of the forests and mountains was cut off on every side, and nothing +presented itself to the eye but the dim forms of the rocks and trees +which were near. These, too, were indistinct and shapeless. The ground +was soon entirely covered, and all hope of finding the path entirely +disappeared. Forester went back then a short distance, endeavoring to +retrace his steps. He followed the foot-prints a little way, but all +traces of them were soon obliterated. When he found that the steps +could no longer be seen, he went toward a tree which he saw rising +dimly at a little distance before him. The tree proved to be a large +hemlock, with wide-spreading branches. There was a place under this +tree where the ground was bare, having been sheltered from the snow by +the branches of the tree. There were some rocks too lying under this +tree. Forester walked up to them and sat down. Marco followed his +example.</p> + +<p>"Well, Marco," said Forester, "we are really lost."</p> + +<p>"And what are we going to do?" asked Marco, with a countenance of +great concern.</p> + +<p>"The first thing is," said Forester, "to open the knapsack, and see +what there is inside that is good to eat."</p> + +<p>So Forester took the knapsack off from his shoulders,--for he had +taken it from Marco some time before, and laying it upon a large +flat stone by his side, he began to open it, and to take out the +provisions.</p> + +<p>Forester was afraid that he and Marco had got themselves into somewhat +serious difficulty, but he wished to teach Marco that in emergencies +of such a nature, it would do no good to give way to a panic, or to +unnecessary anxiety. So he assumed an unconcerned and contented air, +and made arrangements for the luncheon, just as if they had stopped +there to eat it of their own accord, and without being in any +difficulty whatever about the prosecution of the journey.</p> + +<p>Marco, however, seemed to be quite uneasy.</p> + +<p>"What are we going to do?" said he. "If we get lost in this +snow-storm, we shall have to stay in the woods perhaps all night."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester, "that we can do. We have done that before."</p> + +<p>Forester here alluded to an occasion on which he and Marco had spent +the night in a hut in the woods, when traveling in Maine.</p> + +<p>"But we had an axe then," said Marco, "to make a camp."</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Forester, "that is true. I don't think, however, that +we shall have to stay in the woods all night now. We have <i>three</i> +chances for avoiding it."</p> + +<p>"What are the three?" said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Why, in the first place," replied Forester, "we can stay where we are +until it stops snowing,--in fact it has almost stopped now. Then I +presume that the sun will come out, and in half an hour melt away all +the snow. Then we can find our path again, and go on."</p> + +<p>"But I don't think it is certain that we can find our path again," +said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Nor do I," said Forester, "but there's a chance of it. I did not say +that we had three certainties, but three chances."</p> + +<p>"Well," said Marco; "go on; what are the other two?"</p> + +<p>"If we can not find the path," said Forester, "either because the snow +does not melt, or for any other reason, then we can remain where we +are until night, and the people, finding that we do not come home, +will send up for us."</p> + +<p>"And how can they find us?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Why, they will come up the path, of course, and we can not be very +far from the path, for we only lost it a few minutes before we came +here. Of course they will come up very near to this place;--and they +will come shouting out, every few minutes, as loud as they can, and so +we shall hear them."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "I see; that is a pretty good chance."</p> + +<p>"The third chance for us," said Forester, "is to go down into the +first glen or valley that we can find, and then we shall probably come +to a stream. Then we can follow the stream down to the river."</p> + +<p>"How do you know that it goes to the river?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"All mountain streams do, of course," said Forester. "They go down +wherever they can find a valley or a hollow,--joining together and +taking in branches as they proceed,--until they get down into the +level country, and then they flow to the nearest river, and so to the +sea. Now I know that the river takes a bend around this mountainous +tract, and almost surrounds it, and all the streams from it must flow +into the river without going very far. We could follow one down, +though we should probably find the way very rough and difficult."</p> + +<p>"Let us try it," said Marco.</p> + +<p>This plan was decided upon, and so, when the snow squall was entirely +over and the sun had come out Marco and Forester, taking their +departure from the great tree and guiding their course by the sun, +the travelers set out, proceeding as nearly in a straight line as +possible, intending to go on in that manner until they should come to +some stream, and then to follow the stream down to the river. The plan +succeeded perfectly well. They soon descended into a valley, where +they found a little brook flowing over a bed of moss-covered stones. +They followed this brook down for about a mile, when they came to a +junction between the brook that they were following and another one. +After this junction of course the stream was larger, and in many +places they found it difficult to get along. The way was encumbered +with bushes, rocks, and fallen trees, and in one place the stream +flowed in a foaming torrent through the bottom of a deep chasm, with +sides rising directly out of the water. Here the travelers were +obliged to find a way at a distance from the brook--guiding +themselves, however, by the sound of its roaring. After passing the +chasm, they got back to the stream again.</p> + +<p>They came out into the open country about one o'clock, and found to their +great joy that they were very near the place where the horses were +pastured. The horses were all ready for them, and Forester and Marco +mounted them immediately, and set out on their return home.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus22.png" alt="The Ride." />The Ride.</p></div> + +<p>It was very pleasant riding along at their ease on horseback, after all +the dangers and fatigues that they had encountered. A part of the way +the road which they took lay along the shore of the river. Marco enjoyed +this part of the ride very much indeed.</p> + +<p>They reached home about sunset, with an excellent appetite for supper. +Marco was very enthusiastic in his manner of giving his aunt Forester +an account of his adventures, and he said, in conclusion, that he would +just as lief get lost in the woods as not. It was good fun.</p> +</div> +<br /> +<hr class="full" /> + + +<div>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 11681 ***</div> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/11681-h/images/illus01.png b/11681-h/images/illus01.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d6ea1d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-h/images/illus01.png diff --git a/11681-h/images/illus02.png b/11681-h/images/illus02.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d78d224 --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-h/images/illus02.png diff --git a/11681-h/images/illus03.png b/11681-h/images/illus03.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..cc74647 --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-h/images/illus03.png diff --git a/11681-h/images/illus04.png b/11681-h/images/illus04.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c66b03c --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-h/images/illus04.png diff --git a/11681-h/images/illus05.png b/11681-h/images/illus05.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..83560e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-h/images/illus05.png diff --git a/11681-h/images/illus06.png b/11681-h/images/illus06.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..872c9e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-h/images/illus06.png diff --git a/11681-h/images/illus07.png b/11681-h/images/illus07.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..86308f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-h/images/illus07.png diff --git a/11681-h/images/illus08.png b/11681-h/images/illus08.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2b4cd8f --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-h/images/illus08.png diff --git a/11681-h/images/illus09.png b/11681-h/images/illus09.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9d62b99 --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-h/images/illus09.png diff --git a/11681-h/images/illus10.png b/11681-h/images/illus10.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..130842e --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-h/images/illus10.png diff --git a/11681-h/images/illus11.png b/11681-h/images/illus11.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0855dd0 --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-h/images/illus11.png diff --git a/11681-h/images/illus12.png b/11681-h/images/illus12.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4efc454 --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-h/images/illus12.png diff --git a/11681-h/images/illus13.png b/11681-h/images/illus13.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9159d9d --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-h/images/illus13.png diff --git a/11681-h/images/illus14.png b/11681-h/images/illus14.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..80f2cbe --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-h/images/illus14.png diff --git a/11681-h/images/illus15.png b/11681-h/images/illus15.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..497358e --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-h/images/illus15.png diff --git a/11681-h/images/illus16.png b/11681-h/images/illus16.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..963f4df --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-h/images/illus16.png diff --git a/11681-h/images/illus17.png b/11681-h/images/illus17.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d606bfa --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-h/images/illus17.png diff --git a/11681-h/images/illus18.png b/11681-h/images/illus18.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f57835c --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-h/images/illus18.png diff --git a/11681-h/images/illus19.png b/11681-h/images/illus19.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..864ed19 --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-h/images/illus19.png diff --git a/11681-h/images/illus20.png b/11681-h/images/illus20.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..de6fe7f --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-h/images/illus20.png diff --git a/11681-h/images/illus21.png b/11681-h/images/illus21.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..7d8bf5b --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-h/images/illus21.png diff --git a/11681-h/images/illus22.png b/11681-h/images/illus22.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5d3f0e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/11681-h/images/illus22.png diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e86824d --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #11681 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/11681) diff --git a/old/11681-h.zip b/old/11681-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b7d1756 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h.zip diff --git a/old/11681-h/11681-h.htm b/old/11681-h/11681-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..90250db --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h/11681-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,4816 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html + PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd"> +<html> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8" /> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of Marco Paul's Voyages and Travels; Vermont, by Jacob Abbott</title> +<style type="text/css"> + <!-- + + body { + margin : 5%; + font-family: Verdana, Arial, sans-serif; + } + + h1, h2, h3, h4 { + text-align: center; + font-weight: bold; + font-variant: small-caps + } + + .smallcaps { font-variant: small-caps } + + a { text-decoration: none; } + a:hover { background-color: #ffffcc } + + div.chapter { + margin-top: 4em; + } + + hr { + height: 1px; + width: 80%; } + hr.full { width: 100%; + height: 2px; } + div.note { + border-style: dashed; + border-width: 1px; + border-color: #000000; + background-color: #ccffcc; + width: 80%; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + font-size: .8em; + } + + div.image { + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + width: 50%; + } + + img { + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + border: none; + max-width: 100%; + } + a:link {color:blue; + text-decoration:none} + link {color:blue; + text-decoration:none} + a:visited {color:blue; + text-decoration:none} + a:hover {color:red} + pre {font-size: 9pt;} + +--> +</style> +</head> +<body> +<h1>The Project Gutenberg eBook, Marco Paul's Voyages and Travels; Vermont, by +Jacob Abbott</h1> +<pre> +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at <a href = "https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a></pre> +<p>Title: Marco Paul's Voyages and Travels; Vermont</p> +<p>Author: Jacob Abbott</p> +<p>Release Date: March 22, 2004 [eBook #11681]</p> +<p>Language: English</p> +<p>Character set encoding: utf-8</p> +<p>***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MARCO PAUL'S VOYAGES AND TRAVELS; VERMONT***</p> +<br /> +<br /> +<center> +<b>E-text prepared by Project Gutenberg Distributed Proofreaders</b></center> +<br /> +<br /> +<hr class="full" /> +<br /> +<div id="tp"> +<h1 class="title">Marco Paul's Voyages & Travels</h1> + +<h2 class="subtitle">Vermont</h2> + +<h2 class="author">[by Jacob Abbott]</h2> + +<h3>1852</h3> +</div> + + +<div id="preface"> +<h2>Preface.</h2> + + +<p>The design of the series of volumes, entitled <span class="smallcaps">Marco Paul's Adventures +in the Pursuit of Knowledge</span>, is not merely to entertain the reader +with a narrative of juvenile adventures, but also to communicate, in +connection with them, as extensive and varied information as possible, +in respect to the geography, the scenery, the customs and the +institutions of this country, as they present themselves to the +observation of the little traveler, who makes his excursions under the +guidance of an intelligent and well-informed companion, qualified to +assist him in the acquisition of knowledge and in the formation of +character. The author has endeavored to enliven his narrative, and to +infuse into it elements of a salutary moral influence, by means of +personal incidents befalling the actors in the story. These incidents +are, of course, imaginary--but the reader may rely upon the strict +and exact truth and fidelity of all the descriptions of places, +institutions and scenes, which are brought before his mind in the +progress of the narrative. Thus, though the author hopes that the +readers who may honor these volumes with their perusal, will be amused +and interested by them, his design throughout will be to instruct +rather than to entertain.</p> +</div> + + +<div id="toc"> +<h2>Contents.</h2> + + +<ol style="list-style-type: upper-roman"> + <li><a href="#ch01">Journeying</a></li> + <li><a href="#ch02">Accidents</a></li> + <li><a href="#ch03">The Grass Country</a></li> + <li><a href="#ch04">The Village</a></li> + <li><a href="#ch05">Studying</a></li> + <li><a href="#ch06">The Log Canoe</a></li> + <li><a href="#ch07">A Dilemma</a></li> + <li><a href="#ch08">A Confession</a></li> + <li><a href="#ch09">Boating</a></li> + <li><a href="#ch10">An Expedition</a></li> + <li><a href="#ch11">Lost In The Woods</a></li> +</ol> +</div> + +<div id="engravings"> +<h2>Engravings.</h2> + + +<ul style="list-style-type: none"> + <li><a href="images/illus01.png">The Great Elm</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus02.png">The Hill</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus03.png">The Accident</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus04.png">Who Are You?</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus05.png">The Lumber Box</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus06.png">The Tire</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus07.png">The Risk</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus08.png">The Study</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus09.png">Marco's Desk</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus10.png">Boat Adrift</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus11.png">Cap Gone</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus12.png">The Millman's House</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus13.png">Paddling</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus14.png">Marco's Room</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus15.png">Toss</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus16.png">Bad Rowing</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus17.png">Good Rowing</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus18.png">The Portage</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus19.png">The Expedition</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus20.png">The Drag</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus21.png">The School House</a></li> + <li><a href="images/illus22.png">The Ride</a></li> +</ul> +</div> + +<div id="series"> +<h2>Order Of The Volumes.</h2> + +<p>Marco Paul,</p> + +<ol style="list-style-type: upper-roman"><li>In New York.</li> +<li>On the Erie Canal.</li> +<li>In Maine.</li> +<li>In Vermont.</li> +<li>In Boston.</li> +<li>At the Springfield Armory.</li> +</ol> +</div> + +<div id="personae"> +<h2>Principal Persons</h2> + +<p> <span class="smallcaps">Mr. Baron</span>, a merchant of New York.</p> +<p> <span class="smallcaps">Marco</span>, his son, a boy about twelve years old.</p> +<p> <span class="smallcaps">John Forester</span>, Marco's cousin, about nineteen years old.</p> + +<p>Marco is traveling and studying under Forester's care.</p> +</div> + + + + +<h1 class="title">Marco Paul in Vermont.</h1> + + + +<div class="chapter" id="ch01"> +<h2>Chapter I.</h2> + +<h3>Journeying.</h3> + + + +<p>When Mr. Baron, Marco's father, put Marco under his cousin Forester's +care, it was his intention that he should spend a considerable part +of his time in traveling, and in out-of-door exercises, such as might +tend to re-establish his health and strengthen his constitution. +He did not, however, intend to have him give up the study of books +altogether. Accordingly, at one time, for nearly three months, Marco +remained at Forester's home, among the Green Mountains of Vermont, +where he studied several hours every day.</p> + +<p>It was in the early part of the autumn, that he and Forester went to +Vermont. They traveled in the stage-coach. Vermont lies upon one side +of the Connecticut river, and New Hampshire upon the other side. The +Green Mountains extend up and down, through the middle of Vermont, +from north to south, and beyond these mountains, on the western side +of the state, is lake Champlain, which extends from north to south +also, and forms the western boundary. Thus, the Green Mountains divide +the state into two great portions, one descending to the eastward, +toward Connecticut river, and the other to the westward, toward lake +Champlain. There are, therefore, two great ways of access to Vermont +from the states south of it; one up the Connecticut river on the +eastern side, and the other along the shores of lake George and lake +Champlain on the western side. There are roads across the Green +Mountains also, leading from the eastern portion of the state to the +western. All this can be seen by looking upon any map of Vermont.</p> + +<p>Marco and Forester went up by the Connecticut river. The road lay +along upon the bank of the river, and the scenery was very pleasant. +They traveled in the stage-coach; for there were very few railroads in +those days.</p> + +<p>The country was cultivated and fertile, and the prospect from the +windows of the coach was very fine. Sometimes wide meadows and +intervales extended along the river,--and at other places, high hills, +covered with trees, advanced close to the stream. They could see, too, +the farms, and villages, and green hills, across the river, on the New +Hampshire side.</p> + +<p>On the second day of their journey, they turned off from the river by +a road which led into the interior of the country; for the village +where Forester's father resided was back among the mountains. They had +new companions in the coach too, on this second day, as well as a new +route; for the company which had been in the coach the day before were +to separate in the morning, to go off in different directions. Several +stage-coaches drove up to the door of the tavern in the morning, just +after breakfast, with the names of the places where they were going +to, upon their sides. One was marked, "Haverhill and Lancaster;" +another, "Middlebury;" and a third, "Concord and Boston;" and there +was one odd-looking vehicle, a sort of carryall, open in front, and +drawn by two horses, which had no name upon it, and so Marco could not +tell where it was going. As these several coaches and carriages drove +up to the door, the hostlers and drivers put on the baggage and bound +it down with great straps, and then handed in the passengers;--and +thus the coaches, one after another, drove away. The whole movement +formed a very busy scene, and Marco, standing upon the piazza in front +of the tavern, enjoyed it very much.</p> + +<p>There was a very large elm-tree before the door, with steps to climb +up, and seats among the branches. Marco went up there and sat some +time, looking down upon the coaches as they wheeled round the tree, in +coming up to the door. Then he went down to the piazza again.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus01.png"alt="The Great Elm" />The Great Elm</p></div> + +<p>There was a neatly-dressed young woman, with a little flower-pot in +her hand, standing near him, waiting for her turn. There was a small +orange-tree in her flower-pot. It was about six inches high. The sight +of this orange-tree interested Marco very much, for it reminded him +of home. He had often seen orange-trees growing in the parlors and +green-houses in New York.</p> + +<p>"What a pretty little orange-tree!" said Marco. "Where did you get +it?"</p> + +<p>"How did you know it was an orange-tree?" said the girl.</p> + +<p>"O, I know an orange-tree well enough," replied Marco. "I have seen +them many a time."</p> + +<p>"Where?" asked, the girl.</p> + +<p>"In New York," said Marco. "Did your orange-tree come from New York?"</p> + +<p>"No," said the girl. "I planted an orange-seed, and it grew from +that. I've got a lemon-tree, too," she added, "but it is a great deal +larger. The lemon-tree grows faster than the orange. My lemon-tree is +so large that I couldn't bring it home very well, so I left it in the +mill."</p> + +<p>"In the mill?" said Marco. "Are you a miller?"</p> + +<p>The girl laughed. She was a very good-humored girl, and did not appear +to be displeased, though it certainly was not quite proper for Marco +to speak in that manner to a stranger. She did not, however, reply to +his question, but said, after a pause,</p> + +<p>"Do you know where the Montpelier stage is?"</p> + +<p>The proper English meaning of the word <i>stage</i> is a <i>portion of +the road</i>, traveled between one resting-place and another. But in +the United States it is used to mean the carriage,--being a sort of +contraction for <i>stage-coach</i>.</p> + +<p>"No," said Marco, "<i>we</i> are going in that stage."</p> + +<p>"I wish it would come along," said the girl, "for I'm tired of +watching my trunk."</p> + +<p>"Where is your trunk?" said Marco.</p> + +<p>So the girl pointed out her trunk. It was upon the platform of the +piazza, near those belonging to Forester and Marco. The girl showed +Marco her name, which was Mary Williams, written on a card upon the +end of it.</p> + +<p>"I'll watch your trunk," said Marco, "and you can go in and sit down +until the stage comes."</p> + +<p>Mary thanked him and went in. She was not, however, quite sure that +her baggage was safe, intrusted thus to the charge of a strange boy, +and so she took a seat near the window, where she could keep an eye +upon it. There was a blue chest near these trunks, which looked like a +sailor's chest, and Marco, being tired of standing, sat down upon this +chest. He had, however, scarcely taken his seat, when he saw a coach +with four horses, coming round a corner. It was driven by a small boy +not larger than Marco. It wheeled up toward the door, and came to a +stand. Some men then put on the sailor's chest and the trunks. Mary +Williams came out and got into the coach. She sat on the back seat. +Forester and Marco got in, and took their places on the middle seat. A +young man, dressed like a sailor, took the front seat, at one corner +of the coach. These were all the passengers that were to get in here. +When every thing was ready, they drove away.</p> + +<p>The stage stopped, however, in a few minutes at the door of a handsome +house in the town, and took a gentleman and lady in. These new +passengers took places on the back seat, with Mary Williams.</p> + +<p>This company rode in perfect silence for some time. Forester took +out a book and began to read. The gentleman on the back seat went to +sleep. Mary Williams and Marco looked out at the windows, watching the +changing scenery. The sailor rode in silence; moving his lips now and +then, as if he were talking to himself, but taking no notice of any +of the company. The coach stopped at the villages which they +passed through, to exchange the mail, and sometimes to take in new +passengers. In the course of these changes Marco got his place shifted +to the forward seat by the side of the sailor, and he gradually got +into conversation with him. Marco introduced the conversation, by +asking the sailor if he knew how far it was to Montpelier.</p> + +<p>"No," said the sailor, "I don't keep any reckoning, but I wish we were +there."</p> + +<p>"Why?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"O, I expect the old cart will capsize somewhere among these +mountains, and break our necks for us."</p> + +<p>Marco had observed, all the morning, that when the coach canted to +one side or the other, on account of the unevenness of the road, the +sailor always started and looked anxious, as if afraid it was going to +be upset. He wondered that a man who had been apparently accustomed +to the terrible dangers of the seas, should be alarmed at the gentle +oscillations of a stage-coach.</p> + +<p>"Are you afraid that we shall upset?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said the sailor, "over some of these precipices and mountains; +and then there'll be an end of us."</p> + +<p>The sailor said this in an easy and careless manner, as if, after all, +he was not much concerned about the danger. Still, Marco was surprised +that he should fear it at all. He was not aware how much the fears +which people feel, are occasioned by the mere novelty of the danger +which they incur. A stage-driver, who is calm and composed on his box, +in a dark night, and upon dangerous roads, will be alarmed by the +careening of a ship under a gentle breeze at sea,--while the sailor +who laughs at a gale of wind on the ocean, is afraid to ride in a +carriage on land.</p> + +<p>"An't you a sailor?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied his companion.</p> + +<p>"I shouldn't think that a man that had been used to the sea, would be +afraid of upsetting in a coach."</p> + +<p>"I'm not a <i>man</i>" said the sailor.</p> + +<p>"What are you?" said Marco.</p> + +<p>"I'm a boy. I'm only nineteen years old; though I'm going to be rated +seaman next voyage."</p> + +<p>"Have you just got back from a voyage?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said the sailor. "I've been round the Horn in a whaler, from +old Nantuck. And now I'm going home to see my mother."</p> + +<p>"How long since you've seen her?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"O, it's four years since I ran away."</p> + +<p>Here the sailor began to speak in rather a lower tone than he had done +before, so that Marco only could hear. This was not difficult, as the +other passengers were at this time engaged in conversation.</p> + +<p>"I ran away," continued the sailor, "and went to sea about four years +ago."</p> + +<p>"What made you run away?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"O, I didn't want to stay at home and be abused. My father used to +abuse me; but my mother took my part, and now I want to go and see +her."</p> + +<p>"And to see your father too," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"No," said the sailor. "I don't care for him. I hope he's gone off +somewhere. But I want to see my mother. I have got a shawl for her in +my chest."</p> + +<p>Marco was shocked to hear a young man speak in such a manner of his +father. Still there was something in the frankness and openness of the +sailor's manner, which pleased him very much. He liked to hear his odd +and sailor-like language too, and he accordingly entered into a +long conversation with him. The sailor gave him an account of his +adventures on the voyage; how he was drawn off from the ship one day, +several miles, by a whale which they had harpooned;--how they caught +a shark, and hauled him in on deck by means of a pulley at the end of +the yard-arm;--and how, on the voyage home, the ship was driven before +an awful gale of wind for five days, under bare poles, with terrific +seas roaring after them all the way. These descriptions took a strong +hold of Marco's imagination. His eye brightened up, and he became +restless on his seat, and thought that he would give the world for a +chance to stand up in the bow of a boat, and put a harpoon into the +neck of a whale.</p> + +<p>In the mean time, the day wore away, and the road led into a more and +more mountainous country. The hills were longer and steeper, and the +tracts of forest more frequent and solitary. The number of passengers +increased too, until the coach was pretty heavily loaded; and +sometimes all but the female passengers would get out and walk up the +hills. On these occasions Forester and Marco would generally walk +together, talking about the incidents of their journey, or the +occupations and amusements which they expected to engage in when they +arrived at Forester's home. About the middle of the afternoon the +coach stopped at the foot of a long winding ascent, steep and stony, +and several of the passengers got out. Forester, however, remained +in, as he was tired of walking, and so Marco and the sailor walked +together. The sailor, finding how much Marco was interested in his +stories, liked his company, and at length he asked Marco where he was +going. Marco told him.</p> + +<p>"Ah, if you were only going on a voyage with me," said the sailor, +"that would make a man of you. I wouldn't go and be shut up with that +old prig, poring over books forever."</p> + +<p>Marco was displeased to hear the sailor call his cousin an old +prig, and he felt some compunctions of conscience about forming and +continuing an intimacy with such a person. Still he was so much +interested in hearing him talk, that he continued to walk with him up +the hill. Finally, the sailor fairly proposed to him to run away and +go to sea with him.</p> + +<p>"O no," said Marco, "I wouldn't do such a thing for the world. +Besides," said he, "they would be after us, and carry me back."</p> + +<p>"No," said the sailor; "we would cut across the country, traveling in +the night and laying to by day, till we got to another stage route, +and then make a straight wake, till we got to New Bedford, and there +we could get a good voyage. Come," said he, "let's go to-night. I'll +turn right about. I don't care a great deal about seeing my mother."</p> + +<p>Though Marco was a very bold and adventurous sort of a boy, still he +was not quite prepared for such a proposal as this. In the course of +the conversation the sailor used improper and violent language too, +which Marco did not like to hear; and, in fact, Marco began to be a +little afraid of his new acquaintance. He determined, as soon as he +got back to the coach to keep near Forester all the time, so as not to +be left alone again with the sailor. He tried to hasten on, so as to +overtake the coach, but the sailor told him not to walk so fast; and, +being unwilling to offend him, he was obliged to go slowly, and keep +with him; and thus protracted the conversation.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus02.png" alt="The Hill." />The Hill.</p></div> + +<p>About half-way up the hill there was a small tavern, and the sailor +wanted Marco to go in with him and get a drink. Marco thought that he +meant a drink of water, but it was really a drink of spirits which +was intended. Marco, however, refused to go, saying that he was not +thirsty; and so they went on up the hill. At the top of the hill, the +stage-coach stopped for the pedestrians to come up. There was also +another passenger there to get in,--a woman, who came out from a +farm-house near by. The driver asked the sailor if he was not willing +to ride outside, in order to make room for the new passenger. But he +would not. He was afraid. He said he would not ride five miles outside +for a month's wages. Marco laughed at the sailor's fears, and he +immediately asked Forester to let <i>him</i> ride outside. Forester +hesitated, but on looking up, and seeing that there was a secure seat, +with a good place to hold on, he consented. So Marco clambered up +and took his seat with the driver, while the other passengers +re-established themselves in the stage.</p> +</div> + + +<div class="chapter" id="ch02"> +<h2>Chapter II.</h2> + +<h3>Accidents.</h3> + + + +<p>Marco liked his seat upon the outside of the stage-coach very much. He +could see the whole country about him to great advantage. He was very +much interested in the scenery, not having been accustomed to travel +among forests and mountains. The driver was a rough young man,--for +the boy who drove the coach up to the door was not the regular driver. +He was not disposed to talk much, and his tone and manner, in what he +did say, did not indicate a very gentle disposition. Marco, however, +at last got a little acquainted with him, and finally proposed to the +driver to let <i>him</i> drive.</p> + +<p>"Nonsense," said he, in reply, "you are not big enough to drive such a +team as this."</p> + +<p>"Why, there was a boy, no bigger than I, that drove the horses up to +the door when we started, this morning," replied Marco.</p> + +<p>"O yes,--Jerry,"--said the driver,--"but he'll break his neck one of +these days."</p> + +<p>"I didn't see but that he drove very well," said Marco.</p> + +<p>The driver was silent.</p> + +<p>"Come," persisted Marco, "let me drive a little way, and I'll do as +much for you some day."</p> + +<p>"You little fool," said the driver, "you never can do any thing for +me. You are not big enough to be of any use at all."</p> + +<p>Marco thought of the fable of the mouse and the lion, but since his +new companion was in such ill-humor, he thought he would say no more +to him. A resentful reply to the epithet "little fool," did in fact +rise to his lips, but he suppressed it and said nothing.</p> + +<p>It was fortunate for Marco that he did so. For whenever any person has +said any thing harsh, unjust, or cruel, the most effectual reply is, +generally, silence. It leaves the offender to think of what he has +said, and conscience will often reprove him in silence, far more +effectually than words could do it. This was the case in this +instance. As they rode along in silence, the echo of the words "little +fool," and the tone in which he had uttered them, lingered upon the +driver's ear. He could not help thinking that he had been rather harsh +with his little passenger. Presently he said,</p> + +<p>"I don't care though,--we are coming to a level piece of ground on +ahead here a little way, and then I'll see what you can make of +teaming."</p> + +<p>Marco was quite pleased at this unexpected result, and after ten or +fifteen minutes, they came to the level piece of road, and the driver +put the reins into Marco's hand. Marco had sometimes driven two +horses, when riding out with his father in a barouche, up the +Bloomingdale road in New York. He was therefore not entirely +unaccustomed to the handling of reins; and he took them from the +driver's hand and imitated the manner of holding them which he had +observed the driver himself to adopt, quite dexterously.</p> + +<p>The horses, in fact, needed very little guidance. They went along the +road very quietly of their own accord. Marco kept wishing that a +wagon or something else would come along, that he might have the +satisfaction of turning out. But nothing of the kind appeared, and he +was obliged to content himself with turning a little to one side, +to avoid a stone. At the end of the level piece of road there was a +tavern, where they were going to stop to change the horses, and Marco +asked the driver to let him turn the horses up to the door. The driver +consented, keeping a close watch all the time, ready to seize the +reins again at a moment's notice, if there had been any appearance of +difficulty. But there was none. Marco guided the horses right, and +drawing in the reins with all his strength, he brought them up +properly at the door; or rather, he seemed to do it,--for, in +reality, the horses probably acted as much of their own accord, being +accustomed to stop at this place, as from any control which Marco +exercised over them through the reins.</p> + +<p>There was, however, an advantage in this evolution, for Marco became +accustomed to the feeling of the reins in his hand, and acquired a +sort of confidence in his power over the horses,--greater to be sure +than there was any just ground for, but which was turned to a very +important account, a few hours afterward, as will be seen in the +sequel.</p> + +<p>The sailor went several times into the taverns on the way, in the +course of the afternoon, to drink, until, at length, he became +partially intoxicated. He felt, however, so much restrained in the +presence of the passengers within the coach, that he did not become +talkative and noisy, as is frequently the case in such circumstances; +but was rather stupid and sleepy. In fact, no one observed that any +change was taking place in his condition, until, at last, as he was +coming out from the door of a tavern, where he had been in to get +another drink, the driver said,</p> + +<p>"Come, Jack, you must get up with me now, there is another passenger +to get in here."</p> + +<p>Marco, who was still in his seat, holding the reins of the horses, +looked down, expecting that the sailor would make objections to this +proposal,--but he found, on the contrary, that Jack, as they called +him, acquiesced without making any difficulty, and allowed the driver +to help him up. The new passenger got inside. Forester felt somewhat +uneasy at having Marco ride any longer on the top, especially now that +the sailor was going up too. But the coach was full. He himself was +wedged into his seat, so that he could not get out easily. He knew, +too, that two or three of the passengers were going to get out at the +next stage, and so he concluded to let Marco remain outside until that +time, and then to take him in again.</p> + +<p>Marco's admiration for the sailor was very much diminished when he +saw how helpless he had rendered himself by his excesses, and how +unceremoniously the driver pulled and hauled him about, in getting him +into his seat.</p> + +<p>"There! hold on there," said the driver to him, in a stern +voice,--"hold on well, or you'll be down head foremost under the +horses' heels, at the first pitch we come to."</p> + +<p>The poor sailor said nothing, but grasped an iron bar which passed +from the top of the coach down by the side of the seat, and held on as +well as he could.</p> + +<p>They rode on in this manner for some miles, the head of the sailor +swinging back and forth, helplessly, as if he was nearly asleep. +Whenever Marco or the driver spoke to him, he either answered in a +thick and sleepy tone of voice, or he did not reply at all. Marco +watched him for a time, being continually afraid that he would fall +off. He could do nothing, however, to help him, for he himself was +sitting at one end of the seat while the sailor was upon the other, +the driver being between them. In the mean time the sun gradually went +down and the twilight came on, and as the shadows extended themselves +slowly over the landscape, Marco began to find riding outside less +pleasant than it had been before, and he thought that, on the whole, +he should be very glad when the time arrived for him to get into the +coach again, with his cousin.</p> + +<p>At length they came to a bridge, covered with planks, which led across +a small stream. It was in rather a solitary place, with woods on each +side of the road. Beyond the bridge there was a level piece of road +for a short distance, and then a gentle ascent, with a farmhouse near +the top of it, on the right hand side of the road. At the end of the +bridge, between the planks and the ground beyond them, there was a +jolt, caused by the rotting away of a log which had been imbedded in +the ground at the beginning of the planking. As it was rather dark, +on account of the shade of the trees, the driver did not observe this +jolt, and he was just beginning to put his horses to the trot, as they +were leaving the bridge, when the forward wheels struck down heavily +into the hollow, giving the front of the coach a sudden pitch forward +and downward. Marco grasped the iron bar at his end of the seat, and +saved himself; and the driver, who was habitually on his guard, had +his feet so braced against the fender before him, that he would not +have fallen. But the poor sailor, entirely unprepared for the shock, +and perhaps unable to resist it if he had been prepared, pitched +forward, lost his hold, went over the fender, and was tumbling down, +as the driver had predicted, head foremost, under the horses' heels. +The driver seized hold of him with one hand, but finding this +insufficient dropped his reins and tried to grasp him with both. In +doing it, however, he lost his own balance and went over too. He, of +course, let go of the sailor, when he found that he was going himself. +The sailor fell heavily and helplessly between the pole and the side +of one of the horses, to the ground. The driver followed. He seized +the pole with one hand, but was too late to save himself entirely, +and thinking there was danger of being dragged, and finding that the +horses were springing forward in a fright, he let himself drop through +to the ground also. The coach passed over them in a moment, as the +horses cantered on.</p> + +<p>All this passed in an instant, and Marco, before he had a moment's +time for reflection, found himself alone on his seat,--the driver run +over and perhaps killed, and the horses cantering away, with the reins +dangling about their heels. The first impulse, in such a case, would +be to scream aloud, in terror,--which would have only made the horses +run the faster. But Marco was not very easily frightened; at least, +he was not easily made crazy by fright. So he did not scream; and not +knowing what else to do, he sat still and did nothing.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus03.png" alt="The Accident." />The Accident.</p></div> + +<p>In the mean time, the passengers inside knew nothing of all this. Many +of them had been asleep when they came over the bridge. The jolt had +aroused them a little, but there was nothing to indicate to them +the accident which had occurred forward, so they quietly adjusted +themselves in their seats, and endeavored to compose themselves to +sleep again.</p> + +<p>The horses were well trained and gentle. They cantered on as far as +the level ground extended, and then they slackened their pace as +they began to rise the ascent. The idea then occurred to Marco, that +perhaps he might clamber down over the fender to the pole, and then +walk along upon that a little way till he could gather up the reins. +Then he thought that if he could get back again with them to the +driver's seat, perhaps he could stop the horses. Marco was an expert +climber. He had learned this art in his gymnasium at New York; so that +he had no fears in respect to his being able to get down and back +again. The only danger was, lest he might frighten the horses again +and set them to running anew.</p> + +<p>After a moment's reflection, he concluded that at any rate he would +try it; so he cautiously stepped over the fender and clambered down. +When his feet reached the pole, he rested them a moment upon it, and +clung with his hands to the fender and other parts of the front of the +coach. He found his position here more unstable than he had expected; +for the coach being upon springs, the forward part rose and fell with +many jerks and surges, as the horses traveled swiftly along, while the +pole was held in its position straight and firm. Thus the different +parts of his body were connected with different systems of motion, +which made his position very uncomfortable.</p> + +<p>He found, however, after a moment's pause, that he could stand, and +probably walk upon the pole; so he advanced cautiously, putting his +hands on the backs of the horses, and walking along on the pole +between them. The horses were somewhat disturbed by the strange +sensations which they experienced, and began to canter again; but +Marco, who felt more and more confidence every moment, pushed boldly +on, gathered up the reins, and got all the ends together. Then taking +the ends of the reins in one hand, he crept back, supporting himself +by taking hold of the harness of one of the horses with the other +hand. By this means he regained the coach, and then, though with some +difficulty, he clambered up to his seat again.</p> + +<p>He then endeavored to stop the horses by gathering the reins together, +and pulling upon them with all his strength; but it was in vain. The +horses had by this time reached a part of the road where it was more +level, and they began to press forward at a more rapid pace. Marco +thought of calling to Forester to get out of the window and climb +along the side of the coach to the box, in order to help him; but just +at that moment he saw that they were coming up opposite to the farm +house, which had been in sight, at a distance, when they were crossing +the bridge. So he thought that though he could not stop the horses, he +might perhaps have strength enough to turn them off from the road into +the farmer's yard; and that then they could be more easily stopped. In +this he succeeded. By pulling the off rein of the leaders with all his +strength, he was able to turn them out of the road. The pole horses +followed as a matter of course,--the coach came up with a graceful +sweep to the farmer's door, and then the horses were easily stopped. +The farmer came at once to the door, to see what strange company had +come to visit him in the stage,--his wife following; while several +children crowded to the windows.</p> + +<p>"What's here?" said a voice from the window of the coach,--"a +post-office?" They thought the stage had been driven up to the door of +some post-office.</p> + +<p>Marco did not answer; in fact he was bewildered and confounded at the +strangeness of his situation. He looked back over the top of the coach +down the road to see what had become of the driver. To his great joy, +he saw him running up behind the coach,--his hat crushed out of shape, +and his clothes dusty. The passengers looked out at the windows of the +stage, exclaiming,</p> + +<p>"Why, driver! what's the matter?"</p> + +<p>The driver made no reply. He began to brush his clothes,--and, taking +off his hat, he attempted to round it out into shape again.</p> + +<p>"What <i>is</i> the matter, driver?" said the passengers.</p> + +<p>"Nothing," replied he, "only that drunkard of a sailor tumbled off the +stage."</p> + +<p>"Where?" "When?" exclaimed half a dozen voices. "Is he killed?"</p> + +<p>"Killed? no," replied the driver; "I don't believe he is even +sobered."</p> + +<p>Forester and another gentleman then urgently asked where he was, and +the driver told them that he was "back there a piece," as he expressed +it.</p> + +<p>"What! lying in the road?" said Forester; "open the door, and let us +go and see to him."</p> + +<p>"No," said the driver; "he has got off to the side of the road, safe. +I don't believe he's hurt any. Let him take care of himself, and we'll +drive on."</p> + +<p>But Forester remonstrated strongly against leaving the poor sailor in +such a condition, and in such a place; and finally it was agreed that +the farmer should go down the road and see to him, so as to allow the +stage-coach with the passengers to go on.</p> + +<p>Forester was not willing, however, to have Marco ride outside any +longer; and so they contrived to make room for him within. As Marco +descended from his high seat, the driver said to him, as he passed +him, in a low voice,</p> + +<p>"How did you get the reins? I thought they all came down with me, +under the horses' heels."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "they did, and I climbed down upon the pole and got +them."</p> + +<p>"Well," said the driver, "you're a smart boy. But don't tell them +inside that I tumbled off. Tell them I gave you the reins, and jumped +down to see the sailor."</p> + +<p>After receiving this charge, Marco would have been under a strong +temptation to tell a falsehood, if the company in the coach had asked +him any questions about it. But they did not. They were so much +occupied in expressing their astonishment that the sailor did not +break his neck, that they asked very few questions, and after riding a +short time, they relapsed into silence again. The fact that both +the driver and the sailor escaped being seriously hurt, was not so +wonderful as it might seem. Horses have generally an instinctive +caution about not stepping upon any thing under their feet. If a +little child were lying asleep in the middle of a road, and a horse +were to come galloping along without any rider, the mother, who +should see the sight from the window of the house, would doubtless be +exceedingly terrified; but in all probability the horse would pass the +child without doing it any injury. He would leap over it, or go around +it, as he would if it were a stone. This is one reason why, in so many +cases, persons are run over without being hurt. The driver and the +sailor, however, fell rather behind the horses' heels, and escaped +them in that way, and they came down so exactly into the middle of the +road, that they were out of the way of the track of the wheels, and +thus they escaped serious injury.</p> + +<p>The misfortunes of the evening, however, did not end here. The road +was rather rough, and there were many ruts and joltings; and one or +two of the passengers seemed to feel some fear lest the stage should +upset. One, who sat near the door, put his arm out at the window over +the door, so as to get his hand upon the handle of the catch, in +order, as he said, to be ready to open the door and spring out, at a +moment's warning. The gentleman on the back seat advised him not to do +it.</p> + +<p>"If you have your arm out," said he, "the coach may fall over upon +it, and break it. That's the way people get hurt by the upsetting of +coaches, by thrusting out their legs and arms in all directions, when +they find they are going over, and thus get them broken. You ought to +fold your arms and draw in your feet, and when you find that we are +going over, go in an easy attitude, with all the muscles relaxed, as +if your body was a bag of corn."</p> + +<p>The passenger laughed and took his arm in; and all the other +passengers, seeing that the advice of the gentleman was reasonable, +concluded to follow it if they should have occasion. And they did have +occasion sooner than they had expected. For, just after dark, as they +were going down a long hill at a pretty rapid rate, with a wagon a +short distance before them, one of the horses of the wagon stumbled +and fell, which brought the wagon to a sudden stand just before the +coach. The driver perceived in an instant that there was not time to +stop his horses, and that the only chance was to turn out of the road +and drive by. The ground at the road-side was so much inclined, that +he was almost afraid to venture this expedient, but he had no time for +thought. He wheeled his horses out,--just escaped the hind wheel of +the wagon--ran along by the road-side a short distance, with the +wheels on one side, down very near the gutter,--and then, just as he +was coming back safely into the road again, the forward wheel nearest +the middle of the road, struck a small stone, and threw the coach +over. The top rested upon the bank, and the horses were suddenly +stopped. Sometimes, on such occasions, the <i>transom</i> bolt, as it +is called, that is, the bolt by which the forward wheels are fastened +to the carriage, comes out, and the horses run off with the wheels. It +did not come out in this case, however. The man who had put his arm +out of the window, immediately called out, in great alarm, "Hold the +horses! Hold the horses! Don't let the horses run and drag us." But +this vociferation was needless. A coach full of passengers and baggage +is a full load for four horses, when it is mounted on wheels. It would +require an exertion far beyond their strength to drag it when on its +side. The horses remained quiet, therefore, while the wagoner and the +driver, who was not hurt, opened the door in the upper side of the +coach. The passengers then climbed out, one by one, without injury. +Mary Williams came out last, with her orange-tree safe in her hand.</p> +</div> + + +<div class="chapter" id="ch03"> +<h2>Chapter III.</h2> + +<h3>The Grass Country.</h3> + + + +<p>The scene of confusion, produced by the double accident described in +the last chapter, was great, but not long continued. The wagoner got +his fallen horse up, and then the passengers, with the driver and +wagoner, all taking hold together, soon righted the stage. None of the +passengers were hurt, but the coach itself was so much injured that +the driver thought it was not safe to load it heavily again. The +female passengers got in, but the men walked along by the side of it, +intending to travel in that way about four miles to the next +tavern. Forester, however, was not inclined to take so long a walk. +Fortunately, at a small distance before them, was a farmhouse which +looked as if it belonged to a large and thrifty farmer. The great +barns and sheds, the neat yards, the well-built walls and fences, +and the large stock of cattle in the barn-yard, indicated wealth and +prosperity. Forester concluded to apply here for a lodging for the +night, for himself and Marco. The farmer was very willing to receive +them. So the driver took off their trunks, and then the stage-coach, +with the rest of the passengers, went on.</p> + +<p>"How long shall we have to stay here?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Only till to-morrow," said Forester. "Another stage will come along +to-morrow. We can stop just as well as not, as we are in no haste to +get home. Besides, I should like to have you see something of the +operations of a great grass farm."</p> + +<p>Marco and Forester went into the house, and were ushered into a large +room, which seemed to be both sitting-room and kitchen. A large round +table was set in the middle of the floor, for supper. A monstrous dog +was lying under it, with his chin resting upon his paws. There was a +great settle in one corner, by the side of the fire. There were chairs +also, with straight backs and seats of basket-work, a spinning-wheel, +an open cupboard, and various other similar objects, which, being +so different from the articles of furniture which Marco had been +accustomed to see in the New York parlors, attracted his attention +very strongly. Marco went and took his seat upon the settle, and the +dog rose and came to him. The dog gazed into his face with an earnest +look of inquiry, which plainly said, "Who are you?" while Marco patted +him on the head, thereby answering as plainly, "A friend." The dog, +perfectly understanding the answer, seemed satisfied, and, turning +away, went back to his place again under the table.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus04.png" alt="Who Are You?" />Who Are You?</p></div> + +<p>One of the farmer's young men carried the trunks into a little +bed-room, which opened from the great room; and then the farmer sat +down and began to enter into conversation with Forester and Marco +about their accident. Forester told him also about the sailor, who +had tumbled off the coach a mile or two back, and been left behind. +Forester said that he should like to know whether he was hurt much. +Then the farmer said that he would let him take a horse and wagon the +next morning and ride back and inquire. This plan was therefore agreed +upon. Marco and Forester ate a good supper with the farmer's family, +and then spent the evening in talking, and telling stories about +horses, and sagacious dogs, and about catching wild animals in the +woods with traps. About nine o'clock the family all assembled for +evening prayers. After prayers Marco and Forester went to bed in their +little bed-room, where they slept soundly till morning.</p> + +<p>In the morning they were both awakened by the crowing of the cocks, at +an early hour. They also heard movements in the house and in the +yard before sunrise; so they arose and dressed themselves, and after +attending to their morning devotions together in their room, a duty +which Forester never omitted, they went out. Marco was very much +interested in the morning occupations of the farm. There was the +milking of the cows, and the feeding of the various animals, and the +pitching off a load of corn, which had been got in the evening before +and allowed to stand on the cart, on the barn-floor, over night. The +cows were then to be driven to pasture, and the boy who went with +them, took a bridle to catch a horse for Forester and Marco to have +for their ride. Forester and Marco went with him. It was only a short +walk to the pasture bars, but they had to ramble about a little while, +before they found the horses. At last they found them feeding together +at the edge of a grove of trees. There were two or three horses, and +several long-tailed colts. The boy caught one of the horses, which he +called Nero. Nero was a white horse. Marco mounted him and rode down, +with the other horses and the colts following him. They put the horse +in the stable until after breakfast, and then harnessed him into the +wagon. When all was ready, the farmer told them to bring the sailor +along with them to his house, if they found that he was hurt so that +he could not travel.</p> + +<p>When they were seated in the wagon, and had fairly commenced +their ride, Marco asked Forester, what he meant last evening by a +<i>grass</i> farm. "You told me," said he, "that you wanted me to see +a great grass farm."</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Forester. "The farms in this part of the United States +may be called grass farms. This is the grass country."</p> + +<p>"Isn't it all grass country?" asked Marco. "Grass grows everywhere."</p> + +<p>"Grass is not <i>cultivated</i> everywhere so much as it is among +the mountains, in the northern states," replied Forester. "The great +articles of cultivation in the United States are grass, grain, and +cotton. The grass is cultivated in the northern states, the grain in +the middle states, and the cotton in the southern states. The grass +is food for beasts, the grain is food for man, and the cotton is +for clothing. These different kinds of cultivation are not indeed +exclusive in the different districts. Some grass is raised in the +middle and southern states, and some grain is raised in the northern +states; but, in general, the great agricultural production of the +northern states is grass, and these farms among the mountains in +Vermont are grass farms.</p> + +<p>"There is one striking difference," continued Forester, "between the +grass farms of the north, and the grain farms of the middle states, or +the cotton plantations of the south. The grass cultivation brings with +it a vast variety of occupations and processes on the farm, making +the farm a little world by itself; whereas the grain and the cotton +cultivation are far more simple, and require much less judgment and +skill. This is rather remarkable; for one would think that raising +food for beasts would require less skill than raising food or clothes +for man."</p> + +<p>"I should have thought so," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"The reason for the difference is," replied Forester, "that in raising +food for animals, it is necessary to keep the animals to eat it, on +the spot, for it will not bear transportation."</p> + +<p>"Why not?" said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Because it is so cheap," replied Forester.</p> + +<p>"I don't think that is any reason," replied Marco.</p> + +<p>"A load of grass"--said Forester.</p> + +<p>"A load of grass!" repeated Marco, laughing.</p> + +<p>"Yes, dried grass, that is, hay. Hay, you know, is grass dried to +preserve it."</p> + +<p>"Very well," said Marco; "go on."</p> + +<p>"A load of grass, then, is so cheap, that the cost of hauling it fifty +miles would be more than it is worth. But cotton is worth a great deal +more, in proportion to its bulk. It can therefore be transported to +distant places to be sold and manufactured. Thus the enormous quantity +of cotton which grows every summer in the southern states, is packed +in bags, very tight, and is hauled to the rivers and creeks, and there +it is put into steamboats and sent to the great seaports, and at the +seaports it is put into ships, which carry it to England or to the +northern states, to be manufactured; and it is so valuable, that it +will bring a price sufficient to pay all the persons that have been +employed in raising it, or in transporting it. But the grass that +grows in the northern countries can not be transported. The mills for +manufacturing cotton may be in one country, and the cotton be raised +in another, and then, after the cotton is gathered, it may be packed +and sent thousands of miles to be manufactured. But the sheep and oxen +which are to eat the hay, can not be kept in one country, while the +grass which they feed upon grows in another. The animals must live, in +general, on the very farm which the grass grows upon. Thus, while the +cotton cultivator has nothing to do but to raise his cotton and send +it to market, the grass cultivator must not only raise his grass, but +he must provide for and take care of all the animals which are to +eat it. This makes the agriculture of the northern states a far more +complicated business, because the care of animals runs into great +detail, and requires great skill, and sound judgment, and the exercise +of constant discretion.</p> + +<p>"You observe," continued Forester, "that it is by the intervention of +animals that the farmer gets the product of his land into such a shape +that it will bear transportation. For instance, he feeds out his hay +to his sheep, attending them with care and skill all the winter. In +the spring he shears off their fleeces; and now he has got something +which he <i>can</i> send to market. He has turned his grass into wool, +and thus got its value into a much more compact form. The wool will +bear transportation. Perhaps he gave a whole load of hay to his sheep, +to produce a single bag of wool. So the bag of wool is worth as much +as the load of hay, and is very much more easily carried to market. He +can put it upon his lumber-box, and drive off fifty miles with it, to +market, without any difficulty."</p> + +<p>"His lumber-box?" asked Marco. "What is that?"</p> + +<p>"Didn't you ever see a lumber-box?" asked Forester. "It is a square +box, on runners, like those of a sleigh. The farmers have them to haul +their produce to market."</p> + +<p>"Why do they call it a lumber-box?" asked Marco.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus05.png" alt="The Lumber-Box." />The Lumber-Box.</p></div> + +<p>"Why, when the country was first settled, they used to carry lumber to +market principally; that is, bundles of shingles and clapboards, which +they made from timber cut in the woods. It requires some time for a +new farm, made in the forests, to get into a condition to produce +much grass for cattle. I suppose that it was in this way that these +vehicles got the name of lumber-boxes. You will see a great many +of them, in the winter season, coming down from every part of the +country, toward the large towns on the rivers, filled with produce."</p> + +<p>"What else do the farmers turn their grass into, besides wool?" asked +Marco.</p> + +<p>"Into beef," said Forester. "They raise cows and oxen. They let them +eat the grass as it grows, all summer, and in the winter they feed +them with what they have cut and dried and stored in the barn for +them. The farmers are all ambitious to cut as much hay as they can, +and to keep a large stock of cattle. Thus they turn the grass into +beef, and the beef can be easily transported. In fact, it almost +transports itself."</p> + +<p>"How do you mean?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Why, the oxen and cows, when they are fat and ready for market, walk +off in droves to Boston, to be killed. They don't kill them where they +are raised, for then they would have to haul away the beef in wagons +or sleighs, but make the animals walk to market themselves, and kill +them there. But the farmers don't generally take their own cattle to +market. Men go about the country, and call upon the farmers, and buy +their cattle, and thus collect great droves. These men are called +drovers. In traveling in this part of the country, late in the fall, +you would see great droves of cattle and sheep, passing along the +road, all going to Boston, or rather Brighton."</p> + +<p>"Where is Brighton?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"It is a town very near Boston, where the great cattle market is held. +The Boston dealers come out to Brighton, and buy the cattle, and have +them slaughtered, and the beef packed and sent away all over the +world. Thus the farmers turn the grass into beef, and in that shape it +can be transported and sold."</p> + +<p>"And what else?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Why, they raise a great many horses in Vermont," replied Forester. +"These horses live upon grass, eating it as it grows in the pastures +and on the mountains, in the summer, and being fed upon hay in the +barn in the winter. These horses, when they are four or five years +old, are sent away to market to be sold. They can be transported very +easily. A man will ride one, and lead four or five by his side. They +will be worth perhaps seventy-five dollars apiece; so that one man +will easily take along with him, three or four hundred dollars' worth +of the produce of the farm, in the shape of horses; whereas the hay +which had been consumed on the farm to make these horses, it would +have taken forty yoke of oxen to move."</p> + +<p>"Forty yoke!" repeated Marco.</p> + +<p>"I don't mean to be exact," said Forester. "I mean it would take a +great many. So that, by feeding his hay out to horses, the farmer +gets his produce into a better state to be transported to market. The +Vermont horses go all over the land. Thus you see that the farmers +in the grass country have to turn the vegetable products which they +raise, into animal products, before they can get them to market; and +as the rearing of animals is a work which requires a great deal of +attention, care, patience, and skill, the cultivators must be men of a +higher class than those which are employed in raising cotton, or even +than those who raise grain. The animals must be watched and guarded +while they are young. There are a great many different diseases, and +accidents, and injuries which they are exposed to, and it requires +constant watchfulness, and considerable, intelligence, to guard +against them. This makes a great difference in the character which is +required in the laborers, in the different cases. A cotton plantation +in the south can be cultivated by slaves. A grain farm in the middle +states can be worked by hired laborers; but a northern grass farm, +with all its oxen, cows, sheep, poultry, and horses, can only be +successfully managed by the work of the owner."</p> + +<p>"Is that the reason why they have slaves at the south?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"It is a reason why slaves can be profitable at the south. In +cultivating cotton or sugar, a vast proportion of all the work done +in the year is the same. Almost the whole consists of a few simple +processes, such as planting, hoeing, picking cotton, &c., and this is +to be performed on smooth, even land, where set tasks can be easily +assigned. But the work on a grass farm is endlessly varied. It would +not be possible to divide it into set tasks. And then it is of such a +nature, that it could not possibly be performed successfully by the +mere labor of the hands. The <i>mind</i> must be employed upon it. For +instance, even in getting in hay, in the summer season, the farmer has +to exercise all his judgment and discretion to avoid getting it wet by +the summer showers, and yet to secure it in good time, and with proper +dispatch. A cotton planter may hire an overseer to see to the getting +in of his cotton, and he can easily tell by the result, whether he +has been faithful or not. But hay can not be got in well, without the +activity, and energy, and good judgment, which can come only from the +presence and immediate supervision of an owner. This produces vast +differences in the nature of the business, and in the whole state of +society in the two regions."</p> + +<p>"What are the differences?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Why, in the first place," said Forester, "the fact that cotton and +sugar can be cultivated by hired overseers, with slaves to do the +work, enables rich men to carry on great plantations without laboring +themselves. But a great grass farm could not be managed so. A man may +have one thousand acres for his plantation at the south, and with a +good overseer and good hands, it will all go on very well, so far as +his profit is concerned. They will produce a great amount of cotton, +which may be sent to market and sold, and the planter realize the +money, so as to make a large profit after paying all his expenses. But +if a man were to buy a thousand acres of grass land, and employ an +overseer and slaves to cultivate it, every thing would go to ruin. The +hay would get wet and spoiled,--the carts, wagons, and complicated +tools necessary, would get broken to pieces,--the lambs would be +neglected and die, and the property would soon go to destruction. +Even when a rich man attempts to carry on a moderate farm by hired +laborers, taking the best that he can find, he seldom succeeds."</p> + +<p>"Does he <i>ever</i> succeed?" said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Forester, "sometimes. There is Mr. Warner, who lives +near my father's; he was brought up on a farm, and is practically +acquainted with all the work. He has been very successful, and has +a very large farm. He works now very little himself, but he watches +every thing with the greatest care, and he succeeds very well. He has +a great stock. He cuts fifty tons of hay."</p> + +<p>"I should like to see his farm," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"We'll go some day," replied Forester.</p> + +<p>"So you see," continued Forester, "that the work of a cotton or sugar +plantation, is comparatively simple and plain, requiring little +judgment or mental exertion, and a great deal of plain straightforward +bodily labor; while on a northern stock farm the labors are endlessly +varied. Every month, every week, and almost every day brings some +change. New emergencies are constantly arising, which call for +deliberation and judgment. It is necessary to have a great variety of +animals, in order to consume all the different productions of the farm +to advantage. I can explain it all to you better, when you come to see +Mr. Warner's farm."</p> + +<p>As Nero traveled very fast, they began by this time to draw near to +the place where they had left the sailor. When they came up to the +house, they fastened the horse to a post, and went in. The man who +lived there had gone away, but the woman said that the sailor was +somewhat hurt, and asked them to come in and see him. They found him +in the kitchen, with his foot up in a chair. He seemed to be in some +pain. There was a great bruise on his ankle, made by the cork of one +of the horses' shoes. These <i>corks</i>, as they are called, are +projections, made of steel, at the heel of a horse-shoe, to give the +horse a firm footing. They are made quite sharp in the winter season, +when there is ice and snow upon the ground, but they are generally +more blunt in the summer. This prevented the ankle's being cut as +badly as it would have been, if the corks had been sharper. Forester +looked at the ankle, and found that nothing had been done for it. It +was inflamed and painful. He got the woman to give him a basin of warm +water, and then he bathed it very carefully, which relieved the sense +of tension and pain. Then he made an ointment of equal parts of tallow +and oil, which he put upon the end of a bandage, and thus bound it +up. This treatment relieved the poor sailor very much. Then Forester +proposed to the sailor to get into the wagon and go with him to the +next house, and the sailor consented. Forester was then going to pay +the woman for his night's lodging, but the sailor said at once,--"No, +squire, not at all. I'm much obliged to you for doing up my foot, but +you need not pay any thing for me. I've got plenty of shot in the +locker."</p> + +<p>So saying, he put his hand in his pocket and drew out a handful of +gold and silver pieces. But the woman, who began now to feel a little +ashamed that she had not done something for the wounded foot, said he +was welcome to his lodging; and so they all got into the wagon, and +Nero carried them rapidly back to his master's.</p> +</div> + + +<div class="chapter" id="ch04"> +<h2>Chapter IV.</h2> + +<h3>The Village.</h3> + + + +<p>In due time, and without any farther adventure, Forester and Marco +arrived at the end of their journey. The village where Forester's +father lived was situated in a gorge of the mountains, or rather at +the entrance of a valley, which terminated at last in a gorge. There +was a river flowing through this valley, and the village was upon its +banks. At the upper end of the village a branch stream came in from +the north, and there was a dam upon it, with some mills. The river +itself was a rapid stream, flowing over a sandy and gravelly bottom, +and there were broad intervals on each side of it, extending for some +distance toward the higher land. Beyond these intervals, the land rose +gradually, and in an undulating manner, to the foot of the mountains, +which extended along the sides of the valley, and from the summits of +which, one might look down upon the whole scene, with the village in +the center of it as upon a map.</p> + +<p>Marco was very much pleased with the situation, and with the +appearance of the village. The street was broad, and it was shaded +with rows of large maples and elms on each side. The houses were +generally white, with green blinds. Most of them had pleasant yards +before them and at their sides; these yards were planted with trees +and shrubbery. There were also gardens behind. The mountains which +surrounded the scene, gave a very secluded and sheltered appearance to +the valley.</p> + +<p>The house in which Forester lived was the largest in the village. It +was a square house of two stories. It stood back a little from the +road, in the middle of a large yard, ornamented with rows of trees +along the sides, and groups of shrubbery in the corners and near the +house. There were gravel walks leading in different directions through +this yard, and on one side of the house was a carriage-way, which led +from a great gate in front, to a door in one end of the house, and +thence to the stable in the rear. On the other side of the house, near +the street, was the office,--for Forester's father was a lawyer. The +office was a small square building, with the lawyer's name over the +door. There was a back door to the office, and a footpath, winding +among trees and shrubbery, which led from the office to the house.</p> + +<p>The morning after they arrived, Forester took Marco out to see the +village. He intended not only to show him the various objects of +interest which were to be seen, but also to explain to him why it was +that such villages would spring up in a farming country, and what were +the occupations of the inhabitants.</p> + +<p>"The first thing which causes the commencement of a village in New +England," said Forester, "is a water-fall."</p> + +<p>"Why is that?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"There are certain things," replied Forester, "which the farmers can +not very well do for themselves, by their own strength, particularly +grinding their corn, and sawing logs into boards for their houses. +When they first begin to settle in a new country, they make the houses +of logs, and they have to take the corn and grain a great many miles +on horseback, through paths in the woods, or, in the winter, on +hand-sleds, to get it ground. But as soon as any of them are able to +do it, they build a dam on some stream in the neighborhood, where +there is a fall in the water, and thus get a water power. This water +power they employ, to turn a saw-mill and a grist-mill. Then all the +farmers, when they want to build houses or barns, haul logs to the +mill to get them sawed into boards, and they carry their grain to the +grist-mill and get it ground. They pay the owner of the mills for +doing this work for them. And thus, if there are a great many farms in +the country around, and no other mills very near, so that the mills +are kept all the time at work, the owner gets a great deal of pay, and +gradually acquires property.</p> + +<p>"Now, as soon as the mills are built, perhaps a blacksmith sets up a +shop near them. If a blacksmith is going to open a shop anywhere +in that town, it will be better for him to have it near the mills, +because, as the farmers all have to come to the mills at any rate, +they can avail themselves of the opportunity, to get their horses +shod, or to get new tires to their wheels, when they are broken."</p> + +<p>"Tires?" repeated Marco. "What are tires?"</p> + +<p>"They are the iron rims around wheels. Every wheel must have an iron +band about it, very tight, to strengthen it and to hold it firmly +together. Without a tire, a wheel would very soon come to pieces, in +rattling over a stony road.</p> + +<p>"Besides," continued Forester, "there is a great deal of other iron +work, which the farmers must have done. Farmers can, generally, do +most of the wood work which they want themselves. They can make their +rakes, and drags, and cart-bodies, and sleds, and tool handles; but +when they want iron work, they must go to the blacksmith's. They can +make a harrow-frame, but the blacksmith must make the teeth."</p> + +<p>"Now I should think," said Marco, "that it would be easier to make the +teeth than the frame."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps it is as easy, if one has the forge and tools," replied +Forester; "but the tools and fixtures, necessary for blacksmith's +work, are much more expensive than those required for ordinary wood +work. There must be a forge built on purpose, and an anvil, supported +on a solid foundation, and various tools. All these are necessary for +shoeing a single horse, and when they are all procured, they will +answer for all the horses of the neighborhood. Thus it happens, that +though farmers do a great deal of their wood work themselves, at their +own farms, in cold and stormy weather, they generally have their iron +work done at a blacksmith's at some central place, where it is easy +and convenient for all of them to go."</p> + +<p>The above conversation took place between Marco and Forester, as they +were walking along together through the village, toward the part of +the town where the mills were situated. Just at this moment, Marco +happened to cast his eyes across the street a short distance before +them, and he saw a fire on the ground in a little yard. He asked +Forester what that fire could be. As soon as Forester saw the fire, he +exclaimed,</p> + +<p>"Ah! they are putting a tire upon a wheel; that's quite fortunate; +we'll go across and see them."</p> + +<p>So they left the path under the trees where they had been walking, and +went obliquely across the street toward the fire. Marco saw that +there was a large blacksmith's shop there. It was a very neat-looking +building, painted red. There was a large door in the front, and a very +low window, with a shutter hanging over it, by the side of the door. +In an open yard, by the side of the shop, was the fire. The fire was +in the form of a ring. There were several men standing about it; one +of them, whom Marco supposed was the blacksmith, by his leather apron, +was putting on small sticks of wood and chips, here and there, around +the ring. Marco saw that there was a large iron hoop, as he called it, +on the fire. It was not really a hoop, it was a <i>tire</i>. It was +made of a much larger and thicker bar of iron, than those which are +used for hoops. It was a tire belonging to a wheel. The wheel was +lying upon the ground near, ready to receive the tire. It was the hind +wheel of a wagon. The wagon itself was standing in front of the shop, +with one end of the hind axletree supported by a block.</p> + +<p>"What do they heat the tire for?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"To swell it," replied Forester. "It is necessary to have the tire go +on very tight, so as to hold the wheel together with all the force of +the iron. Now when iron is heated it swells, and then shrinks again +when it cools. So they heat the tire hot, and put it upon the wheel in +that state. Then when it cools it shrinks, and binds the whole wheel +together with a very strong grip."</p> + +<p>"But if they put it on hot, it will burn the wood," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Forester, "it will burn the wood a little. They can not +help that entirely; but they stand ready with water, to pour on, as +soon as the tire is in its place, and so cool it immediately, so that +it does not burn the fellies enough to injure them."</p> + +<p>"What are the fellies?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"They are the parts of the wooden rim of the wheel. The rim is made of +several pieces of wood, which are called fellies."</p> + +<p>So Forester took Marco to the wheel, and showed him the parts of +which the rim was composed. While Marco was looking at the wheel, the +blacksmith began to push away the burning brands a little from the +tire, as it began to be hot enough. Presently he went into his shop +and brought out several pairs of tongs. With these the men lifted the +tire out of the fire, but the blacksmith said it was a little too hot, +and he must let it cool a minute or two.</p> + +<p>"Why, if it's very hot," said Marco, "it will grip the wheel all the +harder."</p> + +<p>"It will grip it <i>too</i> hard," said Forester. "Sometimes a tire +shrinks so much as to spring the spokes out of shape. Didn't you ever +see a wheel with the spokes bent out of shape?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know," said Marco. "I never noticed wheels much."</p> + +<p>"They do get bent, sometimes," said Forester. "It requires great care +to put on a tire in such a manner, as to give it just the right degree +of force to bind the wheel strongly together, without straining it."</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus06.png" alt="The Tire." />The Tire.</p></div> + +<p>As soon as the tire became of the right temperature, the men took it +up again with the pairs of tongs--taking hold with them at different +sides of it--and then they put it down carefully over the wheel. The +wheel immediately began to smoke on all sides. In one or two places +it burst into a flame. The blacksmith, however, paid no attention to +this, but with a hammer, which he held in his hand, he knocked it down +into its place, all around the rim; then he took up a brown pitcher +full of water, which was standing near, and began to pour the +water on, walking round and round the wheel as he did it, so as to +extinguish the flames in every part and cool the iron. When this +process was completed, Forester and Marco walked on.</p> + +<p>"Let me see," said Forester, "where did I leave off, Marco, in my +account of the growth of a village? I was telling you about the +blacksmith's shop, I believe."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"The next thing to the blacksmith's shop, in the history of a New +England village," said Forester, "is generally a store. You see the +farmers can not raise every thing they want. There are a great many +things which come from foreign countries, which they have to buy."</p> + +<p>"Such as sugar and tea," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Forester, "only they make a great deal of sugar in +Vermont out of the sap of the maple-tree. We will go and see Mr. +Warner's sugar bush next spring. But there are a great many things +which the farmers must buy. One of the most important articles is +iron. Now when a man concludes to open a store, the best place that he +can have for his business is near the mills and the blacksmith's shop; +because the people have to come there on other business, and so that +is the most convenient place for them to visit his store. And so, by +and by, when a carpenter and a mason come into the country, the little +village which has thus begun to form itself, is the best place for +them to settle in, for that is the place where people can most +conveniently call and see them. After a while a physician comes and +settles there, to heal them when they are sick, and a lawyer to +prevent disputes."</p> + +<p>"To <i>prevent</i> disputes!" said Marco. Marco had not much idea of +the nature of a lawyer's business, but he had a sort of undefined and +vague notion, that lawyers <i>made</i> disputes among men, and lived +by them. + +"Why, I know," said Forester, laughing, "that lawyers have not the +credit, generally, of preventing many disputes, but I believe they do. +Perhaps it is because I am going to be a lawyer myself. But I really +believe that lawyers prevent ten disputes, where they occasion one."</p> + +<p>"How do they do it?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Why, they make contracts, and draw up writings, and teach men to be +clear and distinct in their engagements and bargains. Then besides, +when men will not pay their debts, they compel them to do it, by legal +process. And there are a vast many debts which are paid, for fear of +this legal process, which would not have been paid without it. Thus, +knowing that the lawyers are always ready to apply the laws, men are +much more careful not to break them, than they otherwise would be. So +that it is no doubt vastly for the benefit of a community, not only to +have efficient laws, but efficient lawyers to aid in the execution of +them."</p> + +<p>By this time, Forester and Marco had reached the part of the village +where the mills were situated. Forester showed Marco the dam. It was +supported by ledges of rocks on each bank, and there was a flume, +which conducted the water to the wheels of the mills. There were two +mills and a machine-shop. They went into the machine-shop. There was +a lathe here carried by water. A man was at work at it, turning hoe +handles. Forester asked him what other articles were turned there; and +he said posts for bedsteads, and rounds for chairs, and such other +things as were used in quantities in that part of the country. +Forester asked him whether the lathe would turn brass and iron as well +as wood; but he said it would not. It was not fitted for that work.</p> + +<p>"I suppose you might have a lathe here, to work in the metals," said +Forester.</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied the man, "but it would not be worth while. There is +very little of that kind of work wanted in this part of the country."</p> + +<p>After looking at the mills, Forester and Marco walked along up the +stream a little way, to look at the mill-pond. Whenever a dam is +made, it causes a pond to be formed above it, more or less extensive, +according to the nature of the ground. In this case there was quite a +large pond, formed by the accumulation of the water above the dam. +The pond was not very wide, but it extended more than a mile up the +stream. The banks were picturesque and beautiful, being overhung with +trees in some places, and in others presenting verdant slopes, down to +the water's edge.</p> + +<p>"That's a good pond to go a-fishing in," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester, "and it makes fine skating ground in the +winter."</p> + +<p>Marco and Forester followed the banks of the mill-pond, until they +came to the end of the still water; beyond that they saw a rapid +running stream, coming down from the mountains. Marco wished to follow +this stream up farther, to see what they would come to, and Forester +consented. The ground ascended more and more the farther they +proceeded, and the view began to be shut in by forests, precipices and +mountains. Marco liked clambering over the rocks, and he found a +great deal to interest him at every step of the way. He saw several +squirrels and one rabbit. He wanted Forester to get him a gun and let +him come out into those woods a-gunning.</p> + +<p>"No," said Forester.</p> + +<p>"Why not?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"That is dangerous amusement."</p> + +<p>"Why? Do you think I should get killed with my sun?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"No," replied Forester, "I don't think you would; but you <i>might</i> +get killed. The risk would be too great for the benefit."</p> + +<p>"Why, you told me the other day, that it was a great thing to learn to +take risks coolly. If I had a gun I could practice and learn."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester, "it is well to take risks coolly, when the +advantage is sufficient to justify it. For instance, when you crept +down upon the pole the other day, to get the reins, you took a great +risk, but perhaps you saved the lives of the passengers by it. That +was right--but to hazard your life, for the sake of the pleasure of +shooting a squirrel, is not wise." Marco had before this time told him +about his getting the reins.</p> + +<p>"I shouldn't think, there was much danger," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"No," said Forester, "there's very little danger. In using a gun, you +put yourself in a very little danger of a very great calamity. There's +very little probability that your gun would burst, or that you would +ever shoot accidentally any other person;--very little indeed. But if +the gun were to burst, and blow off one of your arms, or put out your +eyes, or if you were to shoot another boy, the calamity would be a +very terrible one. So we call it a great risk."</p> + +<p>"It seems to be a small risk of a great calamity," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Forester, "but we call it a great risk. We call the +risk great, when either the evil which we are in danger of is great, +or when the chance of its befalling us is great. For example, if you +and I were to walk over that log which lies across the stream, we +should run a great risk; but that would be, not a small chance of a +great evil, but a great chance of a small evil. There would be a great +chance that we should fall off into the stream; but that would not be +much of an evil as we should only get ourselves wet."</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus07.png" alt="The Risk" />The Risk</p></div> + +<p>"Let us go and try it," said Marco. "Not I," said Forester. "You may, +however, if you please. I am willing to have you take such a risk as +<i>that</i>, for your amusement."</p> + +<p>Marco went to the log and walked back and forth across it, as +composedly as if it were a broad plank, lying upon the ground. +Finally, he hopped across it on one foot, to show Forester his +dexterity. Forester was surprised. He did not know how much skill in +such feats Marco had acquired by his gymnastics in New York.</p> + +<p>After this, Forester and Marco clambered up some rocks on an elevated +summit, where they had a fine view of the village below them. They +could trace the river, winding through the valley, with the green +intervals on both sides of it. They could see the village and the +streets, with the spire of the meeting-house in the center. The +mill-pond was in full view also; and Marco's attention was attracted +by a boat, which he saw gliding over the surface of the water.</p> + +<p>"O! there is a boat," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester. "I have paddled over the water many a time in +her."</p> + +<p>"How many oars does she pull?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Oars?" said Forester, "no oars; they use paddles."</p> + +<p>"I wish they had some oars," said Marco, "and then I would get a crew +of boys, and teach them to manage a boat man-o'-war fashion."</p> + +<p>"How do you know any thing about it?" asked Forester.</p> + +<p>"O, I learned at New York, in the boats at the Battery."</p> + +<p>"Well," said Forester, "we'll have some oars made, and get a crew. I +should like to learn myself."</p> + +<p>"Let us go down and see the boat," said Marco, "now."</p> + +<p>"No," replied Forester, "it is time to go to dinner now; but we'll +come and see the boat the next time we go to take a walk."</p> + +<p>So Marco and Forester came down the hill, and thence went across the +fields home to dinner. They dined at half-past twelve o'clock, which +seemed a very strange hour to Marco.</p> +</div> + + +<div class="chapter" id="ch05"> +<h2>Chapter V.</h2> + +<h3>Studying.</h3> + + + +<p>The little building where Forester's father had his office, had a +small back room in it, which opened from the office proper, and which +was used as a library and private study. It had a small fire place +in it, and there was a table in the middle of the room, with a large +portable writing-desk upon it. This desk was made of rosewood. The +sides of the room were lined with book-shelves. There was one large +window which looked upon the yard and garden behind. The books in +this room were principally law-books, though there were some books of +history and travels, and great dictionaries of various kinds. Forester +conducted Marco into this room, a day or two after their arrival in +the village, saying,</p> + +<p>"Here, Marco, this is to be our study. How do you like it?"</p> + +<p>"Very well," said Marco. "It is a very pleasant room. Am I to study +all these books?"</p> + +<p>"Not more than one at a time, at any rate," said Forester.</p> + +<p>"<i>This</i> is my place, I suppose," said Marco; and so saying he sat +down in a great arm-chair, before the portable writing-desk, which was +open on the table.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus08.png" alt="The Study." />The Study.</p></div> + +<p>"No," said Forester, "that is <i>my</i> place. I am going to arrange +your establishment near the window. James has gone to bring your desk +now."</p> + +<p>While he was speaking, the door opened, and James, the young man who +lived at Forester's father's came in, bringing a desk. It was painted +blue, and had four legs. These legs were of such a length as to make +the desk just high enough for Marco. James put it down, at Forester's +direction, near the window. It was placed with the left side toward +the window, so that the light from the window would strike across the +desk from left to right. This is the most convenient direction for +receiving light when one is writing. Forester then placed a chair +before the desk, and Marco went into the house and brought out all the +books and papers which he had, and arranged them neatly in his desk. +While he was gone, Forester took an inkstand and a sand-box out of a +closet by the side of the fire, and filled them both, and put them on +the desk. He also placed in the desk a supply of paper, in quarter +sheets. After Marco had come back, and had put in his books and +papers, Forester gave him a ruler and a lead pencil; also a slate and +half a dozen slate pencils; also a piece of sponge and a piece of +India-rubber. He gave him besides a little square phial, and sent him +to fill it with water, so that he might have water always at hand to +wet his sponge with.</p> + +<p>"Now is that all you will want?" asked Forester.</p> + +<p>"Why, yes, I should think so," said Marco. "If I should want any thing +else, I can ask you, you know. You are going to stay here and study +too?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester; "but your asking me is just what I wish to +avoid. I wish to arrange it so that we shall both have our time to +ourselves, without interruption."</p> + +<p>"But I shall have to ask you questions when I get into difficulty," +said Marco.</p> + +<p>"No," said Forester, "I hope not. I mean to contrive it so that you +can get out of difficulty yourself. Let me see. You will want some +pens. I will get a bunch of quills and make them up into pens for +you."</p> + +<p>"What, a whole bunch?" said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Forester. "I don't wish to have you come to me, when I +am in the midst of a law argument, to get me to make a pen."</p> + +<p>Steel pens were very little used in those days.</p> + +<p>While Forester was making the pens, he said,</p> + +<p>"There are twenty-five quills in a bunch. I shall tie them up, when +they are ready, into two bunches, of about a dozen in each. These you +will put in your desk. When you want a pen, you will draw one out of +the bunches and use it. You must not stop to look them over, to choose +a good one, but you must take any one that comes first to hand, +because, if any one should not be good, the sooner you get it out and +try it, and ascertain that it is not good, the sooner you will get it +out of the way."</p> + +<p>"Well," said Marco, "and what shall I do with the bad ones?"</p> + +<p>"Wipe them clean,--by the way, you must have a good penwiper,--and +then put them together in a particular place in your desk. When you +have thus used one bunch, tie them up and lay the bunch on my desk to +be mended, and then you can go on using the other bunch. This will +give me opportunity to choose a convenient time to mend the first +bunch again. When I have mended them, I will tie them up and lay them +on your desk again. Thus you will always have a supply of pens, and I +shall never be interrupted to mend one. This will be a great deal more +convenient, both for you and for me."</p> + +<p>"Only it will use up a great many more pens," replied Marco.</p> + +<p>"No," said Forester; "not at all. We shall have more in use at one +time, it is true, but the whole bunch may last as long as if we had +only one cut at a time."</p> + +<p>"We shall begin to study," continued Forester, "at nine o'clock, and +leave off at twelve. That will give you half an hour to run about and +play before dinner."</p> + +<p>"And a recess?" said Marco,--"I ought to have a recess."</p> + +<p>"Why, there's a difficulty about a recess," said Forester. "I shall +have it on my mind every day, to tell you when it is time for the +recess, and when it is time to come in."</p> + +<p>"O no," replied Marco, "I can find out when it is time for the recess. +Let it be always at ten o'clock, and I can look at the watch."</p> + +<p>Marco referred to a watch belonging to Forester's father, which was +kept hung up over the mantel-piece in their little study.</p> + +<p>"I think it probable you would find out when it was time for the +recess to <i>begin</i>," said Forester, "but you would not be so +careful about the end of it. You would get engaged in play, and would +forget how the time was passing, and I should have to go out and call +you in."</p> + +<p>"Couldn't you have a little bell?" said Marco.</p> + +<p>"But I don't wish to have any thing of that kind to do," said +Forester, "I am going to instruct you half an hour every morning, +beginning at nine o'clock, and I want to have it all so arranged, that +after that, I shall be left entirely to myself, so that I can go +on with my studies, as well as you with yours. If we can do this +successfully, then, when noon comes, I shall feel that I have done my +morning's work well, and you and I can go off in the afternoon on all +sorts of expeditions. But if I have to spend the whole morning in +attending to you, then I must stay at home and attend to my own +studies in the afternoon."</p> + +<p>"Well," said Marco, "I think I can find out when to come in."</p> + +<p>"We'll try it one or two mornings, but I have no idea that you will +succeed. However, we can give up the plan if we find that you stay +out too long. You may have five minutes' recess every day, at eleven +o'clock. On the whole it shall be <i>ten</i> minutes. And this shall +be the plan of your studies for the morning. At nine o'clock, I shall +give you instruction for half an hour. Then you may study arithmetic +for one hour; then write half an hour; then have a recess for ten +minutes: then read for the rest of the last hour. That will bring it +to twelve o'clock."</p> + +<p>"But I can't study arithmetic, alone," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester, "I shall show you how, in the first half-hour +when I am giving you my instructions. Now, are you willing really to +try to carry this system into effect, pleasantly and prosperously?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "I'll try."</p> + +<p>"We shall find some inconveniences and troubles at first, I have no +doubt," said Forester; "but if we are patient and persevering, we +shall soon make the system go smoothly."</p> + +<p>Forester then said, that as Marco might forget what he had to do each +hour, he would make a sort of map of the hours, with the name of +the study which he was to pursue marked in each. This he called a +schedule. The schedule, when it was completed, was as follows:</p> + +<p>IX. X. XI. XII. + | Instruction. | Arithmetic. | Writing. | Recess. | Reading. |</p> + +<p>This schedule was drawn neatly on a piece of paper, and fastened with +wafers to the under side of the lid of Marco's desk, so that he could +look at it at any time, by opening his desk.</p> + +<p>It was in the afternoon that this conversation was held, and these +preparations made. The next morning, at nine o'clock, Marco and +Forester went into the little study, and Forester gave him his +instructions. He took his arithmetic, and explained to him how to +perform some examples, under one of the rules. Forester performed one +or two of them himself, explaining very particularly all the steps. +He then rubbed out his work, and directed Marco to perform them by +himself in the same manner. "If you succeed in doing these right," +said he, "you may set yourself some others of the same kind, with +different numbers, and perform those too. If you get into any +difficulty, you must not ask me, but you may set yourself sums in +addition, and spend the rest of the hour in doing them. That, you can +certainly do without help."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "I can do that."</p> + +<p>"The next half-hour is for writing," said Forester. "I will set you +some copies."</p> + +<p>So Forester took a writing-book, which he had prepared, and wrote +Marco some copies, one on the top of each page. Marco looked over +him while he wrote. It is very important that a child should see his +teacher write his copies, for thus he will see how the letters should +be formed. Forester wrote four or five copies for Marco, and while he +was writing them he gave him particular instructions about the manner +of holding his pen, and shaping the letters.</p> + +<p>"Now," said Forester, "you can not possibly have occasion to come to +me about your writing; for here are pages enough for you to write upon +for several days, and you have plenty of pens."</p> + +<p>"But I should think you would want to see whether I write it well," +said Marco.</p> + +<p>"I shall examine it carefully to-morrow morning," said Forester.</p> + +<p>"Very well," said Marco; "after the writing will come the recess."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester, "and then the reading."</p> + +<p>"What shall I read?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>Forester then rose and went to one of the book-shelves, where there +was a set of books, entitled the American Encyclopedia. There were +thirteen octavo volumes in the set. It was rather too high for Marco +to reach it, and so Forester took all the volumes down and placed them +on a lower shelf, not far from the window, in a place where Marco +could get easy access to them.</p> + +<p>"There," said Forester; "there is your library. The American +Encyclopedia is a sort of a dictionary. When your reading hour comes, +you may take down any volume of this Encyclopedia, and turn to any +article you please. Or you may think of any subject that you would +like to read about, as for instance, <i>boat, cannon, camel, eagle, +trout, horse</i>, or any other subject, and take down the proper +volume and find the article. You can find it by the letters which are +printed on the backs of the volumes."</p> + +<p>"Let us look now," said Marco, "and see what it says about trouts."</p> + +<p>"No, not now," replied Forester; "when your reading hour comes, you +may read what you choose. Only you must have a piece of paper at hand, +and write upon it the title of every article which you read, and show +it to me the next morning, because I shall wish to know what you have +been reading, and perhaps to question you about it. Now you understand +your work, do you not?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco; "and what are you going to do?"</p> + +<p>"O, I'm going to study my law-books."</p> + +<p>"Shall you stay here and study?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Forester, "I shall be here most of the time. Sometimes +I shall be called into the other room, perhaps, on business with my +lather; but that need not make any difference with you."</p> + +<p>"Only, then there will be nobody to watch me," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"O, I shall not watch you any, even when I am here. I shall pay no +attention to you at all. I can judge to-morrow morning, when I come to +look at your work and give you new instructions, whether you have been +industrious or not.</p> + +<p>"Even if I accidentally see you doing any thing wrong, I shall not +probably say any thing about it. I shall remember it, and speak to you +about it to-morrow morning, in my half-hour. I shall do everything in +my half-hour."</p> + +<p>Marco felt somewhat relieved, to think that he was not going to be +under a very rigid observation in his studies.</p> + +<p>"I do not expect," said Forester, "that you will do very well for the +first few days. It will take some time to get this system under full +operation. I presume that you will come to me as many as ten times the +first day."</p> + +<p>"O, no," said Marco, "I don't mean to come to you once."</p> + +<p>"You will,--I have no doubt. What shall I say to you if you do? Will +it be a good plan for me to answer your question?"</p> + +<p>"Why, no," said Marco, "I suppose not."</p> + +<p>"And yet, if I refuse to answer, it will not be very pleasant to you. +It will put you out of humor."</p> + +<p>"No," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"I will have one invariable answer to give you," said Forester. "It +shall be this,--Act according to your own judgment. That will be a +little more civil than to take no notice of your question at all, +and yet it will preserve our principle,--that I am to give you no +assistance except in my half-hour. Then, besides, I will keep an +account of the number of questions you ask me, and see if they do not +amount to ten."</p> + +<p>By this time Forester's half-hour was out, and Marco went to his desk.</p> + +<p>"There's one thing," said Marco, "before I begin:--may I have the +window open?"</p> + +<p>"Act according to your own judgment," said Forester, "and there is one +question asked." So Forester made one mark upon a paper which he had +upon the table.</p> + +<p>"But, cousin Forester, it is not right to count that, for I had not +begun."</p> + +<p>Forester made no reply, but began arranging his note-books, as if he +was about commencing his own studies. Marco looked at him a moment, +and then he rose and gently opened the window and began his work.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus09.png" alt="Marco's Desk." />Marco's Desk.</p></div> + +<p>Marco was but little accustomed to solitary study, and, after +performing one of the examples which Forester had given him, he +thought he was tired, and he began to look out the window and to play +with his pencil. He would lay his pencil upon the upper side of +his slate, and let it roll down. As the pencil was not round, but +polygonal in its form, it made a curious clicking sound in rolling +down, which amused Marco, though it disturbed and troubled Forester. +Whatever may have been the nice peculiarities in the delicate +mechanism of Forester's ear, and of the nerves connected with it, +compared with that of Marco's, by which the same sound produced a +sensation of pleasure in one ear, while it gave only pain in the +other, it would require a very profound philosopher to explain. But +the effect was certain. Forester, however, did not speak, but let +Marco roll his pencil down the slate as long as he pleased.</p> + +<p>This was not long, however; Marco soon grew tired of it, and then +began to look out the window. There was a little staple in the window +sill, placed there as a means of fastening the blind. Marco pushed the +point of his pencil into this staple, in order to see if it would go +through. It did go through in an instant, and slipping through his +fingers, it fell out of the window.</p> + +<p>"Dear me! there goes my pencil. My pencil has dropped out of the +window, cousin Forester; shall I go out and get it?"</p> + +<p>"Act according to your own judgment," said Forester. At the same time +he was saying this, he made another mark upon his paper.</p> + +<p>"Why, you ought not to count that, cousin Forester," said Marco, "for +I don't know whether you'd wish me to go and get that pencil, or take +another out of my desk."</p> + +<p>"Act according to your own judgment," replied Forester.</p> + +<p>Marco looked perplexed and troubled. In fact, he was a little +displeased to find that Forester would not answer him. He thought +that, it was an unforeseen emergency, which Forester ought to have +considered an exception to his rule. But he was obliged to decide the +question for himself, and he concluded to go out for his pencil. It +took him some time to find it in the grass, and after he had found it, +he stopped for some time longer, to watch some ants which were passing +in and out, at the entrance to their nest, each one bringing up a +grain of sand in his forceps. When Marco came in, he found that his +hour for arithmetic was so nearly expired, that he should not have +time to finish another sum, if he should begin it; so he put his +arithmetical apparatus away, and took out his writing-book.</p> + +<p>Marco went through the whole forenoon pretty much in the same way. He +spent a large part of his time in looking out of the window and about +the room. He went out at the time for the recess, but he stayed out +twenty minutes instead of ten. He was astonished, when he came in, to +see how rapidly the time had passed. He then took down a volume of the +Encyclopedia, and read until twelve o'clock, and then, leaving the +volume of the Encyclopedia and his writing-book on his desk, he told +Forester that the study hours were over, and went away.</p> + +<p>The next morning, at nine, Forester asked him how he had got along the +day before. Marco had the frankness to admit that he did not get along +very well.</p> + +<p>"Still," said Forester, "I am well satisfied on the whole. You did +very well for a first experiment. In the first place, you did really +make some effort to carry out my plan. You kept the reckoning of the +hours, and changed your studies at the appointed time. You did not +speak to me more than three or four times, and then you acquiesced +pretty good-naturedly in my refusing to help you. To-day you will do +better, I have no doubt, and to-morrow better still. And thus, in the +course of a week, I have great confidence that you will learn to study +for three hours by yourself, to good advantage."</p> + +<p>"Two hours and a half it is," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester.</p> + +<p>It resulted as Forester predicted. Marco, finding that Forester was +disposed to be pleased with and to commend his efforts, made greater +efforts every day, and, in the course of a week, he began to be a +very respectable student. In the afternoon he used to ramble about, +sometimes with Forester, and sometimes alone. He was very fond of +fishing, and Forester used to allow him to go to certain parts of the +river, where the water was not deep, alone, trusting to his word that +he would confine himself strictly to the prescribed bounds.</p> +</div> + + +<div class="chapter" id="ch06"> +<h2>Chapter VI.</h2> + +<h3>The Log Canoe.</h3> + + + +<p>Every thing went on very prosperously, for a week or two, in the +little study. Marco became more and more attentive to his studies, and +more and more interested in them. He was often getting into little +difficulties, it is true, and giving trouble to his uncle and aunt; +but then he generally seemed sorry afterward for the trouble which he +had thus occasioned, and he bore reproof, and such punishments as his +cousin thought it necessary to inflict, with so much good-humor, that +they all readily forgave him for his faults and misdemeanors.</p> + +<p>One day, however, about a fortnight after he had commenced his +studies, he got led away, through the influence of a peculiar +temptation, into a rather serious act of transgression, which might +have been followed by very grave consequences. The circumstances were +these. He had commenced his studies as usual, after having received +his half-hour's instruction from Forester, and was in the midst of the +process of reducing the fraction 504/756 to its lowest terms, when he +happened to look out of the window and to see two boys climbing over +a garden fence belonging to one of the neighbor's houses, at a little +distance in the rear of his uncle's house. It was a very pleasant +morning, and Marco had the window open; so he could see the boys very +plainly. They stopped on the farther side of the fence which they had +got over, and though they were partially concealed by the fence, yet +Marco could plainly perceive that they were busily employed in doing +something there, though he could not imagine what. He wished very much +to go and see; but he knew that it would be in vain to make request +for permission, and so he contented himself with watching them.</p> + +<p>Just at this moment his uncle opened the door which led into the +little study, and asked Forester if he would step into the office. +Forester did so; and then, after a few minutes, he returned, put up +his books, and said that he had got to go away, and that perhaps he +should not be back till noon. Marco had often been left alone at his +studies for a time, but never for a whole morning before. He knew that +he was to go on with his work just as if Forester had remained. So +Forester bade him good morning, and then went away.</p> + +<p>Marco watched the boys, wondering more and more what they could be +doing. They kept stooping down to the ground, and moving about a +little, as if they were planting seeds. But as it was entirely the +wrong season for any such work, Marco concluded that they must be +hiding something in the ground. "Perhaps," said he to himself, "they +have been stealing some money, and are burying it. I wish I could go +and see."</p> + +<p>If there had been a door leading directly from the study into the +yard, Marco would have left his studies and have gone out at once; but +as it was, he could not get out without going through the office where +his uncle was sitting. At last the thought struck him that he might +jump out the window. He felt some hesitation at taking this step, but +finally he concluded that he would do it, and just go near enough to +see what the boys were hiding, and exactly where they were putting it, +so that he could go afterward and find it without fail. He determined +to return then immediately.</p> + +<p>"I shall not be out longer than five minutes," said he to himself, +"and I will let it go for my recess."</p> + +<p>So he took his cap from the nail where he was accustomed to hang it, +while he was at his studies, and then climbing out the window, feet +foremost, he let himself down gently to the ground. He then crept +slyly along through the yards and gardens, until he got pretty near +the place where the boys were at work. The mystery, however, was +rather increased than diminished by the near view. He could make +nothing of the operations which they were engaged in; and while he was +hesitating whether to go nearer, one of the boys happened to look up +and spied him. Marco had intended to keep himself concealed by a tree, +behind which he had taken his station, but the boy having looked up +suddenly, at a moment when he happened to be off his guard, saw him +before he had time to draw back under the cover he had chosen.</p> + +<p>"Holloa, Marco," said the boy, "come here."</p> + +<p>Marco was astonished at this frank and open invitation. He had +expected that the boys, when they saw him, would have dropped at once +behind the fence to conceal themselves, or that they would have caught +up what he supposed they were burying, and have run away. Their +accosting him in this fearless manner deranged his ideas about their +probable object, and increased his curiosity to know what they were +doing. So he came forth from his concealment and went toward them. +When he reached the spot, the mystery was suddenly dispelled by his +finding out that they were digging worms for bait, to go a-fishing.</p> + +<p>Marco's curiosity was now changed to eager desire. The boys told him +that they were going down to the river to fish for eels, and Marco's +soul was all on fire to accompany them. He had never fished for eels. +He knew the boys very well, and they offered to lend him a hook and +line. But Marco thought that on the whole it would not do. He tried to +persuade them to wait until the afternoon, but they would not consent +to such a postponement of their pleasure. So Marco wished them good +luck, and began to mount the fence again, with the intention of +returning to his studies.</p> + +<p>On looking toward the office, he saw his uncle coming out of the door +in the rear of it, and walking toward the house. Marco immediately +reflected that it would not answer for him to meet his uncle, and he +descended from the fence again on the same side with the boys, until +his uncle should go back. The boys thought he came back because he +was undecided whether to go with them or not, and they renewed their +invitations with redoubled urgency. Marco did not reply, but looked +steadily toward the house. He saw a man standing in the yard with a +small ladder in his hand. A moment afterward, Marco's uncle came out +of the house, and, to Marco's great consternation, he perceived that +he had a saw and a hatchet in his hand, and then he recollected that +his uncle had been intending to prune some trees that forenoon. The +trees were situated in various positions about the yard, so that Marco +could neither go in at the front door of the office, nor climb in at +the window, without being discovered. He did not know what to do.</p> + +<p>In the mean time, the boys urged him to go with them. They did not +know any thing about his studies, and supposed that his hesitation was +only owing to his want of interest in the object of the expedition. +Finally, Marco concluded to go. He supposed that he should not be able +to get back into his study till noon, as he recollected that his +uncle expected to be employed all the forenoon about his pruning. +He thought, therefore, that his chance of detection would not be +increased by staying out an hour or two longer, and so he told the +boys that he would go.</p> + +<p>When they had procured sufficient bait, they went toward the river. +Their way led them not very far from the house, and they were several +times in situations where they were exposed to view, in case Marco's +uncle had looked toward them. Marco, however, contrived to walk by +these places in such a manner as to cover himself as much as possible +from view by the other boys; and besides, he hoped that his uncle was +too much occupied with his pruning, to notice what boys were prowling +about the village. They passed across the street in this manner, and +then went down over the intervales toward the river. Marco felt quite +relieved at seeing that his uncle kept steadily at his work, holding +the ladder for the other man to mount by, or sawing off low branches +himself, without appearing to notice the boys at all.</p> + +<p>The river was circuitous in its course, and its banks were in some +places steep, and in others low and sandy. The water was generally +shallow, but in some places it was deep,--especially under the high +banks. In many places there were willows and elms, overhanging the +water. It was in one of these places that the boys were going to fish +for eels. It was a point where the river took a sudden turn, forming a +sort of angle in the stream, where the water was very dark and deep. +The bank was high at that place, and it was covered with trees and +bushes. Some of these trees had been undermined, and their roots and +branches were floating in the water. The boys scrambled down to the +brink and made ready for fishing. They cut slender poles in the +bushes, for fishing-poles. There was a trunk of a tree lying along +the shore, extending obliquely out a little way over the water, which +furnished them a convenient footing. They stood or sat upon it, baited +their hooks, and threw them over into the water. They followed the +bait with their eyes as it sunk slowly down into the dark depths, +among the logs, and roots, and trunks of trees, which were lying +submerged in the water.</p> + +<p>The boys remained here an hour, but they caught no eels. Either there +were none there, or for some reason or other they chose not to bite. +They had some talk about going to another place, but before they +decided upon that plan, Marco's attention was arrested by the sight of +what appeared to be a large log floating down the river. He pointed it +out to the other boys, and, on closer examination, they saw that it +was an old canoe, of the kind that are formed by hollowing out a log. +It was not of very large size and it appeared to be rather old and +decayed. Still, the boys wanted to get it very much. They gathered in +their lines, and ran along the bank, keeping pace with the boat as it +floated down.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus10.png" alt="Boat Adrift." />Boat Adrift.</p></div> + +<p>They very soon came to a reach of the river,--that is, to a length +of it between one bend and another, where the water was swift and +shallow. So the two boys who had been fishing with Marco threw off +their shoes, and pulled up their trowsers, and ran down the bank, and +into the river. The boat was far out in the stream, and they had to +wade some distance before they came to it. Besides, as the boat was +floating down all the time, while they were wading across, it got some +distance down the stream before they could reach it. They, however, +succeeded in getting it at last, and, with much floundering in the +water and many shouts of laughter, they brought it over to Marco.</p> + +<p>Marco was much pleased with the prize. It was in better condition than +they had expected to find it. There was, indeed, a piece knocked out +at one end, near the upper edge, but they found that it would support +all three of the boys, if they sat in it carefully, and with their +weight principally at the other end. For want of oars or paddles they +cut poles on the banks, thinking that they could push the boat along, +by planting the poles against the bottom, as the water was not deep. +They drew the boat up to the shore, and poured out some water which +had got into her, and then they all carefully embarked, intending to +make a little voyage.</p> + +<p>It happened that just below the place to which the boat had drifted +before they overtook it, the water became somewhat deeper, and of +course more smooth and still, so that it afforded a favorable place +for navigating such a boat. In fact, the character of the stream, +throughout its whole course for several miles, was to present a +constant succession of changes, from deep and almost still water, to +shallow and rapid currents, rippling over beds of sand and gravel. +One of these rapids, or rips, as they were called, the boys had just +passed; it being in one of them, though one more broad and less rapid +than many of the others, that they had pursued and overtaken the +boat. In the smooth and still water below, therefore, they had a very +favorable opportunity to try their boat, for the water, though not so +shallow as it was above, was still not so deep as to prevent their +propelling their boat, by pushing their poles against the bottom. It +required some care to preserve their equilibrium, but then the water +was not deep, and they knew, therefore, that there was no danger of +being drowned if they should upset.</p> + +<p>Things went on very prosperously, until, after a few minutes, the boys +suddenly found themselves drifting into deeper water. Their poles +would scarcely touch the bottom. Marco, who was not much accustomed to +this kind of navigation, was at first somewhat alarmed, but the other +boys told him to keep quiet, and they would soon drift into shallow +water again. They accordingly drew in their poles, and began to look +over the edge of the boat into the water, to see if they could see +any eels. They saw no eels, but the water soon began to grow shallow +again, and so the boys, feeling that they were in no danger, remained +quietly in their places, looking idly into the water, talking about +the various objects which they saw upon the bottom.</p> + +<p>After some minutes spent in this manner, one of the boys looked down +the stream, and saw that the boat was gradually approaching another of +the rapids.</p> + +<p>"Come, boys," said he, "we must go to work, or we shall be down over +the rips."</p> + +<p>So the boys all took their poles and began to push the boat up the +stream; but they found it harder than they had expected. In fact, the +boat had drifted down nearer to the rapids than they ought to have +allowed it to go. The water was running quite swiftly where they were, +and they soon found that all their efforts were not sufficient to stem +the current. The boat was carried round and round in every direction, +excepting up the stream. In fact the current was rapidly acquiring the +entire mastery over them, and hurrying them down to a point where the +water poured on in a furious torrent through a long narrow passage +between beds of stone and gravel.</p> + +<p>"Pull, boys, pull!" said Marco; "we shall go down over the rips in +spite of every thing."</p> + +<p>The boys did pull, but they could effect nothing. The water was +sweeping them along with great rapidity, notwithstanding all their +struggles. Finally, when they found that they could not make head +against it, so as to go up the stream, they concluded to pull for the +shore. They were not in any great fear, for the river was very narrow +and not more than knee deep in the rapids, so that there was no real +danger of any calamity greater than getting well wet. They seemed to +be also in a fair way to escape this, for they found that they could +make some progress in getting their boat toward the shore. But, just +as they began to think their object was about to be accomplished, they +were arrested by a sudden mishap. It happened that there was a little +snag in the river, nearly in the direction in which they were going. +It was the end of a small log, which rose almost to the surface of the +water. The greater part of the log was firmly imbedded in the sand, +but there was a small portion of it which projected so far as barely +to be submerged. The boys did not notice this, and, in their eagerness +to run the boat ashore, it happened that they were running it across +the current, just above this snag. But as the current was sweeping +them down the stream at the same time that they were pushing +themselves across it, it carried the boat with great force against +this snag. The bottom of the boat was confined by it, while the force +of the current, still pressing upon the side, overset it in a moment, +and threw all the boys out into the water.</p> + +<p>The boys scrambled out without much difficulty, and stood upon the +gravelly beach. They saw at the same moment a man on the bank of the +river above, who looked as if he was about to run to their aid; but +when he saw that they were safe, he turned around immediately and +disappeared. An instant afterward, Marco, finding that his cap was not +upon his head, looked around for it, and, to his dismay, he saw it +floating swiftly away down the rapids. He ran into the water and +seized the boat, which was then beginning also to go away. He called +upon the boys to help him pull it up and pour the water out. He then +lanched it again with all speed, seized one of the poles, clambered +into it, and pushed off into the swiftest part of the current, and +away he went after his cap.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus11.png" alt="Cap Gone." />Cap Gone.</p></div> + +<p>He resorted to this desperate measure, because he was greatly alarmed +at the idea of going home without his cap. It would have certainly +insured his detection, and, as he supposed, a double punishment. He +now was as eager to go down the rapids as he had before been to escape +them. His only care was to keep his boat head down, so that if he +should encounter any snag or rock he might not be thrown broadside on. +He kept a good lookout too ahead. The boat shot through the water like +an arrow, and was soon clear of the rapids in the comparatively still +water below.</p> + +<p>Marco contrived to paddle with his pole, so as to overtake the cap and +recover it. Then he went to the shore and landed. He drew up the +boat as high as he could, and went back to seek the other boys. He +concluded that it was time to go home. His conscience now began to +reproach him with the wrong which he had been doing. His promised +pleasure had failed. His clothes were wet and uncomfortable. His mind +was anxious and unhappy. With a heavy heart he began to retrace his +steps, sure of detection when he reached home, and of punishment. He +did not, however, dread the punishment so much as the just displeasure +which his cousin would manifest, and the evidence of the pain which he +knew his cousin would suffer, when he came to learn how his pupil had +betrayed the confidence which had been reposed in him. Before he set +out for home, however, he took off such of his clothes as were most +wet, and wrung out the water as well as he could, and then put them on +again.</p> + +<p>When he drew near to the house, he expected to see his uncle still at +work, but he was not there. Marco reconnoitered the place carefully, +and then went into the office. His uncle was not in the office. He +passed through into the study. He was afraid that Forester would be +there, but, to his surprise and joy, he was not, and there was no sign +that he had been there since the morning. Marco looked at the watch, +and found that it was only about half-past eleven. So he took down +a volume of the Encyclopedia and began to read. He read the article +<i>canoe</i>, and he found some information about the bark canoes made +by Indians, but nothing about log canoes. In about fifteen minutes he +heard the office door open, and his cousin Forester came in. Forester +walked into the study, but said nothing to Marco. Marco kept at his +work, without speaking to his cousin. He began to hope that he might +yet escape. His only fear now was lest his wet clothes should be +observed. He put his hand down many times to his knees, to ascertain +how fast they were drying. The clothes that he wore were of woolen, +and of a dark color, so that they did not show the wet very +distinctly, and, besides, the sun and the air were warm that day, and +the clothes had dried fast. In a word, when twelve o'clock arrived and +Marco put his books away, nobody would have observed that his clothes +had been wet. He ran about in the open air until dinner-time, and +though, when he went in to dinner, he felt oppressed with a sense of +guilt and of self-condemnation, he was satisfied that no one suspected +him. Marco thought that he had had a very lucky escape.</p> +</div> + + +<div class="chapter" id="ch07"> +<h2>Chapter VII.</h2> + +<h3>A Dilemma.</h3> + + + +<p>Though Marco's first feeling was that of relief, to find that he had +got back from his truancy without detection, he felt, after all, ill +at ease. He kept out of sight till the dinner-bell rang, and then he +was almost afraid to go in, for fear that, by some accident or other, +his uncle might have noticed his absence, and might ask him something +about it. He was usually much interested at dinner-time in talking +with Forester about plans for the afternoon; but now he felt guilty +and afraid, and he was disinclined to look his uncle or his cousin in +the face, or to speak a word.</p> + +<p>And yet it was not punishment that Marco was afraid of. There were +very few boys who could bear punishment of any kind with more +fortitude than he, or to whom the idea of punishment gave less +concern. It was the detection itself, rather than what was to come +after it, that he feared. There is something in the very act of being +detected and exposed in guilt, which the heart instinctively shrinks +from; and many a boy would willingly bear in secret twice the pain +which the punishment of an offense would bring, rather than have his +commission of the offense discovered and made known.</p> + +<p>There was, however, no indication, at the dinner table, that Marco's +cousin or uncle suspected him of any wrong. They talked of various +subjects in their usual manner. Forester had arranged it with Marco, +to go that afternoon down to the mill-pond, to examine the boat, in +order to see whether they could have it fitted with oars, and to +make arrangements to that effect. Marco now hoped that Forester had +forgotten this plan, and would not go. Though he had been very much +interested in the plan the day before, he now felt disinclined to go. +He wished to be alone, or at least out of sight of Forester. He felt +as if he had a terrible secret on his mind, and that there was great +danger that something or other would occur to discover it. So he hoped +that Forester would have forgotten the appointment, and that it would +be thus postponed to some future time.</p> + +<p>But Forester had not forgotten it; and after dinner, he asked Marco +how soon he should be ready to go. Marco said that he should be ready +at any time; and in about half an hour they set out. They walked +together to the mill-pond. Forester said that the boat belonged to +a man who worked in the mills, but he lived a little distance above +them. His house was near the water, in a little valley. The water of +the pond extended up into this valley, forming a sort of bay.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus12.png" alt="The Millman's House." />The Millman's House.</p></div> + +<p>A road led to the house, but did not go beyond it. The house was +small, but it had pleasant little yards and gardens about it, and +various pens and coops for different sorts of animals. The man who +lived there was famous for keeping a great many animals. He had pigs, +and cows, and Malta cats, and two dogs,--one of them a water dog,--and +ducks and geese,--among the latter, two wild geese,--and hens and +rabbits; and there were two gray squirrels, hanging up in a cage by +the side of the front door. Forester told Marco about these animals as +they walked along.</p> + +<p>Marco was very fond of animals, and he began to anticipate great +pleasure in seeing these. When they came near the house, he ran +forward to look at the wild geese. The water dog ran to meet Forester. +He knew Forester, having often seen him there before. Forester and +Marco rambled about the yards, looking at the animals for some time, +and then went to the water's edge, which was very near the house. The +ducks and geese were swimming in the water. Forester called the dog +there, and Marco amused himself for some time in throwing sticks into +the water, and ordering the dog, whose name was Nelson, to plunge in +and go and bring them back. The boat was there too, fastened by a rope +to a post in the bank. At length, after Marco had satisfied himself +with these amusements, he said,</p> + +<p>"Well, cousin Forester, here is the boat."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester, "but the man don't seem to be at home. I presume +he's at the mill."</p> + +<p>"And what shall we do in that case?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Why, I will go into the house first, and ascertain the fact, and get +a paddle."</p> + +<p>So Forester went into the house, and soon afterward returned, bringing +with him a paddle. He said that the man was at the mill, but that +his wife said that they might have the boat to go and find him. "I +thought," said Forester, "that you would rather go in the boat than +walk."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "I should."</p> + +<p>"Besides," continued Forester, "I can teach you to paddle."</p> + +<p>Marco took the paddle from Forester's hand. He had never seen one +before. He said that they always used oars, not paddles, in New York +harbor. A paddle is shaped very differently from an oar. It is much +shorter and lighter,--though the blade is broader. A paddle is worked, +too, differently from an oar. An oar acts as a lever against the side +of the boat,--the middle of it resting in a small notch called a +row-lock, or between two wooden pins. But a paddle is held in the +hands entirely.</p> + +<p>"What do they have paddles for in this country?" said Marco. "Oars are +better."</p> + +<p>"You are not competent to decide that question," replied Forester.</p> + +<p>"Why not?" said Marco; "I have rowed boats many a time."</p> + +<p>"Yes, but you have never paddled much. You have used oars, but not +paddles, and so you can not compare them."</p> + +<p>"Well," said Marco, "I mean to try this paddle now, and then I can +tell."</p> + +<p>Marco had seen the boys who were with him in the boat that morning, +using their poles as paddles, and he had used one of the poles in that +manner himself; and he was just upon the point of saying something +upon the subject, when suddenly he recollected that it would betray +him. In fact, Marco found that having such a secret as this upon his +mind, was a source of great embarrassment and constraint, as he more +than once came very near making some allusion inadvertently, which +would have resulted in his exposure. While speaking of boats, and +oars, and paddles, and such subjects, he had to be continually upon +his guard and to watch all his words.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus13.png" alt="Paddling." />Paddling.</p></div> + +<p>They got into the boat and pushed out upon the water. Forester taught +Marco how to use the paddle. He gave him his seat in the stern of the +boat, and directed him to grasp the lower end of the handle with the +other hand. Then, by dipping the blade in the water and pushing the +water back, the boat was propelled forward. He also explained to him +how, by turning the blade of the paddle, one way or the other, he +could give the bow of the boat an impulse toward the right or toward +the left.</p> + +<p>"Thus you see," said Forester, "with a paddle you can steer, but with +an oar you can not."</p> + +<p>"With two oars I can," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes." replied Forester. "You must have two oars to guide a boat, but +you can do it with one paddle. Therefore, if you can have but one, a +paddle is better than an oar. There is another advantage in a paddle; +that is, in using it, your face looks the way that you are going."</p> + +<p>"Yes," rejoined Marco, "that is a great advantage."</p> + +<p>"In rowing, you must sit with your back to the bow of the boat, and +look over your shoulder to see where you are going."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "unless you have a steersman."</p> + +<p>"True," replied Forester. "When you have several men to row, and one +to steer, you get along very well with oars, but in case of only one +man, there is an advantage in a paddle. There is still another point +to be considered,--a paddle is better for a narrow boat and oars for +wide ones."</p> + +<p>"Why so?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Because," said Forester, "a certain width is required in a boat in +order to work oars well. The oarsman must sit upon the seat, and +extend the oar off upon one side of the boat, and there must be a +certain distance between the part which he takes hold of, and the +row-lock, in order to work to advantage. But it is no matter how +narrow the boat is if he has a paddle, for he holds it perpendicularly +over the side."</p> + +<p>"So paddles are better," said Marco, "for one kind of boat, and oars +for another."</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Forester, "and paddles are better for one kind of +<i>navigation</i>, and oars for another. Oars require greater breadth +of water to work in. In a narrow, crooked stream flowing among logs +and rocks, oars would not answer at all. But with a paddle a man can +worm a boat through anywhere."</p> + +<p>"That is, if it is only wide enough for the boat to go," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Of course," replied Forester. "The paddle itself requires no +additional space. But oars extend so far laterally"--</p> + +<p>"Laterally?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," rejoined Forester; "that is, on each side. Oars extend so far +on each side, that they require a great breadth of water. If you +attempt to go through a narrow place, the oars would strike."</p> + +<p>"Why, no," said Marco. "You can give orders to trail oars."</p> + +<p>"I don't know any thing about that," said Forester.</p> + +<p>"That's a beautiful manoeuver," said Marco, "only it is hard to do. +You see, you order them to give way hearty, so as to get a good +headway, till just as you get to the narrow place, and then +<i>trail</i> is the word. Then the oarsmen all whip their oars out of +the row-locks in an instant, and let 'em trail alongside under the +boat's counters, and she shoots through the narrow place like a bird."</p> + +<p>Marco became very enthusiastic in describing this manoeuver, but +Forester did not get a very clear idea of it, after all.</p> + +<p>"You'll teach it to us," said Forester, "when we get our oars and +a good boat's crew of boys. At any rate, a boat can be paddled +continuously through a narrow space, better than it can be rowed. +Therefore, paddles are generally used on rivers, where there are many +narrow places to pass through. Indians and savages almost always use +paddles, for they navigate many intricate and narrow passages of +water."</p> + +<p>By this time they began to draw near the mill. They landed near some +great logs which were floating in the water, ready to be drawn up into +the mill and sawed. They went up the bank and thence into the mill. +The man who owned the boat, was tending the mill. When he wanted a +log, he would take the end of a long chain down a sloping plane of +planks which led to the water, and fasten it to a log. The other end +of the chain was fastened round an axle in the mill, and when all was +ready, the man would set the axle in motion by the machinery, and that +would draw the log up. When the log was in the mill, the man would +roll it over into its place, on a long platform of timber, where it +was to be sawed. Then he would set the saw machinery in motion, and +the platform would begin to move forward, and the saw at the same time +to go up and down, sawing the log as it advanced. Thus it would saw +it through, from end to end, and then, by reversing the motion of the +machinery, the log was carried back again. The man would then move it +a little to one side, just far enough for the thickness of the board +which he wished to make, and then begin to saw again. He moved the log +by means of an iron bar with a sharp point, which he struck into the +end of the log, and thus pried it over, one end at a time. When the +log was placed in its new position, the machinery was set in motion +again, and the log was sawed through in another place, from end to +end, parallel to the first sawing, leaving the width of a board +between. This process was continued until the log was sawed entirely +into boards, except a piece in the middle, which it was necessary to +leave of double thickness, and this answered for a plank.</p> + +<p>Marco was much interested in watching this process, and when the +sawing of this log was completed, and another log drawn up into its +place, Forester introduced the subject of the boat. He told the man +what he wished to do, namely, to have some row-locks or thole-pins +made along the sides of the boat, and some oars to row it with. It +would also be necessary to have seats, or thwarts, as they are called, +placed in such a manner that there should be one just before each +row-lock. These seats were for the oarsmen to sit upon, in rowing. The +man told Forester that he might do any thing he pleased with the boat. +He was sure that Forester would do it no injury. Forester asked him +who would be a good man to do the work, and the man recommended to him +a wagon-maker who had a shop very near the mill.</p> + +<p>They went to the wagon-maker and explained to him what they wanted. +The wagon-maker readily undertook the work. They all went down to the +boat together, to plan the seats and the places for the thole-pins. +They concluded to have three pairs on each side. This would require +six oars. These oars the wagon-maker promised to make, and to have all +the work done by the beginning of the next week. They also concluded +to have the boat taken out of the water and thoroughly calked again, +and her bottom <i>payed</i> over with pitch, as she was not perfectly +tight. This being all arranged, Forester and Marco began to walk +toward home.</p> + +<p>"It seems to me strange to get a wagon-maker to work on a boat," said +Marco.</p> + +<p>"In New York, I suppose you would go to a boat-builder," said +Forester.</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Marco, "to be sure."</p> + +<p>"There are no boat-builders here," rejoined Forester. "In fact, there +are very few trades represented here, and workmen are willing to do +any kind of jobs that they can."</p> + +<p>As only a small part of the afternoon was yet passed away, Marco asked +Forester if he might go down to the river a-fishing. "I can keep +within my bounds, you know," said he.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester, "you <i>can</i> keep within your bounds."</p> + +<p>"And I will," said Marco. "Don't you suppose I will?"</p> + +<p>"Why, you can tell better than I can about that," said Forester. +"You have been here now some weeks, and I have treated you with +considerable trust and confidence,--have I not?"</p> + +<p>"Why, yes," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"I have given you leave to go a-fishing, trusting to your fidelity +in keeping within your bounds. I have left you alone in your study, +several times in the forenoons. I have let you go up on the mountains +with other boys, and lent you my watch, so that you might know when +it was time to come back. Now you can tell better than I, whether you +have been faithful to all of these trusts."</p> + +<p>Marco did not answer. He did not know what to say. He walked along in +silence.</p> + +<p>"I will leave it with you to decide," said Forester. "Here we are just +home; now you may go into the study and reflect a few moments upon the +subject. Call to mind all the cases in which I have treated you with +trust and confidence, and consider whether you have always been +faithful to the trust. If, on reflection, you think that you have, you +may take your fishing-line and go a-fishing. If you feel conscious +that you have at any time betrayed my confidence, you must not go this +afternoon. You may go out to play wherever you please about the house +and garden, but you must not go a-fishing. If you are in doubt whether +you have betrayed my confidence or not, and wish to ask my opinion +about some particular case which comes up to your mind, you may remain +in the study till I come in, and ask me, and I will tell you. I shall +be in, in a few minutes."</p> + +<p>There was a pause here. Marco looked very serious, and walked along in +silence. Such a turn to the conversation was entirely unexpected to +him, and he did not know what to say.</p> + +<p>"It is possible," continued Forester, "that you may be conscious that +you have clearly been guilty of betraying the confidence which I have +placed in you in some instance which I know nothing of, or which you +suppose I know nothing of, and you may wish to confess it to me. If +you have been guilty of any such act, the best thing that you can do +is to confess it to me at once; and if you wish to do it, you may wait +till I come, for that purpose. So you may wait till I come either to +ask me a question, or to confess a fault. If you do not wish to do +either, you may go out without waiting for me; but you must not go +a-fishing unless you can truly say that you have been faithful and +honest, whenever I have trusted you before."</p> + +<p>So saying, Forester parted from Marco and went into the house. Marco +slowly walked into the office, and through it into the little study. +He was greatly perplexed to know what to make of this address. "Can +it be," thought he, "that he knows that I went away this morning? How +could he have found it out? Or did he say that, only to find out now +whether I have been honest or not heretofore?"</p> + +<p>On mature reflection, Marco concluded that Forester did not probably +know any thing about his having gone away. He thought that what he had +just said was only a part of Forester's general plan of managing +his case, and that it did not imply that Forester entertained any +particular suspicions. Marco thought that he might therefore safely go +a-fishing that afternoon if he was disposed; but we must do him the +justice to say, that he did not entertain the idea of doing it a +moment. He determined that he would not go. But as he was not prepared +to confess his fault, and as he had no question to ask, he determined +to go and play about the garden. He thought a little of waiting till +his cousin came in, and then honestly making a confession; but he +could not quite conclude upon this, and so he determined to go and +think more of it. Besides, he concluded that if he were going to make +a confession at all, he should rather do it that evening when he went +to bed; for Forester always came up to his room after he went to bed, +to have a little friendly and serious conversation with him, and to +bid him good night.</p> + +<p>He accordingly went out before Forester came in. He spent the +afternoon in a miserable state of mind. He could not divest himself of +the feeling of anxiety, that in some way or other, Forester had found +out his transgression. He rather wondered, that, if it were true that +Forester had found it out, he had not said something to him directly +about it,--but then he knew it was Forester's way not always to make +known, at once, all that he knew in such cases. But then he thought, +again, that Forester <i>could</i> not know any thing about it. There +was no way for him to have known it. He was away all the morning, and +did not come home until after Marco got back. So he concluded that +Forester did not know; but he began to wish that he did. He could not +bear to think of telling him, but he wished that he knew. The burden +of such a secret became intolerable to him. He strolled about the +yards and garden, not knowing what to do with himself, and growing all +the time more and more anxious and unhappy. He was in a very serious +dilemma.</p> + +<p>Marco cast his eyes occasionally toward the office, expecting to see +Forester come out. He thought Forester would want to know whether he +went a-fishing or not. But he did not come. Marco spent some time in +the garden with James, who was at work there raking over the ground, +and gathering in such things as might be hurt by any sudden frost. +Marco worked with him for some time, and endeavored to converse with +him, but he did not find him very communicative, and at last he went +into the house and sat on the sofa in the parlor, reading, until +supper time.</p> + +<p>Marco fully expected that Forester would ask him at supper time +whether he had been a-fishing or not; but he said nothing about it. +Forester told his father and mother about their plan for a boat, and +gave them a full account of their visit to the mill. His mother seemed +quite interested in the account, and told Marco, that, after he got +his crew well trained, she should hope that he would invite her on an +excursion in the boat.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "we will. We must have a seat, cousin Forester, for +passengers and visitors, in the stern sheets."</p> + +<p>"The stern sheets?" said Forester, "what do you mean by the stern +sheets?"</p> + +<p>"Why, it is aft," said Marco, "between the coxswain's place and the +stroke-oarsman."</p> + +<p>"You'll have to show us," said his aunt, "when we come to see the +boat."</p> + +<p>This kind of conversation somewhat relieved Marco's mind,--but still +he was ill at ease, and he determined to tell Forester the whole story +at bedtime, if he could only summon up courage to begin.</p> +</div> + + +<div class="chapter" id="ch08"> +<h2>Chapter VIII.</h2> + +<h3>A Confession.</h3> + + + +<p>In the room where Marco slept, there was a large, stuffed arm-chair, +which was commonly called the easy chair; it was one that was seldom +used by the family, except in sickness. It stood in a corner of the +room not far from the head of Marco's bed. Forester used to sit in +this chair while he remained conversing with Marco, when he came up to +take his light.</p> + +<p>When Forester had taken his seat in the great chair this evening, +according to his usual custom, he began his conversation by saying.</p> + +<p>"Well, Marco, have you been helping James in the garden this +afternoon?"</p> + +<p>"Why, no," said Marco, "I did not help him much,--I don't like James +very well."</p> + +<p>"Why not?" asked Forester.</p> + +<p>"Why, I don't think he is very accommodating," replied Marco.</p> + +<p>"What has he done to-day, which is unaccommodating?" asked Forester.</p> + +<p>"He would not lend me his knife. I wanted to borrow his knife to cut +me a cane from some apple-tree trimmings, and he would not let me have +it."</p> + +<p>"Haven't you got a knife of your own?" asked Forester.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "but mine won't open."</p> + +<p>"Won't open?" repeated Forester. "What's the cause of that?"</p> + +<p>"Why, I suppose because the joint is rusty," replied Marco.</p> + +<p>"How came it rusty?" asked Forester.</p> + +<p>"Why, you see I laid it down one day on a stone, where I was at work +with it, and left it there, and there happened to come a rain in the +night and rusted it. I did not know where it was, and so I didn't find +it for a good many days."</p> + +<p>"Then, I presume," said Forester, "that James supposed that you would +leave his knife out in the same way and spoil it."</p> + +<p>"No," replied Marco, "that was not the reason."</p> + +<p>"You are sure that you asked him for it distinctly, and he refused?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco.</p> + +<p>Here there was a moment's pause. Marco thought that his cousin +Forester was considering what should be done to James, for being so +unaccommodating. He did not know but that he would report him to his +father and have him turned away; though Marco did not really wish to +have him turned away.</p> + +<p>But Forester said, after reflecting a moment, "That makes me think of +a story I have got here; listen and hear it."</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus14.png" alt="Marco's Room." />Marco's Room.</p></div> + +<p>So Forester took out his pocket-book and opened it, and then appeared +to be turning over the leaves, for a moment, to find a place. Then he +began to read, or to appear to read, as follows:</p> + +<p>Once there was a little girl named Anne. She came to her mother one +day, as she was sitting in the parlor, and began to complain bitterly +of her sister Mary. Her sister Mary was older than she was, and had a +doll. Anne complained that Mary would not lend her her doll.</p> + +<p>"Are you sure that she refused to lend you her doll?" asked her +mother.</p> + +<p>"Yes, mother, I am <i>sure</i> she did," replied Anne.</p> + +<p>"Perhaps she is playing with it herself," said her mother.</p> + +<p>"No," replied Anne, "she is ironing in the kitchen."</p> + +<p>"I think you must be mistaken," said her mother. "Go and ask her +again. Don't tell her I sent you, but ask her yourself, whether she +really meant that she was not willing to lend you her doll."</p> + +<p>So Anne ran off to put the question to Mary again; presently she +returned with the same answer. "Mary," she said, "would not lend it to +her."</p> + +<p>"I am very sorry to hear it," said her mother, "for now I suppose I +shall have to punish you."</p> + +<p>"To punish <i>her</i>, you mean," said Anne.</p> + +<p>"No," said her mother, "to punish you. I don't suppose <i>she</i> is +to blame."</p> + +<p>"Why, mother--how can <i>I</i> be to blame, for her not being willing +to lend me her doll?"</p> + +<p>"You <i>are</i>, I've no doubt," said her mother. "Mary is a +good-natured, accommodating girl,--always ready to do kindnesses, and +if she has any unwillingness to lend any thing to you, it must be that +you have created it yourself, by some misconduct. So that it will +prove, no doubt, that you are the one to be punished."</p> + +<p>Here Anne began to hang her head and look a little ashamed. Her +mother's supposition proved to be correct, for, on inquiring, it +appeared that Mary had lent her doll to Anne a few days before, and +that when she wanted it again, Anne was unwilling to give it to her, +and when Mary insisted on her bringing it to her, she became angry and +threw the doll out the window.</p> + +<p>"I never heard that story before, cousin Forester," said Marco. "And I +did not know that you had stories in your pocket-book."</p> + +<p>Forester laughed and put up his pocket-book.</p> + +<p>"I don't believe there is any story there," said Marco. "You made it +up for me, I verily believe."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester, "I did. Don't it fit your case pretty well?"</p> + +<p>"Why, I don't know," said Marco. "I don't see why he could not let me +have his knife."</p> + +<p>"Suppose <i>I</i> had asked him for his knife; don't you suppose he +would have lent it to me?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "I've no doubt he would; he would do any thing for +<i>you</i>, of course, because you pay him--or uncle pays him, which +is the same thing."</p> + +<p>"I don't think that that is the reason altogether," replied Forester. +"There was the man at the mill to-day, who said that I might take his +boat and do any thing I chose to do with it."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "I noticed that."</p> + +<p>"And perhaps you thought it was very much to his credit that he did +so."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"But the fact is," rejoined Forester, "as I think, it was more to +my credit than his; because I have had his boat a great many times +heretofore, and his having so much confidence in me now, shows how I +have acted with his property before. I have always taken a great deal +of pains to use it carefully, to bring it back to its place safely, to +get the water out, if there was any in it, and leave every thing in +order. I have done this, not only because it is just and right that I +should not make him suffer inconvenience on account of his doing me a +favor, but as a matter of policy."</p> + +<p>"What do you mean by a matter of policy?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Why, regard to my own interest. If I did not do so, I should soon +make people unwilling to lend me their things. And I think there must +be some good reason why James is not willing to lend you his knife."</p> + +<p>"Why, he says," answered Marco, "that I don't bring back his things."</p> + +<p>"Ah!" rejoined Forester, "that's it. I thought there must be some such +reason as that. You have lost your character with James, and I advise +you to acquire a new one as soon as you can. Besides, you have done +him injustice this evening. You represented him as refusing you his +knife because he was unaccommodating and selfish, whereas it was +only proper regard to the safety of his property. What you said was +calculated to make an unfavorable impression on my mind against him, +and one which would have been unjust."</p> + +<p>Marco perceived that it was so, and was silent.</p> + +<p>"I am sorry that your knife is rusty," resumed Forester. "Perhaps I +can get it open for you."</p> + +<p>"How?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Why, I believe the best way is to soak the joint in oil. The oil will +insinuate itself into the joint, and then we can get hold of the blade +with a pair of nippers, or something of the kind, and open it; and +then, by working it to and fro a few times, the rust will work out, +and the knife be as good as it was before. If it is very rusty indeed, +this plan will not answer."</p> + +<p>"What must be done in that case?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"The only way then is to carry it to some kind of smith and get him to +punch out the rivet. Then we can take the blade out entirely. By this +means we can clean it of its rust, and then put it in again with a new +rivet. If you will give me your knife to-morrow, I will try to put it +in order for you again, in one or the other of these ways.</p> + +<p>"And now," continued Forester, after a short pause, "it is time for me +to go down, unless you have something which you wish to say."</p> + +<p>Although it was not unusual for Forester to close his evening +conversation in this manner, Marco's attention was particularly +arrested by the excellent opportunity which this remark afforded him +to make his confession. He really wished to make it,--but he did not +know how to begin. He wished that his cousin would ask him something +about it, or introduce the subject in some way or other, but Forester +was silent. Presently he rose, came to Marco's bedside, and asked him +if he was warm enough,--for the nights at this season of the year were +beginning to be cool.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "I'm very comfortable."</p> + +<p>"Well, then, good night." So Forester took the lamp and walked slowly +toward the door.</p> + +<p>"Cousin Forester," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"What?" said Forester.</p> + +<p>"Don't go just yet."</p> + +<p>Forester turned back and advanced to the foot of the bed. There was a +high foot-board at the foot of the bed, and Forester leaned upon it +with the lamp in his hand.</p> + +<p>"Is there any thing that you want to say to me?"</p> + +<p>Marco was silent. He looked distressed and embarrassed, and moved his +head restlessly on his pillow.</p> + +<p>"There's something wrong, isn't there, Marco," said Forester, "that +you are thinking whether to confess to me or not? If there is, do just +as you choose about it. I like to have you confess what you have done +that is wrong, but then, if you do it at all, it must be done of your +own accord."</p> + +<p>"Well," said Marco, "I want to tell you about my going away to play +this forenoon."</p> + +<p>"How long were you gone?" asked Forester.</p> + +<p>"Pretty much all the forenoon," replied Marco.</p> + +<p>"Well," said Forester, "I am very glad you concluded to confess it of +your own accord, but I know all about it."</p> + +<p>Marco started up in his bed and looked his cousin in the face, and +said,</p> + +<p>"Why, cousin Forester, how did you know?"</p> + +<p>"To prove to you that I really did know, I will tell you what you did. +You got out of the window soon after I went away, and went over into +Mr. Eldon's garden, where George Eldon and Samuel Warner were digging +worms for bait. Then you went with them down to the river. You hid +behind them when you passed in sight of the house, for fear that +father would see you, as he was out in the yard, pruning trees. +Then you went down to the river and sat on a log under some bushes, +fishing. After a while you spied an old log canoe, drifting down the +river, and the other boys waded out and got it. Then you all got into +it and paddled about a while, and afterward got carried over the rips +and upset in the water. Your cap drifted down the stream, and you +went after it in the canoe and got it. After that, you took off your +stockings and wrung out the water from them, and then came home. You +got into the study only about a quarter of an hour before I came."</p> + +<p>Marco listened to this minute account of his adventures with eager +interest, wondering how his cousin could have obtained so early and +such complete information. After Forester had concluded, he paused a +moment and breathed a long sigh. Then he laid his head down upon his +pillow again, saying,</p> + +<p>"Well, I don't see how you found it out; and I am sorry that you did, +for I meant to have told you all about it myself."</p> + +<p>Marco seemed really disappointed at having lost the opportunity to +make his full confession, but Forester told him that he considered +that he <i>had</i> made full confession. "You made up your mind to +do it," said he, "and you did begin, and it was the beginning which +required all the effort. I only refrained from asking you about the +details, from a wish to show you that I really knew all about it."</p> + +<p>"I don't see how you found it out," said Marco. "I suppose it must +have been that the boys told you."</p> + +<p>"No," replied Forester; "I have not seen either of the boys, or heard +any thing from them, directly or indirectly."</p> + +<p>"Then you must have watched me yourself," said Marco, "instead of +going away."</p> + +<p>"Do you think," said Forester, "that I would pretend that I was going +away, and then just go out a little way and lie in wait to watch you?</p> + +<p>"Why, no,"--said Marco,--"I don't really suppose that you would."</p> + +<p>"No," said Forester, "I really went away nut of town. I went to visit +a sick man and help him make his will, and I did not return until just +before you saw me."</p> + +<p>"Then I don't see how you knew," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"It is of very little consequence to you to know that," said Forester, +"but I want to ask you a little more about the affair. Are you willing +to answer any question that I may ask?"</p> + +<p>Marco said that he was, and Forester asked him about the circumstances +which led him to go away. Marco explained to him how he saw the boys, +and what he thought that they were doing, and what induced him to go +and see them, and how he was prevented from coming back as he had +intended. There was an air of openness and honesty in the manner in +which Marco related these facts, which convinced Forester that he was +telling the truth.</p> + +<p>Forester was glad to find that it was not a deliberate and +preconcerted plan, between Marco and the other boys, to go off on this +expedition; for, bad as it was for Marco to allow himself to be drawn +away by such temptations, it would have been worse, or rather it would +have indicated a worse state of character, if he had deliberately +planned such a truancy.</p> + +<p>"Well," said Forester, as he was about to close the conversation, "I +am very glad that you concluded to confess your fault. I am very glad, +too, that you did not go a-fishing this afternoon under the sort of +permission which I gave you. I infer from these two things that you +wish to be cured of these faults, and to become a boy of firm moral +principle. Now it is a rule with me, generally, not to punish a boy +for what he confesses of his own accord. Still, I think it probable +it would be better for you to have some punishment for this. It would +help to make a strong impression upon your mind, and make it much more +easy for you to resist such temptations in time to come. But you +may decide this question yourself. If you choose to submit to a +punishment, and will tell me so to-morrow morning, I will think of +some suitable one for you. If you do not say any thing to me about it, +I shall not punish you." So saying, Forester bade Marco good night.</p> + +<p>The next morning, Marco met Forester on the stairs, as he was coming +down to breakfast, and told him that he thought he should feel better +to be punished. So Forester reflected upon the subject, and at nine +o'clock, when Marco went in to commence his studies, Forester told him +that he had concluded upon his punishment.</p> + +<p>"What is it to be?" said Marco.</p> + +<p>"It is for me not to allow you to study," replied Forester, "all this +forenoon, but to require you to sit still at your desk, with nothing +to do. You see it will be a sort of solitary imprisonment, only your +prison will in itself be a pleasant place."</p> + +<p>Marco thought that this would not be a very severe punishment, but he +found, in enduring it, that it was in fact much more severe than he +had imagined. He got very tired indeed, long before the forenoon was +out. He concluded that solitary imprisonment for years, in a gloomy +dungeon, must be a terrible punishment indeed.</p> + +<p>A year or two after this time, when Marco had been entirely cured of +all such faults, he one day asked Forester to explain to him how he +knew where he went on this memorable forenoon; and Forester willingly +explained it to him. It seems that Forester's father, though a very +gentle and kind-hearted man, was a very shrewd one, and having been +accustomed to the discovery, in the course of his practice, of all +sorts of pranks and roguery, was less disposed to place confidence in +others till he knew the confidence was deserved, than Forester himself +was, who had less experience. And when he knew that Forester had gone +away, leaving Marco alone, he doubted a little whether he would remain +industriously at his work. While he was thinking of this, he heard a +slight noise which Marco made with his feet against the clapboards of +the house in getting out the window. He therefore came into the study +a moment afterward, and found that Marco had gone. He looked out the +window and saw him going off toward the other boys. Just at that +moment the man came to help him prune his trees, but before he began +this work he went into the house to James, called him to a window and +pointed out Marco to him, and said,</p> + +<p>"I want you, James, to follow him, and keep in sight of him until he +returns, but if possible don't let him see you. Say nothing to +me about it, but give my son Forester an account of all that you +observe."</p> + +<p>James did as he was directed, and when Forester came back he told him +the whole story, just before Forester went into the study. So that +Forester knew all about it, before Marco saw him. James managed the +affair very adroitly, for he kept himself entirely out of sight except +in one instance, and that was when the boys fell into the water. He +then rushed toward them for fear that they might be drowned, but +he stopped on the bank when he saw that there was no danger, and +disappeared again before Marco had time to recognize him.</p> +</div> + + +<div class="chapter" id="ch09"> +<h2>Chapter IX.</h2> + +<h3>Boating.</h3> + + + +<p>The alterations and improvements, which Forester had ordered in the +boat, were completed at the time promised. Marco said that it would +require a crew of eight to man the boat properly: six oarsmen, a +bowman, and a coxswain. Marco pronounced this word as if it was spelt +<i>coxen</i>. This is the proper way to pronounce it. It means the one +who sits in the stern, to steer the boat and direct the rowers. In +fact, the coxswain is the commander of the boat's crew.</p> + +<p>"<i>I</i> will be bowman," said Marco, "and you can be coxswain, and +then we shall want six boys for oarsmen."</p> + +<p>"You will have to explain to me then what my duties will be," said +Forester, "for I don't even know what a coxswain is."</p> + +<p>"Why, he's the commander," said Marco. "He gives all the orders."</p> + +<p>"Then you must be coxswain at first," said Forester, "for I don't know +any thing about it. You have got to teach us all. After I have learned +to manage a boat with six oars, man-of-war fashion, I should like to +be coxswain sometimes very much. And it seems to me," added Forester, +"that you and I had better go down first alone, until you get me +taught, and then we can get the boys to come afterward."</p> + +<p>"O no," said Marco, "you'll all learn easily enough together. I can +tell you all exactly what to do."</p> + +<p>Forester acceded to this proposal, and they made out a list of six +boys, and Forester authorized Marco to invite them to come. "Be sure," +said Forester, "to tell their parents that we are going out in a boat, +and tell them that I am going too." Marco did this. The boys all +gladly accepted the invitation. They came first to the house, and then +proceeded by a path, from the foot of the garden, which led to the +mill-pond. It was about half-past one when they reached the boat.</p> + +<p>Here there was a great scene of confusion, as the boys all commenced +talking and asking questions together. They found the boat in fine +order, being perfectly tight and dry, and the new seats being all in +their places. The oars, however, were not there. Forester recommended +to Marco to send a detachment of his men, to go to the wagon-maker's +shop and get them. So Marco sent off three of the boys, calculating +very correctly that they could bring two oars apiece. Before many +minutes they returned, each of the boys having two oars, one on each +shoulder.</p> + +<p>The other boys immediately began to take the oars, and they all +advanced together toward the boat, to get in.</p> + +<p>"Stop," exclaimed Marco, "stop, boys! you must not go aboard without +an order. I'm coxswain; you must wait till I tell you, before one of +you goes aboard. John, come out."</p> + +<p>John, who had stepped into the boat, came back again on hearing this +peremptory order, and the boys waited on the bank. Marco then +told them to put the oars in. The boys began to pitch them in, in +confusion, some falling upon the thwarts, and some into the bottom of +the boat.</p> + +<p>"No,--stop," said Marco; "that isn't the way. Put 'em in in order."</p> + +<p>"Yes, put 'em in order," said John. "Let's put 'em in order."</p> + +<p>"Lay 'em along the thwarts," said Marco, "the blades forward."</p> + +<p>Marco explained to the boys how to place the oars. They were laid +along the middle of the thwarts so as to leave room to sit by the side +of them. They were placed in such a manner that the handle of one came +upon each seat.</p> + +<p>"<i>Aboard!</i>" said Marco, in a military tone.</p> + +<p>The boys did not understand that order, and of course did not obey it.</p> + +<p>"<i>Aboard</i>, I say!" repeated Marco; "when I say <i>Aboard</i>, you +must all get into the boat."</p> + +<p>With this explanation of the word of command, the boys understood what +they were to do, and got aboard the boat as fast as they could. There +was much confusion among them in getting their seats. Several of them +began to take up their oars, until they were forbidden to do so by +Marco, in a loud voice.</p> + +<p>"You must not touch the oars," said he, "until I say <i>Toss</i>. Then +you must take them and toss them right up in the air."</p> + +<p>"How?" said one of the boys, named Joseph. "How, Marco?"</p> + +<p>This question was scarcely heard amid the confusion.</p> + +<p>"Be silent, boys; don't talk, and don't stop to ask <i>how</i>, but do +just as I tell you."</p> + +<p>Marco was so much accustomed to the idea which sailors attach to +the word <i>toss</i>, and to the manner in which they perform the +evolution, that he forgot how many different ways there might be of +tossing up an oar. The proper way is, when the command is given, for +each oarsman to raise the blade of his oar quick, but gently, into the +air, letting the end of the handle rest upon the thwart. It is then in +a position to be let down into the water conveniently when the next +order, which is, <i>Let fall</i>, is given.</p> + +<p>The raising of the oars, and then letting them fall, all exactly +together, by the crew of a man-of-war's boat, makes a very pretty +spectacle.</p> + +<p>The boys, however, knew nothing about this, for Marco, as it was all +very plain and familiar to him, did not realize the necessity of +making very minute explanations to such new recruits as those +that were under his command. Accordingly, when the order came to +<i>toss</i>, some of the boys sat still, looking at Marco, and not +knowing what to do; others raised their oars into the air, some one +way and some another; and Joseph, who was a little discomposed by the +rebuff he had met with, concluded that he would obey as literally as +possible, let what would come of it and he gave his oar a high toss +into the air. It fell at a short distance from him into the water, +went down for a moment out of sight, and then, shooting out for half +its length, it fell over upon its side and began to float away.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus15.png" alt=""Toss."" />"Toss."</p></div> + +<p>Hereupon ensued just such a scene of laughter shouts, and confusion +as might have been expected. All began to shout out exclamations and +orders, and to give directions how to proceed to recover the lost oar. +The boys whose oars were still left, thrust them confusedly into the +water, and began pushing, poking, and paddling with them, in order to +get the boat out to where Joseph's oar was floating. All this time +Forester remained on the bank, laughing at this specimen of nautical +command and subordination.</p> + +<p>After a time the oar was recovered, and Marco, after much scolding and +vociferation, got his crew in order again. Forester said that he would +remain where he was, on the bank, until Marco had tried his oarsmen a +little. So Marco went on giving his orders. He succeeded finally in +getting the boys all in their seats again, with their oars in their +hands.</p> + +<p>"Now, boys, mind," said he, "and I'll tell you exactly what to do. +<i>Attention!</i> When I say <i>Attention</i>, you must all stop talking. +<i>Attention!</i> Now you mustn't speak a word. You must hold your oars out +over the water and have them all ready, the handles in your hands, and +when I say <i>Give way</i>, then you must all begin to row, all together +exactly, so as to keep the stroke. You must keep the stroke with the +stroke-oarsman."</p> + +<p>But the boys did not know who the stroke-oarsman was, and they began +clamorously to inquire, notwithstanding the injunction to silence +which they had received. Marco explained to them that the +stroke-oarsman was the one who sat nearest to him, that is, the one +farthest aft. As the oarsmen were all sitting with their backs toward +the bow of the boat, their faces were toward the stern, and therefore +the one who sat farthest aft could be seen by the rest. This is the +reason why the thwart which is farthest aft is made the seat of the +best oarsman, and the others are required to make their motions keep +time with his. For the oars in a boat that is fully manned are so +close together, that, unless they keep time exactly with each other, +the blades would cross and hit one another in utter confusion. But +if they keep the stroke, as they call it, exactly together, all goes +right. For this reason the oarsman who sits aft, by whose oar the +movements of all the other oars are to be regulated, is called the +stroke-oarsman.</p> + +<p>The boys, however, knew nothing of all this. Marco contented himself +with giving one general direction to them, to keep the stroke with +the stroke-oarsman, and to begin when he gave the order, "<i>Give +way</i>." Accordingly, after all were silent again, the oars being +extended over the water, and Forester standing on the bank watching +the operation, Marco called out in the tone of command, "<i>Give +way!</i>"</p> + +<p>The boys immediately began to row, all looking at the stroke-oarsman, +but failing entirely to keep time with him. The oars thumped against +each other, crossed each other, and made all manner of confusion. +Some could not get into the water, and others could not get out; and +Joseph's oar, which somehow or other came out too suddenly, while he +was pulling hard upon it, caused him to pitch backward off his seat +and tumble over into the bottom of the boat.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus16.png" alt="Bad Rowing." />Bad Rowing.</p></div> + +<p>"<i>Oars!</i>" said Marco, "OARS!"</p> + +<p>What Marco meant by <i>oars</i> they did not know, so they paid no +attention to the command, but some stopped rowing in despair, while +others kept on, banging the blades of the oars against one another, +and plashing the water, but produced no effect whatever in respect to +propelling the boat. In the mean time the air was filled with shouts +of laughter and loud vociferations.</p> + +<p>"<i>Oars!</i>" exclaimed Marco again, with the voice of a colonel at +the head of his regiment. "<i>Oars!</i> Why don't you stop when I say +<i>Oars</i>?"</p> + +<p>The boys began to stop, shouting to one another, "Stop!" "Stop!" In a +few minutes all was still again. The boys began to take their oars in +and one of them rose and said,</p> + +<p>"Poh! this is all nonsense. You can't do any thing with oars. I'd +rather have one good paddle than all the oars in New York."</p> + +<p>In fact, Marco himself began to despair. He uttered some impatient +exclamations, and tried to paddle the boat toward the shore. But he +found he was almost as awkward in managing a paddle, as the other boys +were in working oars. He succeeded, however, at last, in getting the +boat to the shore, and then he told the boys that they might as well +get out, for they could not do any thing at all about rowing.</p> + +<p>"You don't seem to get along very well, Marco," said Forester: "what +is the matter?"</p> + +<p>"Why, I havn't got any crew. They don't know any thing about it."</p> + +<p>"It seems to me the fault is in the commander," said Forester.</p> + +<p>"In me?" said Marco. "Why, I ordered them right, but they wouldn't +obey."</p> + +<p>"Yes, your orders would have been right, if you had had a trained +crew. But you don't manage in the right way to teach raw recruits."</p> + +<p>"I wish you would try, then, cousin Forester," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Well," said Forester, "I have no objection to try. Boys, are you +willing to have me for commander?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir," "Yes, sir," said all the boys.</p> + +<p>"I shall be a great deal more strict than Marco," said Forester. "So I +don't expect that you will like me. But I will try. I don't want quite +so many oarsmen to begin with; I should rather teach a few at a time. +Are there any of you that would like to come ashore, and let the rest +practice first?"</p> + +<p>None of the boys moved. They all wished to practice first. This was +just as Forester expected.</p> + +<p>"Very well," said Forester; "I know how I can thin out my crew. As +fast as I find that you don't obey my orders, I shall put you ashore."</p> + +<p>"But suppose we don't understand?" said one of the boys.</p> + +<p>"I shall explain fully beforehand what you are to do. And, Marco, you +must observe how I manage, and then you will know another time. When +you have got any thing to teach, the art consists in dividing the +lesson into a great many very short steps, and letting your pupils +take one at a time."</p> + +<p>Forester knew nothing about managing a boat's crew until that day, but +he had observed very attentively all the orders which Marco had given, +and noticed their meaning, and thus he was prepared to manoeuver the +boat as far as Marco had gone in giving his orders. He accordingly +stepped into the boat and took Marco's place; while Marco himself +walked forward and took his place at the bow of the boat, saying that +he was going to be bowman.</p> + +<p>"Marco," said Forester, "you say that when the order is +<i>Attention</i>, the crew must be silent; what is the order when I +want to give them liberty to talk again?"</p> + +<p>"<i>Crew at ease</i>" said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Very well. Now, boys, when I say <i>Attention</i>, you must be still, +look at me, hear all I say, and obey the orders as exactly as you can, +but ask no questions and give me no advice, nor speak to one another, +till I say, <i>Crew at ease</i>. Then you can talk again. Perhaps two +or three of you will disobey, and I have no objection to that, as I +should like some excuse for putting some of you ashore."</p> + +<p>Forester smiled as he said this, and every boy determined that he +would not be the one to be sent ashore.</p> + +<p>"<i>Attention!</i>" said Forester.</p> + +<p>Forester then put his paddle into the water and paddled the boat out +into the pond a little way. While he was doing this, there was a dead +silence on board the boat. Not a boy spoke a word; and when, at last, +Forester stopped paddling, the boat floated on a little way gently +through the water, and not a sound was to be heard except the distant +barking of a dog on the opposite shore.</p> + +<p>"<i>Crew at ease</i>," said Forester. The boys laughed, changed their +positions, and began to talk.</p> + +<p>"I didn't get any of you ashore then," said Forester, "but I shall +succeed the next time, for I shall watch my opportunity when you are +all busy talking, and say, <i>Attention</i>, suddenly; then you will +not all stop in an instant, but some will go on just to finish their +sentence, and this will be disobeying the order, and so I shall get +you ashore."</p> + +<p>The boys laughed; they thought that it was not very good policy for +Forester to give them this warning of his intention, as it put +them all upon their guard. Presently the word of command came very +suddenly--"<i>Attention!</i>" Every voice was hushed in an instant; +the boys assumed immediately an erect position, and looked directly +toward Forester.</p> + +<p>"Joseph," said Forester, "when I give order <i>Toss</i>, you are +to take up your oar and raise the blade into the air, and hold it +perpendicularly, with the end of the handle resting on the thwart by +your side, on the side of the boat opposite to the one on which you +are going to row,--<i>Toss!</i>"</p> + +<p>So Joseph raised his oar in the manner directed, the other boys +looking on.</p> + +<p>"Let it down again," said Forester. Joseph obeyed.</p> + +<p>"<i>Crew at ease</i>," said Forester.</p> + +<p>Forester acted very wisely in not keeping the attention of the crew +very long at a time. By relieving them very frequently, he made the +distinction between being under orders and at ease a very marked +and striking one, so that the boys easily kept it in mind. In a few +moments he commanded attention again, with the same success as before. +He then ordered another boy to toss his oar, then another, and so on, +until he had taught the movement to each one separately. He gave to +each one such explanations as he needed, and when necessary he made +them perform the evolution twice, so as to be sure that each one +understood exactly what was to be done. Then Forester gave the command +for them all to toss together, and they did so quite successfully. The +oars rose and stood perpendicularly like so many masts; while Forester +paddled the boat slowly through the water. Then he directed the boys +to let the oars down again, gently, to their places along the thwarts, +and put the crew at ease.</p> + +<p>The boys perceived now that they were making progress. They were +gaining slowly, it is true, but surely, and Marco saw where the cause +of his failure was. He had not realized how entirely ignorant all +these boys were of the whole mystery of managing an oar and of acting +in concert; and besides, he had not had experience enough as a +teacher, to know how short the steps must be made, in teaching any +science or art which is entirely new.</p> + +<p>In the same slow and cautious manner, Forester taught the boys to let +the blades of their oars fall gently into the water, at the command, +"<i>Let fall</i>." He taught one at a time, as before, each boy +dropping the blades into the water and letting the middle of the oar +come into the row-lock, while he held the handle in his hands ready +to row. Then, without letting them row any, he ordered them to +<i>toss</i> again; that is, to raise the oars out of the water and +hold them in the air, with the end of the handle resting upon the +thwart. He drilled them in this exercise for some time, until they +could go through it with ease, regularity, and dispatch. He then gave +the order, "<i>Crew at ease</i>," and let the boys rest themselves and +enjoy conversation.</p> + +<p>While they were resting, Forester paddled them about. The boys asked +him when he was going to let them row, and Forester told them that +perhaps they had had drilling enough for one day, and if they chose he +would not require any thing more of them, but would paddle them about +and let them amuse themselves. But they were all eager to learn to +row. So Forester consented.</p> + +<p>He taught them the use of the oar, in the same slow and cautious +manner by which his preceding instructions had been characterized. He +made one learn at a time, explaining to him minutely every motion. As +each one, in turn, practiced these instructions, the rest looked on, +observing every thing very attentively, so as to be ready when their +turn should come. At length, when they had rowed separately, he tried +first two, and then four, and then six together, and finally got them +so trained that they could keep the stroke very well. While they were +pulling in this manner, the boat would shoot ahead very rapidly. When +he wanted them to stop, he would call out, "<i>Oars</i>." This was +the order for them to stop rowing, after they had finished the stroke +which they had commenced, and to hold the oars in a horizontal +position, with the blades just above the water, ready to begin again +whenever he should give the command.</p> + +<p>At first the boys were inclined to stop immediately, even if they were +in the middle of a stroke, if they heard the command, <i>oars</i>. But +Marco said that this was wrong; they must finish the stroke, he said, +if they had commenced it, and then all take the oars out of the water +regularly together. Forester was careful too to give the order always +between the middle and the end of a stroke, so that the obeying of the +order came immediately after the issuing of it.</p> + +<p>By this means Forester could stop them in a moment, when any thing +went wrong. He would order, "<i>Give way</i>," and then the boys would +all begin to pull their oars. As soon as any of them lost the stroke, +or whenever any oars began to interfere, or any other difficulty or +accident occurred, he would immediately give the order, "<i>Oars</i>." +This would instantly arrest the rowing, before the difficulty became +serious. Then, after a moment's pause he would say, "<i>Give way</i>," +again, when they would once more begin rowing all together. All this +time, he sat in the stern and steered the boat wherever they wanted to +go.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus17.png" alt="Good Rowing." />Good Rowing.</p></div> + +<p>Marco wished to have Forester teach the boys how to back water, and to +trail oars, and to put the oars apeak, and to perform various other +evolutions. But Forester was very slow in going on to new manoeuvers +before the old ones were made perfectly familiar. He accordingly spent +nearly an hour in rowing about the pond, up and down, to make the boys +familiar with the stroke. He found, as is, in fact, universally the +case with beginners in the art of rowing, that they were very prone to +row faster and faster, that is, to accelerate their strokes, instead +of rowing regularly, keeping continually the same time. They gradually +improved, however, in respect to this fault, and by the middle of the +afternoon Marco began to think that they were quite a good crew. +They practiced several new evolutions during the latter part of the +afternoon, and just before tea time they all went home, much pleased +with the afternoon's enjoyment, and with the new knowledge and skill +which they had acquired. They also planned another excursion the +following week.</p> +</div> + + +<div class="chapter" id="ch10"> +<h2>Chapter X.</h2> + +<h3>An Expedition.</h3> + + + +<p>Forester and Marco got their boat's crew well trained in the course of +a week or two, and one pleasant day in September they planned a long +expedition in their boat. The boys collected at the house of the owner +of the boat, at one o'clock. Two of them carried a large basket which +Forester had provided. It was quite heavy, and they did not know what +was in it; but they supposed that it was a store of some sort of +provisions for a supper, in case they should be gone so long as to +need a supper. Forester carried a hatchet also.</p> + +<p>At the proper word of command, the boys got into the boat and took +their several stations. Marco took his place forward to act as bowman. +It is the duty of the bowman to keep a lookout forward, that the boat +does not run into any danger; and also, when the boat comes to land, +to step out first and hold it by the painter, that is, the rope which +is fastened to the bow, while the others get out. Marco had a pole, +with an iron spike and also an iron hook in the end of it, which he +used to <i>fend off</i> with, as they called it, when the boat was in +danger of running against any obstacle. This was called a boat-hook.</p> + +<p>"<i>Attention!</i>" said Forester, when the boys were all seated.</p> + +<p>"<i>Toss!</i>"</p> + +<p>Hereupon the boys raised the oars into the air, ready to let them down +into the water.</p> + +<p>"<i>Let fall!</i>" said Forester. The oars all fell gently and +together into their places.</p> + +<p>"<i>Give way!</i>" said Forester.</p> + +<p>The boat began immediately to glide rapidly over the water, under the +impulse which the boys gave it in rowing. "<i>Crew at ease</i>," said +Forester.</p> + +<p>So the boys went on rowing, but understood that they had liberty to +talk. One of them wished to know where Forester was going with them; +but Forester said it was entirely contrary to the discipline aboard +a man-of-war for the crew to ask the captain where they were going. +"Besides," said Forester, "though I could easily tell you, I think you +will enjoy the expedition more, to know nothing about it beforehand, +but to take every thing as it comes."</p> + +<p>Forester steered in such a manner as to put the head of the boat +toward a bank at some distance from where they started, on which there +was a thick forest of firs and other evergreens, growing near the +water. When they got pretty near the land, he gave the order for +attention, that they might observe silence in going through whatever +manoeuvers were required here. The next order was, <i>Oars</i>. At +this the oarsmen stopped rowing, and held their oars horizontally over +the water. The boat in the mean time was gliding on toward the shore.</p> + +<p>"<i>Aboard!</i>" said Forester.</p> + +<p>The crew then gently raised their oars into the air, and passed them +over their heads into the boat, laying them upon the thwarts in their +proper position, along the middle of the boat. By this order the crew +supposed that Forester was going to land.</p> + +<p>"Bear a hand, Mr. Bowman," said Forester, "and fend off from the +shore."</p> + +<p>Forester, by means of his paddle, had steered the boat up to a log +which lay in the edge of the water, and Marco, at first fending off +from the log, to keep the boat from striking hard, and then holding on +to it with his hook, got it into a good position for landing, and held +it securely.</p> + +<p>"<i>Crew ashore</i>," said Forester.</p> + +<p>The crew, who had learned all these orders in the course of the +repeated instructions which Forester and Marco had given them, began +to rise and to walk toward the bow of the boat and to go ashore. Marco +landed first, and held the boat with his boat-hook, while the rest got +out. Forester then ordered Marco to make the boat fast, until they +were ready to embark again.</p> + +<p>Forester then went up in the woods a little way, with his hatchet +in his hand, and began to look about among the trees. Finally, he +selected a small tree, with a round, straight stem, and began to cut +it down. The boys gathered around him, wondering what it could be for. +Forester smiled, and worked on in silence, declining to answer any of +their questions. Marco said it was for a mast, he knew, but when they +asked him where the sail was, he seemed perplexed, and could not +answer.</p> + +<p>As soon, however, as the tree was cut down, it was evident that it was +not intended to be used as a mast, for Forester began at once to cut +it up into lengths of about two feet long. What could be his design, +the boys were utterly unable to imagine. He said nothing, but ordered +the boys to take these lengths, one by one, and put them into the +boat. There were five in all. Then he ordered the crew on board again. +Marco got in last. When all were seated, the order was given to shove +off, the oars were <i>tossed</i>--then <i>let fall</i> into the water. +He ordered them to <i>back water</i> first, by which manoeuver the +boat was backed off from the land into deep water. Then he commanded +them to <i>give way</i>, and at the same time bringing the stern of +the boat round by his paddle, the boat was made to shoot swiftly down +the stream.</p> + +<p>The boat went rapidly forward along the shores of the pond, and +presently, on coming round a wooded point, the mills appeared in +sight. As they approached the mills, they kept pretty near the shore, +and at length landed just above the dam.</p> + +<p>Forester ordered the crew ashore, at a place where there was a road +leading down to the water's edge. This road was made by the teams +which came down to get logs and lumber from the water. At Forester's +direction, the boys drew the bow of the boat up a little way upon the +land. Then he ordered the boys to take out the pieces of the stem of +the little tree, and he placed one of them under the bow as a roller. +The boys then took hold of the sides of the boat, three on each side, +each boy opposite to his own row-lock, while Marco stood ready to put +under another roller. The ascent was very gradual, so that the boat +moved up easily, and the boys were very much surprised and delighted +to see their boat thus running up upon the land.</p> + +<p>It seemed to them an exercise of great power to be able to take so +large a boat so easily and rapidly up such an ascent upon the land. +They were aided to do it by two principles. One was the combination of +their strength in one united effort, and the other was the influence +of the rollers in preventing the friction of the bottom of the boat +upon the ground.</p> + +<p>Presently the whole length of the boat was out of water and resting +on four rollers, which Marco had put under it, one by one, as it had +advanced. Forester would then call out, "<i>Ahead with her!</i>" when +the boys would move about two steps. Then Forester would give the +command, "<i>Hold on</i>," and they would stop. By this time one of +the rollers would come out behind, and Marco would take it up and +carry it round forward, and place it under the bow, and Forester +would then say, "<i>Ahead with her!</i>" again, and the boat would +immediately advance again up the acclivity.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus18.png" alt="The Portage." />The Portage.</p></div> + +<p>In a very few minutes the boat was thus rolled up into a sort of a +road, where the way was level. Here it went very easily. Presently it +began to descend, and soon the boys saw that Forester was taking a +sort of path which led by a gentle slope down to the water immediately +below the mill. They were very much pleased at this, for, as they had +had a great many excursions already on the mill-pond, they had become +familiar with it in all its parts, and they were much animated at the +idea of exploring new regions. In going down to the water on the lower +side of the mill, they had, of course, no exertion to make to draw the +boat, as its own weight was more than sufficient to carry it down upon +the rollers. They only had to hold it back to prevent its running down +too fast, and to keep it properly guided.</p> + +<p>"It goes down pretty easy," said Marco; "but I don't see how you are +ever going to get it back again."</p> + +<p>It was, in fact, a long and rather steep descent. The boys thought +that it would require far more strength than they could exercise, to +bring the boat <i>up</i> such an inclination. Forester told them not +to fear. He said that a good commander never put too much upon his +men, or voluntarily got them into any difficulty without planning +beforehand a way to get out.</p> + +<p>They soon got down to the water's edge again. Here, instead of the +broad and smooth pond which they had above the dam, they found a +stream eddying, and foaming, and flowing rapidly down between rocks +and logs. There was a bridge across the stream too, a short distance +below. The boys were a little inclined to be afraid to embark, in what +appeared to be a rather dangerous navigation, but they had confidence +in Forester, and so they readily obeyed when Forester ordered the crew +aboard.</p> + +<p>"Now, Mr. Bowman," said Forester, "keep a sharp lookout ahead for +rocks and snags, and fend off well when there is any danger."</p> + +<p>So Marco kneeled upon a small seat at the bow of the boat, and looked +into the water before him, while Forester propelled and guided the +boat with his paddle. They advanced slowly and by a very tortuous +course, so as to avoid the rocks and shallows, and at length, just +above the bridge, they came to a wider and smoother passage of water: +and here Forester ordered the oars out. There was only room for them +to take four or five strokes before they came to the bridge, and under +the bridge there was only a very narrow passage where they could go +through. This passage was between one of the piers and a gravel +bed. As they advanced toward it, Forester called out, "<i>Give way +strong!</i>" and all the boys pulled their oars with all their +strength, without, however, accelerating the strokes. This gave +the boat a rapid headway, and then Forester gave the order to +<i>trail</i>, when the boys simultaneously lifted the oars out of the +row-locks and let them drift in the water alongside of the boat. As +the boat was advancing very swiftly, the oars were immediately swept +in close to her sides, and thus were out of the way, and the boat +glided safely and swiftly through the passage, and emerged into a +broader sheet of smooth water beyond.</p> + +<p>"<i>Recover!</i>" said Forester. The boys then, by a peculiar +manoeuver which they had learned by much practice, brought back their +oars into the row-locks, and raised the blades out of the water, so +as to get them into a position for rowing. "<i>Give way!</i>" said +Forester, and immediately they were all in motion, the boat gliding +swiftly down the stream.</p> + +<p>After they had gone on in this way a few minutes, Forester ordered the +oars <i>apeak</i>, and put the crew at ease. When the oars are apeak, +they are drawn <i>in</i> a little way, so that the handle of each oar +may be passed under a sort of cleat or ledge, which runs along on the +inside of the boat near the upper edge of it. This keeps the oar firm +in its place without the necessity of holding it, the handle being +under this cleat, while the middle of the oar rests in the row-lock. +Thus the oarsmen are relieved from the necessity of holding their +oars, and yet the oars are all ready to be seized again in a moment, +whenever it becomes desirable to commence rowing.</p> + +<p>Meantime the boat slowly drifted down the stream. The water was here +deep and comparatively still, and the boys amused themselves with +looking over the sides into the depths of the water. They glided +noiselessly along over various objects,--now a great flat rock, now +a sunken tree, and now a bed of yellow sand. Every now and then, +Forester would order the oars out, and make the oarsmen give way for +a few strokes, so as to give the boat what they called steerage way, +that is, way through the water, so that holding the paddle in one +position or the other would steer it. In this way Forester guided the +boat in the right direction, keeping it pretty near the middle of the +stream.</p> + +<p>This mill-stream, as has already been stated, emptied into the river, +and the boat was now rapidly approaching the place of junction. In a +few minutes more the river came into view. The boys could see it at +some distance before them, running with great rapidity by a rocky +point of land which formed one side of the mouth of the brook.</p> + +<p>"Now, boys," said Forester, "is it safe for us to go out into that +current?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "by all means,--let us go."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps we shall upset in the rips," said some of the boys.</p> + +<p>"No matter if we do," said Marco; "it is not deep in the rips, and of +course there is no danger."</p> + +<p>"That is in our favor certainly," said Forester. "Whenever the current +sets strong, there it is sure to be shallow, so that if we upset +we should not be drowned; and where it is deep, so as to make it +dangerous for us to get in, it is always still, and thus there is no +danger of upsetting."</p> + +<p>"What is the reason of that?" said one of the boys.</p> + +<p>"The reason is given in this way," said Forester, "in the college +mathematics. The velocity of a stream is inversely as the area of the +section."</p> + +<p>The boys did not understand such mathematical phraseology as this, and +so Forester clothed his explanation in different language. He said +that where the stream was shallow or narrow, the current must be more +rapid, in order to get all the water through in so small a space, but +where it is deep, it may move slowly.</p> + +<p>Forester landed his crew upon the rocky point, where they had a very +pleasant view up and down the river. He proposed to them to have their +luncheon there, and to this they agreed. So they went back to the edge +of the rocks, where there was a little grove of trees, and they sat +down upon a log which had been worn smooth by the action of the water +in floods, and bleached by the sun.</p> + +<p>There were plenty of dry sticks and slabs lying about upon the shore, +which Forester ordered the crew to collect in order to build a fire. +It was not cold, and they had no need of a fire for any purposes +of cooking, but a fire would look cheerful and pleasant, and they +accordingly made one. Forester had some matches in his pocket. Two of +the crew brought the basket from the boat, and when they had opened +it, they found an abundant store of provisions. There was a dozen or +more of round cakes, and a large apple-pie, which, as there were just +eight of them, gave forty-five degrees to each one. There was also a +jug of milk, and a silver mug, which Forester's mother had lent them +for the excursion, to drink out of.</p> + +<p>The boys, whose appetites had been sharpened by their exertions in the +portage of the boat round the falls, and in rowing, did not cease +to eat until the provisions were entirely exhausted, and then they +carried the empty basket back to the boat. Soon after this, Forester +summoned what he called a council of war, to consider the question +whether they had better go down the river. He said he wanted their +true and deliberate judgment in the case. He did not wish them to say +what they would like, merely, but what they thought, on the whole, +was best. He told them that he should not be <i>governed</i> by their +advice, but, after hearing all that they had to say, he should act +according to his own judgment.</p> + +<p>"Then what's the use of asking us at all?" said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Why, what you will say may modify my judgment. I did not say that I +shall decide according to my judgment as it is now, but as it will be +after I have heard what you will have to say. I shall be influenced +perhaps by your reasons, but I shall decide myself. That is the theory +of a council of war. The commander may be influenced by the arguments +of his subalterns, but he is not governed by their votes."</p> + +<p>Forester then called upon each of the boys, in succession, to give his +opinion on the point. Marco was in favor of going down the river, but +all the rest, though they said that they should like to go very much, +thought it would not answer, as it would be almost impossible to get +the boat up again over the rips. After the consultation was concluded, +Forester said, "Well, boys, you have all given wise opinions except +Marco, and his is not wise. Now we'll go aboard the boat."</p> + +<p>"<i>Crew aboard!</i>" said Forester. The other orders followed in +rapid succession: <i>Attention! Toss! Let fall! Backwater! Oars! Give +way!</i> The boys considered it settled, on hearing what Forester had +said of the wisdom of their several opinions, that they were now going +back toward the mill; but how they were going to get the boat back +above the dam they did not know, though they did not doubt that +Forester had some good plan which he had not explained to them. +Instead, however, of turning the head of the boat up the stream, +Forester pointed it toward the river. They supposed that he was going +out to the edge of the river, and that then he would turn and come +back; but, to their utter amazement, he pushed boldly on directly into +the current, and then, putting his helm hard up and calling out to the +crew to give way strong, the boat swept round into the very center of +the stream and shot down the river over the rips like an arrow.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus19.png" alt="The Expedition." />The Expedition.</p></div> + +<p>"Give way, boys, hearty," said Forester. "Give way strong."</p> + +<p>The boys pulled with all their strength, and the boat went swifter +and swifter. Forester kept it in the middle of the current, where the +water was deepest, though even here it was very shallow. Marco, in +the mean time, who was stationed at the bows, kept a sharp lookout +forward, and gave Forester notice of any impending danger. They soon +got through the rips and came to the deep and still water below, where +the current was gentle and the surface smooth. Here Forester ordered +the oars apeak, and the crew at ease.</p> + +<p>"We never shall get back in the world," said one of the boys; "forty +men couldn't row the boat up those rips."</p> + +<p>"Let us try," said Forester. So he ordered the oars out again, and +put the boat under way. He brought her head round so as to point up +stream, and calling upon the crew to give way strong, he forced her +back into the rapid water. They went on a few rods, but long before +they reached the most rapid part, they found that with all their +exertions they could make no progress. The boat seemed stationary. +"<i>Oars</i>," said Forester. The boys stopped rowing, holding their +oars in the air, just above the water. Forester then, by means of his +paddle, turned the boat round again, saying, "Well, if we can't go up, +we can go down stream." He then ordered the crew to give way again, +and they began to glide along swiftly down the river.</p> + +<p>The boys wondered how Forester was going to get back, but he told them +to give themselves no concern on that score. "That responsibility +rests on me," said he.</p> + +<p>"But how came you to come down here," said Marco, "when you said my +advice wasn't good?"</p> + +<p>"I said your opinion was not wise. The boys who advised me not to come +were wiser than you. They gave better advice, so far as they and you +understood the case. But I know something which you do not, as is +usual with commanders,--and therefore I came down. In view of all that +<i>you</i> know, it would have been wisest to have gone back, but in +view of all that <i>I</i> know, it is wisest to come down."</p> + +<p>The curiosity of the boys was very much excited to know what it could +be that Forester knew which rendered coming down the river wise; but +Forester would make no explanations. He said that commanders were not +generally very communicative to their crews. In the mean time the boat +went on, sometimes shooting swiftly through the rapids, and sometimes +floating in a more calm and quiet manner on the surface of the stiller +water. In this way they went on more than a mile, enjoying the voyage +very highly, and admiring the varied scenery which was presented to +their view at every turn of the stream.</p> + +<p>At one place the boys landed upon a small sandy beach under some +overhanging rocks. They amused themselves in climbing about the rocks +for a time, and then they were ordered aboard again, and sailed on.</p> + +<p>Now it happened that the river, in the part of its course over which +this voyage had been performed, took a great circuit, and though they +had followed its course for more than a mile, they were now drawing +near to a place which was not very far from Forester's father's +house,--being about as much below it, as the place where the boat +belonged in the mill-pond was above it. As they approached the point +where the river turned again, Marco, who was looking out before, saw a +sort of landing, where there was a man standing, together with a yoke +of oxen. It was just sunset when they approached this spot. When they +arrived at it, the whole mystery was explained, for they found that +the man was James, who lived at Forester's father's, and the oxen were +his father's oxen. James had come down, under an appointment which +Forester had secretly made with him, with the oxen and a drag, and by +means of them he hauled the boat across to the mill-pond again, by +a back road which led directly across the pastures, and lanched it +safely again into the water close to the dwelling of its owner. So the +boys had, as it were, the pleasure of sliding down hill, without the +labor of drawing their sleds up again.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus20.png" alt="The Drag." />The Drag.</p></div> + +<p>Marco was very much pleased with this expedition. Forester told him +when they got home, that the Indians often carried their canoes around +falls, or from one river to another, and that such carrying-places +were called <i>portages</i>.</p> +</div> + + +<div class="chapter" id="ch11"> +<h2>Chapter XI.</h2> + +<h3>Lost In The Woods.</h3> + + + +<p>While Marco Paul was in Vermont, he and Forester had a remarkable +adventure in the woods. They got lost in fact, and for a time it +seemed quite doubtful how they were ever to find their way home. It +happened thus.</p> + +<p>One morning in the fall of the year, Marco, walking along toward the +barn with James, asked James what he was going to do that day.</p> + +<p>"I expect that I am going to gather apples," said James.</p> + +<p>"Well," said Marco. "Are you going in the cart?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," said James.</p> + +<p>"And may I go with you?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said James.</p> + +<p>"And help gather the apples? said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said James.</p> + +<p>"And drive the oxen a little way?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said James.</p> + +<p>"Well." said Marco. "I will run and get my goad-stick."</p> + +<p>Marco went toward the house intending to go in and get his goad-stick. +On his way he met his uncle. His uncle asked him whether James was out +in the barn. Marco said that he was, and his uncle then asked him to +go and request James to come to him. Marco did so, and he and James +then came along toward the house together.</p> + +<p>Marco's uncle stood upon the step of the door.</p> + +<p>"James," said he, "I was thinking that we ought to send for the +horses;--and the apples ought to be gathered too. Which is it best to +do?"</p> + +<p>"I hardly know, sir," said James. "It is high time that the apples +were gathered, and yet we promised to send for the horses to-day."</p> + +<p>"I can go and get the horses," said Marco,--"just as well as not. +Where is it?"</p> + +<p>"Oh no," said his uncle. "It is ten or fifteen miles from here. Isn't +it, James?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," said James, "by the road. I suppose it is about <i>four</i> +miles through the woods. I was intending to walk there, through the +woods, and then to come home round by the road. It is rather a rough +road for horses through the woods."</p> + +<p>"Let cousin Forester and me go," said Marco. "I will go and ask him."</p> + +<p>So Marco went and found Forester. When Forester heard of the plan +he was quite inclined to accede to it. He had been much engaged +in studying for some time, and had had very little exercise and +recreation, so that he was easily persuaded to undertake an +expedition. The plan was all soon agreed upon. The horses had been put +out to pasture at a farmer's up the river about twelve miles. In going +that twelve miles the river took a great turn, so that in fact the +farm where the horses were pastured was not, in a straight line, +more than four miles from Mr. Forester's house. But the intermediate +country was a desolate and almost impassable region of forests and +mountains. There was, indeed, a sort of footpath by which it was +possible for men to get through, but this path was dangerous, and in +fact almost impracticable for horses. So James had formed the plan of +walking through the woods by the path, and then of coming home by the +road, riding one of the horses and leading the other.</p> + +<p>Forester and Marco concluded to adopt the same plan; except that in +coming home there would be just a horse a-piece for them to ride. They +put up some provisions to eat on the way, packing them in Marco's +knapsack. The knapsack, when it was ready, was strapped upon Marco's +back, for he insisted on carrying it. Forester consented to this +arrangement, secretly intending, however, not to allow Marco to carry +the load very far.</p> + +<p>Forester asked James if there would be any difficulty about the way. +James said that there would not be. The path, though it was not an +easy one to travel, was very easy to find.</p> + +<p>"You go on," said he, "along the back road about three quarters of a +mile, and then you will come to a small school-house on the left hand +side of the road, on a sort of hill. It is in the Jones district."</p> + +<p>"What sort of a school-house is it?" asked Forester.</p> + +<p>"It is a small school-house, with a little cupola upon the top of it," +said James, "for a bell. It stands upon a knoll by the side of the +road. Just beyond it the main road turns to the right, and there is +a narrower road leading off to the left through a gate. You must go +through that gate and then follow the path into the woods."</p> + +<p>"We can find it, I think," said Forester.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "I know the place very well."</p> + +<p>Forester said he thought that they should find the way without any +difficulty, and so bidding his uncle and aunt good-bye, he and Marco +set out.</p> + +<p>They went through the garden, and from the garden they passed out +through a small gate into the orchard. Marco wished to go this way in +order to get some apples. He chose two from off his favorite tree and +put them into the knapsack, and took another in his hand to eat by the +way. Forester did the same, only he put the two that he carried with +him, into his pockets.</p> + +<p>From the orchard the travelers walked across a field and down into +the glen, and after crossing a brook upon some stepping-stones, they +ascended upon the other side, and presently climbing over a fence, +they came out into what James had called the back road. They walked +along upon this road, for about three quarters of a mile, until at +last they came in sight of the school-house. Marco spied it first.</p> + +<p>"There," said Marco, "that is the school-house."</p> + +<p>"How do you know that that is the one?" asked Forester.</p> + +<p>"Oh, I know the Jones district very well," said Marco.</p> + +<p>In New England the tract of country included within the jurisdiction +of a town, is divided into districts for the establishment and support +of schools. These districts are called school-districts, and each one +is generally named from some of the principal families that happen to +live in it. It happened that there were several families of the name +of Jones that lived in this part of the town, and so their district +was called the Jones district.</p> + +<p>"How do you happen to know it?" said Forester.</p> + +<p>"Oh, I came out here two or three times with Thomas Jones to set my +squirrel trap," said Marco. "There goes Thomas Jones now."</p> + +<p>"Where?" asked Forester.</p> + +<p>"There," said Marco, pointing along the road a little way.</p> + +<p>Forester looked forward, and saw in the road before them a boy walking +toward the school-house, with his slate under his arm. Beyond the boy, +upon the knoll on the left side of the road, was the school-house +itself.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus21.png" alt="The School-House." />The School-House.</p></div> + +<p>The school-house was not far from the road, and there was a little +grove of trees behind it. Beyond the school-house, and almost directly +before them, Marco and Forester saw the road turning a little to the +left toward the gate.</p> + +<p>"There is the gate," said Marco, "that we are to go through."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester, "that must be the one."</p> + +<p>Forester and Marco walked on until they came to the school-house. +Thomas got to the school-house before them, and went in. Forester and +Marco passed on and went through the gate. They then went on beyond +the gate a little way till they came to a pair of bars. Marco took +down all but the topmost bar, and Forester, stooping down, passed +under. Marco attempted to do the same; but forgetting that he had a +knapsack upon his back, he did not stoop low enough, and gave his +knapsack such a knock as almost threw him down. Fortunately there was +nothing frangible inside, and so no damage was done. One of his apples +was mellowed a little; that was all.</p> + +<p>The path led the travelers first across a rough and rocky pasture, and +then it suddenly entered a wood where every thing wore an expression +of wild and solemn grandeur. The trees were very lofty, and consisted +of tall stems, rising to a vast height and surmounted above with a +tuft of branches, which together formed a broad canopy over the heads +of the travelers, and produced a sort of somber twilight below. Birds +sang in plaintive notes on the tops of distant trees, and now and then +a squirrel was seen running along the ground, or climbing up the trunk +of some vast hemlock or pine.</p> + +<p>"I hope that we shall not lose our way in these woods," said Forester.</p> + +<p>"Oh, there is no danger of that," rejoined Marco. "The path is very +plain."</p> + +<p>"It seems plain here," said Forester, "and I presume that there can +not be any danger, or James would have recommended to us to go the +other way."</p> + +<p>"We shall come home the other way," said Marco. "I wonder if there are +any saddles. Twelve miles would be too far to ride bareback."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester, "there are saddles. I asked James about that."</p> + +<p>The path which Forester and Marco were pursuing soon began to +ascend. It ascended at first gradually, and afterward more and more +precipitously, and at length began to wind about among rocks and +precipices in such a manner, that Marco said he did not wonder at all +that James said it would be a rough road for horses.</p> + +<p>"I think it is a very rough road for boys," said Forester.</p> + +<p>"Boys?" repeated Marco. "Do you call yourself boys."</p> + +<p>"For <i>men</i> then," said Forester.</p> + +<p>"But <i>I</i> am not a man," said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Then I don't see how I can express my idea," said Forester.</p> + +<p>Marco's attention was here diverted from the rhetorical difficulty in +which Forester had become involved, by a very deep chasm upon one side +of the path. He went to the brink of it and could hear the roaring of +a torrent far below.</p> + +<p>"I mean to throw a stone down," said Marco. He accordingly, after +looking around for a moment, found a stone about as large as his head. +This stone he contrived to bring to the edge of the precipice and then +to throw it over. It went thundering down among the rocks and trees +below, while Marco stood upon the brink and listened to the sound of +the echoes and reverberations. He then got another stone larger than +the first, and threw that down; after which he and Forester resumed +their journey.</p> + +<p>The path, though it was a very rough and tortuous one, was pretty +plain; and it is probable that the travelers would have found no +difficulty in following it to the end of their route, had it not been +for an occurrence which they had not at all anticipated, but which was +one, nevertheless, that has often taken place to confuse the steps of +mountain travelers and make them lose their way. This occurrence was a +fall of snow.</p> + +<p>It was not late enough in the year for snow upon the lowlands, but +snow falls very early in the autumn upon the summits of mountains. +Marco and Forester had not anticipated stormy weather of any kind, +when they left home; for the wind was west and the sky was clear. +When, however, they had accomplished about one half of their journey, +large masses of fleecy clouds began to drive over the mountains, +and presently, all at once, it began to snow. Marco was extremely +delighted to see the snow falling. Forester was not so much pleased. +On the other hand, he looked somewhat concerned. He did not at first +think how the snow could do them any serious injury, but he seemed to +have an undefined sense of danger from it, and appeared uneasy. They +both, however, walked on.</p> + +<p>The region through which the path led at the time when the snow came +on, was a tract of flat land on the summit of the mountainous range, +with small and scattered trees here and there upon it. The best thing, +probably, for the travelers to have done in the emergency would have +been to have turned round the moment it began to snow, and go back as +fast as possible by the way that they came, as long as they were sure +of the path, and then to wait until the fallen snow had melted. If +they found then that the snow did not melt, so that they could see the +path again, it would be better to return altogether, as their chance +of being able to follow the path back toward their home would be much +greater than that of pursuing it forward; for they might expect to +find some guidance, in going back, by their recognition of the place +which they had passed in ascending.</p> + +<p>Forester, however, did not happen to think of this; and so when it +began to snow, his only immediate desire was to go forward as fast as +possible, so as to get into the woods again where he and Marco would +be in some measure under shelter.</p> + +<p>Marco finding that Forester appeared somewhat anxious, began to feel +some sentiment of fear himself.</p> + +<p>"Who would have thought," said he, "that we should have got caught out +in this snow-storm?"</p> + +<p>"Oh, it is not a snow-storm," replied Forester. "It is only a little +snow flurry. It will be over in a few minutes."</p> + +<p>"How do you know that it is not going to be a snow-storm?" asked +Marco.</p> + +<p>"Because storms never come out of the west," replied Forester.</p> + +<p>It snowed, however, faster and faster, and the ground soon began to be +entirely whitened. Forester pressed on, but he soon found himself at +a loss for his way. The air was so filled with the descending flakes, +that he could see only a very short distance before him. The view +of the forests and mountains was cut off on every side, and nothing +presented itself to the eye but the dim forms of the rocks and trees +which were near. These, too, were indistinct and shapeless. The ground +was soon entirely covered, and all hope of finding the path entirely +disappeared. Forester went back then a short distance, endeavoring to +retrace his steps. He followed the foot-prints a little way, but all +traces of them were soon obliterated. When he found that the steps +could no longer be seen, he went toward a tree which he saw rising +dimly at a little distance before him. The tree proved to be a large +hemlock, with wide-spreading branches. There was a place under this +tree where the ground was bare, having been sheltered from the snow by +the branches of the tree. There were some rocks too lying under this +tree. Forester walked up to them and sat down. Marco followed his +example.</p> + +<p>"Well, Marco," said Forester, "we are really lost."</p> + +<p>"And what are we going to do?" asked Marco, with a countenance of +great concern.</p> + +<p>"The first thing is," said Forester, "to open the knapsack, and see +what there is inside that is good to eat."</p> + +<p>So Forester took the knapsack off from his shoulders,--for he had +taken it from Marco some time before, and laying it upon a large +flat stone by his side, he began to open it, and to take out the +provisions.</p> + +<p>Forester was afraid that he and Marco had got themselves into somewhat +serious difficulty, but he wished to teach Marco that in emergencies +of such a nature, it would do no good to give way to a panic, or to +unnecessary anxiety. So he assumed an unconcerned and contented air, +and made arrangements for the luncheon, just as if they had stopped +there to eat it of their own accord, and without being in any +difficulty whatever about the prosecution of the journey.</p> + +<p>Marco, however, seemed to be quite uneasy.</p> + +<p>"What are we going to do?" said he. "If we get lost in this +snow-storm, we shall have to stay in the woods perhaps all night."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Forester, "that we can do. We have done that before."</p> + +<p>Forester here alluded to an occasion on which he and Marco had spent +the night in a hut in the woods, when traveling in Maine.</p> + +<p>"But we had an axe then," said Marco, "to make a camp."</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Forester, "that is true. I don't think, however, that +we shall have to stay in the woods all night now. We have <i>three</i> +chances for avoiding it."</p> + +<p>"What are the three?" said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Why, in the first place," replied Forester, "we can stay where we are +until it stops snowing,--in fact it has almost stopped now. Then I +presume that the sun will come out, and in half an hour melt away all +the snow. Then we can find our path again, and go on."</p> + +<p>"But I don't think it is certain that we can find our path again," +said Marco.</p> + +<p>"Nor do I," said Forester, "but there's a chance of it. I did not say +that we had three certainties, but three chances."</p> + +<p>"Well," said Marco; "go on; what are the other two?"</p> + +<p>"If we can not find the path," said Forester, "either because the snow +does not melt, or for any other reason, then we can remain where we +are until night, and the people, finding that we do not come home, +will send up for us."</p> + +<p>"And how can they find us?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"Why, they will come up the path, of course, and we can not be very +far from the path, for we only lost it a few minutes before we came +here. Of course they will come up very near to this place;--and they +will come shouting out, every few minutes, as loud as they can, and so +we shall hear them."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Marco, "I see; that is a pretty good chance."</p> + +<p>"The third chance for us," said Forester, "is to go down into the +first glen or valley that we can find, and then we shall probably come +to a stream. Then we can follow the stream down to the river."</p> + +<p>"How do you know that it goes to the river?" asked Marco.</p> + +<p>"All mountain streams do, of course," said Forester. "They go down +wherever they can find a valley or a hollow,--joining together and +taking in branches as they proceed,--until they get down into the +level country, and then they flow to the nearest river, and so to the +sea. Now I know that the river takes a bend around this mountainous +tract, and almost surrounds it, and all the streams from it must flow +into the river without going very far. We could follow one down, +though we should probably find the way very rough and difficult."</p> + +<p>"Let us try it," said Marco.</p> + +<p>This plan was decided upon, and so, when the snow squall was entirely +over and the sun had come out Marco and Forester, taking their +departure from the great tree and guiding their course by the sun, +the travelers set out, proceeding as nearly in a straight line as +possible, intending to go on in that manner until they should come to +some stream, and then to follow the stream down to the river. The plan +succeeded perfectly well. They soon descended into a valley, where +they found a little brook flowing over a bed of moss-covered stones. +They followed this brook down for about a mile, when they came to a +junction between the brook that they were following and another one. +After this junction of course the stream was larger, and in many +places they found it difficult to get along. The way was encumbered +with bushes, rocks, and fallen trees, and in one place the stream +flowed in a foaming torrent through the bottom of a deep chasm, with +sides rising directly out of the water. Here the travelers were +obliged to find a way at a distance from the brook--guiding +themselves, however, by the sound of its roaring. After passing the +chasm, they got back to the stream again.</p> + +<p>They came out into the open country about one o'clock, and found to their +great joy that they were very near the place where the horses were +pastured. The horses were all ready for them, and Forester and Marco +mounted them immediately, and set out on their return home.</p> + +<div class="image"><p><img src="images/illus22.png" alt="The Ride." />The Ride.</p></div> + +<p>It was very pleasant riding along at their ease on horseback, after all +the dangers and fatigues that they had encountered. A part of the way +the road which they took lay along the shore of the river. Marco enjoyed +this part of the ride very much indeed.</p> + +<p>They reached home about sunset, with an excellent appetite for supper. +Marco was very enthusiastic in his manner of giving his aunt Forester +an account of his adventures, and he said, in conclusion, that he would +just as lief get lost in the woods as not. It was good fun.</p> +</div> +<br /> +<hr class="full" /> + + +<p>***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MARCO PAUL'S VOYAGES AND TRAVELS; VERMONT***</p> +<p>******* This file should be named 11681-h.txt or 11681-h.zip *******</p> +<p>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:<br /> +<a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/1/1/6/8/11681">https://www.gutenberg.org/1/1/6/8/11681</a></p> +<p>Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed.</p> + +<p>Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution.</p> + + + +<pre> +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +<a href="https://gutenberg.org/license">https://gutenberg.org/license)</a>. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + +<a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">https://www.gutenberg.org</a> + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + +<a href="http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext06">http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext06</a> + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + +https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: +https://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: +<a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/GUTINDEX.ALL">https://www.gutenberg.org/GUTINDEX.ALL</a> + +*** END: FULL LICENSE *** +</pre> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/old/11681-h/images/illus01.png b/old/11681-h/images/illus01.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d6ea1d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h/images/illus01.png diff --git a/old/11681-h/images/illus02.png b/old/11681-h/images/illus02.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d78d224 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h/images/illus02.png diff --git a/old/11681-h/images/illus03.png b/old/11681-h/images/illus03.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..cc74647 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h/images/illus03.png diff --git a/old/11681-h/images/illus04.png b/old/11681-h/images/illus04.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c66b03c --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h/images/illus04.png diff --git a/old/11681-h/images/illus05.png b/old/11681-h/images/illus05.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..83560e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h/images/illus05.png diff --git a/old/11681-h/images/illus06.png b/old/11681-h/images/illus06.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..872c9e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h/images/illus06.png diff --git a/old/11681-h/images/illus07.png b/old/11681-h/images/illus07.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..86308f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h/images/illus07.png diff --git a/old/11681-h/images/illus08.png b/old/11681-h/images/illus08.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2b4cd8f --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h/images/illus08.png diff --git a/old/11681-h/images/illus09.png b/old/11681-h/images/illus09.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9d62b99 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h/images/illus09.png diff --git a/old/11681-h/images/illus10.png b/old/11681-h/images/illus10.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..130842e --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h/images/illus10.png diff --git a/old/11681-h/images/illus11.png b/old/11681-h/images/illus11.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0855dd0 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h/images/illus11.png diff --git a/old/11681-h/images/illus12.png b/old/11681-h/images/illus12.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4efc454 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h/images/illus12.png diff --git a/old/11681-h/images/illus13.png b/old/11681-h/images/illus13.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9159d9d --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h/images/illus13.png diff --git a/old/11681-h/images/illus14.png b/old/11681-h/images/illus14.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..80f2cbe --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h/images/illus14.png diff --git a/old/11681-h/images/illus15.png b/old/11681-h/images/illus15.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..497358e --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h/images/illus15.png diff --git a/old/11681-h/images/illus16.png b/old/11681-h/images/illus16.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..963f4df --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h/images/illus16.png diff --git a/old/11681-h/images/illus17.png b/old/11681-h/images/illus17.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d606bfa --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h/images/illus17.png diff --git a/old/11681-h/images/illus18.png b/old/11681-h/images/illus18.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f57835c --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h/images/illus18.png diff --git a/old/11681-h/images/illus19.png b/old/11681-h/images/illus19.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..864ed19 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h/images/illus19.png diff --git a/old/11681-h/images/illus20.png b/old/11681-h/images/illus20.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..de6fe7f --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h/images/illus20.png diff --git a/old/11681-h/images/illus21.png b/old/11681-h/images/illus21.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..7d8bf5b --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h/images/illus21.png diff --git a/old/11681-h/images/illus22.png b/old/11681-h/images/illus22.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5d3f0e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681-h/images/illus22.png diff --git a/old/11681.txt b/old/11681.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ce340b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681.txt @@ -0,0 +1,4763 @@ +The Project Gutenberg eBook, Marco Paul's Voyages and Travels; Vermont, by +Jacob Abbott + + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + + + + +Title: Marco Paul's Voyages and Travels; Vermont + +Author: Jacob Abbott + +Release Date: March 22, 2004 [eBook #11681] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: US-ASCII + + +***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MARCO PAUL'S VOYAGES AND TRAVELS; +VERMONT*** + + +E-text prepared by Project Gutenberg Distributed Proofreaders + + + +Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this + file which includes the original illustrations. + See 11681-h.htm or 11681-h.zip: + (http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/1/1/6/8/11681/11681-h/11681-h.htm) + or + (http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/1/1/6/8/11681/11681-h.zip) + + + + + +MARCO PAUL'S VOYAGES & TRAVELS: VERMONT + +by + +JACOB ABBOTT + +1852 + + + + + + + +Preface. + + +The design of the series of volumes, entitled MARCO PAUL'S ADVENTURES +IN THE PURSUIT OF KNOWLEDGE, is not merely to entertain the reader +with a narrative of juvenile adventures, but also to communicate, in +connection with them, as extensive and varied information as possible, +in respect to the geography, the scenery, the customs and the +institutions of this country, as they present themselves to the +observation of the little traveler, who makes his excursions under the +guidance of an intelligent and well-informed companion, qualified to +assist him in the acquisition of knowledge and in the formation of +character. The author has endeavored to enliven his narrative, and to +infuse into it elements of a salutary moral influence, by means of +personal incidents befalling the actors in the story. These incidents +are, of course, imaginary--but the reader may rely upon the strict +and exact truth and fidelity of all the descriptions of places, +institutions and scenes, which are brought before his mind in the +progress of the narrative. Thus, though the author hopes that the +readers who may honor these volumes with their perusal, will be amused +and interested by them, his design throughout will be to instruct +rather than to entertain. + + + + +Contents. + + I. Journeying + II. Accidents + III. The Grass Country + IV. The Village + V. Studying + VI. The Log Canoe + VII. A Dilemma +VIII. A Confession + IX. Boating + X. An Expedition + XI. Lost In The Woods + + + + +Engravings. + +The Great Elm +The Hill +The Accident +Who Are You? +The Lumber Box +The Tire +The Risk +The Study +Marco's Desk +Boat Adrift +Cap Gone +The Millman's House +Paddling +Marco's Room +Toss +Bad Rowing +Good Rowing +The Portage +The Expedition +The Drag +The School House +The Ride + + + + +Order Of The Volumes. + +Marco Paul, + + I.--In New York. + II.--On the Erie Canal. +III.--In Maine. + IV.--In Vermont. + V.--In Boston. + VI.--At the Springfield Armory. + + + + +Principal Persons + + MR. BARON, a merchant of New York. + MARCO, his son, a boy about twelve years old. + JOHN FORESTER, Marco's cousin, about nineteen years old. + +Marco is traveling and studying under Forester's care. + + + + +Marco Paul in Vermont. + + + + +Chapter I. + +Journeying. + + + +When Mr. Baron, Marco's father, put Marco under his cousin Forester's +care, it was his intention that he should spend a considerable part +of his time in traveling, and in out-of-door exercises, such as might +tend to re-establish his health and strengthen his constitution. +He did not, however, intend to have him give up the study of books +altogether. Accordingly, at one time, for nearly three months, Marco +remained at Forester's home, among the Green Mountains of Vermont, +where he studied several hours every day. + +It was in the early part of the autumn, that he and Forester went to +Vermont. They traveled in the stage-coach. Vermont lies upon one side +of the Connecticut river, and New Hampshire upon the other side. The +Green Mountains extend up and down, through the middle of Vermont, +from north to south, and beyond these mountains, on the western side +of the state, is lake Champlain, which extends from north to south +also, and forms the western boundary. Thus, the Green Mountains divide +the state into two great portions, one descending to the eastward, +toward Connecticut river, and the other to the westward, toward lake +Champlain. There are, therefore, two great ways of access to Vermont +from the states south of it; one up the Connecticut river on the +eastern side, and the other along the shores of lake George and lake +Champlain on the western side. There are roads across the Green +Mountains also, leading from the eastern portion of the state to the +western. All this can be seen by looking upon any map of Vermont. + +Marco and Forester went up by the Connecticut river. The road lay +along upon the bank of the river, and the scenery was very pleasant. +They traveled in the stage-coach; for there were very few railroads in +those days. + +The country was cultivated and fertile, and the prospect from the +windows of the coach was very fine. Sometimes wide meadows and +intervales extended along the river,--and at other places, high hills, +covered with trees, advanced close to the stream. They could see, too, +the farms, and villages, and green hills, across the river, on the New +Hampshire side. + +On the second day of their journey, they turned off from the river by +a road which led into the interior of the country; for the village +where Forester's father resided was back among the mountains. They had +new companions in the coach too, on this second day, as well as a new +route; for the company which had been in the coach the day before were +to separate in the morning, to go off in different directions. Several +stage-coaches drove up to the door of the tavern in the morning, just +after breakfast, with the names of the places where they were going +to, upon their sides. One was marked, "Haverhill and Lancaster;" +another, "Middlebury;" and a third, "Concord and Boston;" and there +was one odd-looking vehicle, a sort of carryall, open in front, and +drawn by two horses, which had no name upon it, and so Marco could not +tell where it was going. As these several coaches and carriages drove +up to the door, the hostlers and drivers put on the baggage and bound +it down with great straps, and then handed in the passengers;--and +thus the coaches, one after another, drove away. The whole movement +formed a very busy scene, and Marco, standing upon the piazza in front +of the tavern, enjoyed it very much. + +There was a very large elm-tree before the door, with steps to climb +up, and seats among the branches. Marco went up there and sat some +time, looking down upon the coaches as they wheeled round the tree, in +coming up to the door. Then he went down to the piazza again. + +[Illustration: THE GREAT ELM] + +There was a neatly-dressed young woman, with a little flower-pot in +her hand, standing near him, waiting for her turn. There was a small +orange-tree in her flower-pot. It was about six inches high. The sight +of this orange-tree interested Marco very much, for it reminded him +of home. He had often seen orange-trees growing in the parlors and +green-houses in New York. + +"What a pretty little orange-tree!" said Marco. "Where did you get +it?" + +"How did you know it was an orange-tree?" said the girl. + +"O, I know an orange-tree well enough," replied Marco. "I have seen +them many a time." + +"Where?" asked, the girl. + +"In New York," said Marco. "Did your orange-tree come from New York?" + +"No," said the girl. "I planted an orange-seed, and it grew from +that. I've got a lemon-tree, too," she added, "but it is a great deal +larger. The lemon-tree grows faster than the orange. My lemon-tree is +so large that I couldn't bring it home very well, so I left it in the +mill." + +"In the mill?" said Marco. "Are you a miller?" + +The girl laughed. She was a very good-humored girl, and did not appear +to be displeased, though it certainly was not quite proper for Marco +to speak in that manner to a stranger. She did not, however, reply to +his question, but said, after a pause, + +"Do you know where the Montpelier stage is?" + +The proper English meaning of the word _stage_ is a _portion of +the road_, traveled between one resting-place and another. But in +the United States it is used to mean the carriage,--being a sort of +contraction for _stage-coach_. + +"No," said Marco, "_we_ are going in that stage." + +"I wish it would come along," said the girl, "for I'm tired of +watching my trunk." + +"Where is your trunk?" said Marco. + +So the girl pointed out her trunk. It was upon the platform of the +piazza, near those belonging to Forester and Marco. The girl showed +Marco her name, which was Mary Williams, written on a card upon the +end of it. + +"I'll watch your trunk," said Marco, "and you can go in and sit down +until the stage comes." + +Mary thanked him and went in. She was not, however, quite sure that +her baggage was safe, intrusted thus to the charge of a strange boy, +and so she took a seat near the window, where she could keep an eye +upon it. There was a blue chest near these trunks, which looked like a +sailor's chest, and Marco, being tired of standing, sat down upon this +chest. He had, however, scarcely taken his seat, when he saw a coach +with four horses, coming round a corner. It was driven by a small boy +not larger than Marco. It wheeled up toward the door, and came to a +stand. Some men then put on the sailor's chest and the trunks. Mary +Williams came out and got into the coach. She sat on the back seat. +Forester and Marco got in, and took their places on the middle seat. A +young man, dressed like a sailor, took the front seat, at one corner +of the coach. These were all the passengers that were to get in here. +When every thing was ready, they drove away. + +The stage stopped, however, in a few minutes at the door of a handsome +house in the town, and took a gentleman and lady in. These new +passengers took places on the back seat, with Mary Williams. + +This company rode in perfect silence for some time. Forester took +out a book and began to read. The gentleman on the back seat went to +sleep. Mary Williams and Marco looked out at the windows, watching the +changing scenery. The sailor rode in silence; moving his lips now and +then, as if he were talking to himself, but taking no notice of any +of the company. The coach stopped at the villages which they +passed through, to exchange the mail, and sometimes to take in new +passengers. In the course of these changes Marco got his place shifted +to the forward seat by the side of the sailor, and he gradually got +into conversation with him. Marco introduced the conversation, by +asking the sailor if he knew how far it was to Montpelier. + +"No," said the sailor, "I don't keep any reckoning, but I wish we were +there." + +"Why?" asked Marco. + +"O, I expect the old cart will capsize somewhere among these +mountains, and break our necks for us." + +Marco had observed, all the morning, that when the coach canted to +one side or the other, on account of the unevenness of the road, the +sailor always started and looked anxious, as if afraid it was going to +be upset. He wondered that a man who had been apparently accustomed +to the terrible dangers of the seas, should be alarmed at the gentle +oscillations of a stage-coach. + +"Are you afraid that we shall upset?" asked Marco. + +"Yes," said the sailor, "over some of these precipices and mountains; +and then there'll be an end of us." + +The sailor said this in an easy and careless manner, as if, after all, +he was not much concerned about the danger. Still, Marco was surprised +that he should fear it at all. He was not aware how much the fears +which people feel, are occasioned by the mere novelty of the danger +which they incur. A stage-driver, who is calm and composed on his box, +in a dark night, and upon dangerous roads, will be alarmed by the +careening of a ship under a gentle breeze at sea,--while the sailor +who laughs at a gale of wind on the ocean, is afraid to ride in a +carriage on land. + +"An't you a sailor?" asked Marco. + +"Yes," replied his companion. + +"I shouldn't think that a man that had been used to the sea, would be +afraid of upsetting in a coach." + +"I'm not a _man_" said the sailor. + +"What are you?" said Marco. + +"I'm a boy. I'm only nineteen years old; though I'm going to be rated +seaman next voyage." + +"Have you just got back from a voyage?" asked Marco. + +"Yes," said the sailor. "I've been round the Horn in a whaler, from +old Nantuck. And now I'm going home to see my mother." + +"How long since you've seen her?" asked Marco. + +"O, it's four years since I ran away." + +Here the sailor began to speak in rather a lower tone than he had done +before, so that Marco only could hear. This was not difficult, as the +other passengers were at this time engaged in conversation. + +"I ran away," continued the sailor, "and went to sea about four years +ago." + +"What made you run away?" asked Marco. + +"O, I didn't want to stay at home and be abused. My father used to +abuse me; but my mother took my part, and now I want to go and see +her." + +"And to see your father too," said Marco. + +"No," said the sailor. "I don't care for him. I hope he's gone off +somewhere. But I want to see my mother. I have got a shawl for her in +my chest." + +Marco was shocked to hear a young man speak in such a manner of his +father. Still there was something in the frankness and openness of the +sailor's manner, which pleased him very much. He liked to hear his odd +and sailor-like language too, and he accordingly entered into a +long conversation with him. The sailor gave him an account of his +adventures on the voyage; how he was drawn off from the ship one day, +several miles, by a whale which they had harpooned;--how they caught +a shark, and hauled him in on deck by means of a pulley at the end of +the yard-arm;--and how, on the voyage home, the ship was driven before +an awful gale of wind for five days, under bare poles, with terrific +seas roaring after them all the way. These descriptions took a strong +hold of Marco's imagination. His eye brightened up, and he became +restless on his seat, and thought that he would give the world for a +chance to stand up in the bow of a boat, and put a harpoon into the +neck of a whale. + +In the mean time, the day wore away, and the road led into a more and +more mountainous country. The hills were longer and steeper, and the +tracts of forest more frequent and solitary. The number of passengers +increased too, until the coach was pretty heavily loaded; and +sometimes all but the female passengers would get out and walk up the +hills. On these occasions Forester and Marco would generally walk +together, talking about the incidents of their journey, or the +occupations and amusements which they expected to engage in when they +arrived at Forester's home. About the middle of the afternoon the +coach stopped at the foot of a long winding ascent, steep and stony, +and several of the passengers got out. Forester, however, remained +in, as he was tired of walking, and so Marco and the sailor walked +together. The sailor, finding how much Marco was interested in his +stories, liked his company, and at length he asked Marco where he was +going. Marco told him. + +"Ah, if you were only going on a voyage with me," said the sailor, +"that would make a man of you. I wouldn't go and be shut up with that +old prig, poring over books forever." + +Marco was displeased to hear the sailor call his cousin an old +prig, and he felt some compunctions of conscience about forming and +continuing an intimacy with such a person. Still he was so much +interested in hearing him talk, that he continued to walk with him up +the hill. Finally, the sailor fairly proposed to him to run away and +go to sea with him. + +"O no," said Marco, "I wouldn't do such a thing for the world. +Besides," said he, "they would be after us, and carry me back." + +"No," said the sailor; "we would cut across the country, traveling in +the night and laying to by day, till we got to another stage route, +and then make a straight wake, till we got to New Bedford, and there +we could get a good voyage. Come," said he, "let's go to-night. I'll +turn right about. I don't care a great deal about seeing my mother." + +Though Marco was a very bold and adventurous sort of a boy, still he +was not quite prepared for such a proposal as this. In the course of +the conversation the sailor used improper and violent language too, +which Marco did not like to hear; and, in fact, Marco began to be a +little afraid of his new acquaintance. He determined, as soon as he +got back to the coach to keep near Forester all the time, so as not to +be left alone again with the sailor. He tried to hasten on, so as to +overtake the coach, but the sailor told him not to walk so fast; and, +being unwilling to offend him, he was obliged to go slowly, and keep +with him; and thus protracted the conversation. + +[Illustration: THE HILL.] + +About half-way up the hill there was a small tavern, and the sailor +wanted Marco to go in with him and get a drink. Marco thought that he +meant a drink of water, but it was really a drink of spirits which +was intended. Marco, however, refused to go, saying that he was not +thirsty; and so they went on up the hill. At the top of the hill, the +stage-coach stopped for the pedestrians to come up. There was also +another passenger there to get in,--a woman, who came out from a +farm-house near by. The driver asked the sailor if he was not willing +to ride outside, in order to make room for the new passenger. But he +would not. He was afraid. He said he would not ride five miles outside +for a month's wages. Marco laughed at the sailor's fears, and he +immediately asked Forester to let _him_ ride outside. Forester +hesitated, but on looking up, and seeing that there was a secure seat, +with a good place to hold on, he consented. So Marco clambered up +and took his seat with the driver, while the other passengers +re-established themselves in the stage. + + + + +Chapter II. + +Accidents. + + + +Marco liked his seat upon the outside of the stage-coach very much. He +could see the whole country about him to great advantage. He was very +much interested in the scenery, not having been accustomed to travel +among forests and mountains. The driver was a rough young man,--for +the boy who drove the coach up to the door was not the regular driver. +He was not disposed to talk much, and his tone and manner, in what he +did say, did not indicate a very gentle disposition. Marco, however, +at last got a little acquainted with him, and finally proposed to the +driver to let _him_ drive. + +"Nonsense," said he, in reply, "you are not big enough to drive such a +team as this." + +"Why, there was a boy, no bigger than I, that drove the horses up to +the door when we started, this morning," replied Marco. + +"O yes,--Jerry,"--said the driver,--"but he'll break his neck one of +these days." + +"I didn't see but that he drove very well," said Marco. + +The driver was silent. + +"Come," persisted Marco, "let me drive a little way, and I'll do as +much for you some day." + +"You little fool," said the driver, "you never can do any thing for +me. You are not big enough to be of any use at all." + +Marco thought of the fable of the mouse and the lion, but since his +new companion was in such ill-humor, he thought he would say no more +to him. A resentful reply to the epithet "little fool," did in fact +rise to his lips, but he suppressed it and said nothing. + +It was fortunate for Marco that he did so. For whenever any person has +said any thing harsh, unjust, or cruel, the most effectual reply is, +generally, silence. It leaves the offender to think of what he has +said, and conscience will often reprove him in silence, far more +effectually than words could do it. This was the case in this +instance. As they rode along in silence, the echo of the words "little +fool," and the tone in which he had uttered them, lingered upon the +driver's ear. He could not help thinking that he had been rather harsh +with his little passenger. Presently he said, + +"I don't care though,--we are coming to a level piece of ground on +ahead here a little way, and then I'll see what you can make of +teaming." + +Marco was quite pleased at this unexpected result, and after ten or +fifteen minutes, they came to the level piece of road, and the driver +put the reins into Marco's hand. Marco had sometimes driven two +horses, when riding out with his father in a barouche, up the +Bloomingdale road in New York. He was therefore not entirely +unaccustomed to the handling of reins; and he took them from the +driver's hand and imitated the manner of holding them which he had +observed the driver himself to adopt, quite dexterously. + +The horses, in fact, needed very little guidance. They went along the +road very quietly of their own accord. Marco kept wishing that a +wagon or something else would come along, that he might have the +satisfaction of turning out. But nothing of the kind appeared, and he +was obliged to content himself with turning a little to one side, +to avoid a stone. At the end of the level piece of road there was a +tavern, where they were going to stop to change the horses, and Marco +asked the driver to let him turn the horses up to the door. The driver +consented, keeping a close watch all the time, ready to seize the +reins again at a moment's notice, if there had been any appearance of +difficulty. But there was none. Marco guided the horses right, and +drawing in the reins with all his strength, he brought them up +properly at the door; or rather, he seemed to do it,--for, in +reality, the horses probably acted as much of their own accord, being +accustomed to stop at this place, as from any control which Marco +exercised over them through the reins. + +There was, however, an advantage in this evolution, for Marco became +accustomed to the feeling of the reins in his hand, and acquired a +sort of confidence in his power over the horses,--greater to be sure +than there was any just ground for, but which was turned to a very +important account, a few hours afterward, as will be seen in the +sequel. + +The sailor went several times into the taverns on the way, in the +course of the afternoon, to drink, until, at length, he became +partially intoxicated. He felt, however, so much restrained in the +presence of the passengers within the coach, that he did not become +talkative and noisy, as is frequently the case in such circumstances; +but was rather stupid and sleepy. In fact, no one observed that any +change was taking place in his condition, until, at last, as he was +coming out from the door of a tavern, where he had been in to get +another drink, the driver said, + +"Come, Jack, you must get up with me now, there is another passenger +to get in here." + +Marco, who was still in his seat, holding the reins of the horses, +looked down, expecting that the sailor would make objections to this +proposal,--but he found, on the contrary, that Jack, as they called +him, acquiesced without making any difficulty, and allowed the driver +to help him up. The new passenger got inside. Forester felt somewhat +uneasy at having Marco ride any longer on the top, especially now that +the sailor was going up too. But the coach was full. He himself was +wedged into his seat, so that he could not get out easily. He knew, +too, that two or three of the passengers were going to get out at the +next stage, and so he concluded to let Marco remain outside until that +time, and then to take him in again. + +Marco's admiration for the sailor was very much diminished when he +saw how helpless he had rendered himself by his excesses, and how +unceremoniously the driver pulled and hauled him about, in getting him +into his seat. + +"There! hold on there," said the driver to him, in a stern +voice,--"hold on well, or you'll be down head foremost under the +horses' heels, at the first pitch we come to." + +The poor sailor said nothing, but grasped an iron bar which passed +from the top of the coach down by the side of the seat, and held on as +well as he could. + +They rode on in this manner for some miles, the head of the sailor +swinging back and forth, helplessly, as if he was nearly asleep. +Whenever Marco or the driver spoke to him, he either answered in a +thick and sleepy tone of voice, or he did not reply at all. Marco +watched him for a time, being continually afraid that he would fall +off. He could do nothing, however, to help him, for he himself was +sitting at one end of the seat while the sailor was upon the other, +the driver being between them. In the mean time the sun gradually went +down and the twilight came on, and as the shadows extended themselves +slowly over the landscape, Marco began to find riding outside less +pleasant than it had been before, and he thought that, on the whole, +he should be very glad when the time arrived for him to get into the +coach again, with his cousin. + +At length they came to a bridge, covered with planks, which led across +a small stream. It was in rather a solitary place, with woods on each +side of the road. Beyond the bridge there was a level piece of road +for a short distance, and then a gentle ascent, with a farmhouse near +the top of it, on the right hand side of the road. At the end of the +bridge, between the planks and the ground beyond them, there was a +jolt, caused by the rotting away of a log which had been imbedded in +the ground at the beginning of the planking. As it was rather dark, +on account of the shade of the trees, the driver did not observe this +jolt, and he was just beginning to put his horses to the trot, as they +were leaving the bridge, when the forward wheels struck down heavily +into the hollow, giving the front of the coach a sudden pitch forward +and downward. Marco grasped the iron bar at his end of the seat, and +saved himself; and the driver, who was habitually on his guard, had +his feet so braced against the fender before him, that he would not +have fallen. But the poor sailor, entirely unprepared for the shock, +and perhaps unable to resist it if he had been prepared, pitched +forward, lost his hold, went over the fender, and was tumbling down, +as the driver had predicted, head foremost, under the horses' heels. +The driver seized hold of him with one hand, but finding this +insufficient dropped his reins and tried to grasp him with both. In +doing it, however, he lost his own balance and went over too. He, of +course, let go of the sailor, when he found that he was going himself. +The sailor fell heavily and helplessly between the pole and the side +of one of the horses, to the ground. The driver followed. He seized +the pole with one hand, but was too late to save himself entirely, +and thinking there was danger of being dragged, and finding that the +horses were springing forward in a fright, he let himself drop through +to the ground also. The coach passed over them in a moment, as the +horses cantered on. + +All this passed in an instant, and Marco, before he had a moment's +time for reflection, found himself alone on his seat,--the driver run +over and perhaps killed, and the horses cantering away, with the reins +dangling about their heels. The first impulse, in such a case, would +be to scream aloud, in terror,--which would have only made the horses +run the faster. But Marco was not very easily frightened; at least, +he was not easily made crazy by fright. So he did not scream; and not +knowing what else to do, he sat still and did nothing. + +[Illustration: THE ACCIDENT.] + +In the mean time, the passengers inside knew nothing of all this. Many +of them had been asleep when they came over the bridge. The jolt had +aroused them a little, but there was nothing to indicate to them +the accident which had occurred forward, so they quietly adjusted +themselves in their seats, and endeavored to compose themselves to +sleep again. + +The horses were well trained and gentle. They cantered on as far as +the level ground extended, and then they slackened their pace as +they began to rise the ascent. The idea then occurred to Marco, that +perhaps he might clamber down over the fender to the pole, and then +walk along upon that a little way till he could gather up the reins. +Then he thought that if he could get back again with them to the +driver's seat, perhaps he could stop the horses. Marco was an expert +climber. He had learned this art in his gymnasium at New York; so that +he had no fears in respect to his being able to get down and back +again. The only danger was, lest he might frighten the horses again +and set them to running anew. + +After a moment's reflection, he concluded that at any rate he would +try it; so he cautiously stepped over the fender and clambered down. +When his feet reached the pole, he rested them a moment upon it, and +clung with his hands to the fender and other parts of the front of the +coach. He found his position here more unstable than he had expected; +for the coach being upon springs, the forward part rose and fell with +many jerks and surges, as the horses traveled swiftly along, while the +pole was held in its position straight and firm. Thus the different +parts of his body were connected with different systems of motion, +which made his position very uncomfortable. + +He found, however, after a moment's pause, that he could stand, and +probably walk upon the pole; so he advanced cautiously, putting his +hands on the backs of the horses, and walking along on the pole +between them. The horses were somewhat disturbed by the strange +sensations which they experienced, and began to canter again; but +Marco, who felt more and more confidence every moment, pushed boldly +on, gathered up the reins, and got all the ends together. Then taking +the ends of the reins in one hand, he crept back, supporting himself +by taking hold of the harness of one of the horses with the other +hand. By this means he regained the coach, and then, though with some +difficulty, he clambered up to his seat again. + +He then endeavored to stop the horses by gathering the reins together, +and pulling upon them with all his strength; but it was in vain. The +horses had by this time reached a part of the road where it was more +level, and they began to press forward at a more rapid pace. Marco +thought of calling to Forester to get out of the window and climb +along the side of the coach to the box, in order to help him; but just +at that moment he saw that they were coming up opposite to the farm +house, which had been in sight, at a distance, when they were crossing +the bridge. So he thought that though he could not stop the horses, he +might perhaps have strength enough to turn them off from the road into +the farmer's yard; and that then they could be more easily stopped. In +this he succeeded. By pulling the off rein of the leaders with all his +strength, he was able to turn them out of the road. The pole horses +followed as a matter of course,--the coach came up with a graceful +sweep to the farmer's door, and then the horses were easily stopped. +The farmer came at once to the door, to see what strange company had +come to visit him in the stage,--his wife following; while several +children crowded to the windows. + +"What's here?" said a voice from the window of the coach,--"a +post-office?" They thought the stage had been driven up to the door of +some post-office. + +Marco did not answer; in fact he was bewildered and confounded at the +strangeness of his situation. He looked back over the top of the coach +down the road to see what had become of the driver. To his great joy, +he saw him running up behind the coach,--his hat crushed out of shape, +and his clothes dusty. The passengers looked out at the windows of the +stage, exclaiming, + +"Why, driver! what's the matter?" + +The driver made no reply. He began to brush his clothes,--and, taking +off his hat, he attempted to round it out into shape again. + +"What _is_ the matter, driver?" said the passengers. + +"Nothing," replied he, "only that drunkard of a sailor tumbled off the +stage." + +"Where?" "When?" exclaimed half a dozen voices. "Is he killed?" + +"Killed? no," replied the driver; "I don't believe he is even +sobered." + +Forester and another gentleman then urgently asked where he was, and +the driver told them that he was "back there a piece," as he expressed +it. + +"What! lying in the road?" said Forester; "open the door, and let us +go and see to him." + +"No," said the driver; "he has got off to the side of the road, safe. +I don't believe he's hurt any. Let him take care of himself, and we'll +drive on." + +But Forester remonstrated strongly against leaving the poor sailor in +such a condition, and in such a place; and finally it was agreed that +the farmer should go down the road and see to him, so as to allow the +stage-coach with the passengers to go on. + +Forester was not willing, however, to have Marco ride outside any +longer; and so they contrived to make room for him within. As Marco +descended from his high seat, the driver said to him, as he passed +him, in a low voice, + +"How did you get the reins? I thought they all came down with me, +under the horses' heels." + +"Yes," said Marco, "they did, and I climbed down upon the pole and got +them." + +"Well," said the driver, "you're a smart boy. But don't tell them +inside that I tumbled off. Tell them I gave you the reins, and jumped +down to see the sailor." + +After receiving this charge, Marco would have been under a strong +temptation to tell a falsehood, if the company in the coach had asked +him any questions about it. But they did not. They were so much +occupied in expressing their astonishment that the sailor did not +break his neck, that they asked very few questions, and after riding a +short time, they relapsed into silence again. The fact that both +the driver and the sailor escaped being seriously hurt, was not so +wonderful as it might seem. Horses have generally an instinctive +caution about not stepping upon any thing under their feet. If a +little child were lying asleep in the middle of a road, and a horse +were to come galloping along without any rider, the mother, who +should see the sight from the window of the house, would doubtless be +exceedingly terrified; but in all probability the horse would pass the +child without doing it any injury. He would leap over it, or go around +it, as he would if it were a stone. This is one reason why, in so many +cases, persons are run over without being hurt. The driver and the +sailor, however, fell rather behind the horses' heels, and escaped +them in that way, and they came down so exactly into the middle of the +road, that they were out of the way of the track of the wheels, and +thus they escaped serious injury. + +The misfortunes of the evening, however, did not end here. The road +was rather rough, and there were many ruts and joltings; and one or +two of the passengers seemed to feel some fear lest the stage should +upset. One, who sat near the door, put his arm out at the window over +the door, so as to get his hand upon the handle of the catch, in +order, as he said, to be ready to open the door and spring out, at a +moment's warning. The gentleman on the back seat advised him not to do +it. + +"If you have your arm out," said he, "the coach may fall over upon +it, and break it. That's the way people get hurt by the upsetting of +coaches, by thrusting out their legs and arms in all directions, when +they find they are going over, and thus get them broken. You ought to +fold your arms and draw in your feet, and when you find that we are +going over, go in an easy attitude, with all the muscles relaxed, as +if your body was a bag of corn." + +The passenger laughed and took his arm in; and all the other +passengers, seeing that the advice of the gentleman was reasonable, +concluded to follow it if they should have occasion. And they did have +occasion sooner than they had expected. For, just after dark, as they +were going down a long hill at a pretty rapid rate, with a wagon a +short distance before them, one of the horses of the wagon stumbled +and fell, which brought the wagon to a sudden stand just before the +coach. The driver perceived in an instant that there was not time to +stop his horses, and that the only chance was to turn out of the road +and drive by. The ground at the road-side was so much inclined, that +he was almost afraid to venture this expedient, but he had no time for +thought. He wheeled his horses out,--just escaped the hind wheel of +the wagon--ran along by the road-side a short distance, with the +wheels on one side, down very near the gutter,--and then, just as he +was coming back safely into the road again, the forward wheel nearest +the middle of the road, struck a small stone, and threw the coach +over. The top rested upon the bank, and the horses were suddenly +stopped. Sometimes, on such occasions, the _transom_ bolt, as it +is called, that is, the bolt by which the forward wheels are fastened +to the carriage, comes out, and the horses run off with the wheels. It +did not come out in this case, however. The man who had put his arm +out of the window, immediately called out, in great alarm, "Hold the +horses! Hold the horses! Don't let the horses run and drag us." But +this vociferation was needless. A coach full of passengers and baggage +is a full load for four horses, when it is mounted on wheels. It would +require an exertion far beyond their strength to drag it when on its +side. The horses remained quiet, therefore, while the wagoner and the +driver, who was not hurt, opened the door in the upper side of the +coach. The passengers then climbed out, one by one, without injury. +Mary Williams came out last, with her orange-tree safe in her hand. + + + + +Chapter III. + +The Grass Country. + + + +The scene of confusion, produced by the double accident described in +the last chapter, was great, but not long continued. The wagoner got +his fallen horse up, and then the passengers, with the driver and +wagoner, all taking hold together, soon righted the stage. None of the +passengers were hurt, but the coach itself was so much injured that +the driver thought it was not safe to load it heavily again. The +female passengers got in, but the men walked along by the side of it, +intending to travel in that way about four miles to the next +tavern. Forester, however, was not inclined to take so long a walk. +Fortunately, at a small distance before them, was a farmhouse which +looked as if it belonged to a large and thrifty farmer. The great +barns and sheds, the neat yards, the well-built walls and fences, +and the large stock of cattle in the barn-yard, indicated wealth and +prosperity. Forester concluded to apply here for a lodging for the +night, for himself and Marco. The farmer was very willing to receive +them. So the driver took off their trunks, and then the stage-coach, +with the rest of the passengers, went on. + +"How long shall we have to stay here?" asked Marco. + +"Only till to-morrow," said Forester. "Another stage will come along +to-morrow. We can stop just as well as not, as we are in no haste to +get home. Besides, I should like to have you see something of the +operations of a great grass farm." + +Marco and Forester went into the house, and were ushered into a large +room, which seemed to be both sitting-room and kitchen. A large round +table was set in the middle of the floor, for supper. A monstrous dog +was lying under it, with his chin resting upon his paws. There was a +great settle in one corner, by the side of the fire. There were chairs +also, with straight backs and seats of basket-work, a spinning-wheel, +an open cupboard, and various other similar objects, which, being +so different from the articles of furniture which Marco had been +accustomed to see in the New York parlors, attracted his attention +very strongly. Marco went and took his seat upon the settle, and the +dog rose and came to him. The dog gazed into his face with an earnest +look of inquiry, which plainly said, "Who are you?" while Marco patted +him on the head, thereby answering as plainly, "A friend." The dog, +perfectly understanding the answer, seemed satisfied, and, turning +away, went back to his place again under the table. + +[Illustration: WHO ARE YOU?] + +One of the farmer's young men carried the trunks into a little +bed-room, which opened from the great room; and then the farmer sat +down and began to enter into conversation with Forester and Marco +about their accident. Forester told him also about the sailor, who +had tumbled off the coach a mile or two back, and been left behind. +Forester said that he should like to know whether he was hurt much. +Then the farmer said that he would let him take a horse and wagon the +next morning and ride back and inquire. This plan was therefore agreed +upon. Marco and Forester ate a good supper with the farmer's family, +and then spent the evening in talking, and telling stories about +horses, and sagacious dogs, and about catching wild animals in the +woods with traps. About nine o'clock the family all assembled for +evening prayers. After prayers Marco and Forester went to bed in their +little bed-room, where they slept soundly till morning. + +In the morning they were both awakened by the crowing of the cocks, at +an early hour. They also heard movements in the house and in the +yard before sunrise; so they arose and dressed themselves, and after +attending to their morning devotions together in their room, a duty +which Forester never omitted, they went out. Marco was very much +interested in the morning occupations of the farm. There was the +milking of the cows, and the feeding of the various animals, and the +pitching off a load of corn, which had been got in the evening before +and allowed to stand on the cart, on the barn-floor, over night. The +cows were then to be driven to pasture, and the boy who went with +them, took a bridle to catch a horse for Forester and Marco to have +for their ride. Forester and Marco went with him. It was only a short +walk to the pasture bars, but they had to ramble about a little while, +before they found the horses. At last they found them feeding together +at the edge of a grove of trees. There were two or three horses, and +several long-tailed colts. The boy caught one of the horses, which he +called Nero. Nero was a white horse. Marco mounted him and rode down, +with the other horses and the colts following him. They put the horse +in the stable until after breakfast, and then harnessed him into the +wagon. When all was ready, the farmer told them to bring the sailor +along with them to his house, if they found that he was hurt so that +he could not travel. + +When they were seated in the wagon, and had fairly commenced +their ride, Marco asked Forester, what he meant last evening by a +_grass_ farm. "You told me," said he, "that you wanted me to see +a great grass farm." + +"Yes," replied Forester. "The farms in this part of the United States +may be called grass farms. This is the grass country." + +"Isn't it all grass country?" asked Marco. "Grass grows everywhere." + +"Grass is not _cultivated_ everywhere so much as it is among +the mountains, in the northern states," replied Forester. "The great +articles of cultivation in the United States are grass, grain, and +cotton. The grass is cultivated in the northern states, the grain in +the middle states, and the cotton in the southern states. The grass +is food for beasts, the grain is food for man, and the cotton is +for clothing. These different kinds of cultivation are not indeed +exclusive in the different districts. Some grass is raised in the +middle and southern states, and some grain is raised in the northern +states; but, in general, the great agricultural production of the +northern states is grass, and these farms among the mountains in +Vermont are grass farms. + +"There is one striking difference," continued Forester, "between the +grass farms of the north, and the grain farms of the middle states, or +the cotton plantations of the south. The grass cultivation brings with +it a vast variety of occupations and processes on the farm, making +the farm a little world by itself; whereas the grain and the cotton +cultivation are far more simple, and require much less judgment and +skill. This is rather remarkable; for one would think that raising +food for beasts would require less skill than raising food or clothes +for man." + +"I should have thought so," said Marco. + +"The reason for the difference is," replied Forester, "that in raising +food for animals, it is necessary to keep the animals to eat it, on +the spot, for it will not bear transportation." + +"Why not?" said Marco. + +"Because it is so cheap," replied Forester. + +"I don't think that is any reason," replied Marco. + +"A load of grass"--said Forester. + +"A load of grass!" repeated Marco, laughing. + +"Yes, dried grass, that is, hay. Hay, you know, is grass dried to +preserve it." + +"Very well," said Marco; "go on." + +"A load of grass, then, is so cheap, that the cost of hauling it fifty +miles would be more than it is worth. But cotton is worth a great deal +more, in proportion to its bulk. It can therefore be transported to +distant places to be sold and manufactured. Thus the enormous quantity +of cotton which grows every summer in the southern states, is packed +in bags, very tight, and is hauled to the rivers and creeks, and there +it is put into steamboats and sent to the great seaports, and at the +seaports it is put into ships, which carry it to England or to the +northern states, to be manufactured; and it is so valuable, that it +will bring a price sufficient to pay all the persons that have been +employed in raising it, or in transporting it. But the grass that +grows in the northern countries can not be transported. The mills for +manufacturing cotton may be in one country, and the cotton be raised +in another, and then, after the cotton is gathered, it may be packed +and sent thousands of miles to be manufactured. But the sheep and oxen +which are to eat the hay, can not be kept in one country, while the +grass which they feed upon grows in another. The animals must live, in +general, on the very farm which the grass grows upon. Thus, while the +cotton cultivator has nothing to do but to raise his cotton and send +it to market, the grass cultivator must not only raise his grass, but +he must provide for and take care of all the animals which are to +eat it. This makes the agriculture of the northern states a far more +complicated business, because the care of animals runs into great +detail, and requires great skill, and sound judgment, and the exercise +of constant discretion. + +"You observe," continued Forester, "that it is by the intervention of +animals that the farmer gets the product of his land into such a shape +that it will bear transportation. For instance, he feeds out his hay +to his sheep, attending them with care and skill all the winter. In +the spring he shears off their fleeces; and now he has got something +which he _can_ send to market. He has turned his grass into wool, +and thus got its value into a much more compact form. The wool will +bear transportation. Perhaps he gave a whole load of hay to his sheep, +to produce a single bag of wool. So the bag of wool is worth as much +as the load of hay, and is very much more easily carried to market. He +can put it upon his lumber-box, and drive off fifty miles with it, to +market, without any difficulty." + +"His lumber-box?" asked Marco. "What is that?" + +"Didn't you ever see a lumber-box?" asked Forester. "It is a square +box, on runners, like those of a sleigh. The farmers have them to haul +their produce to market." + +"Why do they call it a lumber-box?" asked Marco. + +[Illustration: THE LUMBER-BOX.] + +"Why, when the country was first settled, they used to carry lumber to +market principally; that is, bundles of shingles and clapboards, which +they made from timber cut in the woods. It requires some time for a +new farm, made in the forests, to get into a condition to produce +much grass for cattle. I suppose that it was in this way that these +vehicles got the name of lumber-boxes. You will see a great many +of them, in the winter season, coming down from every part of the +country, toward the large towns on the rivers, filled with produce." + +"What else do the farmers turn their grass into, besides wool?" asked +Marco. + +"Into beef," said Forester. "They raise cows and oxen. They let them +eat the grass as it grows, all summer, and in the winter they feed +them with what they have cut and dried and stored in the barn for +them. The farmers are all ambitious to cut as much hay as they can, +and to keep a large stock of cattle. Thus they turn the grass into +beef, and the beef can be easily transported. In fact, it almost +transports itself." + +"How do you mean?" asked Marco. + +"Why, the oxen and cows, when they are fat and ready for market, walk +off in droves to Boston, to be killed. They don't kill them where they +are raised, for then they would have to haul away the beef in wagons +or sleighs, but make the animals walk to market themselves, and kill +them there. But the farmers don't generally take their own cattle to +market. Men go about the country, and call upon the farmers, and buy +their cattle, and thus collect great droves. These men are called +drovers. In traveling in this part of the country, late in the fall, +you would see great droves of cattle and sheep, passing along the +road, all going to Boston, or rather Brighton." + +"Where is Brighton?" asked Marco. + +"It is a town very near Boston, where the great cattle market is held. +The Boston dealers come out to Brighton, and buy the cattle, and have +them slaughtered, and the beef packed and sent away all over the +world. Thus the farmers turn the grass into beef, and in that shape it +can be transported and sold." + +"And what else?" asked Marco. + +"Why, they raise a great many horses in Vermont," replied Forester. +"These horses live upon grass, eating it as it grows in the pastures +and on the mountains, in the summer, and being fed upon hay in the +barn in the winter. These horses, when they are four or five years +old, are sent away to market to be sold. They can be transported very +easily. A man will ride one, and lead four or five by his side. They +will be worth perhaps seventy-five dollars apiece; so that one man +will easily take along with him, three or four hundred dollars' worth +of the produce of the farm, in the shape of horses; whereas the hay +which had been consumed on the farm to make these horses, it would +have taken forty yoke of oxen to move." + +"Forty yoke!" repeated Marco. + +"I don't mean to be exact," said Forester. "I mean it would take a +great many. So that, by feeding his hay out to horses, the farmer +gets his produce into a better state to be transported to market. The +Vermont horses go all over the land. Thus you see that the farmers +in the grass country have to turn the vegetable products which they +raise, into animal products, before they can get them to market; and +as the rearing of animals is a work which requires a great deal of +attention, care, patience, and skill, the cultivators must be men of a +higher class than those which are employed in raising cotton, or even +than those who raise grain. The animals must be watched and guarded +while they are young. There are a great many different diseases, and +accidents, and injuries which they are exposed to, and it requires +constant watchfulness, and considerable, intelligence, to guard +against them. This makes a great difference in the character which is +required in the laborers, in the different cases. A cotton plantation +in the south can be cultivated by slaves. A grain farm in the middle +states can be worked by hired laborers; but a northern grass farm, +with all its oxen, cows, sheep, poultry, and horses, can only be +successfully managed by the work of the owner." + +"Is that the reason why they have slaves at the south?" asked Marco. + +"It is a reason why slaves can be profitable at the south. In +cultivating cotton or sugar, a vast proportion of all the work done +in the year is the same. Almost the whole consists of a few simple +processes, such as planting, hoeing, picking cotton, &c., and this is +to be performed on smooth, even land, where set tasks can be easily +assigned. But the work on a grass farm is endlessly varied. It would +not be possible to divide it into set tasks. And then it is of such a +nature, that it could not possibly be performed successfully by the +mere labor of the hands. The _mind_ must be employed upon it. For +instance, even in getting in hay, in the summer season, the farmer has +to exercise all his judgment and discretion to avoid getting it wet by +the summer showers, and yet to secure it in good time, and with proper +dispatch. A cotton planter may hire an overseer to see to the getting +in of his cotton, and he can easily tell by the result, whether he +has been faithful or not. But hay can not be got in well, without the +activity, and energy, and good judgment, which can come only from the +presence and immediate supervision of an owner. This produces vast +differences in the nature of the business, and in the whole state of +society in the two regions." + +"What are the differences?" asked Marco. + +"Why, in the first place," said Forester, "the fact that cotton and +sugar can be cultivated by hired overseers, with slaves to do the +work, enables rich men to carry on great plantations without laboring +themselves. But a great grass farm could not be managed so. A man may +have one thousand acres for his plantation at the south, and with a +good overseer and good hands, it will all go on very well, so far as +his profit is concerned. They will produce a great amount of cotton, +which may be sent to market and sold, and the planter realize the +money, so as to make a large profit after paying all his expenses. But +if a man were to buy a thousand acres of grass land, and employ an +overseer and slaves to cultivate it, every thing would go to ruin. The +hay would get wet and spoiled,--the carts, wagons, and complicated +tools necessary, would get broken to pieces,--the lambs would be +neglected and die, and the property would soon go to destruction. +Even when a rich man attempts to carry on a moderate farm by hired +laborers, taking the best that he can find, he seldom succeeds." + +"Does he _ever_ succeed?" said Marco. + +"Yes," replied Forester, "sometimes. There is Mr. Warner, who lives +near my father's; he was brought up on a farm, and is practically +acquainted with all the work. He has been very successful, and has +a very large farm. He works now very little himself, but he watches +every thing with the greatest care, and he succeeds very well. He has +a great stock. He cuts fifty tons of hay." + +"I should like to see his farm," said Marco. + +"We'll go some day," replied Forester. + +"So you see," continued Forester, "that the work of a cotton or sugar +plantation, is comparatively simple and plain, requiring little +judgment or mental exertion, and a great deal of plain straightforward +bodily labor; while on a northern stock farm the labors are endlessly +varied. Every month, every week, and almost every day brings some +change. New emergencies are constantly arising, which call for +deliberation and judgment. It is necessary to have a great variety of +animals, in order to consume all the different productions of the farm +to advantage. I can explain it all to you better, when you come to see +Mr. Warner's farm." + +As Nero traveled very fast, they began by this time to draw near to +the place where they had left the sailor. When they came up to the +house, they fastened the horse to a post, and went in. The man who +lived there had gone away, but the woman said that the sailor was +somewhat hurt, and asked them to come in and see him. They found him +in the kitchen, with his foot up in a chair. He seemed to be in some +pain. There was a great bruise on his ankle, made by the cork of one +of the horses' shoes. These _corks_, as they are called, are +projections, made of steel, at the heel of a horse-shoe, to give the +horse a firm footing. They are made quite sharp in the winter season, +when there is ice and snow upon the ground, but they are generally +more blunt in the summer. This prevented the ankle's being cut as +badly as it would have been, if the corks had been sharper. Forester +looked at the ankle, and found that nothing had been done for it. It +was inflamed and painful. He got the woman to give him a basin of warm +water, and then he bathed it very carefully, which relieved the sense +of tension and pain. Then he made an ointment of equal parts of tallow +and oil, which he put upon the end of a bandage, and thus bound it +up. This treatment relieved the poor sailor very much. Then Forester +proposed to the sailor to get into the wagon and go with him to the +next house, and the sailor consented. Forester was then going to pay +the woman for his night's lodging, but the sailor said at once,--"No, +squire, not at all. I'm much obliged to you for doing up my foot, but +you need not pay any thing for me. I've got plenty of shot in the +locker." + +So saying, he put his hand in his pocket and drew out a handful of +gold and silver pieces. But the woman, who began now to feel a little +ashamed that she had not done something for the wounded foot, said he +was welcome to his lodging; and so they all got into the wagon, and +Nero carried them rapidly back to his master's. + + + + +Chapter IV. + +The Village. + + + +In due time, and without any farther adventure, Forester and Marco +arrived at the end of their journey. The village where Forester's +father lived was situated in a gorge of the mountains, or rather at +the entrance of a valley, which terminated at last in a gorge. There +was a river flowing through this valley, and the village was upon its +banks. At the upper end of the village a branch stream came in from +the north, and there was a dam upon it, with some mills. The river +itself was a rapid stream, flowing over a sandy and gravelly bottom, +and there were broad intervals on each side of it, extending for some +distance toward the higher land. Beyond these intervals, the land rose +gradually, and in an undulating manner, to the foot of the mountains, +which extended along the sides of the valley, and from the summits of +which, one might look down upon the whole scene, with the village in +the center of it as upon a map. + +Marco was very much pleased with the situation, and with the +appearance of the village. The street was broad, and it was shaded +with rows of large maples and elms on each side. The houses were +generally white, with green blinds. Most of them had pleasant yards +before them and at their sides; these yards were planted with trees +and shrubbery. There were also gardens behind. The mountains which +surrounded the scene, gave a very secluded and sheltered appearance to +the valley. + +The house in which Forester lived was the largest in the village. It +was a square house of two stories. It stood back a little from the +road, in the middle of a large yard, ornamented with rows of trees +along the sides, and groups of shrubbery in the corners and near the +house. There were gravel walks leading in different directions through +this yard, and on one side of the house was a carriage-way, which led +from a great gate in front, to a door in one end of the house, and +thence to the stable in the rear. On the other side of the house, near +the street, was the office,--for Forester's father was a lawyer. The +office was a small square building, with the lawyer's name over the +door. There was a back door to the office, and a footpath, winding +among trees and shrubbery, which led from the office to the house. + +The morning after they arrived, Forester took Marco out to see the +village. He intended not only to show him the various objects of +interest which were to be seen, but also to explain to him why it was +that such villages would spring up in a farming country, and what were +the occupations of the inhabitants. + +"The first thing which causes the commencement of a village in New +England," said Forester, "is a water-fall." + +"Why is that?" asked Marco. + +"There are certain things," replied Forester, "which the farmers can +not very well do for themselves, by their own strength, particularly +grinding their corn, and sawing logs into boards for their houses. +When they first begin to settle in a new country, they make the houses +of logs, and they have to take the corn and grain a great many miles +on horseback, through paths in the woods, or, in the winter, on +hand-sleds, to get it ground. But as soon as any of them are able to +do it, they build a dam on some stream in the neighborhood, where +there is a fall in the water, and thus get a water power. This water +power they employ, to turn a saw-mill and a grist-mill. Then all the +farmers, when they want to build houses or barns, haul logs to the +mill to get them sawed into boards, and they carry their grain to the +grist-mill and get it ground. They pay the owner of the mills for +doing this work for them. And thus, if there are a great many farms in +the country around, and no other mills very near, so that the mills +are kept all the time at work, the owner gets a great deal of pay, and +gradually acquires property. + +"Now, as soon as the mills are built, perhaps a blacksmith sets up a +shop near them. If a blacksmith is going to open a shop anywhere +in that town, it will be better for him to have it near the mills, +because, as the farmers all have to come to the mills at any rate, +they can avail themselves of the opportunity, to get their horses +shod, or to get new tires to their wheels, when they are broken." + +"Tires?" repeated Marco. "What are tires?" + +"They are the iron rims around wheels. Every wheel must have an iron +band about it, very tight, to strengthen it and to hold it firmly +together. Without a tire, a wheel would very soon come to pieces, in +rattling over a stony road. + +"Besides," continued Forester, "there is a great deal of other iron +work, which the farmers must have done. Farmers can, generally, do +most of the wood work which they want themselves. They can make their +rakes, and drags, and cart-bodies, and sleds, and tool handles; but +when they want iron work, they must go to the blacksmith's. They can +make a harrow-frame, but the blacksmith must make the teeth." + +"Now I should think," said Marco, "that it would be easier to make the +teeth than the frame." + +"Perhaps it is as easy, if one has the forge and tools," replied +Forester; "but the tools and fixtures, necessary for blacksmith's +work, are much more expensive than those required for ordinary wood +work. There must be a forge built on purpose, and an anvil, supported +on a solid foundation, and various tools. All these are necessary for +shoeing a single horse, and when they are all procured, they will +answer for all the horses of the neighborhood. Thus it happens, that +though farmers do a great deal of their wood work themselves, at their +own farms, in cold and stormy weather, they generally have their iron +work done at a blacksmith's at some central place, where it is easy +and convenient for all of them to go." + +The above conversation took place between Marco and Forester, as they +were walking along together through the village, toward the part of +the town where the mills were situated. Just at this moment, Marco +happened to cast his eyes across the street a short distance before +them, and he saw a fire on the ground in a little yard. He asked +Forester what that fire could be. As soon as Forester saw the fire, he +exclaimed, + +"Ah! they are putting a tire upon a wheel; that's quite fortunate; +we'll go across and see them." + +So they left the path under the trees where they had been walking, and +went obliquely across the street toward the fire. Marco saw that +there was a large blacksmith's shop there. It was a very neat-looking +building, painted red. There was a large door in the front, and a very +low window, with a shutter hanging over it, by the side of the door. +In an open yard, by the side of the shop, was the fire. The fire was +in the form of a ring. There were several men standing about it; one +of them, whom Marco supposed was the blacksmith, by his leather apron, +was putting on small sticks of wood and chips, here and there, around +the ring. Marco saw that there was a large iron hoop, as he called it, +on the fire. It was not really a hoop, it was a _tire_. It was +made of a much larger and thicker bar of iron, than those which are +used for hoops. It was a tire belonging to a wheel. The wheel was +lying upon the ground near, ready to receive the tire. It was the hind +wheel of a wagon. The wagon itself was standing in front of the shop, +with one end of the hind axletree supported by a block. + +"What do they heat the tire for?" asked Marco. + +"To swell it," replied Forester. "It is necessary to have the tire go +on very tight, so as to hold the wheel together with all the force of +the iron. Now when iron is heated it swells, and then shrinks again +when it cools. So they heat the tire hot, and put it upon the wheel in +that state. Then when it cools it shrinks, and binds the whole wheel +together with a very strong grip." + +"But if they put it on hot, it will burn the wood," said Marco. + +"Yes," replied Forester, "it will burn the wood a little. They can not +help that entirely; but they stand ready with water, to pour on, as +soon as the tire is in its place, and so cool it immediately, so that +it does not burn the fellies enough to injure them." + +"What are the fellies?" asked Marco. + +"They are the parts of the wooden rim of the wheel. The rim is made of +several pieces of wood, which are called fellies." + +So Forester took Marco to the wheel, and showed him the parts of +which the rim was composed. While Marco was looking at the wheel, the +blacksmith began to push away the burning brands a little from the +tire, as it began to be hot enough. Presently he went into his shop +and brought out several pairs of tongs. With these the men lifted the +tire out of the fire, but the blacksmith said it was a little too hot, +and he must let it cool a minute or two. + +"Why, if it's very hot," said Marco, "it will grip the wheel all the +harder." + +"It will grip it _too_ hard," said Forester. "Sometimes a tire +shrinks so much as to spring the spokes out of shape. Didn't you ever +see a wheel with the spokes bent out of shape?" + +"I don't know," said Marco. "I never noticed wheels much." + +"They do get bent, sometimes," said Forester. "It requires great care +to put on a tire in such a manner, as to give it just the right degree +of force to bind the wheel strongly together, without straining it." + +[Illustration: THE TIRE.] + +As soon as the tire became of the right temperature, the men took it +up again with the pairs of tongs--taking hold with them at different +sides of it--and then they put it down carefully over the wheel. The +wheel immediately began to smoke on all sides. In one or two places +it burst into a flame. The blacksmith, however, paid no attention to +this, but with a hammer, which he held in his hand, he knocked it down +into its place, all around the rim; then he took up a brown pitcher +full of water, which was standing near, and began to pour the +water on, walking round and round the wheel as he did it, so as to +extinguish the flames in every part and cool the iron. When this +process was completed, Forester and Marco walked on. + +"Let me see," said Forester, "where did I leave off, Marco, in my +account of the growth of a village? I was telling you about the +blacksmith's shop, I believe." + +"Yes," said Marco. + +"The next thing to the blacksmith's shop, in the history of a New +England village," said Forester, "is generally a store. You see the +farmers can not raise every thing they want. There are a great many +things which come from foreign countries, which they have to buy." + +"Such as sugar and tea," said Marco. + +"Yes," replied Forester, "only they make a great deal of sugar in +Vermont out of the sap of the maple-tree. We will go and see Mr. +Warner's sugar bush next spring. But there are a great many things +which the farmers must buy. One of the most important articles is +iron. Now when a man concludes to open a store, the best place that he +can have for his business is near the mills and the blacksmith's shop; +because the people have to come there on other business, and so that +is the most convenient place for them to visit his store. And so, by +and by, when a carpenter and a mason come into the country, the little +village which has thus begun to form itself, is the best place for +them to settle in, for that is the place where people can most +conveniently call and see them. After a while a physician comes and +settles there, to heal them when they are sick, and a lawyer to +prevent disputes." + +"To _prevent_ disputes!" said Marco. Marco had not much idea of +the nature of a lawyer's business, but he had a sort of undefined and +vague notion, that lawyers _made_ disputes among men, and lived +by them. + +"Why, I know," said Forester, laughing, "that lawyers have not the +credit, generally, of preventing many disputes, but I believe they do. +Perhaps it is because I am going to be a lawyer myself. But I really +believe that lawyers prevent ten disputes, where they occasion one." + +"How do they do it?" asked Marco. + +"Why, they make contracts, and draw up writings, and teach men to be +clear and distinct in their engagements and bargains. Then besides, +when men will not pay their debts, they compel them to do it, by legal +process. And there are a vast many debts which are paid, for fear of +this legal process, which would not have been paid without it. Thus, +knowing that the lawyers are always ready to apply the laws, men are +much more careful not to break them, than they otherwise would be. So +that it is no doubt vastly for the benefit of a community, not only to +have efficient laws, but efficient lawyers to aid in the execution of +them." + +By this time, Forester and Marco had reached the part of the village +where the mills were situated. Forester showed Marco the dam. It was +supported by ledges of rocks on each bank, and there was a flume, +which conducted the water to the wheels of the mills. There were two +mills and a machine-shop. They went into the machine-shop. There was +a lathe here carried by water. A man was at work at it, turning hoe +handles. Forester asked him what other articles were turned there; and +he said posts for bedsteads, and rounds for chairs, and such other +things as were used in quantities in that part of the country. +Forester asked him whether the lathe would turn brass and iron as well +as wood; but he said it would not. It was not fitted for that work. + +"I suppose you might have a lathe here, to work in the metals," said +Forester. + +"Yes," replied the man, "but it would not be worth while. There is +very little of that kind of work wanted in this part of the country." + +After looking at the mills, Forester and Marco walked along up the +stream a little way, to look at the mill-pond. Whenever a dam is +made, it causes a pond to be formed above it, more or less extensive, +according to the nature of the ground. In this case there was quite a +large pond, formed by the accumulation of the water above the dam. +The pond was not very wide, but it extended more than a mile up the +stream. The banks were picturesque and beautiful, being overhung with +trees in some places, and in others presenting verdant slopes, down to +the water's edge. + +"That's a good pond to go a-fishing in," said Marco. + +"Yes," said Forester, "and it makes fine skating ground in the +winter." + +Marco and Forester followed the banks of the mill-pond, until they +came to the end of the still water; beyond that they saw a rapid +running stream, coming down from the mountains. Marco wished to follow +this stream up farther, to see what they would come to, and Forester +consented. The ground ascended more and more the farther they +proceeded, and the view began to be shut in by forests, precipices and +mountains. Marco liked clambering over the rocks, and he found a +great deal to interest him at every step of the way. He saw several +squirrels and one rabbit. He wanted Forester to get him a gun and let +him come out into those woods a-gunning. + +"No," said Forester. + +"Why not?" asked Marco. + +"That is dangerous amusement." + +"Why? Do you think I should get killed with my sun?" asked Marco. + +"No," replied Forester, "I don't think you would; but you _might_ +get killed. The risk would be too great for the benefit." + +"Why, you told me the other day, that it was a great thing to learn to +take risks coolly. If I had a gun I could practice and learn." + +"Yes," said Forester, "it is well to take risks coolly, when the +advantage is sufficient to justify it. For instance, when you crept +down upon the pole the other day, to get the reins, you took a great +risk, but perhaps you saved the lives of the passengers by it. That +was right--but to hazard your life, for the sake of the pleasure of +shooting a squirrel, is not wise." Marco had before this time told him +about his getting the reins. + +"I shouldn't think, there was much danger," said Marco. + +"No," said Forester, "there's very little danger. In using a gun, you +put yourself in a very little danger of a very great calamity. There's +very little probability that your gun would burst, or that you would +ever shoot accidentally any other person;--very little indeed. But if +the gun were to burst, and blow off one of your arms, or put out your +eyes, or if you were to shoot another boy, the calamity would be a +very terrible one. So we call it a great risk." + +"It seems to be a small risk of a great calamity," said Marco. + +"Yes," replied Forester, "but we call it a great risk. We call the +risk great, when either the evil which we are in danger of is great, +or when the chance of its befalling us is great. For example, if you +and I were to walk over that log which lies across the stream, we +should run a great risk; but that would be, not a small chance of a +great evil, but a great chance of a small evil. There would be a great +chance that we should fall off into the stream; but that would not be +much of an evil as we should only get ourselves wet." + +[Illustration: The Risk] + +"Let us go and try it," said Marco. "Not I," said Forester. "You may, +however, if you please. I am willing to have you take such a risk as +_that_, for your amusement." + +Marco went to the log and walked back and forth across it, as +composedly as if it were a broad plank, lying upon the ground. +Finally, he hopped across it on one foot, to show Forester his +dexterity. Forester was surprised. He did not know how much skill in +such feats Marco had acquired by his gymnastics in New York. + +After this, Forester and Marco clambered up some rocks on an elevated +summit, where they had a fine view of the village below them. They +could trace the river, winding through the valley, with the green +intervals on both sides of it. They could see the village and the +streets, with the spire of the meeting-house in the center. The +mill-pond was in full view also; and Marco's attention was attracted +by a boat, which he saw gliding over the surface of the water. + +"O! there is a boat," said Marco. + +"Yes," said Forester. "I have paddled over the water many a time in +her." + +"How many oars does she pull?" asked Marco. + +"Oars?" said Forester, "no oars; they use paddles." + +"I wish they had some oars," said Marco, "and then I would get a crew +of boys, and teach them to manage a boat man-o'-war fashion." + +"How do you know any thing about it?" asked Forester. + +"O, I learned at New York, in the boats at the Battery." + +"Well," said Forester, "we'll have some oars made, and get a crew. I +should like to learn myself." + +"Let us go down and see the boat," said Marco, "now." + +"No," replied Forester, "it is time to go to dinner now; but we'll +come and see the boat the next time we go to take a walk." + +So Marco and Forester came down the hill, and thence went across the +fields home to dinner. They dined at half-past twelve o'clock, which +seemed a very strange hour to Marco. + + + + +Chapter V. + +Studying. + + + +The little building where Forester's father had his office, had a +small back room in it, which opened from the office proper, and which +was used as a library and private study. It had a small fire place +in it, and there was a table in the middle of the room, with a large +portable writing-desk upon it. This desk was made of rosewood. The +sides of the room were lined with book-shelves. There was one large +window which looked upon the yard and garden behind. The books in +this room were principally law-books, though there were some books of +history and travels, and great dictionaries of various kinds. Forester +conducted Marco into this room, a day or two after their arrival in +the village, saying, + +"Here, Marco, this is to be our study. How do you like it?" + +"Very well," said Marco. "It is a very pleasant room. Am I to study +all these books?" + +"Not more than one at a time, at any rate," said Forester. + +"_This_ is my place, I suppose," said Marco; and so saying he sat +down in a great arm-chair, before the portable writing-desk, which was +open on the table. + +[Illustration: THE STUDY.] + +"No," said Forester, "that is _my_ place. I am going to arrange +your establishment near the window. James has gone to bring your desk +now." + +While he was speaking, the door opened, and James, the young man who +lived at Forester's father's came in, bringing a desk. It was painted +blue, and had four legs. These legs were of such a length as to make +the desk just high enough for Marco. James put it down, at Forester's +direction, near the window. It was placed with the left side toward +the window, so that the light from the window would strike across the +desk from left to right. This is the most convenient direction for +receiving light when one is writing. Forester then placed a chair +before the desk, and Marco went into the house and brought out all the +books and papers which he had, and arranged them neatly in his desk. +While he was gone, Forester took an inkstand and a sand-box out of a +closet by the side of the fire, and filled them both, and put them on +the desk. He also placed in the desk a supply of paper, in quarter +sheets. After Marco had come back, and had put in his books and +papers, Forester gave him a ruler and a lead pencil; also a slate and +half a dozen slate pencils; also a piece of sponge and a piece of +India-rubber. He gave him besides a little square phial, and sent him +to fill it with water, so that he might have water always at hand to +wet his sponge with. + +"Now is that all you will want?" asked Forester. + +"Why, yes, I should think so," said Marco. "If I should want any thing +else, I can ask you, you know. You are going to stay here and study +too?" + +"Yes," said Forester; "but your asking me is just what I wish to +avoid. I wish to arrange it so that we shall both have our time to +ourselves, without interruption." + +"But I shall have to ask you questions when I get into difficulty," +said Marco. + +"No," said Forester, "I hope not. I mean to contrive it so that you +can get out of difficulty yourself. Let me see. You will want some +pens. I will get a bunch of quills and make them up into pens for +you." + +"What, a whole bunch?" said Marco. + +"Yes," replied Forester. "I don't wish to have you come to me, when I +am in the midst of a law argument, to get me to make a pen." + +Steel pens were very little used in those days. + +While Forester was making the pens, he said, + +"There are twenty-five quills in a bunch. I shall tie them up, when +they are ready, into two bunches, of about a dozen in each. These you +will put in your desk. When you want a pen, you will draw one out of +the bunches and use it. You must not stop to look them over, to choose +a good one, but you must take any one that comes first to hand, +because, if any one should not be good, the sooner you get it out and +try it, and ascertain that it is not good, the sooner you will get it +out of the way." + +"Well," said Marco, "and what shall I do with the bad ones?" + +"Wipe them clean,--by the way, you must have a good penwiper,--and +then put them together in a particular place in your desk. When you +have thus used one bunch, tie them up and lay the bunch on my desk to +be mended, and then you can go on using the other bunch. This will +give me opportunity to choose a convenient time to mend the first +bunch again. When I have mended them, I will tie them up and lay them +on your desk again. Thus you will always have a supply of pens, and I +shall never be interrupted to mend one. This will be a great deal more +convenient, both for you and for me." + +"Only it will use up a great many more pens," replied Marco. + +"No," said Forester; "not at all. We shall have more in use at one +time, it is true, but the whole bunch may last as long as if we had +only one cut at a time." + +"We shall begin to study," continued Forester, "at nine o'clock, and +leave off at twelve. That will give you half an hour to run about and +play before dinner." + +"And a recess?" said Marco,--"I ought to have a recess." + +"Why, there's a difficulty about a recess," said Forester. "I shall +have it on my mind every day, to tell you when it is time for the +recess, and when it is time to come in." + +"O no," replied Marco, "I can find out when it is time for the recess. +Let it be always at ten o'clock, and I can look at the watch." + +Marco referred to a watch belonging to Forester's father, which was +kept hung up over the mantel-piece in their little study. + +"I think it probable you would find out when it was time for the +recess to _begin_," said Forester, "but you would not be so +careful about the end of it. You would get engaged in play, and would +forget how the time was passing, and I should have to go out and call +you in." + +"Couldn't you have a little bell?" said Marco. + +"But I don't wish to have any thing of that kind to do," said +Forester, "I am going to instruct you half an hour every morning, +beginning at nine o'clock, and I want to have it all so arranged, that +after that, I shall be left entirely to myself, so that I can go +on with my studies, as well as you with yours. If we can do this +successfully, then, when noon comes, I shall feel that I have done my +morning's work well, and you and I can go off in the afternoon on all +sorts of expeditions. But if I have to spend the whole morning in +attending to you, then I must stay at home and attend to my own +studies in the afternoon." + +"Well," said Marco, "I think I can find out when to come in." + +"We'll try it one or two mornings, but I have no idea that you will +succeed. However, we can give up the plan if we find that you stay +out too long. You may have five minutes' recess every day, at eleven +o'clock. On the whole it shall be _ten_ minutes. And this shall +be the plan of your studies for the morning. At nine o'clock, I shall +give you instruction for half an hour. Then you may study arithmetic +for one hour; then write half an hour; then have a recess for ten +minutes: then read for the rest of the last hour. That will bring it +to twelve o'clock." + +"But I can't study arithmetic, alone," said Marco. + +"Yes," said Forester, "I shall show you how, in the first half-hour +when I am giving you my instructions. Now, are you willing really to +try to carry this system into effect, pleasantly and prosperously?" + +"Yes," said Marco, "I'll try." + +"We shall find some inconveniences and troubles at first, I have no +doubt," said Forester; "but if we are patient and persevering, we +shall soon make the system go smoothly." + +Forester then said, that as Marco might forget what he had to do each +hour, he would make a sort of map of the hours, with the name of +the study which he was to pursue marked in each. This he called a +schedule. The schedule, when it was completed, was as follows: + +IX. X. XI. XII. + | Instruction. | Arithmetic. | Writing. | Recess. | Reading. | + +This schedule was drawn neatly on a piece of paper, and fastened with +wafers to the under side of the lid of Marco's desk, so that he could +look at it at any time, by opening his desk. + +It was in the afternoon that this conversation was held, and these +preparations made. The next morning, at nine o'clock, Marco and +Forester went into the little study, and Forester gave him his +instructions. He took his arithmetic, and explained to him how to +perform some examples, under one of the rules. Forester performed one +or two of them himself, explaining very particularly all the steps. +He then rubbed out his work, and directed Marco to perform them by +himself in the same manner. "If you succeed in doing these right," +said he, "you may set yourself some others of the same kind, with +different numbers, and perform those too. If you get into any +difficulty, you must not ask me, but you may set yourself sums in +addition, and spend the rest of the hour in doing them. That, you can +certainly do without help." + +"Yes," said Marco, "I can do that." + +"The next half-hour is for writing," said Forester. "I will set you +some copies." + +So Forester took a writing-book, which he had prepared, and wrote +Marco some copies, one on the top of each page. Marco looked over +him while he wrote. It is very important that a child should see his +teacher write his copies, for thus he will see how the letters should +be formed. Forester wrote four or five copies for Marco, and while he +was writing them he gave him particular instructions about the manner +of holding his pen, and shaping the letters. + +"Now," said Forester, "you can not possibly have occasion to come to +me about your writing; for here are pages enough for you to write upon +for several days, and you have plenty of pens." + +"But I should think you would want to see whether I write it well," +said Marco. + +"I shall examine it carefully to-morrow morning," said Forester. + +"Very well," said Marco; "after the writing will come the recess." + +"Yes," said Forester, "and then the reading." + +"What shall I read?" asked Marco. + +Forester then rose and went to one of the book-shelves, where there +was a set of books, entitled the American Encyclopedia. There were +thirteen octavo volumes in the set. It was rather too high for Marco +to reach it, and so Forester took all the volumes down and placed them +on a lower shelf, not far from the window, in a place where Marco +could get easy access to them. + +"There," said Forester; "there is your library. The American +Encyclopedia is a sort of a dictionary. When your reading hour comes, +you may take down any volume of this Encyclopedia, and turn to any +article you please. Or you may think of any subject that you would +like to read about, as for instance, _boat, cannon, camel, eagle, +trout, horse_, or any other subject, and take down the proper +volume and find the article. You can find it by the letters which are +printed on the backs of the volumes." + +"Let us look now," said Marco, "and see what it says about trouts." + +"No, not now," replied Forester; "when your reading hour comes, you +may read what you choose. Only you must have a piece of paper at hand, +and write upon it the title of every article which you read, and show +it to me the next morning, because I shall wish to know what you have +been reading, and perhaps to question you about it. Now you understand +your work, do you not?" + +"Yes," said Marco; "and what are you going to do?" + +"O, I'm going to study my law-books." + +"Shall you stay here and study?" + +"Yes," replied Forester, "I shall be here most of the time. Sometimes +I shall be called into the other room, perhaps, on business with my +lather; but that need not make any difference with you." + +"Only, then there will be nobody to watch me," said Marco. + +"O, I shall not watch you any, even when I am here. I shall pay no +attention to you at all. I can judge to-morrow morning, when I come to +look at your work and give you new instructions, whether you have been +industrious or not. + +"Even if I accidentally see you doing any thing wrong, I shall not +probably say any thing about it. I shall remember it, and speak to you +about it to-morrow morning, in my half-hour. I shall do everything in +my half-hour." + +Marco felt somewhat relieved, to think that he was not going to be +under a very rigid observation in his studies. + +"I do not expect," said Forester, "that you will do very well for the +first few days. It will take some time to get this system under full +operation. I presume that you will come to me as many as ten times the +first day." + +"O, no," said Marco, "I don't mean to come to you once." + +"You will,--I have no doubt. What shall I say to you if you do? Will +it be a good plan for me to answer your question?" + +"Why, no," said Marco, "I suppose not." + +"And yet, if I refuse to answer, it will not be very pleasant to you. +It will put you out of humor." + +"No," said Marco. + +"I will have one invariable answer to give you," said Forester. "It +shall be this,--Act according to your own judgment. That will be a +little more civil than to take no notice of your question at all, +and yet it will preserve our principle,--that I am to give you no +assistance except in my half-hour. Then, besides, I will keep an +account of the number of questions you ask me, and see if they do not +amount to ten." + +By this time Forester's half-hour was out, and Marco went to his desk. + +"There's one thing," said Marco, "before I begin:--may I have the +window open?" + +"Act according to your own judgment," said Forester, "and there is one +question asked." So Forester made one mark upon a paper which he had +upon the table. + +"But, cousin Forester, it is not right to count that, for I had not +begun." + +Forester made no reply, but began arranging his note-books, as if he +was about commencing his own studies. Marco looked at him a moment, +and then he rose and gently opened the window and began his work. + +[Illustration: MARCO'S DESK.] + +Marco was but little accustomed to solitary study, and, after +performing one of the examples which Forester had given him, he +thought he was tired, and he began to look out the window and to play +with his pencil. He would lay his pencil upon the upper side of +his slate, and let it roll down. As the pencil was not round, but +polygonal in its form, it made a curious clicking sound in rolling +down, which amused Marco, though it disturbed and troubled Forester. +Whatever may have been the nice peculiarities in the delicate +mechanism of Forester's ear, and of the nerves connected with it, +compared with that of Marco's, by which the same sound produced a +sensation of pleasure in one ear, while it gave only pain in the +other, it would require a very profound philosopher to explain. But +the effect was certain. Forester, however, did not speak, but let +Marco roll his pencil down the slate as long as he pleased. + +This was not long, however; Marco soon grew tired of it, and then +began to look out the window. There was a little staple in the window +sill, placed there as a means of fastening the blind. Marco pushed the +point of his pencil into this staple, in order to see if it would go +through. It did go through in an instant, and slipping through his +fingers, it fell out of the window. + +"Dear me! there goes my pencil. My pencil has dropped out of the +window, cousin Forester; shall I go out and get it?" + +"Act according to your own judgment," said Forester. At the same time +he was saying this, he made another mark upon his paper. + +"Why, you ought not to count that, cousin Forester," said Marco, "for +I don't know whether you'd wish me to go and get that pencil, or take +another out of my desk." + +"Act according to your own judgment," replied Forester. + +Marco looked perplexed and troubled. In fact, he was a little +displeased to find that Forester would not answer him. He thought +that, it was an unforeseen emergency, which Forester ought to have +considered an exception to his rule. But he was obliged to decide the +question for himself, and he concluded to go out for his pencil. It +took him some time to find it in the grass, and after he had found it, +he stopped for some time longer, to watch some ants which were passing +in and out, at the entrance to their nest, each one bringing up a +grain of sand in his forceps. When Marco came in, he found that his +hour for arithmetic was so nearly expired, that he should not have +time to finish another sum, if he should begin it; so he put his +arithmetical apparatus away, and took out his writing-book. + +Marco went through the whole forenoon pretty much in the same way. He +spent a large part of his time in looking out of the window and about +the room. He went out at the time for the recess, but he stayed out +twenty minutes instead of ten. He was astonished, when he came in, to +see how rapidly the time had passed. He then took down a volume of the +Encyclopedia, and read until twelve o'clock, and then, leaving the +volume of the Encyclopedia and his writing-book on his desk, he told +Forester that the study hours were over, and went away. + +The next morning, at nine, Forester asked him how he had got along the +day before. Marco had the frankness to admit that he did not get along +very well. + +"Still," said Forester, "I am well satisfied on the whole. You did +very well for a first experiment. In the first place, you did really +make some effort to carry out my plan. You kept the reckoning of the +hours, and changed your studies at the appointed time. You did not +speak to me more than three or four times, and then you acquiesced +pretty good-naturedly in my refusing to help you. To-day you will do +better, I have no doubt, and to-morrow better still. And thus, in the +course of a week, I have great confidence that you will learn to study +for three hours by yourself, to good advantage." + +"Two hours and a half it is," said Marco. + +"Yes," said Forester. + +It resulted as Forester predicted. Marco, finding that Forester was +disposed to be pleased with and to commend his efforts, made greater +efforts every day, and, in the course of a week, he began to be a +very respectable student. In the afternoon he used to ramble about, +sometimes with Forester, and sometimes alone. He was very fond of +fishing, and Forester used to allow him to go to certain parts of the +river, where the water was not deep, alone, trusting to his word that +he would confine himself strictly to the prescribed bounds. + + + + +Chapter VI. + +The Log Canoe. + + + +Every thing went on very prosperously, for a week or two, in the +little study. Marco became more and more attentive to his studies, and +more and more interested in them. He was often getting into little +difficulties, it is true, and giving trouble to his uncle and aunt; +but then he generally seemed sorry afterward for the trouble which he +had thus occasioned, and he bore reproof, and such punishments as his +cousin thought it necessary to inflict, with so much good-humor, that +they all readily forgave him for his faults and misdemeanors. + +One day, however, about a fortnight after he had commenced his +studies, he got led away, through the influence of a peculiar +temptation, into a rather serious act of transgression, which might +have been followed by very grave consequences. The circumstances were +these. He had commenced his studies as usual, after having received +his half-hour's instruction from Forester, and was in the midst of the +process of reducing the fraction 504/756 to its lowest terms, when he +happened to look out of the window and to see two boys climbing over +a garden fence belonging to one of the neighbor's houses, at a little +distance in the rear of his uncle's house. It was a very pleasant +morning, and Marco had the window open; so he could see the boys very +plainly. They stopped on the farther side of the fence which they had +got over, and though they were partially concealed by the fence, yet +Marco could plainly perceive that they were busily employed in doing +something there, though he could not imagine what. He wished very much +to go and see; but he knew that it would be in vain to make request +for permission, and so he contented himself with watching them. + +Just at this moment his uncle opened the door which led into the +little study, and asked Forester if he would step into the office. +Forester did so; and then, after a few minutes, he returned, put up +his books, and said that he had got to go away, and that perhaps he +should not be back till noon. Marco had often been left alone at his +studies for a time, but never for a whole morning before. He knew that +he was to go on with his work just as if Forester had remained. So +Forester bade him good morning, and then went away. + +Marco watched the boys, wondering more and more what they could be +doing. They kept stooping down to the ground, and moving about a +little, as if they were planting seeds. But as it was entirely the +wrong season for any such work, Marco concluded that they must be +hiding something in the ground. "Perhaps," said he to himself, "they +have been stealing some money, and are burying it. I wish I could go +and see." + +If there had been a door leading directly from the study into the +yard, Marco would have left his studies and have gone out at once; but +as it was, he could not get out without going through the office where +his uncle was sitting. At last the thought struck him that he might +jump out the window. He felt some hesitation at taking this step, but +finally he concluded that he would do it, and just go near enough to +see what the boys were hiding, and exactly where they were putting it, +so that he could go afterward and find it without fail. He determined +to return then immediately. + +"I shall not be out longer than five minutes," said he to himself, +"and I will let it go for my recess." + +So he took his cap from the nail where he was accustomed to hang it, +while he was at his studies, and then climbing out the window, feet +foremost, he let himself down gently to the ground. He then crept +slyly along through the yards and gardens, until he got pretty near +the place where the boys were at work. The mystery, however, was +rather increased than diminished by the near view. He could make +nothing of the operations which they were engaged in; and while he was +hesitating whether to go nearer, one of the boys happened to look up +and spied him. Marco had intended to keep himself concealed by a tree, +behind which he had taken his station, but the boy having looked up +suddenly, at a moment when he happened to be off his guard, saw him +before he had time to draw back under the cover he had chosen. + +"Holloa, Marco," said the boy, "come here." + +Marco was astonished at this frank and open invitation. He had +expected that the boys, when they saw him, would have dropped at once +behind the fence to conceal themselves, or that they would have caught +up what he supposed they were burying, and have run away. Their +accosting him in this fearless manner deranged his ideas about their +probable object, and increased his curiosity to know what they were +doing. So he came forth from his concealment and went toward them. +When he reached the spot, the mystery was suddenly dispelled by his +finding out that they were digging worms for bait, to go a-fishing. + +Marco's curiosity was now changed to eager desire. The boys told him +that they were going down to the river to fish for eels, and Marco's +soul was all on fire to accompany them. He had never fished for eels. +He knew the boys very well, and they offered to lend him a hook and +line. But Marco thought that on the whole it would not do. He tried to +persuade them to wait until the afternoon, but they would not consent +to such a postponement of their pleasure. So Marco wished them good +luck, and began to mount the fence again, with the intention of +returning to his studies. + +On looking toward the office, he saw his uncle coming out of the door +in the rear of it, and walking toward the house. Marco immediately +reflected that it would not answer for him to meet his uncle, and he +descended from the fence again on the same side with the boys, until +his uncle should go back. The boys thought he came back because he +was undecided whether to go with them or not, and they renewed their +invitations with redoubled urgency. Marco did not reply, but looked +steadily toward the house. He saw a man standing in the yard with a +small ladder in his hand. A moment afterward, Marco's uncle came out +of the house, and, to Marco's great consternation, he perceived that +he had a saw and a hatchet in his hand, and then he recollected that +his uncle had been intending to prune some trees that forenoon. The +trees were situated in various positions about the yard, so that Marco +could neither go in at the front door of the office, nor climb in at +the window, without being discovered. He did not know what to do. + +In the mean time, the boys urged him to go with them. They did not +know any thing about his studies, and supposed that his hesitation was +only owing to his want of interest in the object of the expedition. +Finally, Marco concluded to go. He supposed that he should not be able +to get back into his study till noon, as he recollected that his +uncle expected to be employed all the forenoon about his pruning. +He thought, therefore, that his chance of detection would not be +increased by staying out an hour or two longer, and so he told the +boys that he would go. + +When they had procured sufficient bait, they went toward the river. +Their way led them not very far from the house, and they were several +times in situations where they were exposed to view, in case Marco's +uncle had looked toward them. Marco, however, contrived to walk by +these places in such a manner as to cover himself as much as possible +from view by the other boys; and besides, he hoped that his uncle was +too much occupied with his pruning, to notice what boys were prowling +about the village. They passed across the street in this manner, and +then went down over the intervales toward the river. Marco felt quite +relieved at seeing that his uncle kept steadily at his work, holding +the ladder for the other man to mount by, or sawing off low branches +himself, without appearing to notice the boys at all. + +The river was circuitous in its course, and its banks were in some +places steep, and in others low and sandy. The water was generally +shallow, but in some places it was deep,--especially under the high +banks. In many places there were willows and elms, overhanging the +water. It was in one of these places that the boys were going to fish +for eels. It was a point where the river took a sudden turn, forming a +sort of angle in the stream, where the water was very dark and deep. +The bank was high at that place, and it was covered with trees and +bushes. Some of these trees had been undermined, and their roots and +branches were floating in the water. The boys scrambled down to the +brink and made ready for fishing. They cut slender poles in the +bushes, for fishing-poles. There was a trunk of a tree lying along +the shore, extending obliquely out a little way over the water, which +furnished them a convenient footing. They stood or sat upon it, baited +their hooks, and threw them over into the water. They followed the +bait with their eyes as it sunk slowly down into the dark depths, +among the logs, and roots, and trunks of trees, which were lying +submerged in the water. + +The boys remained here an hour, but they caught no eels. Either there +were none there, or for some reason or other they chose not to bite. +They had some talk about going to another place, but before they +decided upon that plan, Marco's attention was arrested by the sight of +what appeared to be a large log floating down the river. He pointed it +out to the other boys, and, on closer examination, they saw that it +was an old canoe, of the kind that are formed by hollowing out a log. +It was not of very large size and it appeared to be rather old and +decayed. Still, the boys wanted to get it very much. They gathered in +their lines, and ran along the bank, keeping pace with the boat as it +floated down. + +[Illustration: BOAT ADRIFT.] + +They very soon came to a reach of the river,--that is, to a length +of it between one bend and another, where the water was swift and +shallow. So the two boys who had been fishing with Marco threw off +their shoes, and pulled up their trowsers, and ran down the bank, and +into the river. The boat was far out in the stream, and they had to +wade some distance before they came to it. Besides, as the boat was +floating down all the time, while they were wading across, it got some +distance down the stream before they could reach it. They, however, +succeeded in getting it at last, and, with much floundering in the +water and many shouts of laughter, they brought it over to Marco. + +Marco was much pleased with the prize. It was in better condition than +they had expected to find it. There was, indeed, a piece knocked out +at one end, near the upper edge, but they found that it would support +all three of the boys, if they sat in it carefully, and with their +weight principally at the other end. For want of oars or paddles they +cut poles on the banks, thinking that they could push the boat along, +by planting the poles against the bottom, as the water was not deep. +They drew the boat up to the shore, and poured out some water which +had got into her, and then they all carefully embarked, intending to +make a little voyage. + +It happened that just below the place to which the boat had drifted +before they overtook it, the water became somewhat deeper, and of +course more smooth and still, so that it afforded a favorable place +for navigating such a boat. In fact, the character of the stream, +throughout its whole course for several miles, was to present a +constant succession of changes, from deep and almost still water, to +shallow and rapid currents, rippling over beds of sand and gravel. +One of these rapids, or rips, as they were called, the boys had just +passed; it being in one of them, though one more broad and less rapid +than many of the others, that they had pursued and overtaken the +boat. In the smooth and still water below, therefore, they had a very +favorable opportunity to try their boat, for the water, though not so +shallow as it was above, was still not so deep as to prevent their +propelling their boat, by pushing their poles against the bottom. It +required some care to preserve their equilibrium, but then the water +was not deep, and they knew, therefore, that there was no danger of +being drowned if they should upset. + +Things went on very prosperously, until, after a few minutes, the boys +suddenly found themselves drifting into deeper water. Their poles +would scarcely touch the bottom. Marco, who was not much accustomed to +this kind of navigation, was at first somewhat alarmed, but the other +boys told him to keep quiet, and they would soon drift into shallow +water again. They accordingly drew in their poles, and began to look +over the edge of the boat into the water, to see if they could see +any eels. They saw no eels, but the water soon began to grow shallow +again, and so the boys, feeling that they were in no danger, remained +quietly in their places, looking idly into the water, talking about +the various objects which they saw upon the bottom. + +After some minutes spent in this manner, one of the boys looked down +the stream, and saw that the boat was gradually approaching another of +the rapids. + +"Come, boys," said he, "we must go to work, or we shall be down over +the rips." + +So the boys all took their poles and began to push the boat up the +stream; but they found it harder than they had expected. In fact, the +boat had drifted down nearer to the rapids than they ought to have +allowed it to go. The water was running quite swiftly where they were, +and they soon found that all their efforts were not sufficient to stem +the current. The boat was carried round and round in every direction, +excepting up the stream. In fact the current was rapidly acquiring the +entire mastery over them, and hurrying them down to a point where the +water poured on in a furious torrent through a long narrow passage +between beds of stone and gravel. + +"Pull, boys, pull!" said Marco; "we shall go down over the rips in +spite of every thing." + +The boys did pull, but they could effect nothing. The water was +sweeping them along with great rapidity, notwithstanding all their +struggles. Finally, when they found that they could not make head +against it, so as to go up the stream, they concluded to pull for the +shore. They were not in any great fear, for the river was very narrow +and not more than knee deep in the rapids, so that there was no real +danger of any calamity greater than getting well wet. They seemed to +be also in a fair way to escape this, for they found that they could +make some progress in getting their boat toward the shore. But, just +as they began to think their object was about to be accomplished, they +were arrested by a sudden mishap. It happened that there was a little +snag in the river, nearly in the direction in which they were going. +It was the end of a small log, which rose almost to the surface of the +water. The greater part of the log was firmly imbedded in the sand, +but there was a small portion of it which projected so far as barely +to be submerged. The boys did not notice this, and, in their eagerness +to run the boat ashore, it happened that they were running it across +the current, just above this snag. But as the current was sweeping +them down the stream at the same time that they were pushing +themselves across it, it carried the boat with great force against +this snag. The bottom of the boat was confined by it, while the force +of the current, still pressing upon the side, overset it in a moment, +and threw all the boys out into the water. + +The boys scrambled out without much difficulty, and stood upon the +gravelly beach. They saw at the same moment a man on the bank of the +river above, who looked as if he was about to run to their aid; but +when he saw that they were safe, he turned around immediately and +disappeared. An instant afterward, Marco, finding that his cap was not +upon his head, looked around for it, and, to his dismay, he saw it +floating swiftly away down the rapids. He ran into the water and +seized the boat, which was then beginning also to go away. He called +upon the boys to help him pull it up and pour the water out. He then +lanched it again with all speed, seized one of the poles, clambered +into it, and pushed off into the swiftest part of the current, and +away he went after his cap. + +[Illustration: CAP GONE.] + +He resorted to this desperate measure, because he was greatly alarmed +at the idea of going home without his cap. It would have certainly +insured his detection, and, as he supposed, a double punishment. He +now was as eager to go down the rapids as he had before been to escape +them. His only care was to keep his boat head down, so that if he +should encounter any snag or rock he might not be thrown broadside on. +He kept a good lookout too ahead. The boat shot through the water like +an arrow, and was soon clear of the rapids in the comparatively still +water below. + +Marco contrived to paddle with his pole, so as to overtake the cap and +recover it. Then he went to the shore and landed. He drew up the +boat as high as he could, and went back to seek the other boys. He +concluded that it was time to go home. His conscience now began to +reproach him with the wrong which he had been doing. His promised +pleasure had failed. His clothes were wet and uncomfortable. His mind +was anxious and unhappy. With a heavy heart he began to retrace his +steps, sure of detection when he reached home, and of punishment. He +did not, however, dread the punishment so much as the just displeasure +which his cousin would manifest, and the evidence of the pain which he +knew his cousin would suffer, when he came to learn how his pupil had +betrayed the confidence which had been reposed in him. Before he set +out for home, however, he took off such of his clothes as were most +wet, and wrung out the water as well as he could, and then put them on +again. + +When he drew near to the house, he expected to see his uncle still at +work, but he was not there. Marco reconnoitered the place carefully, +and then went into the office. His uncle was not in the office. He +passed through into the study. He was afraid that Forester would be +there, but, to his surprise and joy, he was not, and there was no sign +that he had been there since the morning. Marco looked at the watch, +and found that it was only about half-past eleven. So he took down +a volume of the Encyclopedia and began to read. He read the article +_canoe_, and he found some information about the bark canoes made +by Indians, but nothing about log canoes. In about fifteen minutes he +heard the office door open, and his cousin Forester came in. Forester +walked into the study, but said nothing to Marco. Marco kept at his +work, without speaking to his cousin. He began to hope that he might +yet escape. His only fear now was lest his wet clothes should be +observed. He put his hand down many times to his knees, to ascertain +how fast they were drying. The clothes that he wore were of woolen, +and of a dark color, so that they did not show the wet very +distinctly, and, besides, the sun and the air were warm that day, and +the clothes had dried fast. In a word, when twelve o'clock arrived and +Marco put his books away, nobody would have observed that his clothes +had been wet. He ran about in the open air until dinner-time, and +though, when he went in to dinner, he felt oppressed with a sense of +guilt and of self-condemnation, he was satisfied that no one suspected +him. Marco thought that he had had a very lucky escape. + + + + +Chapter VII. + +A Dilemma. + + + +Though Marco's first feeling was that of relief, to find that he had +got back from his truancy without detection, he felt, after all, ill +at ease. He kept out of sight till the dinner-bell rang, and then he +was almost afraid to go in, for fear that, by some accident or other, +his uncle might have noticed his absence, and might ask him something +about it. He was usually much interested at dinner-time in talking +with Forester about plans for the afternoon; but now he felt guilty +and afraid, and he was disinclined to look his uncle or his cousin in +the face, or to speak a word. + +And yet it was not punishment that Marco was afraid of. There were +very few boys who could bear punishment of any kind with more +fortitude than he, or to whom the idea of punishment gave less +concern. It was the detection itself, rather than what was to come +after it, that he feared. There is something in the very act of being +detected and exposed in guilt, which the heart instinctively shrinks +from; and many a boy would willingly bear in secret twice the pain +which the punishment of an offense would bring, rather than have his +commission of the offense discovered and made known. + +There was, however, no indication, at the dinner table, that Marco's +cousin or uncle suspected him of any wrong. They talked of various +subjects in their usual manner. Forester had arranged it with Marco, +to go that afternoon down to the mill-pond, to examine the boat, in +order to see whether they could have it fitted with oars, and to +make arrangements to that effect. Marco now hoped that Forester had +forgotten this plan, and would not go. Though he had been very much +interested in the plan the day before, he now felt disinclined to go. +He wished to be alone, or at least out of sight of Forester. He felt +as if he had a terrible secret on his mind, and that there was great +danger that something or other would occur to discover it. So he hoped +that Forester would have forgotten the appointment, and that it would +be thus postponed to some future time. + +But Forester had not forgotten it; and after dinner, he asked Marco +how soon he should be ready to go. Marco said that he should be ready +at any time; and in about half an hour they set out. They walked +together to the mill-pond. Forester said that the boat belonged to +a man who worked in the mills, but he lived a little distance above +them. His house was near the water, in a little valley. The water of +the pond extended up into this valley, forming a sort of bay. + +[Illustration: THE MILLMAN'S HOUSE.] + +A road led to the house, but did not go beyond it. The house was +small, but it had pleasant little yards and gardens about it, and +various pens and coops for different sorts of animals. The man who +lived there was famous for keeping a great many animals. He had pigs, +and cows, and Malta cats, and two dogs,--one of them a water dog,--and +ducks and geese,--among the latter, two wild geese,--and hens and +rabbits; and there were two gray squirrels, hanging up in a cage by +the side of the front door. Forester told Marco about these animals as +they walked along. + +Marco was very fond of animals, and he began to anticipate great +pleasure in seeing these. When they came near the house, he ran +forward to look at the wild geese. The water dog ran to meet Forester. +He knew Forester, having often seen him there before. Forester and +Marco rambled about the yards, looking at the animals for some time, +and then went to the water's edge, which was very near the house. The +ducks and geese were swimming in the water. Forester called the dog +there, and Marco amused himself for some time in throwing sticks into +the water, and ordering the dog, whose name was Nelson, to plunge in +and go and bring them back. The boat was there too, fastened by a rope +to a post in the bank. At length, after Marco had satisfied himself +with these amusements, he said, + +"Well, cousin Forester, here is the boat." + +"Yes," said Forester, "but the man don't seem to be at home. I presume +he's at the mill." + +"And what shall we do in that case?" asked Marco. + +"Why, I will go into the house first, and ascertain the fact, and get +a paddle." + +So Forester went into the house, and soon afterward returned, bringing +with him a paddle. He said that the man was at the mill, but that +his wife said that they might have the boat to go and find him. "I +thought," said Forester, "that you would rather go in the boat than +walk." + +"Yes," said Marco, "I should." + +"Besides," continued Forester, "I can teach you to paddle." + +Marco took the paddle from Forester's hand. He had never seen one +before. He said that they always used oars, not paddles, in New York +harbor. A paddle is shaped very differently from an oar. It is much +shorter and lighter,--though the blade is broader. A paddle is worked, +too, differently from an oar. An oar acts as a lever against the side +of the boat,--the middle of it resting in a small notch called a +row-lock, or between two wooden pins. But a paddle is held in the +hands entirely. + +"What do they have paddles for in this country?" said Marco. "Oars are +better." + +"You are not competent to decide that question," replied Forester. + +"Why not?" said Marco; "I have rowed boats many a time." + +"Yes, but you have never paddled much. You have used oars, but not +paddles, and so you can not compare them." + +"Well," said Marco, "I mean to try this paddle now, and then I can +tell." + +Marco had seen the boys who were with him in the boat that morning, +using their poles as paddles, and he had used one of the poles in that +manner himself; and he was just upon the point of saying something +upon the subject, when suddenly he recollected that it would betray +him. In fact, Marco found that having such a secret as this upon his +mind, was a source of great embarrassment and constraint, as he more +than once came very near making some allusion inadvertently, which +would have resulted in his exposure. While speaking of boats, and +oars, and paddles, and such subjects, he had to be continually upon +his guard and to watch all his words. + +[Illustration: PADDLING] + +They got into the boat and pushed out upon the water. Forester taught +Marco how to use the paddle. He gave him his seat in the stern of the +boat, and directed him to grasp the lower end of the handle with the +other hand. Then, by dipping the blade in the water and pushing the +water back, the boat was propelled forward. He also explained to him +how, by turning the blade of the paddle, one way or the other, he +could give the bow of the boat an impulse toward the right or toward +the left. + +"Thus you see," said Forester, "with a paddle you can steer, but with +an oar you can not." + +"With two oars I can," said Marco. + +"Yes." replied Forester. "You must have two oars to guide a boat, but +you can do it with one paddle. Therefore, if you can have but one, a +paddle is better than an oar. There is another advantage in a paddle; +that is, in using it, your face looks the way that you are going." + +"Yes," rejoined Marco, "that is a great advantage." + +"In rowing, you must sit with your back to the bow of the boat, and +look over your shoulder to see where you are going." + +"Yes," said Marco, "unless you have a steersman." + +"True," replied Forester. "When you have several men to row, and one +to steer, you get along very well with oars, but in case of only one +man, there is an advantage in a paddle. There is still another point +to be considered,--a paddle is better for a narrow boat and oars for +wide ones." + +"Why so?" asked Marco. + +"Because," said Forester, "a certain width is required in a boat in +order to work oars well. The oarsman must sit upon the seat, and +extend the oar off upon one side of the boat, and there must be a +certain distance between the part which he takes hold of, and the +row-lock, in order to work to advantage. But it is no matter how +narrow the boat is if he has a paddle, for he holds it perpendicularly +over the side." + +"So paddles are better," said Marco, "for one kind of boat, and oars +for another." + +"Yes," replied Forester, "and paddles are better for one kind of +_navigation_, and oars for another. Oars require greater breadth +of water to work in. In a narrow, crooked stream flowing among logs +and rocks, oars would not answer at all. But with a paddle a man can +worm a boat through anywhere." + +"That is, if it is only wide enough for the boat to go," said Marco. + +"Of course," replied Forester. "The paddle itself requires no +additional space. But oars extend so far laterally"-- + +"Laterally?" asked Marco. + +"Yes," rejoined Forester; "that is, on each side. Oars extend so far +on each side, that they require a great breadth of water. If you +attempt to go through a narrow place, the oars would strike." + +"Why, no," said Marco. "You can give orders to trail oars." + +"I don't know any thing about that," said Forester. + +"That's a beautiful manoeuver," said Marco, "only it is hard to do. +You see, you order them to give way hearty, so as to get a good +headway, till just as you get to the narrow place, and then +_trail_ is the word. Then the oarsmen all whip their oars out of +the row-locks in an instant, and let 'em trail alongside under the +boat's counters, and she shoots through the narrow place like a bird." + +Marco became very enthusiastic in describing this manoeuver, but +Forester did not get a very clear idea of it, after all. + +"You'll teach it to us," said Forester, "when we get our oars and +a good boat's crew of boys. At any rate, a boat can be paddled +continuously through a narrow space, better than it can be rowed. +Therefore, paddles are generally used on rivers, where there are many +narrow places to pass through. Indians and savages almost always use +paddles, for they navigate many intricate and narrow passages of +water." + +By this time they began to draw near the mill. They landed near some +great logs which were floating in the water, ready to be drawn up into +the mill and sawed. They went up the bank and thence into the mill. +The man who owned the boat, was tending the mill. When he wanted a +log, he would take the end of a long chain down a sloping plane of +planks which led to the water, and fasten it to a log. The other end +of the chain was fastened round an axle in the mill, and when all was +ready, the man would set the axle in motion by the machinery, and that +would draw the log up. When the log was in the mill, the man would +roll it over into its place, on a long platform of timber, where it +was to be sawed. Then he would set the saw machinery in motion, and +the platform would begin to move forward, and the saw at the same time +to go up and down, sawing the log as it advanced. Thus it would saw +it through, from end to end, and then, by reversing the motion of the +machinery, the log was carried back again. The man would then move it +a little to one side, just far enough for the thickness of the board +which he wished to make, and then begin to saw again. He moved the log +by means of an iron bar with a sharp point, which he struck into the +end of the log, and thus pried it over, one end at a time. When the +log was placed in its new position, the machinery was set in motion +again, and the log was sawed through in another place, from end to +end, parallel to the first sawing, leaving the width of a board +between. This process was continued until the log was sawed entirely +into boards, except a piece in the middle, which it was necessary to +leave of double thickness, and this answered for a plank. + +Marco was much interested in watching this process, and when the +sawing of this log was completed, and another log drawn up into its +place, Forester introduced the subject of the boat. He told the man +what he wished to do, namely, to have some row-locks or thole-pins +made along the sides of the boat, and some oars to row it with. It +would also be necessary to have seats, or thwarts, as they are called, +placed in such a manner that there should be one just before each +row-lock. These seats were for the oarsmen to sit upon, in rowing. The +man told Forester that he might do any thing he pleased with the boat. +He was sure that Forester would do it no injury. Forester asked him +who would be a good man to do the work, and the man recommended to him +a wagon-maker who had a shop very near the mill. + +They went to the wagon-maker and explained to him what they wanted. +The wagon-maker readily undertook the work. They all went down to the +boat together, to plan the seats and the places for the thole-pins. +They concluded to have three pairs on each side. This would require +six oars. These oars the wagon-maker promised to make, and to have all +the work done by the beginning of the next week. They also concluded +to have the boat taken out of the water and thoroughly calked again, +and her bottom _payed_ over with pitch, as she was not perfectly +tight. This being all arranged, Forester and Marco began to walk +toward home. + +"It seems to me strange to get a wagon-maker to work on a boat," said +Marco. + +"In New York, I suppose you would go to a boat-builder," said +Forester. + +"Yes," replied Marco, "to be sure." + +"There are no boat-builders here," rejoined Forester. "In fact, there +are very few trades represented here, and workmen are willing to do +any kind of jobs that they can." + +As only a small part of the afternoon was yet passed away, Marco asked +Forester if he might go down to the river a-fishing. "I can keep +within my bounds, you know," said he. + +"Yes," said Forester, "you _can_ keep within your bounds." + +"And I will," said Marco. "Don't you suppose I will?" + +"Why, you can tell better than I can about that," said Forester. +"You have been here now some weeks, and I have treated you with +considerable trust and confidence,--have I not?" + +"Why, yes," said Marco. + +"I have given you leave to go a-fishing, trusting to your fidelity +in keeping within your bounds. I have left you alone in your study, +several times in the forenoons. I have let you go up on the mountains +with other boys, and lent you my watch, so that you might know when +it was time to come back. Now you can tell better than I, whether you +have been faithful to all of these trusts." + +Marco did not answer. He did not know what to say. He walked along in +silence. + +"I will leave it with you to decide," said Forester. "Here we are just +home; now you may go into the study and reflect a few moments upon the +subject. Call to mind all the cases in which I have treated you with +trust and confidence, and consider whether you have always been +faithful to the trust. If, on reflection, you think that you have, you +may take your fishing-line and go a-fishing. If you feel conscious +that you have at any time betrayed my confidence, you must not go this +afternoon. You may go out to play wherever you please about the house +and garden, but you must not go a-fishing. If you are in doubt whether +you have betrayed my confidence or not, and wish to ask my opinion +about some particular case which comes up to your mind, you may remain +in the study till I come in, and ask me, and I will tell you. I shall +be in, in a few minutes." + +There was a pause here. Marco looked very serious, and walked along in +silence. Such a turn to the conversation was entirely unexpected to +him, and he did not know what to say. + +"It is possible," continued Forester, "that you may be conscious that +you have clearly been guilty of betraying the confidence which I have +placed in you in some instance which I know nothing of, or which you +suppose I know nothing of, and you may wish to confess it to me. If +you have been guilty of any such act, the best thing that you can do +is to confess it to me at once; and if you wish to do it, you may wait +till I come, for that purpose. So you may wait till I come either to +ask me a question, or to confess a fault. If you do not wish to do +either, you may go out without waiting for me; but you must not go +a-fishing unless you can truly say that you have been faithful and +honest, whenever I have trusted you before." + +So saying, Forester parted from Marco and went into the house. Marco +slowly walked into the office, and through it into the little study. +He was greatly perplexed to know what to make of this address. "Can +it be," thought he, "that he knows that I went away this morning? How +could he have found it out? Or did he say that, only to find out now +whether I have been honest or not heretofore?" + +On mature reflection, Marco concluded that Forester did not probably +know any thing about his having gone away. He thought that what he had +just said was only a part of Forester's general plan of managing +his case, and that it did not imply that Forester entertained any +particular suspicions. Marco thought that he might therefore safely go +a-fishing that afternoon if he was disposed; but we must do him the +justice to say, that he did not entertain the idea of doing it a +moment. He determined that he would not go. But as he was not prepared +to confess his fault, and as he had no question to ask, he determined +to go and play about the garden. He thought a little of waiting till +his cousin came in, and then honestly making a confession; but he +could not quite conclude upon this, and so he determined to go and +think more of it. Besides, he concluded that if he were going to make +a confession at all, he should rather do it that evening when he went +to bed; for Forester always came up to his room after he went to bed, +to have a little friendly and serious conversation with him, and to +bid him good night. + +He accordingly went out before Forester came in. He spent the +afternoon in a miserable state of mind. He could not divest himself of +the feeling of anxiety, that in some way or other, Forester had found +out his transgression. He rather wondered, that, if it were true that +Forester had found it out, he had not said something to him directly +about it,--but then he knew it was Forester's way not always to make +known, at once, all that he knew in such cases. But then he thought, +again, that Forester _could_ not know any thing about it. There +was no way for him to have known it. He was away all the morning, and +did not come home until after Marco got back. So he concluded that +Forester did not know; but he began to wish that he did. He could not +bear to think of telling him, but he wished that he knew. The burden +of such a secret became intolerable to him. He strolled about the +yards and garden, not knowing what to do with himself, and growing all +the time more and more anxious and unhappy. He was in a very serious +dilemma. + +Marco cast his eyes occasionally toward the office, expecting to see +Forester come out. He thought Forester would want to know whether he +went a-fishing or not. But he did not come. Marco spent some time in +the garden with James, who was at work there raking over the ground, +and gathering in such things as might be hurt by any sudden frost. +Marco worked with him for some time, and endeavored to converse with +him, but he did not find him very communicative, and at last he went +into the house and sat on the sofa in the parlor, reading, until +supper time. + +Marco fully expected that Forester would ask him at supper time +whether he had been a-fishing or not; but he said nothing about it. +Forester told his father and mother about their plan for a boat, and +gave them a full account of their visit to the mill. His mother seemed +quite interested in the account, and told Marco, that, after he got +his crew well trained, she should hope that he would invite her on an +excursion in the boat. + +"Yes," said Marco, "we will. We must have a seat, cousin Forester, for +passengers and visitors, in the stern sheets." + +"The stern sheets?" said Forester, "what do you mean by the stern +sheets?" + +"Why, it is aft," said Marco, "between the coxswain's place and the +stroke-oarsman." + +"You'll have to show us," said his aunt, "when we come to see the +boat." + +This kind of conversation somewhat relieved Marco's mind,--but still +he was ill at ease, and he determined to tell Forester the whole story +at bedtime, if he could only summon up courage to begin. + + + + +Chapter VIII. + +A Confession. + + + +In the room where Marco slept, there was a large, stuffed arm-chair, +which was commonly called the easy chair; it was one that was seldom +used by the family, except in sickness. It stood in a corner of the +room not far from the head of Marco's bed. Forester used to sit in +this chair while he remained conversing with Marco, when he came up to +take his light. + +When Forester had taken his seat in the great chair this evening, +according to his usual custom, he began his conversation by saying. + +"Well, Marco, have you been helping James in the garden this +afternoon?" + +"Why, no," said Marco, "I did not help him much,--I don't like James +very well." + +"Why not?" asked Forester. + +"Why, I don't think he is very accommodating," replied Marco. + +"What has he done to-day, which is unaccommodating?" asked Forester. + +"He would not lend me his knife. I wanted to borrow his knife to cut +me a cane from some apple-tree trimmings, and he would not let me have +it." + +"Haven't you got a knife of your own?" asked Forester. + +"Yes," said Marco, "but mine won't open." + +"Won't open?" repeated Forester. "What's the cause of that?" + +"Why, I suppose because the joint is rusty," replied Marco. + +"How came it rusty?" asked Forester. + +"Why, you see I laid it down one day on a stone, where I was at work +with it, and left it there, and there happened to come a rain in the +night and rusted it. I did not know where it was, and so I didn't find +it for a good many days." + +"Then, I presume," said Forester, "that James supposed that you would +leave his knife out in the same way and spoil it." + +"No," replied Marco, "that was not the reason." + +"You are sure that you asked him for it distinctly, and he refused?" + +"Yes," said Marco. + +Here there was a moment's pause. Marco thought that his cousin +Forester was considering what should be done to James, for being so +unaccommodating. He did not know but that he would report him to his +father and have him turned away; though Marco did not really wish to +have him turned away. + +But Forester said, after reflecting a moment, "That makes me think of +a story I have got here; listen and hear it." + +[Illustration: MARCO'S ROOM.] + +So Forester took out his pocket-book and opened it, and then appeared +to be turning over the leaves, for a moment, to find a place. Then he +began to read, or to appear to read, as follows: + +Once there was a little girl named Anne. She came to her mother one +day, as she was sitting in the parlor, and began to complain bitterly +of her sister Mary. Her sister Mary was older than she was, and had a +doll. Anne complained that Mary would not lend her her doll. + +"Are you sure that she refused to lend you her doll?" asked her +mother. + +"Yes, mother, I am _sure_ she did," replied Anne. + +"Perhaps she is playing with it herself," said her mother. + +"No," replied Anne, "she is ironing in the kitchen." + +"I think you must be mistaken," said her mother. "Go and ask her +again. Don't tell her I sent you, but ask her yourself, whether she +really meant that she was not willing to lend you her doll." + +So Anne ran off to put the question to Mary again; presently she +returned with the same answer. "Mary," she said, "would not lend it to +her." + +"I am very sorry to hear it," said her mother, "for now I suppose I +shall have to punish you." + +"To punish _her_, you mean," said Anne. + +"No," said her mother, "to punish you. I don't suppose _she_ is +to blame." + +"Why, mother--how can _I_ be to blame, for her not being willing +to lend me her doll?" + +"You _are_, I've no doubt," said her mother. "Mary is a +good-natured, accommodating girl,--always ready to do kindnesses, and +if she has any unwillingness to lend any thing to you, it must be that +you have created it yourself, by some misconduct. So that it will +prove, no doubt, that you are the one to be punished." + +Here Anne began to hang her head and look a little ashamed. Her +mother's supposition proved to be correct, for, on inquiring, it +appeared that Mary had lent her doll to Anne a few days before, and +that when she wanted it again, Anne was unwilling to give it to her, +and when Mary insisted on her bringing it to her, she became angry and +threw the doll out the window. + +"I never heard that story before, cousin Forester," said Marco. "And I +did not know that you had stories in your pocket-book." + +Forester laughed and put up his pocket-book. + +"I don't believe there is any story there," said Marco. "You made it +up for me, I verily believe." + +"Yes," said Forester, "I did. Don't it fit your case pretty well?" + +"Why, I don't know," said Marco. "I don't see why he could not let me +have his knife." + +"Suppose _I_ had asked him for his knife; don't you suppose he +would have lent it to me?" + +"Yes," said Marco, "I've no doubt he would; he would do any thing for +_you_, of course, because you pay him--or uncle pays him, which +is the same thing." + +"I don't think that that is the reason altogether," replied Forester. +"There was the man at the mill to-day, who said that I might take his +boat and do any thing I chose to do with it." + +"Yes," said Marco, "I noticed that." + +"And perhaps you thought it was very much to his credit that he did +so." + +"Yes," said Marco. + +"But the fact is," rejoined Forester, "as I think, it was more to +my credit than his; because I have had his boat a great many times +heretofore, and his having so much confidence in me now, shows how I +have acted with his property before. I have always taken a great deal +of pains to use it carefully, to bring it back to its place safely, to +get the water out, if there was any in it, and leave every thing in +order. I have done this, not only because it is just and right that I +should not make him suffer inconvenience on account of his doing me a +favor, but as a matter of policy." + +"What do you mean by a matter of policy?" asked Marco. + +"Why, regard to my own interest. If I did not do so, I should soon +make people unwilling to lend me their things. And I think there must +be some good reason why James is not willing to lend you his knife." + +"Why, he says," answered Marco, "that I don't bring back his things." + +"Ah!" rejoined Forester, "that's it. I thought there must be some such +reason as that. You have lost your character with James, and I advise +you to acquire a new one as soon as you can. Besides, you have done +him injustice this evening. You represented him as refusing you his +knife because he was unaccommodating and selfish, whereas it was +only proper regard to the safety of his property. What you said was +calculated to make an unfavorable impression on my mind against him, +and one which would have been unjust." + +Marco perceived that it was so, and was silent. + +"I am sorry that your knife is rusty," resumed Forester. "Perhaps I +can get it open for you." + +"How?" asked Marco. + +"Why, I believe the best way is to soak the joint in oil. The oil will +insinuate itself into the joint, and then we can get hold of the blade +with a pair of nippers, or something of the kind, and open it; and +then, by working it to and fro a few times, the rust will work out, +and the knife be as good as it was before. If it is very rusty indeed, +this plan will not answer." + +"What must be done in that case?" asked Marco. + +"The only way then is to carry it to some kind of smith and get him to +punch out the rivet. Then we can take the blade out entirely. By this +means we can clean it of its rust, and then put it in again with a new +rivet. If you will give me your knife to-morrow, I will try to put it +in order for you again, in one or the other of these ways. + +"And now," continued Forester, after a short pause, "it is time for me +to go down, unless you have something which you wish to say." + +Although it was not unusual for Forester to close his evening +conversation in this manner, Marco's attention was particularly +arrested by the excellent opportunity which this remark afforded him +to make his confession. He really wished to make it,--but he did not +know how to begin. He wished that his cousin would ask him something +about it, or introduce the subject in some way or other, but Forester +was silent. Presently he rose, came to Marco's bedside, and asked him +if he was warm enough,--for the nights at this season of the year were +beginning to be cool. + +"Yes," said Marco, "I'm very comfortable." + +"Well, then, good night." So Forester took the lamp and walked slowly +toward the door. + +"Cousin Forester," said Marco. + +"What?" said Forester. + +"Don't go just yet." + +Forester turned back and advanced to the foot of the bed. There was a +high foot-board at the foot of the bed, and Forester leaned upon it +with the lamp in his hand. + +"Is there any thing that you want to say to me?" + +Marco was silent. He looked distressed and embarrassed, and moved his +head restlessly on his pillow. + +"There's something wrong, isn't there, Marco," said Forester, "that +you are thinking whether to confess to me or not? If there is, do just +as you choose about it. I like to have you confess what you have done +that is wrong, but then, if you do it at all, it must be done of your +own accord." + +"Well," said Marco, "I want to tell you about my going away to play +this forenoon." + +"How long were you gone?" asked Forester. + +"Pretty much all the forenoon," replied Marco. + +"Well," said Forester, "I am very glad you concluded to confess it of +your own accord, but I know all about it." + +Marco started up in his bed and looked his cousin in the face, and +said, + +"Why, cousin Forester, how did you know?" + +"To prove to you that I really did know, I will tell you what you did. +You got out of the window soon after I went away, and went over into +Mr. Eldon's garden, where George Eldon and Samuel Warner were digging +worms for bait. Then you went with them down to the river. You hid +behind them when you passed in sight of the house, for fear that +father would see you, as he was out in the yard, pruning trees. +Then you went down to the river and sat on a log under some bushes, +fishing. After a while you spied an old log canoe, drifting down the +river, and the other boys waded out and got it. Then you all got into +it and paddled about a while, and afterward got carried over the rips +and upset in the water. Your cap drifted down the stream, and you +went after it in the canoe and got it. After that, you took off your +stockings and wrung out the water from them, and then came home. You +got into the study only about a quarter of an hour before I came." + +Marco listened to this minute account of his adventures with eager +interest, wondering how his cousin could have obtained so early and +such complete information. After Forester had concluded, he paused a +moment and breathed a long sigh. Then he laid his head down upon his +pillow again, saying, + +"Well, I don't see how you found it out; and I am sorry that you did, +for I meant to have told you all about it myself." + +Marco seemed really disappointed at having lost the opportunity to +make his full confession, but Forester told him that he considered +that he _had_ made full confession. "You made up your mind to +do it," said he, "and you did begin, and it was the beginning which +required all the effort. I only refrained from asking you about the +details, from a wish to show you that I really knew all about it." + +"I don't see how you found it out," said Marco. "I suppose it must +have been that the boys told you." + +"No," replied Forester; "I have not seen either of the boys, or heard +any thing from them, directly or indirectly." + +"Then you must have watched me yourself," said Marco, "instead of +going away." + +"Do you think," said Forester, "that I would pretend that I was going +away, and then just go out a little way and lie in wait to watch you? + +"Why, no,"--said Marco,--"I don't really suppose that you would." + +"No," said Forester, "I really went away nut of town. I went to visit +a sick man and help him make his will, and I did not return until just +before you saw me." + +"Then I don't see how you knew," said Marco. + +"It is of very little consequence to you to know that," said Forester, +"but I want to ask you a little more about the affair. Are you willing +to answer any question that I may ask?" + +Marco said that he was, and Forester asked him about the circumstances +which led him to go away. Marco explained to him how he saw the boys, +and what he thought that they were doing, and what induced him to go +and see them, and how he was prevented from coming back as he had +intended. There was an air of openness and honesty in the manner in +which Marco related these facts, which convinced Forester that he was +telling the truth. + +Forester was glad to find that it was not a deliberate and +preconcerted plan, between Marco and the other boys, to go off on this +expedition; for, bad as it was for Marco to allow himself to be drawn +away by such temptations, it would have been worse, or rather it would +have indicated a worse state of character, if he had deliberately +planned such a truancy. + +"Well," said Forester, as he was about to close the conversation, "I +am very glad that you concluded to confess your fault. I am very glad, +too, that you did not go a-fishing this afternoon under the sort of +permission which I gave you. I infer from these two things that you +wish to be cured of these faults, and to become a boy of firm moral +principle. Now it is a rule with me, generally, not to punish a boy +for what he confesses of his own accord. Still, I think it probable +it would be better for you to have some punishment for this. It would +help to make a strong impression upon your mind, and make it much more +easy for you to resist such temptations in time to come. But you +may decide this question yourself. If you choose to submit to a +punishment, and will tell me so to-morrow morning, I will think of +some suitable one for you. If you do not say any thing to me about it, +I shall not punish you." So saying, Forester bade Marco good night. + +The next morning, Marco met Forester on the stairs, as he was coming +down to breakfast, and told him that he thought he should feel better +to be punished. So Forester reflected upon the subject, and at nine +o'clock, when Marco went in to commence his studies, Forester told him +that he had concluded upon his punishment. + +"What is it to be?" said Marco. + +"It is for me not to allow you to study," replied Forester, "all this +forenoon, but to require you to sit still at your desk, with nothing +to do. You see it will be a sort of solitary imprisonment, only your +prison will in itself be a pleasant place." + +Marco thought that this would not be a very severe punishment, but he +found, in enduring it, that it was in fact much more severe than he +had imagined. He got very tired indeed, long before the forenoon was +out. He concluded that solitary imprisonment for years, in a gloomy +dungeon, must be a terrible punishment indeed. + +A year or two after this time, when Marco had been entirely cured of +all such faults, he one day asked Forester to explain to him how he +knew where he went on this memorable forenoon; and Forester willingly +explained it to him. It seems that Forester's father, though a very +gentle and kind-hearted man, was a very shrewd one, and having been +accustomed to the discovery, in the course of his practice, of all +sorts of pranks and roguery, was less disposed to place confidence in +others till he knew the confidence was deserved, than Forester himself +was, who had less experience. And when he knew that Forester had gone +away, leaving Marco alone, he doubted a little whether he would remain +industriously at his work. While he was thinking of this, he heard a +slight noise which Marco made with his feet against the clapboards of +the house in getting out the window. He therefore came into the study +a moment afterward, and found that Marco had gone. He looked out the +window and saw him going off toward the other boys. Just at that +moment the man came to help him prune his trees, but before he began +this work he went into the house to James, called him to a window and +pointed out Marco to him, and said, + +"I want you, James, to follow him, and keep in sight of him until he +returns, but if possible don't let him see you. Say nothing to +me about it, but give my son Forester an account of all that you +observe." + +James did as he was directed, and when Forester came back he told him +the whole story, just before Forester went into the study. So that +Forester knew all about it, before Marco saw him. James managed the +affair very adroitly, for he kept himself entirely out of sight except +in one instance, and that was when the boys fell into the water. He +then rushed toward them for fear that they might be drowned, but +he stopped on the bank when he saw that there was no danger, and +disappeared again before Marco had time to recognize him. + + + + +Chapter IX. + +Boating. + + + +The alterations and improvements, which Forester had ordered in the +boat, were completed at the time promised. Marco said that it would +require a crew of eight to man the boat properly: six oarsmen, a +bowman, and a coxswain. Marco pronounced this word as if it was spelt +_coxen_. This is the proper way to pronounce it. It means the one +who sits in the stern, to steer the boat and direct the rowers. In +fact, the coxswain is the commander of the boat's crew. + +"_I_ will be bowman," said Marco, "and you can be coxswain, and +then we shall want six boys for oarsmen." + +"You will have to explain to me then what my duties will be," said +Forester, "for I don't even know what a coxswain is." + +"Why, he's the commander," said Marco. "He gives all the orders." + +"Then you must be coxswain at first," said Forester, "for I don't know +any thing about it. You have got to teach us all. After I have learned +to manage a boat with six oars, man-of-war fashion, I should like to +be coxswain sometimes very much. And it seems to me," added Forester, +"that you and I had better go down first alone, until you get me +taught, and then we can get the boys to come afterward." + +"O no," said Marco, "you'll all learn easily enough together. I can +tell you all exactly what to do." + +Forester acceded to this proposal, and they made out a list of six +boys, and Forester authorized Marco to invite them to come. "Be sure," +said Forester, "to tell their parents that we are going out in a boat, +and tell them that I am going too." Marco did this. The boys all +gladly accepted the invitation. They came first to the house, and then +proceeded by a path, from the foot of the garden, which led to the +mill-pond. It was about half-past one when they reached the boat. + +Here there was a great scene of confusion, as the boys all commenced +talking and asking questions together. They found the boat in fine +order, being perfectly tight and dry, and the new seats being all in +their places. The oars, however, were not there. Forester recommended +to Marco to send a detachment of his men, to go to the wagon-maker's +shop and get them. So Marco sent off three of the boys, calculating +very correctly that they could bring two oars apiece. Before many +minutes they returned, each of the boys having two oars, one on each +shoulder. + +The other boys immediately began to take the oars, and they all +advanced together toward the boat, to get in. + +"Stop," exclaimed Marco, "stop, boys! you must not go aboard without +an order. I'm coxswain; you must wait till I tell you, before one of +you goes aboard. John, come out." + +John, who had stepped into the boat, came back again on hearing this +peremptory order, and the boys waited on the bank. Marco then +told them to put the oars in. The boys began to pitch them in, in +confusion, some falling upon the thwarts, and some into the bottom of +the boat. + +"No,--stop," said Marco; "that isn't the way. Put 'em in in order." + +"Yes, put 'em in order," said John. "Let's put 'em in order." + +"Lay 'em along the thwarts," said Marco, "the blades forward." + +Marco explained to the boys how to place the oars. They were laid +along the middle of the thwarts so as to leave room to sit by the side +of them. They were placed in such a manner that the handle of one came +upon each seat. + +"_Aboard!_" said Marco, in a military tone. + +The boys did not understand that order, and of course did not obey it. + +"_Aboard_, I say!" repeated Marco; "when I say _Aboard_, you +must all get into the boat." + +With this explanation of the word of command, the boys understood what +they were to do, and got aboard the boat as fast as they could. There +was much confusion among them in getting their seats. Several of them +began to take up their oars, until they were forbidden to do so by +Marco, in a loud voice. + +"You must not touch the oars," said he, "until I say _Toss_. Then +you must take them and toss them right up in the air." + +"How?" said one of the boys, named Joseph. "How, Marco?" + +This question was scarcely heard amid the confusion. + +"Be silent, boys; don't talk, and don't stop to ask _how_, but do +just as I tell you." + +Marco was so much accustomed to the idea which sailors attach to +the word _toss_, and to the manner in which they perform the +evolution, that he forgot how many different ways there might be of +tossing up an oar. The proper way is, when the command is given, for +each oarsman to raise the blade of his oar quick, but gently, into the +air, letting the end of the handle rest upon the thwart. It is then in +a position to be let down into the water conveniently when the next +order, which is, _Let fall_, is given. + +The raising of the oars, and then letting them fall, all exactly +together, by the crew of a man-of-war's boat, makes a very pretty +spectacle. + +The boys, however, knew nothing about this, for Marco, as it was all +very plain and familiar to him, did not realize the necessity of +making very minute explanations to such new recruits as those +that were under his command. Accordingly, when the order came to +_toss_, some of the boys sat still, looking at Marco, and not +knowing what to do; others raised their oars into the air, some one +way and some another; and Joseph, who was a little discomposed by the +rebuff he had met with, concluded that he would obey as literally as +possible, let what would come of it and he gave his oar a high toss +into the air. It fell at a short distance from him into the water, +went down for a moment out of sight, and then, shooting out for half +its length, it fell over upon its side and began to float away. + +[Illustration: "TOSS."] + +Hereupon ensued just such a scene of laughter shouts, and confusion +as might have been expected. All began to shout out exclamations and +orders, and to give directions how to proceed to recover the lost oar. +The boys whose oars were still left, thrust them confusedly into the +water, and began pushing, poking, and paddling with them, in order to +get the boat out to where Joseph's oar was floating. All this time +Forester remained on the bank, laughing at this specimen of nautical +command and subordination. + +After a time the oar was recovered, and Marco, after much scolding and +vociferation, got his crew in order again. Forester said that he would +remain where he was, on the bank, until Marco had tried his oarsmen a +little. So Marco went on giving his orders. He succeeded finally in +getting the boys all in their seats again, with their oars in their +hands. + +"Now, boys, mind," said he, "and I'll tell you exactly what to do. +_Attention!_ When I say _Attention_, you must all stop talking. +_Attention!_ Now you mustn't speak a word. You must hold your oars out +over the water and have them all ready, the handles in your hands, and +when I say _Give way_, then you must all begin to row, all together +exactly, so as to keep the stroke. You must keep the stroke with the +stroke-oarsman." + +But the boys did not know who the stroke-oarsman was, and they began +clamorously to inquire, notwithstanding the injunction to silence +which they had received. Marco explained to them that the +stroke-oarsman was the one who sat nearest to him, that is, the one +farthest aft. As the oarsmen were all sitting with their backs toward +the bow of the boat, their faces were toward the stern, and therefore +the one who sat farthest aft could be seen by the rest. This is the +reason why the thwart which is farthest aft is made the seat of the +best oarsman, and the others are required to make their motions keep +time with his. For the oars in a boat that is fully manned are so +close together, that, unless they keep time exactly with each other, +the blades would cross and hit one another in utter confusion. But +if they keep the stroke, as they call it, exactly together, all goes +right. For this reason the oarsman who sits aft, by whose oar the +movements of all the other oars are to be regulated, is called the +stroke-oarsman. + +The boys, however, knew nothing of all this. Marco contented himself +with giving one general direction to them, to keep the stroke with +the stroke-oarsman, and to begin when he gave the order, "_Give +way_." Accordingly, after all were silent again, the oars being +extended over the water, and Forester standing on the bank watching +the operation, Marco called out in the tone of command, "_Give +way!_" + +The boys immediately began to row, all looking at the stroke-oarsman, +but failing entirely to keep time with him. The oars thumped against +each other, crossed each other, and made all manner of confusion. +Some could not get into the water, and others could not get out; and +Joseph's oar, which somehow or other came out too suddenly, while he +was pulling hard upon it, caused him to pitch backward off his seat +and tumble over into the bottom of the boat. + +[Illustration: BAD ROWING.] + +"_Oars!_" said Marco, "OARS!" + +What Marco meant by _oars_ they did not know, so they paid no +attention to the command, but some stopped rowing in despair, while +others kept on, banging the blades of the oars against one another, +and plashing the water, but produced no effect whatever in respect to +propelling the boat. In the mean time the air was filled with shouts +of laughter and loud vociferations. + +"_Oars!_" exclaimed Marco again, with the voice of a colonel at +the head of his regiment. "_Oars!_ Why don't you stop when I say +_Oars_?" + +The boys began to stop, shouting to one another, "Stop!" "Stop!" In a +few minutes all was still again. The boys began to take their oars in +and one of them rose and said, + +"Poh! this is all nonsense. You can't do any thing with oars. I'd +rather have one good paddle than all the oars in New York." + +In fact, Marco himself began to despair. He uttered some impatient +exclamations, and tried to paddle the boat toward the shore. But he +found he was almost as awkward in managing a paddle, as the other boys +were in working oars. He succeeded, however, at last, in getting the +boat to the shore, and then he told the boys that they might as well +get out, for they could not do any thing at all about rowing. + +"You don't seem to get along very well, Marco," said Forester: "what +is the matter?" + +"Why, I havn't got any crew. They don't know any thing about it." + +"It seems to me the fault is in the commander," said Forester. + +"In me?" said Marco. "Why, I ordered them right, but they wouldn't +obey." + +"Yes, your orders would have been right, if you had had a trained +crew. But you don't manage in the right way to teach raw recruits." + +"I wish you would try, then, cousin Forester," said Marco. + +"Well," said Forester, "I have no objection to try. Boys, are you +willing to have me for commander?" + +"Yes, sir," "Yes, sir," said all the boys. + +"I shall be a great deal more strict than Marco," said Forester. "So I +don't expect that you will like me. But I will try. I don't want quite +so many oarsmen to begin with; I should rather teach a few at a time. +Are there any of you that would like to come ashore, and let the rest +practice first?" + +None of the boys moved. They all wished to practice first. This was +just as Forester expected. + +"Very well," said Forester; "I know how I can thin out my crew. As +fast as I find that you don't obey my orders, I shall put you ashore." + +"But suppose we don't understand?" said one of the boys. + +"I shall explain fully beforehand what you are to do. And, Marco, you +must observe how I manage, and then you will know another time. When +you have got any thing to teach, the art consists in dividing the +lesson into a great many very short steps, and letting your pupils +take one at a time." + +Forester knew nothing about managing a boat's crew until that day, but +he had observed very attentively all the orders which Marco had given, +and noticed their meaning, and thus he was prepared to manoeuver the +boat as far as Marco had gone in giving his orders. He accordingly +stepped into the boat and took Marco's place; while Marco himself +walked forward and took his place at the bow of the boat, saying that +he was going to be bowman. + +"Marco," said Forester, "you say that when the order is +_Attention_, the crew must be silent; what is the order when I +want to give them liberty to talk again?" + +"_Crew at ease_" said Marco. + +"Very well. Now, boys, when I say _Attention_, you must be still, +look at me, hear all I say, and obey the orders as exactly as you can, +but ask no questions and give me no advice, nor speak to one another, +till I say, _Crew at ease_. Then you can talk again. Perhaps two +or three of you will disobey, and I have no objection to that, as I +should like some excuse for putting some of you ashore." + +Forester smiled as he said this, and every boy determined that he +would not be the one to be sent ashore. + +"_Attention!_" said Forester. + +Forester then put his paddle into the water and paddled the boat out +into the pond a little way. While he was doing this, there was a dead +silence on board the boat. Not a boy spoke a word; and when, at last, +Forester stopped paddling, the boat floated on a little way gently +through the water, and not a sound was to be heard except the distant +barking of a dog on the opposite shore. + +"_Crew at ease_," said Forester. The boys laughed, changed their +positions, and began to talk. + +"I didn't get any of you ashore then," said Forester, "but I shall +succeed the next time, for I shall watch my opportunity when you are +all busy talking, and say, _Attention_, suddenly; then you will +not all stop in an instant, but some will go on just to finish their +sentence, and this will be disobeying the order, and so I shall get +you ashore." + +The boys laughed; they thought that it was not very good policy for +Forester to give them this warning of his intention, as it put +them all upon their guard. Presently the word of command came very +suddenly--"_Attention!_" Every voice was hushed in an instant; +the boys assumed immediately an erect position, and looked directly +toward Forester. + +"Joseph," said Forester, "when I give order _Toss_, you are +to take up your oar and raise the blade into the air, and hold it +perpendicularly, with the end of the handle resting on the thwart by +your side, on the side of the boat opposite to the one on which you +are going to row,--_Toss!_" + +So Joseph raised his oar in the manner directed, the other boys +looking on. + +"Let it down again," said Forester. Joseph obeyed. + +"_Crew at ease_," said Forester. + +Forester acted very wisely in not keeping the attention of the crew +very long at a time. By relieving them very frequently, he made the +distinction between being under orders and at ease a very marked +and striking one, so that the boys easily kept it in mind. In a few +moments he commanded attention again, with the same success as before. +He then ordered another boy to toss his oar, then another, and so on, +until he had taught the movement to each one separately. He gave to +each one such explanations as he needed, and when necessary he made +them perform the evolution twice, so as to be sure that each one +understood exactly what was to be done. Then Forester gave the command +for them all to toss together, and they did so quite successfully. The +oars rose and stood perpendicularly like so many masts; while Forester +paddled the boat slowly through the water. Then he directed the boys +to let the oars down again, gently, to their places along the thwarts, +and put the crew at ease. + +The boys perceived now that they were making progress. They were +gaining slowly, it is true, but surely, and Marco saw where the cause +of his failure was. He had not realized how entirely ignorant all +these boys were of the whole mystery of managing an oar and of acting +in concert; and besides, he had not had experience enough as a +teacher, to know how short the steps must be made, in teaching any +science or art which is entirely new. + +In the same slow and cautious manner, Forester taught the boys to let +the blades of their oars fall gently into the water, at the command, +"_Let fall_." He taught one at a time, as before, each boy +dropping the blades into the water and letting the middle of the oar +come into the row-lock, while he held the handle in his hands ready +to row. Then, without letting them row any, he ordered them to +_toss_ again; that is, to raise the oars out of the water and +hold them in the air, with the end of the handle resting upon the +thwart. He drilled them in this exercise for some time, until they +could go through it with ease, regularity, and dispatch. He then gave +the order, "_Crew at ease_," and let the boys rest themselves and +enjoy conversation. + +While they were resting, Forester paddled them about. The boys asked +him when he was going to let them row, and Forester told them that +perhaps they had had drilling enough for one day, and if they chose he +would not require any thing more of them, but would paddle them about +and let them amuse themselves. But they were all eager to learn to +row. So Forester consented. + +He taught them the use of the oar, in the same slow and cautious +manner by which his preceding instructions had been characterized. He +made one learn at a time, explaining to him minutely every motion. As +each one, in turn, practiced these instructions, the rest looked on, +observing every thing very attentively, so as to be ready when their +turn should come. At length, when they had rowed separately, he tried +first two, and then four, and then six together, and finally got them +so trained that they could keep the stroke very well. While they were +pulling in this manner, the boat would shoot ahead very rapidly. When +he wanted them to stop, he would call out, "_Oars_." This was +the order for them to stop rowing, after they had finished the stroke +which they had commenced, and to hold the oars in a horizontal +position, with the blades just above the water, ready to begin again +whenever he should give the command. + +At first the boys were inclined to stop immediately, even if they were +in the middle of a stroke, if they heard the command, _oars_. But +Marco said that this was wrong; they must finish the stroke, he said, +if they had commenced it, and then all take the oars out of the water +regularly together. Forester was careful too to give the order always +between the middle and the end of a stroke, so that the obeying of the +order came immediately after the issuing of it. + +By this means Forester could stop them in a moment, when any thing +went wrong. He would order, "_Give way_," and then the boys would +all begin to pull their oars. As soon as any of them lost the stroke, +or whenever any oars began to interfere, or any other difficulty or +accident occurred, he would immediately give the order, "_Oars_." +This would instantly arrest the rowing, before the difficulty became +serious. Then, after a moment's pause he would say, "_Give way_," +again, when they would once more begin rowing all together. All this +time, he sat in the stern and steered the boat wherever they wanted to +go. + +[Illustration: GOOD ROWING.] + +Marco wished to have Forester teach the boys how to back water, and to +trail oars, and to put the oars apeak, and to perform various other +evolutions. But Forester was very slow in going on to new manoeuvers +before the old ones were made perfectly familiar. He accordingly spent +nearly an hour in rowing about the pond, up and down, to make the boys +familiar with the stroke. He found, as is, in fact, universally the +case with beginners in the art of rowing, that they were very prone to +row faster and faster, that is, to accelerate their strokes, instead +of rowing regularly, keeping continually the same time. They gradually +improved, however, in respect to this fault, and by the middle of the +afternoon Marco began to think that they were quite a good crew. +They practiced several new evolutions during the latter part of the +afternoon, and just before tea time they all went home, much pleased +with the afternoon's enjoyment, and with the new knowledge and skill +which they had acquired. They also planned another excursion the +following week. + + + + +Chapter X. + +An Expedition. + + + +Forester and Marco got their boat's crew well trained in the course of +a week or two, and one pleasant day in September they planned a long +expedition in their boat. The boys collected at the house of the owner +of the boat, at one o'clock. Two of them carried a large basket which +Forester had provided. It was quite heavy, and they did not know what +was in it; but they supposed that it was a store of some sort of +provisions for a supper, in case they should be gone so long as to +need a supper. Forester carried a hatchet also. + +At the proper word of command, the boys got into the boat and took +their several stations. Marco took his place forward to act as bowman. +It is the duty of the bowman to keep a lookout forward, that the boat +does not run into any danger; and also, when the boat comes to land, +to step out first and hold it by the painter, that is, the rope which +is fastened to the bow, while the others get out. Marco had a pole, +with an iron spike and also an iron hook in the end of it, which he +used to _fend off_ with, as they called it, when the boat was in +danger of running against any obstacle. This was called a boat-hook. + +"_Attention!_" said Forester, when the boys were all seated. + +"_Toss!_" + +Hereupon the boys raised the oars into the air, ready to let them down +into the water. + +"_Let fall!_" said Forester. The oars all fell gently and +together into their places. + +"_Give way!_" said Forester. + +The boat began immediately to glide rapidly over the water, under the +impulse which the boys gave it in rowing. "_Crew at ease_," said +Forester. + +So the boys went on rowing, but understood that they had liberty to +talk. One of them wished to know where Forester was going with them; +but Forester said it was entirely contrary to the discipline aboard +a man-of-war for the crew to ask the captain where they were going. +"Besides," said Forester, "though I could easily tell you, I think you +will enjoy the expedition more, to know nothing about it beforehand, +but to take every thing as it comes." + +Forester steered in such a manner as to put the head of the boat +toward a bank at some distance from where they started, on which there +was a thick forest of firs and other evergreens, growing near the +water. When they got pretty near the land, he gave the order for +attention, that they might observe silence in going through whatever +manoeuvers were required here. The next order was, _Oars_. At +this the oarsmen stopped rowing, and held their oars horizontally over +the water. The boat in the mean time was gliding on toward the shore. + +"_Aboard!_" said Forester. + +The crew then gently raised their oars into the air, and passed them +over their heads into the boat, laying them upon the thwarts in their +proper position, along the middle of the boat. By this order the crew +supposed that Forester was going to land. + +"Bear a hand, Mr. Bowman," said Forester, "and fend off from the +shore." + +Forester, by means of his paddle, had steered the boat up to a log +which lay in the edge of the water, and Marco, at first fending off +from the log, to keep the boat from striking hard, and then holding on +to it with his hook, got it into a good position for landing, and held +it securely. + +"_Crew ashore_," said Forester. + +The crew, who had learned all these orders in the course of the +repeated instructions which Forester and Marco had given them, began +to rise and to walk toward the bow of the boat and to go ashore. Marco +landed first, and held the boat with his boat-hook, while the rest got +out. Forester then ordered Marco to make the boat fast, until they +were ready to embark again. + +Forester then went up in the woods a little way, with his hatchet +in his hand, and began to look about among the trees. Finally, he +selected a small tree, with a round, straight stem, and began to cut +it down. The boys gathered around him, wondering what it could be for. +Forester smiled, and worked on in silence, declining to answer any of +their questions. Marco said it was for a mast, he knew, but when they +asked him where the sail was, he seemed perplexed, and could not +answer. + +As soon, however, as the tree was cut down, it was evident that it was +not intended to be used as a mast, for Forester began at once to cut +it up into lengths of about two feet long. What could be his design, +the boys were utterly unable to imagine. He said nothing, but ordered +the boys to take these lengths, one by one, and put them into the +boat. There were five in all. Then he ordered the crew on board again. +Marco got in last. When all were seated, the order was given to shove +off, the oars were _tossed_--then _let fall_ into the water. +He ordered them to _back water_ first, by which manoeuver the +boat was backed off from the land into deep water. Then he commanded +them to _give way_, and at the same time bringing the stern of +the boat round by his paddle, the boat was made to shoot swiftly down +the stream. + +The boat went rapidly forward along the shores of the pond, and +presently, on coming round a wooded point, the mills appeared in +sight. As they approached the mills, they kept pretty near the shore, +and at length landed just above the dam. + +Forester ordered the crew ashore, at a place where there was a road +leading down to the water's edge. This road was made by the teams +which came down to get logs and lumber from the water. At Forester's +direction, the boys drew the bow of the boat up a little way upon the +land. Then he ordered the boys to take out the pieces of the stem of +the little tree, and he placed one of them under the bow as a roller. +The boys then took hold of the sides of the boat, three on each side, +each boy opposite to his own row-lock, while Marco stood ready to put +under another roller. The ascent was very gradual, so that the boat +moved up easily, and the boys were very much surprised and delighted +to see their boat thus running up upon the land. + +It seemed to them an exercise of great power to be able to take so +large a boat so easily and rapidly up such an ascent upon the land. +They were aided to do it by two principles. One was the combination of +their strength in one united effort, and the other was the influence +of the rollers in preventing the friction of the bottom of the boat +upon the ground. + +Presently the whole length of the boat was out of water and resting +on four rollers, which Marco had put under it, one by one, as it had +advanced. Forester would then call out, "_Ahead with her!_" when +the boys would move about two steps. Then Forester would give the +command, "_Hold on_," and they would stop. By this time one of +the rollers would come out behind, and Marco would take it up and +carry it round forward, and place it under the bow, and Forester +would then say, "_Ahead with her!_" again, and the boat would +immediately advance again up the acclivity. + +[Illustration: THE PORTAGE.] + +In a very few minutes the boat was thus rolled up into a sort of a +road, where the way was level. Here it went very easily. Presently it +began to descend, and soon the boys saw that Forester was taking a +sort of path which led by a gentle slope down to the water immediately +below the mill. They were very much pleased at this, for, as they had +had a great many excursions already on the mill-pond, they had become +familiar with it in all its parts, and they were much animated at the +idea of exploring new regions. In going down to the water on the lower +side of the mill, they had, of course, no exertion to make to draw the +boat, as its own weight was more than sufficient to carry it down upon +the rollers. They only had to hold it back to prevent its running down +too fast, and to keep it properly guided. + +"It goes down pretty easy," said Marco; "but I don't see how you are +ever going to get it back again." + +It was, in fact, a long and rather steep descent. The boys thought +that it would require far more strength than they could exercise, to +bring the boat _up_ such an inclination. Forester told them not +to fear. He said that a good commander never put too much upon his +men, or voluntarily got them into any difficulty without planning +beforehand a way to get out. + +They soon got down to the water's edge again. Here, instead of the +broad and smooth pond which they had above the dam, they found a +stream eddying, and foaming, and flowing rapidly down between rocks +and logs. There was a bridge across the stream too, a short distance +below. The boys were a little inclined to be afraid to embark, in what +appeared to be a rather dangerous navigation, but they had confidence +in Forester, and so they readily obeyed when Forester ordered the crew +aboard. + +"Now, Mr. Bowman," said Forester, "keep a sharp lookout ahead for +rocks and snags, and fend off well when there is any danger." + +So Marco kneeled upon a small seat at the bow of the boat, and looked +into the water before him, while Forester propelled and guided the +boat with his paddle. They advanced slowly and by a very tortuous +course, so as to avoid the rocks and shallows, and at length, just +above the bridge, they came to a wider and smoother passage of water: +and here Forester ordered the oars out. There was only room for them +to take four or five strokes before they came to the bridge, and under +the bridge there was only a very narrow passage where they could go +through. This passage was between one of the piers and a gravel +bed. As they advanced toward it, Forester called out, "_Give way +strong!_" and all the boys pulled their oars with all their +strength, without, however, accelerating the strokes. This gave +the boat a rapid headway, and then Forester gave the order to +_trail_, when the boys simultaneously lifted the oars out of the +row-locks and let them drift in the water alongside of the boat. As +the boat was advancing very swiftly, the oars were immediately swept +in close to her sides, and thus were out of the way, and the boat +glided safely and swiftly through the passage, and emerged into a +broader sheet of smooth water beyond. + +"_Recover!_" said Forester. The boys then, by a peculiar +manoeuver which they had learned by much practice, brought back their +oars into the row-locks, and raised the blades out of the water, so +as to get them into a position for rowing. "_Give way!_" said +Forester, and immediately they were all in motion, the boat gliding +swiftly down the stream. + +After they had gone on in this way a few minutes, Forester ordered the +oars _apeak_, and put the crew at ease. When the oars are apeak, +they are drawn _in_ a little way, so that the handle of each oar +may be passed under a sort of cleat or ledge, which runs along on the +inside of the boat near the upper edge of it. This keeps the oar firm +in its place without the necessity of holding it, the handle being +under this cleat, while the middle of the oar rests in the row-lock. +Thus the oarsmen are relieved from the necessity of holding their +oars, and yet the oars are all ready to be seized again in a moment, +whenever it becomes desirable to commence rowing. + +Meantime the boat slowly drifted down the stream. The water was here +deep and comparatively still, and the boys amused themselves with +looking over the sides into the depths of the water. They glided +noiselessly along over various objects,--now a great flat rock, now +a sunken tree, and now a bed of yellow sand. Every now and then, +Forester would order the oars out, and make the oarsmen give way for +a few strokes, so as to give the boat what they called steerage way, +that is, way through the water, so that holding the paddle in one +position or the other would steer it. In this way Forester guided the +boat in the right direction, keeping it pretty near the middle of the +stream. + +This mill-stream, as has already been stated, emptied into the river, +and the boat was now rapidly approaching the place of junction. In a +few minutes more the river came into view. The boys could see it at +some distance before them, running with great rapidity by a rocky +point of land which formed one side of the mouth of the brook. + +"Now, boys," said Forester, "is it safe for us to go out into that +current?" + +"Yes," said Marco, "by all means,--let us go." + +"Perhaps we shall upset in the rips," said some of the boys. + +"No matter if we do," said Marco; "it is not deep in the rips, and of +course there is no danger." + +"That is in our favor certainly," said Forester. "Whenever the current +sets strong, there it is sure to be shallow, so that if we upset +we should not be drowned; and where it is deep, so as to make it +dangerous for us to get in, it is always still, and thus there is no +danger of upsetting." + +"What is the reason of that?" said one of the boys. + +"The reason is given in this way," said Forester, "in the college +mathematics. The velocity of a stream is inversely as the area of the +section." + +The boys did not understand such mathematical phraseology as this, and +so Forester clothed his explanation in different language. He said +that where the stream was shallow or narrow, the current must be more +rapid, in order to get all the water through in so small a space, but +where it is deep, it may move slowly. + +Forester landed his crew upon the rocky point, where they had a very +pleasant view up and down the river. He proposed to them to have their +luncheon there, and to this they agreed. So they went back to the edge +of the rocks, where there was a little grove of trees, and they sat +down upon a log which had been worn smooth by the action of the water +in floods, and bleached by the sun. + +There were plenty of dry sticks and slabs lying about upon the shore, +which Forester ordered the crew to collect in order to build a fire. +It was not cold, and they had no need of a fire for any purposes +of cooking, but a fire would look cheerful and pleasant, and they +accordingly made one. Forester had some matches in his pocket. Two of +the crew brought the basket from the boat, and when they had opened +it, they found an abundant store of provisions. There was a dozen or +more of round cakes, and a large apple-pie, which, as there were just +eight of them, gave forty-five degrees to each one. There was also a +jug of milk, and a silver mug, which Forester's mother had lent them +for the excursion, to drink out of. + +The boys, whose appetites had been sharpened by their exertions in the +portage of the boat round the falls, and in rowing, did not cease +to eat until the provisions were entirely exhausted, and then they +carried the empty basket back to the boat. Soon after this, Forester +summoned what he called a council of war, to consider the question +whether they had better go down the river. He said he wanted their +true and deliberate judgment in the case. He did not wish them to say +what they would like, merely, but what they thought, on the whole, +was best. He told them that he should not be _governed_ by their +advice, but, after hearing all that they had to say, he should act +according to his own judgment. + +"Then what's the use of asking us at all?" said Marco. + +"Why, what you will say may modify my judgment. I did not say that I +shall decide according to my judgment as it is now, but as it will be +after I have heard what you will have to say. I shall be influenced +perhaps by your reasons, but I shall decide myself. That is the theory +of a council of war. The commander may be influenced by the arguments +of his subalterns, but he is not governed by their votes." + +Forester then called upon each of the boys, in succession, to give his +opinion on the point. Marco was in favor of going down the river, but +all the rest, though they said that they should like to go very much, +thought it would not answer, as it would be almost impossible to get +the boat up again over the rips. After the consultation was concluded, +Forester said, "Well, boys, you have all given wise opinions except +Marco, and his is not wise. Now we'll go aboard the boat." + +"_Crew aboard!_" said Forester. The other orders followed in +rapid succession: _Attention! Toss! Let fall! Backwater! Oars! Give +way!_ The boys considered it settled, on hearing what Forester had +said of the wisdom of their several opinions, that they were now going +back toward the mill; but how they were going to get the boat back +above the dam they did not know, though they did not doubt that +Forester had some good plan which he had not explained to them. +Instead, however, of turning the head of the boat up the stream, +Forester pointed it toward the river. They supposed that he was going +out to the edge of the river, and that then he would turn and come +back; but, to their utter amazement, he pushed boldly on directly into +the current, and then, putting his helm hard up and calling out to the +crew to give way strong, the boat swept round into the very center of +the stream and shot down the river over the rips like an arrow. + +[Illustration: THE EXPEDITION.] + +"Give way, boys, hearty," said Forester. "Give way strong." + +The boys pulled with all their strength, and the boat went swifter +and swifter. Forester kept it in the middle of the current, where the +water was deepest, though even here it was very shallow. Marco, in +the mean time, who was stationed at the bows, kept a sharp lookout +forward, and gave Forester notice of any impending danger. They soon +got through the rips and came to the deep and still water below, where +the current was gentle and the surface smooth. Here Forester ordered +the oars apeak, and the crew at ease. + +"We never shall get back in the world," said one of the boys; "forty +men couldn't row the boat up those rips." + +"Let us try," said Forester. So he ordered the oars out again, and +put the boat under way. He brought her head round so as to point up +stream, and calling upon the crew to give way strong, he forced her +back into the rapid water. They went on a few rods, but long before +they reached the most rapid part, they found that with all their +exertions they could make no progress. The boat seemed stationary. +"_Oars_," said Forester. The boys stopped rowing, holding their +oars in the air, just above the water. Forester then, by means of his +paddle, turned the boat round again, saying, "Well, if we can't go up, +we can go down stream." He then ordered the crew to give way again, +and they began to glide along swiftly down the river. + +The boys wondered how Forester was going to get back, but he told them +to give themselves no concern on that score. "That responsibility +rests on me," said he. + +"But how came you to come down here," said Marco, "when you said my +advice wasn't good?" + +"I said your opinion was not wise. The boys who advised me not to come +were wiser than you. They gave better advice, so far as they and you +understood the case. But I know something which you do not, as is +usual with commanders,--and therefore I came down. In view of all that +_you_ know, it would have been wisest to have gone back, but in +view of all that _I_ know, it is wisest to come down." + +The curiosity of the boys was very much excited to know what it could +be that Forester knew which rendered coming down the river wise; but +Forester would make no explanations. He said that commanders were not +generally very communicative to their crews. In the mean time the boat +went on, sometimes shooting swiftly through the rapids, and sometimes +floating in a more calm and quiet manner on the surface of the stiller +water. In this way they went on more than a mile, enjoying the voyage +very highly, and admiring the varied scenery which was presented to +their view at every turn of the stream. + +At one place the boys landed upon a small sandy beach under some +overhanging rocks. They amused themselves in climbing about the rocks +for a time, and then they were ordered aboard again, and sailed on. + +Now it happened that the river, in the part of its course over which +this voyage had been performed, took a great circuit, and though they +had followed its course for more than a mile, they were now drawing +near to a place which was not very far from Forester's father's +house,--being about as much below it, as the place where the boat +belonged in the mill-pond was above it. As they approached the point +where the river turned again, Marco, who was looking out before, saw a +sort of landing, where there was a man standing, together with a yoke +of oxen. It was just sunset when they approached this spot. When they +arrived at it, the whole mystery was explained, for they found that +the man was James, who lived at Forester's father's, and the oxen were +his father's oxen. James had come down, under an appointment which +Forester had secretly made with him, with the oxen and a drag, and by +means of them he hauled the boat across to the mill-pond again, by +a back road which led directly across the pastures, and lanched it +safely again into the water close to the dwelling of its owner. So the +boys had, as it were, the pleasure of sliding down hill, without the +labor of drawing their sleds up again. + +[Illustration: THE DRAG.] + +Marco was very much pleased with this expedition. Forester told him +when they got home, that the Indians often carried their canoes around +falls, or from one river to another, and that such carrying-places +were called _portages_. + + + + +Chapter XI. + +Lost In The Woods. + + + +While Marco Paul was in Vermont, he and Forester had a remarkable +adventure in the woods. They got lost in fact, and for a time it +seemed quite doubtful how they were ever to find their way home. It +happened thus. + +One morning in the fall of the year, Marco, walking along toward the +barn with James, asked James what he was going to do that day. + +"I expect that I am going to gather apples," said James. + +"Well," said Marco. "Are you going in the cart?" + +"Yes," said James. + +"And may I go with you?" asked Marco. + +"Yes," said James. + +"And help gather the apples? said Marco. + +"Yes," said James. + +"And drive the oxen a little way?" asked Marco. + +"Yes," said James. + +"Well." said Marco. "I will run and get my goad-stick." + +Marco went toward the house intending to go in and get his goad-stick. +On his way he met his uncle. His uncle asked him whether James was out +in the barn. Marco said that he was, and his uncle then asked him to +go and request James to come to him. Marco did so, and he and James +then came along toward the house together. + +Marco's uncle stood upon the step of the door. + +"James," said he, "I was thinking that we ought to send for the +horses;--and the apples ought to be gathered too. Which is it best to +do?" + +"I hardly know, sir," said James. "It is high time that the apples +were gathered, and yet we promised to send for the horses to-day." + +"I can go and get the horses," said Marco,--"just as well as not. +Where is it?" + +"Oh no," said his uncle. "It is ten or fifteen miles from here. Isn't +it, James?" + +"Yes," said James, "by the road. I suppose it is about _four_ +miles through the woods. I was intending to walk there, through the +woods, and then to come home round by the road. It is rather a rough +road for horses through the woods." + +"Let cousin Forester and me go," said Marco. "I will go and ask him." + +So Marco went and found Forester. When Forester heard of the plan +he was quite inclined to accede to it. He had been much engaged +in studying for some time, and had had very little exercise and +recreation, so that he was easily persuaded to undertake an +expedition. The plan was all soon agreed upon. The horses had been put +out to pasture at a farmer's up the river about twelve miles. In going +that twelve miles the river took a great turn, so that in fact the +farm where the horses were pastured was not, in a straight line, +more than four miles from Mr. Forester's house. But the intermediate +country was a desolate and almost impassable region of forests and +mountains. There was, indeed, a sort of footpath by which it was +possible for men to get through, but this path was dangerous, and in +fact almost impracticable for horses. So James had formed the plan of +walking through the woods by the path, and then of coming home by the +road, riding one of the horses and leading the other. + +Forester and Marco concluded to adopt the same plan; except that in +coming home there would be just a horse a-piece for them to ride. They +put up some provisions to eat on the way, packing them in Marco's +knapsack. The knapsack, when it was ready, was strapped upon Marco's +back, for he insisted on carrying it. Forester consented to this +arrangement, secretly intending, however, not to allow Marco to carry +the load very far. + +Forester asked James if there would be any difficulty about the way. +James said that there would not be. The path, though it was not an +easy one to travel, was very easy to find. + +"You go on," said he, "along the back road about three quarters of a +mile, and then you will come to a small school-house on the left hand +side of the road, on a sort of hill. It is in the Jones district." + +"What sort of a school-house is it?" asked Forester. + +"It is a small school-house, with a little cupola upon the top of it," +said James, "for a bell. It stands upon a knoll by the side of the +road. Just beyond it the main road turns to the right, and there is +a narrower road leading off to the left through a gate. You must go +through that gate and then follow the path into the woods." + +"We can find it, I think," said Forester. + +"Yes," said Marco, "I know the place very well." + +Forester said he thought that they should find the way without any +difficulty, and so bidding his uncle and aunt good-bye, he and Marco +set out. + +They went through the garden, and from the garden they passed out +through a small gate into the orchard. Marco wished to go this way in +order to get some apples. He chose two from off his favorite tree and +put them into the knapsack, and took another in his hand to eat by the +way. Forester did the same, only he put the two that he carried with +him, into his pockets. + +From the orchard the travelers walked across a field and down into +the glen, and after crossing a brook upon some stepping-stones, they +ascended upon the other side, and presently climbing over a fence, +they came out into what James had called the back road. They walked +along upon this road, for about three quarters of a mile, until at +last they came in sight of the school-house. Marco spied it first. + +"There," said Marco, "that is the school-house." + +"How do you know that that is the one?" asked Forester. + +"Oh, I know the Jones district very well," said Marco. + +In New England the tract of country included within the jurisdiction +of a town, is divided into districts for the establishment and support +of schools. These districts are called school-districts, and each one +is generally named from some of the principal families that happen to +live in it. It happened that there were several families of the name +of Jones that lived in this part of the town, and so their district +was called the Jones district. + +"How do you happen to know it?" said Forester. + +"Oh, I came out here two or three times with Thomas Jones to set my +squirrel trap," said Marco. "There goes Thomas Jones now." + +"Where?" asked Forester. + +"There," said Marco, pointing along the road a little way. + +Forester looked forward, and saw in the road before them a boy walking +toward the school-house, with his slate under his arm. Beyond the boy, +upon the knoll on the left side of the road, was the school-house +itself. + +[Illustration: THE SCHOOL-HOUSE.] + +The school-house was not far from the road, and there was a little +grove of trees behind it. Beyond the school-house, and almost directly +before them, Marco and Forester saw the road turning a little to the +left toward the gate. + +"There is the gate," said Marco, "that we are to go through." + +"Yes," said Forester, "that must be the one." + +Forester and Marco walked on until they came to the school-house. +Thomas got to the school-house before them, and went in. Forester and +Marco passed on and went through the gate. They then went on beyond +the gate a little way till they came to a pair of bars. Marco took +down all but the topmost bar, and Forester, stooping down, passed +under. Marco attempted to do the same; but forgetting that he had a +knapsack upon his back, he did not stoop low enough, and gave his +knapsack such a knock as almost threw him down. Fortunately there was +nothing frangible inside, and so no damage was done. One of his apples +was mellowed a little; that was all. + +The path led the travelers first across a rough and rocky pasture, and +then it suddenly entered a wood where every thing wore an expression +of wild and solemn grandeur. The trees were very lofty, and consisted +of tall stems, rising to a vast height and surmounted above with a +tuft of branches, which together formed a broad canopy over the heads +of the travelers, and produced a sort of somber twilight below. Birds +sang in plaintive notes on the tops of distant trees, and now and then +a squirrel was seen running along the ground, or climbing up the trunk +of some vast hemlock or pine. + +"I hope that we shall not lose our way in these woods," said Forester. + +"Oh, there is no danger of that," rejoined Marco. "The path is very +plain." + +"It seems plain here," said Forester, "and I presume that there can +not be any danger, or James would have recommended to us to go the +other way." + +"We shall come home the other way," said Marco. "I wonder if there are +any saddles. Twelve miles would be too far to ride bareback." + +"Yes," said Forester, "there are saddles. I asked James about that." + +The path which Forester and Marco were pursuing soon began to +ascend. It ascended at first gradually, and afterward more and more +precipitously, and at length began to wind about among rocks and +precipices in such a manner, that Marco said he did not wonder at all +that James said it would be a rough road for horses. + +"I think it is a very rough road for boys," said Forester. + +"Boys?" repeated Marco. "Do you call yourself boys." + +"For _men_ then," said Forester. + +"But _I_ am not a man," said Marco. + +"Then I don't see how I can express my idea," said Forester. + +Marco's attention was here diverted from the rhetorical difficulty in +which Forester had become involved, by a very deep chasm upon one side +of the path. He went to the brink of it and could hear the roaring of +a torrent far below. + +"I mean to throw a stone down," said Marco. He accordingly, after +looking around for a moment, found a stone about as large as his head. +This stone he contrived to bring to the edge of the precipice and then +to throw it over. It went thundering down among the rocks and trees +below, while Marco stood upon the brink and listened to the sound of +the echoes and reverberations. He then got another stone larger than +the first, and threw that down; after which he and Forester resumed +their journey. + +The path, though it was a very rough and tortuous one, was pretty +plain; and it is probable that the travelers would have found no +difficulty in following it to the end of their route, had it not been +for an occurrence which they had not at all anticipated, but which was +one, nevertheless, that has often taken place to confuse the steps of +mountain travelers and make them lose their way. This occurrence was a +fall of snow. + +It was not late enough in the year for snow upon the lowlands, but +snow falls very early in the autumn upon the summits of mountains. +Marco and Forester had not anticipated stormy weather of any kind, +when they left home; for the wind was west and the sky was clear. +When, however, they had accomplished about one half of their journey, +large masses of fleecy clouds began to drive over the mountains, +and presently, all at once, it began to snow. Marco was extremely +delighted to see the snow falling. Forester was not so much pleased. +On the other hand, he looked somewhat concerned. He did not at first +think how the snow could do them any serious injury, but he seemed to +have an undefined sense of danger from it, and appeared uneasy. They +both, however, walked on. + +The region through which the path led at the time when the snow came +on, was a tract of flat land on the summit of the mountainous range, +with small and scattered trees here and there upon it. The best thing, +probably, for the travelers to have done in the emergency would have +been to have turned round the moment it began to snow, and go back as +fast as possible by the way that they came, as long as they were sure +of the path, and then to wait until the fallen snow had melted. If +they found then that the snow did not melt, so that they could see the +path again, it would be better to return altogether, as their chance +of being able to follow the path back toward their home would be much +greater than that of pursuing it forward; for they might expect to +find some guidance, in going back, by their recognition of the place +which they had passed in ascending. + +Forester, however, did not happen to think of this; and so when it +began to snow, his only immediate desire was to go forward as fast as +possible, so as to get into the woods again where he and Marco would +be in some measure under shelter. + +Marco finding that Forester appeared somewhat anxious, began to feel +some sentiment of fear himself. + +"Who would have thought," said he, "that we should have got caught out +in this snow-storm?" + +"Oh, it is not a snow-storm," replied Forester. "It is only a little +snow flurry. It will be over in a few minutes." + +"How do you know that it is not going to be a snow-storm?" asked +Marco. + +"Because storms never come out of the west," replied Forester. + +It snowed, however, faster and faster, and the ground soon began to be +entirely whitened. Forester pressed on, but he soon found himself at +a loss for his way. The air was so filled with the descending flakes, +that he could see only a very short distance before him. The view +of the forests and mountains was cut off on every side, and nothing +presented itself to the eye but the dim forms of the rocks and trees +which were near. These, too, were indistinct and shapeless. The ground +was soon entirely covered, and all hope of finding the path entirely +disappeared. Forester went back then a short distance, endeavoring to +retrace his steps. He followed the foot-prints a little way, but all +traces of them were soon obliterated. When he found that the steps +could no longer be seen, he went toward a tree which he saw rising +dimly at a little distance before him. The tree proved to be a large +hemlock, with wide-spreading branches. There was a place under this +tree where the ground was bare, having been sheltered from the snow by +the branches of the tree. There were some rocks too lying under this +tree. Forester walked up to them and sat down. Marco followed his +example. + +"Well, Marco," said Forester, "we are really lost." + +"And what are we going to do?" asked Marco, with a countenance of +great concern. + +"The first thing is," said Forester, "to open the knapsack, and see +what there is inside that is good to eat." + +So Forester took the knapsack off from his shoulders,--for he had +taken it from Marco some time before, and laying it upon a large +flat stone by his side, he began to open it, and to take out the +provisions. + +Forester was afraid that he and Marco had got themselves into somewhat +serious difficulty, but he wished to teach Marco that in emergencies +of such a nature, it would do no good to give way to a panic, or to +unnecessary anxiety. So he assumed an unconcerned and contented air, +and made arrangements for the luncheon, just as if they had stopped +there to eat it of their own accord, and without being in any +difficulty whatever about the prosecution of the journey. + +Marco, however, seemed to be quite uneasy. + +"What are we going to do?" said he. "If we get lost in this +snow-storm, we shall have to stay in the woods perhaps all night." + +"Yes," said Forester, "that we can do. We have done that before." + +Forester here alluded to an occasion on which he and Marco had spent +the night in a hut in the woods, when traveling in Maine. + +"But we had an axe then," said Marco, "to make a camp." + +"Yes," replied Forester, "that is true. I don't think, however, that +we shall have to stay in the woods all night now. We have _three_ +chances for avoiding it." + +"What are the three?" said Marco. + +"Why, in the first place," replied Forester, "we can stay where we are +until it stops snowing,--in fact it has almost stopped now. Then I +presume that the sun will come out, and in half an hour melt away all +the snow. Then we can find our path again, and go on." + +"But I don't think it is certain that we can find our path again," +said Marco. + +"Nor do I," said Forester, "but there's a chance of it. I did not say +that we had three certainties, but three chances." + +"Well," said Marco; "go on; what are the other two?" + +"If we can not find the path," said Forester, "either because the snow +does not melt, or for any other reason, then we can remain where we +are until night, and the people, finding that we do not come home, +will send up for us." + +"And how can they find us?" asked Marco. + +"Why, they will come up the path, of course, and we can not be very +far from the path, for we only lost it a few minutes before we came +here. Of course they will come up very near to this place;--and they +will come shouting out, every few minutes, as loud as they can, and so +we shall hear them." + +"Yes," said Marco, "I see; that is a pretty good chance." + +"The third chance for us," said Forester, "is to go down into the +first glen or valley that we can find, and then we shall probably come +to a stream. Then we can follow the stream down to the river." + +"How do you know that it goes to the river?" asked Marco. + +"All mountain streams do, of course," said Forester. "They go down +wherever they can find a valley or a hollow,--joining together and +taking in branches as they proceed,--until they get down into the +level country, and then they flow to the nearest river, and so to the +sea. Now I know that the river takes a bend around this mountainous +tract, and almost surrounds it, and all the streams from it must flow +into the river without going very far. We could follow one down, +though we should probably find the way very rough and difficult." + +"Let us try it," said Marco. + +This plan was decided upon, and so, when the snow squall was entirely +over and the sun had come out Marco and Forester, taking their +departure from the great tree and guiding their course by the sun, +the travelers set out, proceeding as nearly in a straight line as +possible, intending to go on in that manner until they should come to +some stream, and then to follow the stream down to the river. The plan +succeeded perfectly well. They soon descended into a valley, where +they found a little brook flowing over a bed of moss-covered stones. +They followed this brook down for about a mile, when they came to a +junction between the brook that they were following and another one. +After this junction of course the stream was larger, and in many +places they found it difficult to get along. The way was encumbered +with bushes, rocks, and fallen trees, and in one place the stream +flowed in a foaming torrent through the bottom of a deep chasm, with +sides rising directly out of the water. Here the travelers were +obliged to find a way at a distance from the brook--guiding +themselves, however, by the sound of its roaring. After passing the +chasm, they got back to the stream again. + +They came out into the open country about one o'clock, and found to their +great joy that they were very near the place where the horses were +pastured. The horses were all ready for them, and Forester and Marco +mounted them immediately, and set out on their return home. + +It was very pleasant riding along at their ease on horseback, after all +the dangers and fatigues that they had encountered. A part of the way +the road which they took lay along the shore of the river. Marco enjoyed +this part of the ride very much indeed. + +They reached home about sunset, with an excellent appetite for supper. +Marco was very enthusiastic in his manner of giving his aunt Forester +an account of his adventures, and he said, in conclusion, that he would +just as lief get lost in the woods as not. It was good fun. + + + +***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MARCO PAUL'S VOYAGES AND TRAVELS; +VERMONT*** + + +******* This file should be named 11681.txt or 11681.zip ******* + + +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: +https://www.gutenberg.org/1/1/6/8/11681 + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + +https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + +http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext06 + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + +https://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: +https://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: +https://www.gutenberg.org/GUTINDEX.ALL + +*** END: FULL LICENSE *** diff --git a/old/11681.zip b/old/11681.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..13bf2d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/11681.zip |
